I' A :•,)' "'t ^•- •-; ;f. -.i f--: 1^ I f ?:■;■: IN MEMOEIAM J. Henry Senger 1beatb*0 flDot)ern Xanguaoe Seriee A GERMAN GRAMMAR FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES W. Hf'FRASER and W. H. VAN DER SMISSEN // PROFESSORS IN THE UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO o>Ko BOSTON, U.S.A. D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS 1910 IN MEMORIAM "^KOA. X W^VN^-A Si*^Y Copyright, 1909, By D. C. Heath & Co. PREFACE This book is intended to serve as a guide to the use of the spoken and written German of the present day, and makes no claim to be a compendium of all forms and usages in either speech or literature. The grammatical material has been arranged with a view to its convenient use in the exercises, and with the object of facilitating the rapid acquisition of a reading knowledge of the language. The elementary statements of grammatical theory in the earlier part of the book have been supplemented and summarized in the more advanced lessons, thus enabling • the learner to review and amplify the knowledge previously acquired in detail. Thus, for instance, in the treatment of the verb, each mood and tense of both weak and strong verbs is taken up successively, and afterwards the whole theory of conjugation is stated in methodical form. The exercises have been made continuous, wherever it was found practicable to do so, and are constructed on the same general plan as those in the elementary part of Fraser and Squair's French Grammar. It is hoped that this form of exercise will not only render the learner's task less dreary than exercises made up of detached sentences, but will also encourage him to acquire phrases rather than words, which so often change their signification with the context. In the use of the exercises teachers will naturally be guided by their own judgment and the character of their classes, but, in the opinion of the authors, it will be found advantageous first of all to practise very thoroughly the German and oral portions, and afterwards pass on to the translation of the English and to elementary composition. The oral exercises — 92B697 iv PREFACE are not intended to be exhaustive, but rather suggestive for further drill along the same line, as the authors attach the very greatest importance to this method of teaching. The reading extracts are not intended to replace a Reader, but to add variety, with perhaps a spice of entertainment, to the acquisition and practice of grammar. The extracts in verse are designed primarily for memorizing ; the prose ex- tracts may be used as exercises in translation, and may serve also for practice in conversation and composition. The Appendix contains reference lists and paradigms, which it is hoped will prove useful, particularly B, 4 and 5, which are intended as a guide to the correct use of preposi- tions. The principal authorities consulted in the preparation of the work were ; on orthography, the decisions of the Ortho- graphic Conference of Berlin, 1901, and Duden's Ortho- graphisches Worterverzeichnis ; on grammatical points, Blatz' Grammar and Muret-Sanders^ larger dictionary ; on pronun- ciation, the various manuals of Professor Victor of Marburg, whose German Pronunciation (3d ed., Reisland : Leipzig, 1903) and Deutsches Lesebuch in Lautschrift (I. und II. Teil, Teubner : Leipzig ; or David Nutt : London) are especially commended to the attention of teachers. In conclusion, the authors desire to acknowledge their indebtedness to Mr. W. C. Ferguson, Riverdale Collegiate Institute, Toronto, for valuable advice regarding the plan of the work and on many points of detail ; to Miss Julia S. Hillock, Parkdale Collegiate Institute, Toronto, for testing a considerable proportion of the lessons and exercises in the classroom ; and to Mr. Heinrich von Nettelbladt, of the teaching staff of the High Schools, Buffalo, for valuable ser- vices in revising the manuscript and thus affording the au- thors the benefit of the judgment of a native German scholar and teacher. August, 1909. CONTENTS PAGB Introduction : Alphabet . . • • ix Syllabication . x Stress • • xi Quantity xi Pronunciation. xii Use of Capitals ; Punctuation . xxii German Script . xxiii Map of Germany ......... xxvi LESSON I. Gender and Agreement. — Nominative of Personal Pronouns i II. Nominative of tin, fcitt, possessives, tt)el(i^er ... 3 III. Present Indicative of f Cttt. — Pronouns of Address. — Use of h(l§* — Place of Predicate Adjective 6 IV. Present Indicative of l^aliett. — Accusative Forms. — Repeti- tion. — Comparative Degree 9 V. Present Indicative and Imperative of maii^eit. — Adjective as Adverb 12 VI. Review 14 VII. Definite Article. — Use of Cases. — Contraction. — Case Forms 16 VIII. Present Indicative of tUtt. — Infinitive after Verbs. — Accu- sative and Dative Pronouns .20 IX. ^eitt Model. — Possessive Adjectives . . . . -23 X. Imperfect Indicative. — Adverbial Accusative. — Place of Time Phrase and of Verb 26 XI. ^tcf Ct Model. — Some Possessive Pronouns .... 30 XII. Review 33 XIII. Strong Declension of Nouns : ^ttttb^ BotjUf $attb Models. — Essential Parts. — Compound Nouns. — Rule of Gender 35 XIV. Perfect and Pluperfect. — Word Order in Principal Sentences. — Cardinal Numerals. — Multiplicative Adverbs . . 39 XV. Strong Declension (continued) : ^orf^ 9Jlalcr, S^atCt Models.— !antt, mn^f etc 43 XVI. Future and Future Perfect. — Word Order. — Prefixes . . 4? V VI CONTENTS LESSON PAGE XVII. Weak and Mixed Declensions. — Rules of Gender . 5 1 XVIII. Declension of Adjectives 55 XIX. Declension of Nouns ; Summary 61 XX. (Scitt : Compound Tenses ; Use as Auxiliary. — tlliU, tUOUtC. — Infinitive of Purpose 64 XXI. Declension of Adjectives (concluded): Special Cases; Adjectives as Nouns 69 XXII. Word Order : Objects, etc. ; Dependent Sentences. — tticnit, a(i^, mautt 73 XXIII. The Relatives bcr and tticldjcr. — Relative Clauses . 77 XXIV. Passive : Simple Tenses. — Prepositions with Accusative 81 XXV. Time of Day. — Genitive of Time 85 XXVI. The Subjunctive. — Indirect Statements and Questions 89 XXVII. Prepositions with Dative 95 XXVIII. The Conditional. — Conditional Sentences . . . 100 XXIX. Use of Articles 104 XXX. Quantity. — Distributive Article. — ettt, betbe . . 108 XXXI. The Imperative, Infinitive, and Participles. — foil . .112 XXXII. Prepositions with Dative or Accusative . . . • 117 XXXIII. Verb Stems. — Principal Parts. — Special Forms in Weak Verbs. — Irregular Weak Verbs . . .123 XXXIV. Personal Pronouns. — Address. — Impersonal Verbs. — Uses of C)^ 128 XXXV. The Strong Conjugation. — Classes of Strong Verbs . 133 XXXVI. Reflexive Pronouns and Verbs. — Reciprocal and Em- phatic Pronouns 142 XXXVII. Mixed Conjugation. — Modal Auxiliaries. — * shall ' and *will' 146 XXXVIII. Possessive Pronouns. — Possessive Dative . . • 151 XXXIX. Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs . . . '155 XL. Modal Auxiliaries (concluded) : Word Order ; Idio- matic Uses . . . . . . . . 160 XLI. Place Names. — Nouns and Adjectives of Nationality . 167 XLII. Ordinal Numerals. — Dates. — House Number, etc. . 170 XLIII. Person Names. — Ordinals with Person Names . • 1 74 XLIV. Demonstratives 177 XLV. Interrogatives . . 182 XLVI. Fractions. — Mixed Numbers 186 XLVII. Relative Pronouns 189 XLVIII. Indefinite Pronouns i93 XLIX. The Passive Voice I97 CONTENTS vii LESSON PAGE L. Indefinite Pronominal Adjectives 202 LI. Idiomatic Uses of Certain Adverbs ..... 206 LII. Verb Prefixes 210 LIII. Coordinative and Adverbial Conjunctions . . . .216 LIV. Subordinative and Correlative Conjunctions . . . 219 LV. Agreement and Apposition 224 LVI. Use of Nominative and Accusative 227 LVII. Use of Genitive and Dative 230 LVIII. Use of Indicative Tenses. — Use of Subjunctive and Im- perative 234 LIX. The Infinitive 238 LX. The Infinitive (concluded) 241 LXI. The Participles 245 APPENDIX A. Noun Declension : Reference Lists, 1-9 . . • . • 249 B. Prepositions: 1. Prepositions with Genitive . . . . . . .251 2. " " Dative (additional list) . • . . .252 3. " " Varying Case 252 4. Equivalents of English Prepositions 252 5. Prepositions after Verbs, etc 255 C. Verb Paradigms : 1. Auxiliaries of Tense . , . . . • • . 257 2. " " Mood 261 3. "Weak Conjugation ........ 262 4. Strong " 263 5. Conjugation v^ith fctit . 264 6. Passive Voice 265 D. Alphabetical List of Strong and Irregular Verbs . . . 266 Vocabulary: German- English 273 " English-German 3" Index 339 INTRODUCTION The German Alphabet. German Roman German German Roman German form. form. name. form. form. name. %a A, a ak «,tt N, n emt a?, 6 B.b bay D,o 0,0 oh %t C, c tsay %,^ P.P pay %t, D,d day a, q Q.q koo e, e E,e eh 9i,r R.r err 3f,f F,f eff ®,f,« S, s ess ®rfl G,g gay Z,i T,t tay ^rD H, h hah U,tt U,u 00 %i I,i ee », tt V,v fow %L J.J yot SB, to W, w vay S,l- K, k kah X,J X, X iks 2,1 L,l ell %^ Y,y ipsilon m,m M, m emm 3f5 Z, z tset Remarks on the Alphabet. 1. The approximate pronunciation of the German names of the letters is given above in English characters ; these names should be learned, and used in spelling words. 2. Three of the vowels may be modified by the sign " (called 'umlaut') : 21 a, D 0, U ii ; as capitals, in the older spelling, these are : 2le, Oe, Ue* 3. Diphthongs are : 9lt at, 2lu au, (St ei, (Su eu, tu M, and the rarer forms a^, el), ui ix X INTRODUCTION 4. The following change their form slightly when printed as one character : cij = (i); cf=(f ; ff, 1^ = ^; t5=^. 5. The character ^ always replaces ff when final : }^U% ^^% gluft; within a word, it stands after long vowels, after diph- thongs, and before another consonant (elsewhere ff) : ^Ufte, l^et^en, ^aftltc^, muftte; duf ^Wffe, miiffen, 2c,; hence all vowels are to be pronounced short before ff^ 6. The form ^ occurs only as final in words or stems ; else- where f : §au^, ba^, ^clu^tic^ ; §dufer, lefen, t)aft, 7. Since the sounds of German depend to a considerable extent upon syllabication, stress, and quantity, these subjects will be treated in the following paragraphs, before rules are given for the pronunciation of the alphabet. Syllabication. 1. In German the syllable ends in a vowel wherever possi- ble, which is frequently not the case in English : Sftt*It*tdr, ^ mil-i-ta-ry ' ; the neglect of this principle is a serious defect in pronunciation. 2. Hence single consonants within a word, and also such consonant groups as can be pronounced undivided, belong to the following syllable, both in speaking and writing : !^a'6e, ge-firau^rfien, ge-fc^enft ; other consonant groups are divided : 3. In writing, however, doubled consonants are divided at the end of a line : mitf=fen ; so also bt, )jf, ttg, rf, the latter becoming M : ©tab^te, Sm^j^fang, fin-gen, ©tUMe (for @titcfe) ; compounds are divided according to their parts : §uf*eifen, ^in==ab, ©onner^^tag. 4. ' Open ' syllables are those ending in a vowel or f) : ba, Io==t)en, bran^d^e, be-fte^-en. 5. 'Closed' syllables are those ending in a consonant, or coming before a doubled consonant : tDar-ten, Stn-te, fait, ia^, ^at'ten. Note. — This distinction is important for the rules of quantity. INTRODUCTION xi Stress. The relative force with which a syllable in a group is uttered As called ' stress ' (less properly * accent ') : i^reu'nbf C^aft, * frie'ndship ' ; meitl 3Sa'ter i[t f(f)On a'lt. Several degrees of force may be distinguished in longer words and in phrases, but for practical purposes it is sufficient to consider only the sylla- ble of strongest or chief stress. In words of two or more syllables the chief stress is as follows : — 1. In simple German words, on the stem : greu'ttbfd^aft, t5reu'nbli(^fett, te'fen, gele'fen, ret'nlic^. 2. In compounds, usually on the part most distinctive for the meaning : 3lu'genblt(f , Tne'rfrt)iirbig, u'nangene^tn. 3. But in compounded particles, usually on the second com- ponent : ba^e'r, ^erbet', obglei'c^, 4. In loan-words, usually on the syllable stressed in the language from which the word has been taken : ©tube 'tit, ^f)i)fi% ^I)t(ofo'p^, elega'nt, matxo% ®oIba't. 5. Always on the suffixes -ei, -ieren, -ur (of foreign origin) : Slrjenet', ftubie'ren, Olafu'r. 6. Never on the prefixes be-, tmp-, tut-, er-, gc-, t)er-, jer-^ 7. No special rules are required for German sentence-stress (emphasis), as it corresponds closely to that of English. Quantity. 1. Vowels in German may be distinguished as Mong,* 'half long,' and 'short': tobetl (long), 2KiIitar (half long), fait (short). 2. Long vowels become half long, or even short, when un- stressed, usually without change in the quality of the sound : bic'fer (long), bicfer SJKa'ttn (half long). Note. — In practice it is sufficient to distinguish long and short (the latter including half long and short). 3. Vowels are regularly long : — Co) In open stressed syllables ; and a long stem vowel usually retains its length in inflection : ba, tobeu ; lobtc* xii INTRODUCTION {b) When doubled, or followed by silent 1^ or e (the latter only after i) : ©taat, 8ct|rer, @o^n, ^Mi), bicfer. {c) As diphthongs : glauben, I)ei§en, Scute, (d) In final stressed syllable ending in a single consonant* (including monosyllables capable of inflection, or ending in r) : ®ebot, genug, bcm, 9tat, hi^i, gut, voax, iDtr ; so also vowel before ^ persisting in inflection : [a^ (fa^etl), gu^ (Su^e), 4. Vowels are regularly short : — {a) In unstressed syllables : l^abCTl, ge^abt, u'narttg, {p) In closed syllables (including monosyllables ending in more than one consonant) : (Sommer, SBtnter, alt, feft ; so also before -^ not persisting in inflection : glu^ (gliiffe), (c) In uninflected monosyllables ending in a single con- sonant (not -r) : mit, ob, in, tm, tion, tjom ; but fur, ^cr (long). 5. Before ^, some are long, some short : @|)ra^e (long), la^en (short). General Remarks on Pronunciation. Every language has certain characteristics peculiar to the utterance of its sounds, which taken together may be called its 'basis of articulation/ The principal distinctions between German and English, in this respect, are the following : — 1. The action of the organs of speech, in general, is more energetic and precise in German than in English. The pro- nunciation of English strikes the German ear as slovenly. The energy and precision referred to are especially obvious in vowels requiring lip rounding (as observed, for example, in ' who,' ' no,' ' saw,' etc.). Moreover, great care should be taken not to obscure German vowels in unstressed syllables, which is the rule in Enghsh. 2. The tongue, both for vowels and consonants, is generally either further advanced or retracted than in the articulation of corresponding English sounds. INTRODUCTION xiii 3. English long vowels (as a in ^ fate/ 00 in ' poor ') are usu- ally diphthongal, particularly before liquids, whereas German long vowels are uniform in quality throughout. 4. The utterance of every German initial vowel, unless wholly unstressed, begins with the * glottal stop,' which consists in suddenly closing the glottis and forcing it open by an explo- sion of breath, as in sHght coughing : au^, ^tuau^, cff^tl, oijUt, itber, UberaQ. Note. — Corresponding English vowels begin with gradual closure of the glottis, and strike the German ear as indistinct, since the German sound is fully resonant throughout. The learner may be enabled to realize the nature of this sound by' the experiment of placing the hands to the sides and exerting a sudden, forcible pressure, the mouth being open as if to form a vowel. When this is done, the glottis (i.e. the space between the vocal chords) closes automatically, and is at once forced open. 5. It must never be forgotten that the sounds of any two languages hardly ever correspond exactly, and hence that com- parisons between German and English are only approximate. In describing the sounds below, brief cautions have been added in parenthesis, in order to obviate this difficulty in part. Pronunciation of the Alphabet. Vowels. 1. Vowels are either 'front' or 'back,' according to their place of articulation in the mouth, and are so grouped below. 2. They are pronounced long or short according to the rules given above (pp. xi-xii), the commonest exceptions only being noted. 3. All vowels must be distinctly uttered. 4. Do not drawl or diphthongize the long vowels. 5. Doubled vowels and those followed by c or fj^ as a sign of length, are omitted from the conspectus, but included in the examples. xiv INTRODUCTION I. Front Vowels. X I. When long, like i in 'marine' (slightly closer; avoid diphthong, especially before \ and r ; avoid i as in ' bit,' when unstressed) : Wvdt, TUtr, iDtr ; biefer, 8ieb, ftubieren, il^n, fttel^Ift- Exception. — (Short, see 2 below): 3l|)rt'I, bieEei'c^t, iBiertel, t)ierge^n, tJtcrgig. 2. When short, like i in ' bit ' (avoid i as in ' mirth ' before r) : Sinb, fingen, iDtrb, btft, gebtffen, getitten; mit, im, 3. Like y in 'yes,' when unstressed before c in loan-words : gami'He, ^atie'nt. tt I. When long, has no English counterpart; same tongue position as for t, i, with tense lip rounding: ^liite, miibe, griin, fit^, git^e ; SJittlie, fritter. 2. When short has no English counterpart; same tongue position as for i, 2, with sHght lip rounding : l^ubfd^, ©litcf, fiinf, fiiti^ten, Sitfte, 3WuHer, muffen* \) Like i or it (see above) : 3l[^t (long), 3)i^rte (short). e I. When long, like a in 'stated' (avoid diphthong, espe- cially before I and X) : Icfeti, tcben, rcben, fd^tDcr, bcm, ben (but see 4 below); 4Bcet, @(^nee, ftel^en, fclilen, Iciiren. Exception. — (Short, see 2 below) : bC8, C§, tt)Cg. 2. When short, like e in 'let' (avoid e as in 'her,' before r): f(^en!en, fcnben, geftern, beffer, Setten, §crr, gerti^ Exception. — (Long, see i, above): S)rcgben, Srbe, crft, ^fcrb, 3. In unstressed final syllables and in be-, ge-, like a in 'soda' (tongue slightly advanced): l^abe, @abe, lobetl, lobet, ^ruber, biefer, btefem, SSogel ; befteCen, gelobt. 4. The e of ber, bem, ben, be^, e^, when unstressed, varies between 3 and 2, above, according as the stress is more or less completely removed : ber faltc SBi'nter* INTRODUCTION XV a 1. When long, like a in 'care' (avoid diphthong, especially before I and r) : fSett, iDarett, @rf)Iac;e ; §f|re, ma^eti. 2. When short, identical with c short (c, 2, above) : §anbe, mdtx, Spfel, ptte, tangft. Exception. — (Long) : nod^ft, ®tabte. 9 I. When long, has no English counterpart; same tongue position as for e, i, with tense lip rounding and pro- trusion : pren, Mfe,. SiJte, f^8n, grB^er ; h len, Sonne, morgen, SBort ; ob, Don- Exception.— (Long) : ?otfe, Dbft, Often, Dftcrti. Note. — The Eng. short has often very feeble rounding, especially in American Eng., approaching the sound of a in * hat.' xvi INTRODUCTION U I. When long, like oo in ' too ' (tense lip rounding and pro- trusion ; avoid diphthong, especially before I and r) : bu, rufen, -©lutne, gug, guten, nut ; ^u^, ®tu^I. 2. When short, like u in * put ' (definitely rounded ; never lengthened, even before r) : uub, tt)Urbe, TlutttX, gtu^ ; urn, sum, gur. Diphthongs. at 1 Like i in ' mile * (first element more deliberately uttered ; at) ) equals German a, 2 + t/2) : ^aifer, SSatfZXU, an Like ou in ' house ' (first element more deliberately uttered ; equals German a, 2 + u, 2) : grau, SSauvx, ^auer. Su Like oi in ' boil ' (first element more deliberately uttered ; equals German 0, 2 +t, 2) : 9?auber, Wdn^t, SSaumt. Note. — The second element is sometimes slightly rounded. Ct 1 The same sound as at, above ; mettt, SJicile, fcttter, flct== e^ J net, einft, SKc^er, eu The same sound as an, above : tteu, ^CUte, gcuer, CUet, feufjen. nx Equals German u, 2 + 1, 2 : l^ui ! :pfut ! Consonants. 1. It is very important to remember that all final consonants are short in German, although not always so in English ; com- pare matt and *man,' fang and 'sang.' 2. Double consonants have only a single sound, as also in English: gefattett, * fallen'; but when two consonants come together through compounding the sound is lengthened in careful diction, but not fully doubled: mittetteti; similarly also contiguous final and initial consonant, when necessary for distinctness : ttot tutl* 3. When alternative pronunciations are given below the preferable one is put first. INTRODUCTION xvii Alphabetical List of Consonants, ( T. When initial in word or syllable, or doubled, like b in 'ball' : balb, (iefien, t)er6(eiben, ©bbe. 2. When final, in word or syllable, likep in 'tap' : ab, SBetb, lieb, abgef)en, ®(^reibtifc^, Xxt^^it, lieblit^, tiebfter. C I. Before front vowel, like ts in 'sets' : 6tcero, Gcifar, 2. Before back vowel, like c in 'call' : ©attto, Sa[fet. Note. — C alone is now found only in loan-words and proper nouns. (i^ I. After back vowel, has no English counterpart; compare Scotch ch in 'loch' (formed by slight contact of the back of the tongue with the soft palate ; voiceless) : S3ad^, marfien, nod^, fuc^en, raudjeti. Note. — * Voiceless ' means without vibration of the vocal chords; com- pare *fine' (voiceless) with *vine* (voiced). 2. After front vowel, after consonant, and in -d^etl, Hke h ^ in 'hue' very forcibly pronounced (avoid k as in 'kill' and sh as in ' ship ' ; it is best obtained by unvoicing the y in yes) : trf|, fc^(e(J|t, iDetrff, ^Urfjer, folc^e^, 2}?abc^en; so also in ©^ettlie', before a front vowel. 3. Before i^ in a stem syllable, like f (which see) : 8a^^, D(^fen, iDa^fen; also some loan-words, g^rift, 6^or, 2C» d Like I (which see) : birf, f^idett. b I. When initial in a word or syllable, or doubled, like d in 'day' (tongue advanced to the gums) : bu, bret, §eber, §dnbe, tDlirbe, abbieren. 2. When final in a word or syllable, like t in 'take' (tongue advanced to the gums) : 8teb, @anb, Uttb, §dnbc^en, enbltc^, ©efunb^eit. f Like f in 'fall' : faufeti, grau, fiittf, ^offen, g I. When initial in a word or stressed syllable, or doubled, like g in 'began,' 'gain,' 'begin': gab, Slufflabe, ge^en, gegeben, ©ttter, grUn, (Sgge. xviii INTRODUCTION Note. — The place of contact between tongue and palate varies along with the vowel or consonant of the syllable, as in English; similarly also for the sounds of f, ng, ttf* 2. After a back vowel within a word (when followed by a vowel), either like g, i, or voiced d^, i : 2^age, [agen, gogen, ^uge. Note. — This second sound is foreign to English; it may be formed by making the sound usually heard in gargling, without, however, drawing the tongue far enough back to cause the uvula to trill. 3. After a back vowel when final or before a consonant, like (t), I : Sag, lag, gog, 3ug, fagte, mogte. 4. After a front vowel or a consonant within a word (and followed by a vowel), either like g, i, or j (which see) : legen, ©erge, burger, ©d^Iiige, SBiege, ^dnige. Note. — Like j almost universally in the combination ig. 5. After a front vowel, (a) when final, (^) final after a conso- nant, (c) before a consonant, like ^^ 2 : 2^etg, ®teg, ®ontg; ©erg, 3:alg; legte, Itegt. 6. Like z in * azure' (tongue advanced, lips protruded) in many French loan-words : (S'ta'-ge, Sou-ra'-ge. 1^ I. Like h in 'have' (strongly and briefly uttered) : l^abetl, ge^abt, l^ei^en, geliolfen, 21'i^orn- 2. It is silent before the vowel of an ending and as a sign of length : ge^ett, ge[e](|eri ; ^ul^, dttif, tvcff ; see also J I. Regularly, like y in 'yes' (tongue closer to the palate; strongly buzzed): ja, jeber, SuTit, ^orf), jud^jen. 2. In French loan-words, like g, 6, above : ^OUrtia'!, galoufie'. I Like c in ' can ' or k in * ken,' ' keen ' (comp. note to g, i) : lam, fennen, Sinb, Ketn, fant I Like 1 in ' lip ' (tongue advanced to gums) : lobett, Kebcn, aU, QlMlii), tDoffen, t)oC. . INTRODUCTION xix ttt Like m in 'make* : tnit, SSaum, fomtttett, 8amm, n Like n in * name ' (tongue advanced to gums) : netUtett^ unb, §dnbe, an, SJiann, Wdnntx. ng Like ng in 'sang/ 'length' 'sing' (abruptly uttered; comp. note to g, i; never as in English 'finger'): fangen, lang, tanflft, fing, ginger. nf Like nk in ' thank,' ' think ' (abruptly uttered ; comp. note to g, i) : S)anf, banfen, tenfen, finfen. )f Like p in 'pit' (pronounce fully before f ) ; 5|Su^3)Je, ©iro^j, )jflangen, $ferb. p^ Like f (which see) : 5P^tIofo')J^, $^^iro[o^J^ie^ qu Like f 4- tr> (which see) : duetle, quer. r Has no English counterpart; it is formed either (i) by trilling the point of the tongue against the upper gums ('lingual' r), or (2) by drawing the root of the tongue backward so as to cause the uvula to vibrate (' uvular ' r) : SRat, rot, runb, rein, toax, tt)tr, §erj, tt)erben. Note. — Either sound is correct in conversation. The lingual* r, how- ever, is more readily acquired by English-speaking students. f I. When initial in a word or syllable before a vowel, like z in ' zeal ' (tongue advanced towards gums) : fel^etl, f 0, ftc^, fit^, 9Iofe, 3i^f^^^ gelefen. 2. When final in a word or syllable, and before most con- sonants, Hke s in ' seal ' (tongue advanced, as above) ; so also ^, ff, always : (3va^, tot^alb, faft, 3KafIe, effen, gufe, gufee, gluffe. 3. When initial before p or t, like sh in ' ship ' (tongue ad- vanced ; lips protruded) : ftetjett, geftattben, fpieten, gefpielt, ^inberfpiel, jjd) Like sh in ' ship ' (see f , 3) : S^iff, fc^reibetl, Zi\^. XX INTRODUCTION t I. Like t in 'tame' (tongue advanced to gums) : XaQ, teilen, SStfd), Sinte, abutter, xxtt 2. In loan-words before i = t-^ : 5>latio'n, ^atie'tlt. 11^ Same as t, i : !J^eater. ^ Same as 3 (which see) : ®a^, fi^ett. t) I. Same as f (which see) : SJater, t)ieI/tJon, hxat). 2. In most Latin or Romance loan-words = to (which see): SBafe, "iprodia'nt, 9tet3o'(tier, JBera'nba. to Like V in ' vine ' (less strongly buzzed) : toat, too, toir, toe^{)aI6, ©(^toefter, gtoeu g Same as f^ : Sljt, 9?ije» 5 Same as t§ : ju, §er5, ®!isse. Pronunciation of Loan-words. The German pronunciation of loan-words is usually an ap- proximation to the original sound, the original stress of the foreign word being in most cases retained. A full treatment of the subject is beyond the limits of this work, but the pronuncia- tion of the more common consonants of foreign origin has been indicated above. Exercises on Pronunciation. Note. — The words in A^ B, C, Z>, have been taken, with few excep- tions, from the first five exercises of the Grammar. The numerals after the letters correspond to those used in explaining the pronunciation (pp. xiv- xx). A. Simple vowels. — a (i) : SSater, 3Jiarte', 2:afel, aber, bq ; a (2) : alt, mam, «aH, ©artett, Xantt ; c (i) : geber, erft, 8ef)rer, fe^r ; c (2) : ®elb, §err, ajjeffer, getifter ; c (3) : $Rofe, t)tefe, (oben, aber; i (i): tDtr, bie, t)tele ; i (2): 2:tnte, ift, tmnter, artig ; i (3) : 8t'(te ; (i) : tDo, rot, ober, gro^, tvoijl ; (2) : Onfet, ©tocf , oft, ©ontmer ; u (i) : ©u^, Sruber, Slume, ®tu^I ; u (2) : @unb, jung, abutter, ^uppe» INTRODUCTION XXi B. Vowels with umlaut. — a (i) : SKcibc^en, erja^ktt, 2Kdr^ d)en; 8(2): ©defer; B (i): b5fe, f(^ott; 8(2): ©otter, fott== nen, §brner; it (i); gritn, giitig, ®d)uter, 2:ur; it (2): l)ubfc^, funfstg. C Diphthongs. — ai : ^atfer ; au : au^, grau, auftnerffatn, 2lufgabe ; ci : ftein, Sleiftift, gleif c^, rein ; cu : neu, J)eutf^. D, Consonants. — 6 (i) : aber, :8al(, 33ruber, Srtef ; 6 (2) : pbfc^, ©c^reibttf^ ; c : Sdfar, Sicero ; ct| (i) : 53u(f), au^, Tnaci)en ; ^ (2) : id^, ntc^t, 5Kdb(^en, tr)et(^ ; ^ (3) • tra^fen, g^or ; tf : :93dcfer, ©tod ; b (i) : ba, geber, ober, bret, abbieren ; b (2) : tub, unb, griinblid) ; g (i) : gut, gem, ©arten, grog ; 8(2): Jage,fage; 9(3): ^ag, f tug ; g (4): Serge, S5nige; g (5) : artig, guttg, regnen ; g (6) : (Stage, gourage ; HO • ^art, §ut, §err, ^ier ; I| (2) : fal), fe^en, n^e^ ; j : (i) {a, {ung ; J (2) : ^fournal ; I : fait, flein ; \ : alt, !(ug, ©all ; tn : DJJann, immer ; n: nein, JTante, SJiann ; ng: fung, ©pajier^^ gang, SRtng, fingen ; nl : Dn!el ; ^j : ^uppe ; )J^ : 'ip^ilofo'^)^ ; ^\x : Ouelle, quer ; r : rot, 9tofe, runb, tt)er, ©arten, §err ; f (i) : 9Jofe, bofe, fe^r ; f (2) : al^, §au^, grog, 3)?effer, tt)ef[en ; f (3) ©tu^t, Sletftift, ©tod, fptelen ; fc^ : f^tDarj, f^dn, ®dE)tt)e[ter, T)eutf^ ; t (i) : rot, STtnte, 3JJutter ; t (2) : 5«atio'n, ^atie'nt; t^: 2:f)ea'ter ; ^: ^lafe ; ti (i): 3Sater, t)tele ; tj (2) : SSafe, SSerbunt ; tti : tt)o, luer, @d^tt)efter, fd^tDarj ; g : §eje, 2lf t ; s : flanj, 3imnter, funfjig, ergd^Ien. E, To be repeated several times in succession : i . 'J)rei breite ©at^bldtter, brei brette, :c. 2. gift^er^ '^x\% fifc^t frifc^e gif^e, gifc^er^ grife, 2C. 3. ®er tottbuffer ^oft^ futf(^er pufet ben ^ottbuffer ^oftfutfi^faften, ber ^ottbuffer, :c. i?: 5cl^nfud?t. 3l(^ ! au^ btefe^ STafe^ ©riinben^ ©ie ber falte 9?ebel briicft, S5nnf td^ bo(^ ben 3lu^gang finben, 5ld^! iDie fit^tf ic^ mi^ begtucft! xxii INTRODUCTION Sort txUid' id) f(^5ne ©ugel, gtDtg iung unb emig griin ; §atf id) ©(^tDingen, ijMV id) glitget, 5Ka(^ ben ©iigeln jog' i(^ ^in. Use of Capitals. Capital letters are required in German, contrary to English usage, in the following cases : — 1. As initial of all nouns and all words used as nouns : bie geber, * the pen ' ; ba^ 9^iifeUd)e, ' the useful ' ; etlt)a^ 9Jeue^, * something new ' ; ba^ 9teif en, ' travelling ' ; nouns used with other functions take a small initial : Slbeub, * evening/ but abenb^, ' in the evening ' ; geib, ' sorrow/ but e^ tUt TUir leib, * I am sorry. ' 2. As initial of the pronoun ®te = ' you ' (in all forms except fi(^), and of the corresponding possessives : §aben ©ie Qi}Xt geber ? * Have you your pen? ' 3. Similarly, but in correspondence only, bu, t^r = ' you/ and their possessives : SSJir ertDarten ©ic^ unb 3)etne (S(^n)efter, * We expect you and your sister.' 4. Proper adjectives are not written with a capital unless formed from names of persons or forming part of a proper name : ba^ beutf d)e SSud)^ ' the German book ' ; but, bie ©oetl^eft^en @cf)rtften, * Goethe's writings'; ba^ ^Ceutfd^e 9tet(^, * the German Empire.' Punctuation. The rules of punctuation correspond in general to those of English, but the following points should be noted : — 1. A dependent sentence (relative, adverbial, etc.) is intro- duced by a comma. 2. Infinitive clauses with ju are regularly preceded by a comma. 3. An exclamatory point is used in beginning letters : ®el)r gee^rter @err ! INTRODUCTION German Script. yc^ ^£- ^ ^ ^^- /I/ ^ @ c Sf f ® g 4^ ^ ^^^ //- 3f i ^ i » 8 I ^^ <^^ ^J 9Wm 5Wn Co ^ti C I? 9f r S t ^^ ^^ ^^ ^^ ^ vi «ii s»to ^e? -«^i?i' o^ ^ icxiv INTRODUCTION a ci C it a 71 d/ C^ ^ liy x^ e^ C^ If ©t ft ff ^ (Transcription of the German letter on page 172.) ' ynr2^t>-f^^' INTRODUCTION ^-^>^//^2^^^<^Z>^.-^^i/^«^ /C^.:^Z^(7^^/-^^^*-Ai^ACk^ C^CAiCh ^p^.^^^OAAA^ MAP OF GERMANY. (See lesson XLI.) LESSON I 1. Gender and Agreement*. J)Cr aWatin ift aft. The man is old. ^ie grau ift !fug. The woman is clever, ^a^ SU(^ ift neu. The book is new. ^a^ aJJdb^en ift f)Ubf(^. The girl is pretty. ^er §unb ift gro^. The dog is large. 2)er SBinter ift fait. The winter is cold. ^ie 2:inte ift fc^icarj. The ink is black. Observe: i. The subject of a sentence is always in the nominative. 2. Predicate adjectives remain undeclined in German. 3. The definite article agrees with its noun in gender, num- ber, and case, and has the following forms in the nominative singular : Masc, bcr Fem, bte Neut ba^ 4. There are three genders in German : masculine, feminine, and neuter. 5. Names of males are almost always masculine, and names of females feminine, but all nouns in -d^ett and -teitt (diminu- tives) are neuter, regardless of sex. 6. Names of animals and things may be of any gender — to be learned from the vocabulary or dictionary. 2. Nominative Pronouns. 3ft ber 2J?ann ffug? ^a, et Is the man clever? Yes, he is ift f(ug. clever. 3ft ber aSinter tDarm? Slein, Is the winter warm ? No, it is et ift fait. cold. GERMAN GRAMMAR [§2 ©te grau ift ntd)t alt ; fie ift The woman is not old ; she is. Jung, young. S)ie Stnte ift nt(^t rot ; fie ift The ink is not red ; it is black. T)a^ ^nd) ift alt ; e^ ift nt^t The book is old ; it is not new. neu. . \ < ■ ^ Sae aScbrfjenn'ft nic^t fleiti; The girl is not small; she is c^ ift gro^, large. Observe : The personal pronoun of the third singular agrees in gender with the noun to which it refers, and has the follow- ing forms in the nominative : Masc, er jFem, fie Neut, t§ EXERCISE I J\/'.B. The definite article before nouns shows their gender. aber, but. alt, old. ba^ SSViii), the book. ba, there. bte geber, the pen. gro^, large, tall, big,^great. I^ier, here. ber §unb, the dog. ift, is. ja, yes. fait, cold. !(etn, small, little. ilug, clever, intelHgent. )er Sel^rer, the teacher (m.). ba^ ajJabcf)en, the girl. ber 9}iann, the man. netn, no (adv.). neu, new. nti^t, not. ober, or. rot, red. frfltDarj, black. ber ®ommer, the summer. bte 2^inte, the ink. toarm, warm. lt)er? who? ber Sinter, the winter. lt)0? where? bte 8el)rerin, the teacher (/.). A, I. 35a^ SSnd) ift neu. 2. ©ie Slittte ift f^tt)arj. 3. S)er SBinter ift fait. 4- 3)er ®ommer ift iDarm. 5. 3)a^ Wd\)d}tn ift ftein. 6. iSa^ SSnd) ift ntc^t alt; e^ ift neu. 7. ©ie Jinte ift nic^t rot ; fie ift fditDarj. 8. ©a^ Wdbd)tn § 3l LESSON I 3 ift ni^t flein ; e§ tft grog. 9. 3ft bte geber ^ter ? 10. ^a, fie ift {)ier. n. 2Ber tft ba? 12. T)a^ 3Kabrf)en ift ba. 13. ©0 ift ber ge^rer? 14. @r tft nic{)t ^ier; er ift ba. 15. !Der ?e()rer ift ^ier, aber bie Secretin ift ttic^t ^ier. 16. ^fft ber (Sottttiter fatt? 17. 9?ein, er ift iDarttt; er ift ttic^t fait. 18. 3ftber§UTtbf(ug? 19. ^a, er ift flug. (B) Answer the following questions in German : i. Q^t ba^ SUM) grog? 2. 3unb tti(J)t Hug? 12. 3ft ba^ Surf) alt ober neu? C I. The book is large. 2. The ink is red. 3. Is the man clever? 4. He is clever. 5. Where is the pen? 6. It is not here. 7. The summer is warm ; it is not cold. 8. Is the winter warm? 9. No, it is cold. 10. Where is the dog? II. It is here. 12. Is the ink black? 13. No, it is red. 14. Is the teacher here? 15. Yes, she is here. 16. Is the girl large? 17. No, she is small. 18. Is the book old or is it new? 19. It is old; it is not new. 20. Where is the teacher ? Z>. SefeftiicE (extract for reading) : &n^, jtt)ei, brei, SBarm ift niijt tali, mt ift nic^t neu, talt ift ni^t marm, 9Jeu ift nic^t alt, $Reic^ ift nic^t arm,. Note. — For vocabulary of these extracts, see end of the volume. LESSON II 3. Nominative of ein and feitt^ @ttt ©teitt ift ^art. A stone is hard, ©ine 9Jofe ift rot. A rose is red. 4 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§4 (gin ©i ift runb. An egg is round. Slcitt (Sommer ift fait. No summer is cold. Seine 9tofe ift griin. No rose is green. ^ein Sinb ift att. No child is old^^e: Observe : The indefinite article eitt and its negative !eitt agree with their nouns, and have the following forms in the nominative singular : Masc, and Neut, ein Fem. eittC Masc. ^and Neut, fein Fern, feittC 4. Nominative of Some Possessives. 2Wein 23ater ift gro^. My father is tall. ^tXXit aJiutter ift gut. Your (thy) mother is good. ®ein Sinb ift flein. His child is small. 3=ft ba^ i^r Su^ ? Is that her (their) book? Unferc 2)iutter ift alt. Our mother is old. Observe : Possessive adjectives have the same endings as the indefinite article in the nominative singular, and agree. 5. Nominative of ttjcl^et? Seller 3Kann ift att ? Which man is old ? SBet(^e Stume ift rot ? Which flower is red ? Selc^e^ tinb ift p6f^ ? Which child is pretty? Observe: The interrogative tDeI(^er? 'which?' has the fol- lowing forms in the nominative singular, and agrees : Masc. tDelc^cr Fem, tDeli^C Neut tpel^e^^ EXERCISE II ber SSdder, the baker. ^art, hard, ber Salt, the ball. pbfd), pretty, ber iBruber, the brother. ber ©ut, the hat. griin, green. immer, always, gut, good. jung, young. §5] LESSON II ba^ Sinb, the child. bie ©(^tDefter, the sister. bie abutter, the mother fel)r, very. nie, never. ber @tu^t, the chair. ber 9tmg, the ring. ber 35ater, the father. bie SRofe, the rose. Xoa^? what? runb, round. h)ei(f), soff.< fdjled^t, bad. totx^, white. ^. I. (gitt $Rtng ift runb. 2. 2)?ein SSater ift nii^t Jung. 3. 3ft meitt :33aII runb ? 4- 3^a, er ift runb. 5. Unfer 23ater ift alt. 6. SBo ift ber JRing ? 7- ©r ift ^ier. 8. 3ft ein Wd't)d)tn immer jung? 9. Qa, ein aRdbi^en ift nie att. 10. (Seine geber ift ^ier. n. Unfer ©dder ift gro^, aber fein ^ruber ift !(ein. 12. a^eine 3Jiutter ift ^Itbfc^. 13. f ein ^inb ift att. 14. Der ^SSader ift alt. 15. @ein §ut ift meig. 16. ajjeine geber ift gut, aber i^re geber ift f(^(ec^t. 17. Q\t iljv ®tul)l meic^ ? 18. aiein, er ift ni(^t meic^, er ift fe^r ^art. 19. (Sine 9tofe ift rot. 20. gine 9tofe ift nic^t griin. 21. ^ein ©ommer ift fait. 22. 3)fein Sruber ift grog, aber i^re (gc^trefter ift flein. B, Answer in German : i. 3ft ^itie $Rofe fd^tDarj? 2. SBeld^e $Rofe ift mi^? 3. SBo ift mein ©all? 4. SBelc^e geber ift gut? 5. SBett^er ®tuf|I ift tvdij? 6. ©eldie^ SSnd) ift grog? 7. 9Ber ift nie alt ? 8. SBer ift immer iung ? 9- 3Ba^ ift immer runb? 10. 3ft i^re @cf)n)efter grog ober ftein? 11. 3ft unfer ^Mtx jung ober att ? 12. 3ft fein ^ut fditDar;^ ober njeig? 13. 3ft i^t-e ?feber ^art? 14- 3Bo ift unfere Sel)rerin? 15. 3ft f^tn Sommer talt? C. I. The summer is warm. 2. No winter is warm. 3. Is her pen hard or soft? 4. My ink is red; it is not black. 5. Her father is old. 6. No child is old. 7. Our sister is not tall, but she is pretty. 8. His brother is tall, but her brother is small. 9. Which chair is hard? 10. Which ink is black? II. Is her chair hard or soft? 12. His chair is hard, but my 6 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 6 chair is soft. 13. Which child is pretty? 14. His pen is not good; it is very soft. 15. Is our dog not here ? 16. No rose is green. 1 7. A rose is red or white. D, gefeftUd: @tn^, jtDci, bret, §art tft nit^t meid), \ 2llt ift nidit neu, grtfd) tft ttid^t faul, ^^Oc^d- 3lrtn tft ni^t rei^, Ocf)f ift fettt ®aut. LESSON III 6. Present Indicative of fcin, to be. Singular. Plural \i) bin, I am. tDtr finb, we are. bu bift, thou art, you are. i^r feib, ye (you) are. er (fie, e^) tft, he (she, it) is. fie fittb, they are. Formal : ©ie fittb, you are {sing, or plur,^. Interrogatively : bin icf) ? bift bu ? ZC» 7. Pronouns of Address. S3ift \SM !alt, ntein Sinb ? Are you cold, my child ? (geib i^r fait, SHnber? Are you cold, children? ®inb ®ie tparm, §err 31. ? Are you warm, Mr. A. ? ®inb Sie f)ier, tneine §erren? Are you here, gentlemen 3ft ba^ 3^r «UC^, §err «. ? Is that your book, Mr. B. ? Observe : i. '^u, 'thou,' 'you,' is familiar, and its plural is tl|r, ' ye,' ' you ' ; the corresponding possessives are bein, eucr, respectively, declined like ntein. 2. (Sie, 'you,' is formal, is always written with a capital, and requires the verb in the third plural, whether one person is addressed or more than one. 3. 'Your ' in formal address = ^^r, declined like tl)r = 'her,' and always written with, a capital. §9] LESSON III J 8. The Demonstrative ia^^ ^a^ ift ber 33ater. That is the father. ^a^ ift bie Ttnttex. That is the mother. 2)a^ finb meine ©(fitter. Those are my pupils, -^iwp Observe : ^a^ remains unchanged here ; the verb agrees with the real subject, which follows. 9. Word Order. The predicate adjective comes at the end of a principal sentence in simple tenses : S)a^ Setter ift ^eute fd^iitt. The weather is fine to-day. EXERCISE III artig, well-behaved, good^^ ber Onfel, the uncle. aud), also, too. . f(J)arf, sharp. b5fe, bad, cross, angry. fdjdtt, beautiful, handsome, bie 3^rau, the woman, wife, Mrs. fine. ganj, quite. bie ©iJ)Ute, the school. . ber ©arten, the garden. ber @c^it(er^ the pupil, scholar. gittig, kind.-^ bie ©djiiler, the pupils, schol- ber §err, the gentleman, Mr. ars. ' in, in. bie Jante, the aunt. bie Sinber, the children. * u'ttartig, naughty, bad. franf, ill, sick. unb, and. bie 8e^rer, the teachers. • ireffen ? whose ? . ba^ aKeffer, the knife. tro^I, well. bie SKeffer, the knives. . :c., etc. Idiom : ^ctr Scljrcr, teacher (voc.) ; bet ^crr Sc^rcr, the teacher (forms of respect). A. Continue the following throughout the tense: i. Qi) bin !ran!, bu bift, 2c. 2. :93in id) artig ? bift bu? 20. 3. Qd) bin nic^t Hein, bu, 2c. 4- ^in id) nidjt gro§? bift bu? 2c. B. I. 5)ie ®(^iiter finb nid)t ^ier ; fie finb nidjt lt)o^t. 2. £)ie 8et)rer finb I)ier unb bie (Sc^uler finb auc^ l^ier. 8: GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 9 3. Unfere ®(J)ule ift gro^ unb fc^on. 4. Qdj bin tkin, aber (2ie finb gro^* 5. ©inb ®te frant, grau SSxann? 6. 9^ein, i(J) bin gqnj ido^L 7- ®ie finb fe^r gutig, §err ©chafer, 8. 3ft ba^ 3^re geber? 9. T)Vi bift unartig, mein tinb. 10. (Seib i^r artig, Sinber? n. ^a, §err 8ef)rer, n)ir finb artig, 12. Unfer ©arten ift f(f)dn nnb er ift auc^ gro^. 13- S)er §nnb ift gro^, aber er ift ni(^t bdfe, 14. J)ie 5Keffer finb md)t fcf)arf, 15. SBer ift ba^? 16. ©a^ ift meine (Sc^n)efter, 17- J)a^ finb bie ©cottier. 18. J)ae ift nnfere ge^rerin, 19. Unfer £)n!el ift in S^ett) gorL 20. 3=^re 2::ante ift in ©erlin* C. Answer in German : i. ^^ft ba^ ®inb artig? 2. ©inb bie ^inber ni^t artig? 3. -©ift bn n)o^I, mein Sinb? 4. ®inb ®ie ni(^t wo^I, §err (Si^afer? 5. SBeffen geber iftba^? 6. aSeffen^allift ba^? 7. SBer ift ba? 8. SBa^ ift ba^? 9- -3ft S^r §nnb ni(^t bdfe ? 10. ^ft mein ©arten nid)t f(^5n? n. SBo ift ^^re Jante? 12. ^ft ^tjr Onfel nii^t and) in ©eriin ? Z>. I. My aunt is in New York. 2. Where is your uncle? 3. He is also in New York. 4. Are you quite well, Mr. Schafer? 5. No, I am not very well. 6. Are you cold, my child? 7. No, I am quite warm. 8. Are you there, father? 9. Yes, I am here. 10. Is that your school? 11. Yes, that is my school. 12. It is not large, but it is handsome. 13. Chil- dren, you are naug hty. 14. No, we are quite good. 15. My brother and my sister are in Berhn. 16. Whose knives are those? 17. What is that? 18. Who is that? 19. That is my mother. 20. Who are you? 21. I am Mrs. Braun. £. gefeftncf : !Der 5Binter ift Mt, ber ©ommer ift marm ; T)k SItern finb reitf), bie Sinber finb arm ; S)ie geber ift Ieid)t, ba^ gijen ift f(f)tDer ; ©ie (2cf)uffel ift t)otI, ber teller ift leer. ;. * ♦ 4 » § 13] LESSON IV LESSON IV 10. Present Indicative of l^afictt, to have. I have, etc. Have I ? etc. id) f)abe tt)ir ^abett I^abe t^? f)aben iDtr? bu i)a\t i^r ^abt t)aft bu? ^abt if)r? er Ijat fie ^aben i)at er? ^aben fie? Formal : @ie ^beti. Formal : ^abett @ie ? 11. Accusative Forms, i. The direct object is put in the accusative, which has the same form as the nominative, except in the masculine singular. 2. Observe the following forms of the masculine singular accusative, and of the nominative and accusative plural of all genders : Sing, ben einctt !etncn meincn, 2c. tvtiijtn Plur, bie feiue meiue, :c. luelc^e 12. Repetition. !Der SffJanu unb bic grau. The man and woman. ©ie geber uub bic Siute. The pen and ink. aSeiu aSater uub meitie STOutter. My father and mother. Observe : The article, possessive adjective, etc., must be re- peated before each noun in the singular. 13. The Comparative Degree. !J)U bift ffetner al^ ic^. You are smaller than I. (5r get)t fo fc^uett U)ie t(^. ' He walks as quickly as I. -^^ (gr ift alter a(^ feiu greuub. He iToTder than his friend. Observe: i. Most adjectives and adverbs form the com- parative by adding -cr to the stem of the positive. 2. ' Than ' after comparatives = a(i^ ; *as' . . . 'as* or 'so* . . . 'as' = fo ♦ ♦ > tt)tc. 3. Many monosyllabic adjectives and adverbs with stem vowel a, 0, tt, have umlaut (a, d, ii, respectively) in the comparative. lO GERMAN GRAMMAR [§13 4. The noun after at^ has the same case as that which pre- cedes. Note. — Adjectives with umlaut in comparative are marked by (") in the vocabularies; see also vocabularies and Lesson XXXIX for irregular comparison. EXERCISE IV ► aH^ than. I au'fmerffam, attentive.-^ ber ^leiftift, the pencil. bte ^lume, the flower. bie SSMjtv^ the books. brei, three. ba^ genfter, the window. bie genfter, the windows. ba^ S^^if^r the meat. ^ fUnfsig, fifty. ba^ ®elb^ the money, ber -Sunge, the boy. bte Sretbe, the chalk. 3)?arte', Mary, nur, only, bie ^uppe, the doll. .( bie *ipuppen, the dolls. rein, clean. ber @(J)retbtif(^, the writing- desk, writing-table. ba^ ®(l)U{{)au^, the school- house. bie (2(^u(ftube, the school- / room. ber ®tO(J, the cane, stick. bie 2^afel, the blackboard. bte XnXj the door. Dtele, many. tDte? how? ba^ 3to^^^^ the room. bie 3t^^^^r the rooms. A, Continue the following (see Exercise III) : i. 2Bet(^en SSalt ijaht t(^? n)el(^en ^atl ^aft bu? 2c, 2. Qd^ l^abe fetnen 4. ©abe xii) tti^t tl)re 6. Qd) ^be bett @tO(J. S3(etftift. 3. SBelc^e md)tv f)abe ii)? ®it(f)er? 5. Qi} i)aht feme 3)Je[fer. B. Supply the proper form of ber, eitt, feiTt, or of a pos- sessive adjective in the following : i. §at 3J?arte . . ♦ Slume? 2. ^tx ijaOMUmt]^tx (smg.)? 3. §abe ic^ . . . md)? 4. §aft bu . . . geber? 5. ^aben tt)ir . . . ©arten? 6. §abt t^r . . . ®elb? 7. §aben ®ie . . . STttite? 8. . _ |)uttb ^at gletfc^. 9. . . . ^uttge f)at . . . Salt. 10. . . . 931db- djen^at . . . ^u^e.. n. §at e^ . . . ^u^e? § 13] LESSON IV II C. I. Unfer ©c^ul^au^ ift gro^ unb fc^on, 2. g^ f)at t)iele 3immer unb genfter, 3. ©te 3immer finb gro^. 4* ©ie tjaben genfter. 5. Un[er dimmer ^at nur etn genfter. 6. J)a^ genfter ift gro^, aber e^ ift nit^t immer rein, 7. §ier ift unfer ge^rer, 8. SBa^ ^at er ? 9. gr ^at einen ®c^reib^ tif(^, 10. gr ^at aud) eine geber unb Jinte, n. (Seine ©(filler ^aben and) geber unb Xinte. 12. Unfere ©c^utftube l^at eine 3:afe(, 13. ©ie Slafel ift f(^tt)ar3, 14. 3Bie t)iete ©chiller ^t 3^f)re ©c^ute? 15. ©ie ^at fUnfjig ©t^uler. 16. @inb bie (Scf)ii(er aufmerffam ? 17. ®ie finb nit^t immer aufmerffam, 18. Unfere 8e^rer ^aben Sreibe. 19. T)a^ genfter ift fleiner a(§ bie %ViX. 20. J)er 8e^rer ift iilter al^ feine @(f)iiler. 21. ©ie ®d)iKer finb ni(f)t fo flug iDie i^r 8e^rer, D. Oral exercise on the above. E. I. Our teacher has a chair and writing-desk. 2. Has he also a cane? 3. No, he has no cane. 4. The pupils have their books. 5. Have you your books? 6. Yes, but I have no pencil. 7. Mary has my pencil and pen. 8. Which doll have the girls? 9. They have no doll. 10. How many teachers has your school? 11. It has three teachers. 12. Have they many pupils? 13. Yes, they have fifty pupils. 14. Are their pupils attentive? 15. No, not always. 16. Has your teacher her pen or pencil? 17. No, but she has her chalk. 18. Has your sister a doll ? 19. No, she has no doll ; she is too big. 20. She is taller than her brother. F. gefeftud: ' Gin ^inbe^^erj foH fein: SBie ber (Spiegel fo n)a^r, aSie bie ?iUe fo rein, 9Bie ber Quell fo frif^, SBie ber 2^au fo !tar, gro^ \m bie 33dglein im ®e^ biifc^. G. (S)3ric^n)brter (proverbs) : i. Seffer fpcit af^nie. 2. @t* n)a^ ift beffer at^ gar nic^t^. 3. '^txi ift ®etb. 4- ©nbe gut, afle^ gut. 12 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 14 LESSON V 14. Present Indicative of mac^en, to make. I make, am making, do make, etc. Am I making ? do I make ? etc. id) mad) c iDtr mad) en tnac^e ic^ ? tnacf)en h)ir ? buTnacf)ft t^r mac^t mac^ftbu? mac^t i^r? er tnad|t fie mac^cn mai^t er? maijtn fie? Formal : ®ie ma(^en. Formal : maiden ®ie ? Examples. Qi} mad)t eine "iPup^e. I am making a doll, ©pielen fie «alt? Do they play ball? SBir lieben unferen 3Sater. We love our father. !J)U arbeiteft You are working, f >^ [ SJegnet e^? Is it raining? Observe : i . There are no auxiliary forms in German cor- responding to the EngHsh 'I am making,* 'Does he play?' etc. 2. Most verbs form the present indicative like ma(J)en, but when the infinitive stem ends in -t or -b, or consonants after which t cannot be pronounced, the second singular ends in -eft, and the third singular and the second plural in -ct. 15. Imperative of madden. Singular, Plural, ma(i)e (bu), make (thou). tuad^t (i^r), make (ye). Formal: mac^ett @ie, make. 16. Adjective as Adverb, Most adjectives may be used as adverbs without change : pt, good, well. fc^on, beautiful(-ly). ftei^ig, diligent(-ly). . angette^tn, agreeable(-ly).^ § i6] LESSON V 13 EXERCISE V arbeiten, to work. macf)en, to make, do. bie 2lufgabe, the exercise. ba^ 9)?ar(^en, the fairy-tale, bttte, please. story. ber Srief, the letter. bie Wdxdjcn, the fairy-tales, bie ©riiber, the brothers. stories. ®eutfc^, German. oft, often. erja^Ien, to tell (narrate). regtteti, to rain. flei^tg, diligent, industrious. f(^ne((, quick, fast. gem, willingly, gladly.:!^ |cf)reiben, to write. ^arl, Charles. fitigen, to sing. ^ ba^ ^(atJte'r, the piano. ber (Spajte'rgang, the walk. \^ le^ren, to teach. fpielen, to play. lernen, to learn, study. iDen? whom? ba^ 8ieb, the song. tDettig, little (not much). loben, to praise. Idioms: i. ^d) f^ielc gem, I am fond of playing, like to play. 2. (Sinctt S^a^icrgang ntati^ctt, to take (go for) a walk. 3. ^iat)kv fpiclcn, to play the piano. A. Continue the following, giving also the imperative : i. :^d) f(i)retbe etnen Srtef, bu, zc. 2. Qii) mac^e gem etnett ®pa* gtergang. 3. ^i) finge eitt 8teb. 4- 3^ fptele nii^t ^aiL 5. 3lrbeite tc^ ft^nelt? 6. Qd) leme f^neHer aU ^art. B. I. Utifere 8e{)rer lobeti t^re (gd^itler. 2. !Die ge^rerin le^rt t^re ®c^UIer. 3. !Dte ©(fitter lemen gem. 4- Sinber, lemt tf)r gem ©eutfd)? 5. Qa, n)ir Itxmn fe^r gem S)eutf(^. 6. ^inber lemen nidjt tmmer gem. 7. 2Btr f(^retben eitte 9lufgabe. 8. ^arl f^reibt etnen ®rief. 9. 3Karte, fc^retbe eine 3Iufgabe. 10. 2lrbeitet flei^iger, Stnber. n. 3J?arie arbettetfet)r flei^tg. 12. Sinber fpielenintnier gem. 13. <^ar(, fptelft bu gem SSaU? 14. -3a, §err Se^rer, id) f|)iele fe^r gem Satt. 15. 33itte, erjci^Ien @ie ein SJJar^en, §err Secret. 16. Unfere SJiutter erjci^tt oft SKdr^en. 17. SKeine 14 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ i6 ©c^mefter fingt fe^r fc^on; fie fingt ein 8ieb. i8. ©pielen @te ^latjier, grau ©i^cifer? 19. Qii) fpiete ein iDenig, aber ni(f)t [e{)r gut. 20, 3Keine ^©rUber mac^eti oft einen ©^jagier:^ gang. 21. 3rta(i)en @ie gem einen ©pa^iergang? 22. Qa, ic^ mad)e fe^r gem einen ©^ajiergang. C. Answer in German: I. SBer lobt bie ®cf)UIer? 2. gemft bu gem, <^ar(? 3. Slrbeitet if)r flei^ig, Sinber? 4. SBer f^reibt? 5. SBa^ fc^reibt er? 6. 3Ber fpielt? 7. 2Ba^ fpielen fie? 8. ©pieten @ie ^{at)ier? 9. 8emen ®ie gem ©entfd^? 10. aSa^ er5df)It bie eel)rerin? n. SBer fingt? 12. 2Ba^ fingt fie? 13. 9tegnet e^, ober regnet e^ nid^t? D. I. We are learning German. 2. I like to learn German. 3. Do you like to learn German? 4. Charles likes to learn German. 5. Mary works diligently. 6. Her brother learns very quickly. 7. He learns more quickly than I. 8. Our teacher is teUing a story. 9. The teacher teaches and the pupils learn. 10. Do pupils always like to learn ? 11. Charles is not so clever as Mary. 12. What are you writing, Mary? 13. I am writing a letter. 14. Please sing a song,, Mrs. Schafer. 15. Do not play, my child; write an exercise. 16. My father and mother are taking a walk. 1 7. Do they often take a walk? 18. Our house is larger than their house. 19. Our garden is smaller, than their garden. LESSON VI Review Lessons I-V. EXERCISE VI angenet)m, pleasant, agreeable. ^ei^, hot. brani^en, to use, want, need.<;^ l^elt, bright. bunfel, dark. * ber gintmef, heaven, sky. ba^ gener, fire. ^i)ren, to hear. * ba^ @ra^, grass. je^t, now. l^eftig, violent. !nrj, ""er, short. § 1 6] LESSON VI 15 lang, "er, long. ber 9iegen, rain, (egen, to lay. fd)einen, shine, bie 8uft, air. ber ©cfjttee^ snow. Tnattd)ma(, frequently. bie ©onne, sun. me^r, more. ber @taub, dust, bie 5Jac^t, night. ber Sag, day. na^, ""er, wet. trocfen, dry. ntc^t me^r, no longer. n)ieber, again, ber Dfen, stove. A, I. SBtr ^aben \t%i (gotntner. 2. S)er %a^ tft tanger utib bie yiaiji ift fiirjer. 3. ®ie 8uft ift oft fel)r ^ei^. 4- SBir ^aben tnan^mal 9?egen. 5. ®er 9?egen ift fe^r angene^m. 6. @r tnad^t ba^ ®ra^ na§ unb tegt ben Staub. 7. @^ regnet je^t ^eftig ; i^ pre e^. 8. S)ie (Sonne fd^eint ni(^t mep. 9. 3)er §imntel ift bnnfef. 10. ®ie Sonne fc^eint je^t mieber pll nnb mai^t ba^ ®ra^ trocfen. n. 2Bir ^aben \t%i !einen ®rf)nee. 12. 9Ka(^en ®ie fein gener. 13. aSir branifien je^t fein gener. 14. 2Btr branrfien nnferen Dfen nic^t me^r. B, Oral: i. ^ft e^ \t%i SBinter? 2. ^\{ ber Sag furser aU bie yia&ii? 3. 3^ft bie 9?ac^t fo lang lt)ie ber Sag? 4. 9tegnet e^? 5. ^5rt tf)r nit^t ben 9tegen, tinber? 6. ^{egnet e^ ^ier oft? 7. ^^f'^^ ^tr Srf)nee? 8. 3ft ba^ ®ra^ na^? 9. §aben @ie einen Dfen? 10. <33ranc^en xoxx je^t gener? C, Continue: i. ^ij pbe feinen Ofen, bn, it. 2. Q6) pre nic^t ben SRegen. 3. -^c^ bin ni(^t fait. 4- -SSrani^e ic^ fein gener ? Z>. I. It is now winter. 2. The day is shorter than the night. 3. The air is colder. 4. We need a stove. 5. We need also a fire. 6. We have no fire. 7. Our room is quite cold. 8. We have snow. 9. The snow is white and clean. 10. The air is often very cold, but it is pleasant and bright. 1 6 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 17 II. My room has a stove. 12. I use the stove very often. 13. Charles and Mary need a stove. 14. Their room is not very warm. 15. Please make a fire. E. Cefeftud: ^i) Itebe bte Slumen, id) Itebe ba^ ©ptel, ^i) Itebe bte SSdgel, id) Itebe gar t)tel, S)te ©rbe, ben §immel, bte ®onne, ben ®tern, ^&^ liebe ba^ atle^, ob na^' ober fern. LESSON VII 17. Declension of Definite Article. Singular. Plural. Masc, Fem, Neut All Genders, Norn, ber bie ba^ bte, the Gen, be^ ber be^ ber, of the Dat bem ber bem ben, (to, for) the Aee. ben bte ba^ bie, the 18. Use of the Cases. SBeriftba? ^er 9Kann tft ba. Who is 1 there. there? The man is SBeffen^ut^Iiater? Whose book has he? (Sr ^at ba^ «ucf) be^ ©(^itler^. He has the pupil's book. aSem fd)t(ft er ba^ SJui^ ? To whom does he send the book? @r [(^tdt bem 8ef)rer ba^ -Sm^. He sends the|eacher the book. SBen lobt fie? @ie lobt ben Whom does she praise? She ©(^itler. praises the pupil. SBa^ ^aben ®ie? ^i) ^abe What have you? I have the bie geber. pen. Observe : i. The nominative is the subject, and answers the question * who ? ' (tt)er ?) or. ' what ? ' (tua^ ?). § 20] LESSON VII 17 2. The genitive corresponds to the English possessive or objective with of^ and answers the question 'whose?' *of whom?' 'of what?' (tDeffetl?). 3. The dative is the indirect object, and answers the ques- tion 'to whom?' (tDCm?). 4. The accusative is the direct object, and answers the question ' whom? ' (tt)en ?) or ' what? ' (ma^ ?). Notes. — i. Any of these cases, except the nominative, may be gov- erned by a preposition. 2. It is important to remember that some verbs which are transitive in English govern a dative only in German, as indicated in the vocabularies. 19. Contraction. The prepositions an, * on,' 'at,' in, 'in,' tiott, * of,' ' from,' 5«^ ' to,' are contracted with the unemphasized definite article as follows : an bem = am in bent = tm Don bem = tiom p bent = sum gn ber = jur 20. Case Forms of Nouns, i. Most masculine and neuter nouns have the genitive singular in -^ or -t^ ) the dative singu- lar is often, and the accusative usually, the same as the nomi- native ; but masculine and neuter monosyllables usually add -e in the dative singular. 2. Feminines remain unchanged in the singular, and most of them have -n or -cit throughout the plural. 3. The nominative, genitive, and accusative plural are always alike, and the dative ends in -tt. EXERCISE VII anf {dat'), on, upon. fiit {acc^, for. ber Sanm, tree. • ber ©cirtner, gardener. befomnten, to get, receive. bg|^ ©emiife {sing, only), bte S3Iumen, flowers. vegetables. ber :93{nnienfo^I, cauliflower. > gem ^aben, to be fond of, like. bringen, to bring. in {dat>), in. banfen (dat:), to thank. ber So^I, cabbage. 1 8 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 20 bie ^U(^e, kitchen. bcr Zi^d), table. tnit (daf.)y with. unter (^^/.), under. ber 9Jac^bar, neighbor. uftt). (unb |o meiter), etc., and nac^ §aufe, home. so forth. pflanjen, to plant. ba^ 9Sei(d)ett, the violet. pfluden, to pick, pluck. bie 3Set((^en, the violets. bie 9?o[en, roses. t)erfaufen, to sell. fc^enten, to give (as a present)/ t)ie(, much. fc^idett, to send. n)em? (to, for) whom? bie ©tabt, town, city. tDO^tten, to dwell, live. fte^en, to stand. p (dat.), to. A, Continue the following : i. Qii) f(^en!e bem Secret ba^ SSnd), bu, :c. 2. Qd) ijaht htn ©letftift ber ge^reritt. 3. Qd) bin ber ©i^iiler be^ Sel)rer^. 4- -3^) erjctfjle ben Sinbern ba^ aKcirc^en. 5. Qd} arbette tm ©arten. B, I. ^a^ ift ber ©artett be^ yiadjhax^. 2. SBir fpteten oft im ®arten be^ 9^a(^bar^. 3. SBir ^ben and) einen ©arten. 4. SKeitt SSater arbeitet mtt bem ©cirtner im ©arten. 5. SD^etn aSater ^ftanjt je^t :33(umen. 6. ®er ©artner ^ftanjt ba^ ©emllfe. 7. ®te pflanjen and) ben So^I unb ben SIumenfo^L 8. ajjein 93ater pffanjt t)iele ^lumen: 9tofen, 25eil(^en, ufii). 9. ®a^ Stnb be^ ©drtner^ ift and) tm ©arten. 10. @^ fpielt unter bem Saume. n. SBir :pfIitcEen oft Slumen fUr meine Wlntttv. 12. ®te ^at tinmen fe^r gem. 13. @te brauc^t bie SSIumen fitr ben Xx^d) unb ba^ ©emltfe fiir bie ^nd)t, 14. 3)Jeine Xantt mo^nt in ber ©tabt. 15. @te l^at f einen ©arten. 16. 5Kutter fc^idt meiner {daf.) S:ante oft ©lumen. 17- aSater bringt ba^ ©emiife jur ©tabt. 18. @r t)er!auft t3iel ©emiife in ber ®tabt unb bringt ba^ ©elb nai^ §aufe. 19. @r befommt biel ©elb fur fein ©emiife. 20. SBir fi^enfen bem Se^rer unb ber ge^rerin oft ©lumen. 21. ©ie ©lumen fte^en auf bem ©(^reibttfrf) ber ge^rerin. 22. S)ie 8ef)rerin banft itn Sd^itlern. § 2o] LESSON VII 19 C Answer in German : i. SBeffett ©arteu tft ba^? 2. SBer ift tm ©arten? 3. aJZit trem arbeitet er? 4. SBeldjc^ ©emitfe pflanjt ber ©artner? 5. SBer :pflan5t bie ©(utneti? 6. SBet^e Slumen ^)flanjt er ? 7. ffieffen Sinb ift itn ©arten ? 8. aSo fpielt e^? 9. SSer p\iMt S(umen? 10. pr tDen finb fie? n. SSvaudjt fie :S(umen fiir bie ^Urf)e? 12. SBo iDo^nt 3:^re STatite? 13. SBem fc^idt 3U lemft beine 3lufgabe. You learn your lesson. S^r lemt cure 3lufgabe. You learn your lesson. I ©te lemen 3^1^^ 3lufgabe. You leam your lesson. 3. Observe also the correspondence for the third person, especially for fein and if)r, of inanimate objects : ©ieSIume t)erliertt^rc garbe. The flower loses jtscolor. 5) a^ ®ra^ tierliert fetne garbe. The grass loses its color. ®ie ^at t^ren §Ut. She has her hat. 24 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 25 4. The termination of the possessive adjective depends on the gender, number, and case of the noun it quahfies (the thing possessed) ; the stem depends on the gender and num- ber of the noun or pronoun to which it refers (the possessor), as in the examples above. Note. — The neut. diminutive tfa^ 35Zabd)en, *the girl,* takes the pers. pron. and poss. adj. referring to it in the fern., unless a child is meant : S)ag 9}iabc^en liebt i^xt Tlnttex; fie liebt fie, *The girl loves her mother; she loves her.' EXERCISE IX ba^ ^abestmmer, bathroom. fi^ett, to sit. ba^ ^ttt^ bed. fottft, else, or else, otherwise. bretttiett, to burn. ba^ ©peifesimmer, dining- ber Siid}erf(^ran!, book-case. room. effen, to eat. ber @|3ieget, mirror. fiinf, five. ba^ ©tubierjimmer, study ba^ ®ef(^en!, gift, present. (room). gett)0t)nli(^, usually, generally, bte ©tittle, the chairs. ba^ §au^, house. fucf)ett, to look for, seek. {)inter (^^/.), behind. t)ter, four. Itegen, to lie, be situated, be. ba^ SBo^njimmer, sitting- neben (da^.), near, beside. room. fc^Iafett, to sleep. 3^^tt, ten. ba^ ®(i)Iaf3ttnmer, bed-room. A. Continue the following, including all forms of the third person : i. Qii) [uc^e Tueinen <33(et[ttft, bu . . . betnen . . . zc. 2. 3cf) [(f)i(fe metnem Sruber ein ©efdjenf, 2C, 3. Qti) f^enfe meiner (Sc^iDcfter eine "^uppe. 4. Qii) braui^e mein ^vai) (meitte :33u(^er) nidjt. 5. ^ij befurfie ben greunb meine^ S3ruber^ (meiner ©(^tDefter). 6. Qd) ju(J)e ba^ §au^ meiner greunbe. 7. Qd) ttebe meine SJJntter. B, I. §ter ftefjt unfer .^an^. 2. Q\t e^ ni^t pbfd)? 3. Qd) mo^ne im §anfe mit meinen ©riibern nnb meiner § 25] LESSON IX 25 ©(^mefter. 4- Uttfer 55ater unb unfere Tlntttv n)o{)nen and) \m |)aufe. 5. Unfer §au^ f)at nur ^t^n ^tmmer unb eine Mrfjc. 6. aStr fi^en gen)ot)n(i(^ ttn 3BoI)n3itnnier. 7. 2Bir effen itn ©peifejimmer unb fd)(afen in unfern (Sc^Iafjimmern, 8. T)a^ (Stubierjintnter meine^ SSater^ ift gro^ unb fc^dn; 9. (Sr arbeitet {e^t in [einent ©tubierjimmer, 10. Seine 53u(^er fte^en im Silc^erfrfjranf ober Uegen auf feinent ®c^reib^ tifc^. II. Qm Sinter brennt immer ein geuer int dimmer. 12. S)a^ §au^ \)at fiinf ©^lafsimmer. 13. Qm ©c^Iaf^^ gintmer meiner $Kutter [te^en il}r SSttt unb Dier ©tittle, 14- ®te genfter i^re^ 3^^^^^^ fi^^ 9^o6 unb mac^en e^ \}tU, 15. 3^^r (Spiegel fte^t neben bent genfter, 16. ®a^ ©abe^ gintmer ift neben bent Sif)Iaf jintnter nteine^ 3Sater^, 1 7. ^in^ ter bent §dufe ift ein ©arten. 18. §aben Sie au^ einen ©arten Winter Qijxtm §aufe ? C. Answer in German, introducing possessive forms where possible: i. Sa^ fud)t^arl? 2. SBent fc^icfen Sie ein ©ef^enf? 3. SBeffen SdMjex bxandjcn Sie? 4. Sen be- fu(^en Sie? 5. ^ft ba^ Qijv §au^? 6. Set n)oI)nt in ^'firent §aufe? 7. SBie tjiele 3'^^^^ f)^^ -Sf)^ §au^? 8. SBo arbeitet ^f)r §err 33ater? 9. ©0 ift fein Stubier- jintmer? 10. So finb feine ^nd)ev getDd^nlic^? n. SBa^ liegt fonft auf feinent Sdjteibtifc^ ? 12. SBa^ (iegt auf 3<^rent Jifrfie? 13. So fte{)t ber Spiegel Qijxc^ ©rubers? 14. Setc^e^ 3^^^^^' ift 91^0^ unb f)ell? 15. Seffen ©arten ift ba^? 16. So ift ber ©arten be^ 5«a(f)bar^ ? Z>. I. That is my house. 2. Your house is quite pretty. 3. I live here with my wife and our two children. 4. The sister of my wife lives here also (also here). 5. She is the aunt of my children. 6. My house has only ten rooms. 7. The children sleep in a room beside my wife's bedroom. 8. Our children are small and they sleep in one bed. 9. In their room [there] are also two chairs and a table. 10. Their 26 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§26 table stands near the window. 11. I work usually in my study. 12. My wife likes to sit there beside me. 13. Our children play in the garden behind the house. 14. My neighbor's children are playing with them. 15. What is the girl doing? .16. She is playing with her dog. 17. Is the boy playing with the dog? 18. No, he is playing with his ball. 19. My chil- dren like to play with our neighbor's children. E, 8efeftlt(J: , S)ie (Sonne ge^t jnr ^JiltV ^/^ 2?pm gelbe tommt bie ®u^ Y i Unb an(^ bte ©c^cifletn alljumat,/^''^^'""^^"^ " (Sie freu'n fic^ [dE)on auf t()ren ©tatL 3^m ^aum ba fingt !etn 23ogeI mef)r, ®ie bunfte 9?a(i)t ^ie^t fd)nel( ba^er, -53alb iDirb ber a)?onb am §immel fte^n^ ^c^ ben!, '^ ift ^eit gn «ett p gef)n ! ®uf 5)?ad)t ! ®uf 5«a(i)t ! 2luf SBteberf e^n ! LESSON X 26. Imperfect Indicative of fetn and l^aben^ I was, etc. I had, etc. \i) n)ar n)ir n^aren bu marft i^r n)art er n)ar fie n)aren Formal : (gte niaven. 27. Imperfect Indicative of marflCtt, to make. I made, was making, did make, Was I making? did I make ? etc. etc. t^ mai^tc n)tr mac^ten niac^te i(^? ntai^ten mtr? bu mai^teft t^r ntai^tet niad)teft bu? marfitet tt)r? er ntacE)tc fie nta(^ ten ntad)te er? ntadjten fie? Formal: ©ie marten* Formal: marten Sie? bu ^QXit\i er \)M,t n)ir l^atten i^r ^attet fie fatten Formal : @ie fatten. § 3o] LESSON X 27 Observe : A large number of verbs (called 'weak') form the imperfect indicative like madden, but infinitive stems ending in -t, -hf or consonants after which t cannot be pronounced, in- sert e between stem and ending (arbeitete, regncte, :c.). 28. Strong Imperfects. (gtngen, to sing. 48Ieiben, to remain. Xnn, to do. I sang, etc. I remained, etc. I did, etc. id) fang id) blieb tc^ tat bu fang ft bu btiebft bu tatft^ er fang er btieb er tat tt)ir fang en iDtr blieb en xoiv tat en / if)r fangt i^r btieb t it)r tatct - fie fang en fie blieb en fie tat en Observe : i. Many verbs (called 'strong') form the imper- fect indicative by changing the stem vowel, without adding a tense ending. 2. The person endings are the same as in other verbs. Note. — The impf. indie, of sueh strong and irregular verbs as are used in the exercises will be given, for the present, in the vocabularies. 29. Adverbial Accusative. ] ©r n)ar btefcn ©ontmer t)ier. He was here this summer, gr n)ar einen 5Konat ^ier. He was here a month. ®a^ Snd) toftete einen 3)oHar. The book cost a dollar. Observe: Time and price are usually expressed by the accusative. 30. Word Order. Qd) ^abe ^ente fein ©etb. I have no money to-day. Wtin 93etter ift ^ente ^ter. My cousin is here to-day. §ente ift ba^ ^Better fdjon. The weather is fine to-day. -3ni ®arten fte()t ein -Saunt. A tree stands in the garden. Observe: i. Adverbial expressions of time precede noun objects and other adverbs. 28 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§30 2. When any member of a principal sentence other than the subject precedes the verb the subject comes after the verb, which is the second idea in a principal assertive sentence. EXERCISE X a'nttDOrten, to answer, reply. batb, comp, et)er, soon. beginnen, begann, to begin, commence. bleiben, blieb, to remain, stay. bann, then. ber 5)oHar, dollar. erreii^en, to reach. frifd), fresh, cool. fritt)er, earlier, formerly. geben, gab, to give. ge^en, gtng, to walk, go. geftern, yesterday. ber ®ott, God. bte ^anb, hand. ber IJ'ttedit, manservant, la- borer. bie Snei^te, laborers. foften, to cost. long lange {adv.), long, time, bie. iUeber, songs, na^ (dat.), after. neuUc^, lately, the other day. O^tte {ace.) J without. ber 9tegenfd)irm, umbrella. fagen, to say, tell. fe^ett, |a^, to see. fingen, fatig, to sing. bie ©tunbe, hour/^ ber SBalb, forest, wbod(s). tDann? when? treiter {adv.), further, along, on. ba^ Setter, weather. tDO^ttt? where (to)? whither? iDUnberfi^dn, very beautiful. JU §aufe, at home. A, I. ^tu\x6) ma(^te \6) einen ®pa3tergattg mit einem ^reuttbe. 2. gr !)atte einen ®to(f in [einer §anb unb id) I)atte meinen 9?egenfc^irm. 3. ®a^ SBetter iDar f^on unb bie ?uft frifd). 4- ,f^]i e^ ni(f)t icf)on unter ©otte^ §imme(?^' fagte id). 5. „3^^of)t!'' anttnortete mein greunb, „e<3 ift n)unberf(^on.'' 6. SBir gingen meiter unb fa^en balb einen ©arten. 7. -3^ ®arten tDaren ^net^te. 8. ©ie arbeiteten fe^rflei^ig. 9. Sie pflanjten Slunten unb ®emlt[e. 10. 2Bir fa^en auc^ ein §au^ neben bent ®arten. n. .^inter bent @aufe it)ar ein SBalb. 12. ^n bent §aufe it)o^nte ber ®art^ § 3o] LESSON X 29 ner mit feiner grau unb feinen Sinbern. 13. ®ie grau be^ ©drtner^ fdienfte un^ Sfumen unb wix banften i^r, 14. 333ir blteben eine ®tunbe itn SBalbe l^tnter •bem ©arten unb mein greunb fang etn 8ieb. 15. S)ann gingen iDir nacf) ^au[e. 16. g^ begann ju regnen unb tvxx brauc^ten ben $Regenf(f)irm» 17. 9?ac^ einer ©tunbe erretc^ten mir unfer §au^ in ber etabt. ^. Continue: i. ©eftem mar ic^ ntc^t l^ter, , . , bu, 2c. 2. 3<(^ fjatte nteinen ©tod, bu ♦ , ♦ betnen, 2c. 3. grii^er n)o^nte td^ in ber ©tabt* 4- ^'c^ arbeitete eine (gtunbe. 5. -3(^ blieb eine ©tunbe im 355a(be. 6. Qd) fang t^iele Sieber, 7. Qii) ging geftern jur @tabt. 8. aJJein 9tegenf(^irm foftete einen Dollar, bein, 2c, C. Answer: i. SBa^ tat id^ neuli^ ? 2. SBer ging mit ntir? 3. SBie mv ba^ ^Setter? 4. SBer arbeitete? 5. SBo? 6. gBeffen§au^faf)enn)ir? 7- SBer tDofjutentiti^nt? 8. SBo tuar fein §au^? 9. 9Ba^ fd)en!te un^ bie gran? 10. SBa^ tt)ar Winter bent ©arten? n. SBie lange imren n)ir ba? 12. SBa^ tat ntein greunb? 13. 2Ba^ taten mir bann? 14. Srau(J)ten n)ir ben Otegenf d)irm ? 15. SBoI)in gingen n^ir? 16. SBann erreii^ten tt)ir unfer §au^? Z>. I.I visited my friend Schafer yesterday. 2. I said to him: "Do you want to take a walk with me ?'* 3. "No," re- pHed he, " I do not want to take a walk to-day, I am not quite well." 4. Then I went without him. 5. He remained at home. 6. The weather was not very fine, but it was not raining. 7. I wished to visit a friend. 8. My friend lived in a house near the wood. 9. His house had a garden. 10. His gardener was working in the garden with the manservant. 11. He was planting cabbage and cauHflower. 12. The gardener's wife was picking flowers. 13. My friend gave me the flowers. 14. I remained an hour in his house. 15. His wife played on the (auf bent) piano, and sang me a song. 16. I thanked 30 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 31 her for the song. 17. Then we took a walk in the woods behind his house. 18. After an hour I went home again. 19. It began to rain, and I needed my umbrella. LESSON XI 31. 2)tcfcr Model. Singular. Plural. Masc, Fe?n, Neut. All Genders, N. biefcr biefe bief e^, this bie[e, these G, biefcj^ btefer biefc^, of this biefcr, of these D. biefem bte[er biefcm,(to, for) this bief en, (to, for) these A. bie[ett biefe biefe^, this biefc, these Remarks : i. In the same way decline jcttcr, ' that ' (yonder) ; jebcr, ' each,' ' every ' ; meldjer? * which?' Notes. — i. S)tefer is commonly used for 'that,' as well as for *this.' 2. The unchanged bic^ (also jeneS and IDelc^e^?) is used, like ba^ (§8), before fein : ^\t^ tft tneine (gd)n)efter, *This is my sister'; SBcIt^C)^ finb tneine S3u(^er ? * Which are my books? ' 2. Thus also the short forms of the possessive pronouns : tnetner, mine. feiner, his, its. . un[(e)rer, ours. beiner, thine. i^rer, hers, its, theirs. eurer, yours. ^'^rer, yours. Further, ettier, one ; fettier, none. Note. — The contracted forms mein§, bein§, fein6, eing, !ein8, are often used in the nom. and ace. neut. sing. 32. Use of Possessive Pronouns. 3^1^ ^abe meinett §Ut; er ^t I have my hat; he has his; fetnen; fie ^at i^ren. she has hers. 2Btr ^ben unfere -93itc!^er unb We have our books, and you ®te ^aben -3f)re. have yours, ©tefer §ut tft mein(er). ' This hat is mine. § 32] LESSON XI 31 Observe : i. The possessive pronouns correspond with their antecedent like the possessive adjectives (§ 25, 4), but their case depends on their relation in the sentence. 2. When used as predicates, they may also have the unin- flected forms mein, beiti, fein, :c. EXERCISE XI ber 3lbenb, evening. ba^ Sanb^U^, country-house. an (^^/.), on, by, at. ber SKo'nat, month. auf ®efu(^, on a visit. ba^ 2JJotorboot^ motor-boat. auf bem 8anbe, in the country, ber See, lake. bte 2lu^ftcl)t, view, prospect. fi^en, fa^, sit. bet {dat), at, near, by. fo, as, thus. bet un^, at our house. ba^ Ufer, shore, bank. beltJUnbern, to admire. bie 3Seranba, veranda. fa^ren, fu^r, to go (in a Derbringen, t)erbrac^te^ to vehicle), drive, etc. spend, pass (time), bte i^e'rien (//. only), holidays. t)On {dat,), of, from. I^eute^ to-day. ba^ Staffer, water, bie -3n[el, island. bie ^txif time, ber Sa^n, row-boat, canoe, skiff. A, I. 933o tierbrat^ten ®ie btefen ©otnnter bie ^erten? 2. SBtr tjerbra^ten unfere auf bem 8anbe; tt)o t)erbrac^ten ®ie ^\)xt ? 3. ©ir t)erbracf)ten unfere an einem ©ee. 4. Unfer Sanb^au^ fte^t auf einer ^Xi\d in biefem (See. 5. (Sin^reunb metne^ 9Sater^, §err 5KUHer, ^t and) etn^, aber fein^ ift nid)t auf ber ^nfel, e^ fte^t am Ufer be^ @ee^. 6. ©ie uerbrac^ten ®ie bte 3^^^? 7- ^^^ t)erbrad}ten fie getDo^n(t(^ auf bem aSaffer. 8. Q6) ^atte ein 9Kotorboot unb meine greunbe l^atten aucf) ein^. 9. -3^re^ voax grower ate mein^. 10. 9J?etn greunb 3l(bert tDar bei un^ auf -Sefud). n. ^^eber t)on un^ l^atte einen Sa^n. 12. Seiner xoax ni(^t fo gro^ tt)te meiner. 13. SBir fu^ren jeben Slag auf bem SBaffer. 14. (Sr ful)r in f einem ta^ne unb id) in meinem. 15. ^eben Slbenb fa^en 32 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 32 wiv auf unferer aSeranba unb betDunberten bie 2lu^fict)t, 16. ®o t)erbrac{)tett mir einen SJionat fet)r angenef)Tn, B. Fill in the blanks with a suitable word or words of the biefer model: i. aJJein ategenfrfiirm foftete einen ©ollar; mie . t)iel foftete . . , ? 2. ^ft ^^re geber fo gut trie . _ ? 3. ©tefe^ «u(^ ift , . . ; n)erd}e^ tft . _ ? 4. 3JJetn 3Sater ift (titer al^ , . * 5. ^c^ ^abe fein a^effer; ^benSie , , ,? 6. ^aben Sie etnen Sleifttft? Qd) ^abe . , . 7. DKein «Ieiftift ift Heiner aU . . , 8. ^^r «Ietftift ift fteiner al^ . , ♦ 9. SBelc^er @ut ift grower, , . , ober . . . ? 10. 9Bo ift ein ©tod? @ier ift , _ C. Answer, using pronominal forms: i. ^at §err 9JJUHer ein 8anbf)au^? 2. ^eli^e^ 8anb^au^ ift f(^oner, biefer ober jene^? 3. SBeffen 9}?otorboot ift grower? 4. SBeffen ift fteiner? 5. 9BeI(^e^ 9)?otorboot bett)unbern ®ie? 6. gu^r fein ^aljn fc^netter al^ beiner? 7. SBeffen ®a^n brau^ten fie geftern? 8. aBeId)en Sa^n braud^en wiv ^eute, biefen ober jenen? 9. 9luf wd(i)tv SSeranba fa^en @ie ? 10. SBeffen greunb ift 3IIbert ? 11. Sinb biefe SSuiijtx me in ? 12. SBeffen S3Ieiftift ift bie^ ? D. I. Has your father a country-house? 2. Yes, he has one. 3. Where is his country-house? 4. It is (stands) on (an) the shore of a lake. 5. My father's friend, Mr. Mliller, has also one. 6. His is beside ours. 7. His house is larger than ours, but ours is prettier than his. 8. Here we passed X our holidays this summer. 9. Where did you pass yours? ^\^io. I passed mine on an island in the lake. 11. My friend Albert Schafer visited me there. 12. Each of us had a canoe. 13. Which canoe went (fa^ren) faster, yours or his? 14. His went faster than mine. 15. We went on the water every day, ^'^^^ or took a walk on the shore^ 16. The view from our veranda was very fine. 17. We often sat there and admired it. 18. Thus we passed the summer very pleasantly. 19. After a month we went (fa'^ren) to the city with my father and mother. § 32] LESSON XII 33 E, gefeftud: ®u bift iDte etne Stume @o ^olb unb f(^on unb rein; 3cf) fc^au' bic^ an, unb SBe^mut ~ 5>i~J^V^t>t-^ (Scl)teicf)t mir in^ §erj ^inein- jA. I. The children were sitting at the table with their father and mother. 2. Their father cut the meat. 3. He cut it with a knife. 4. Each of them had two knives, two forks, and two spoons. 5. Charles' knife was sharp; it was sharper than William's. 6. William's knife was not so sharp as his. 7. The § 331 LESSON XIII 35 maid handed each child the vegetables. 8. They had potatoes and asparagus. 9. They like potatoes and asparagus. 10. Mary was thirsty, and her mother gave her milk. 11. Yesterday the children were (came) late to (the) school. 12. Their clock was wrong. 13. Ours is always right. 14. Their father and mother asked the teacher to excuse them. jE. 8efe[tii(f : (Etfd?gebet. @peife, 9Sater, beitie Stnber/ i | « T i (j^X^ Jrofte bie betrubten ®unber, !j\Mr-^^^^ (Bpxiii) ben ®egen ju ben ®aben, ^ SBeI(^e tDtr je^t Dor nn^ ^aben, ®a§ fie un^ ju biefem 8eben ©tdrfe, Sraft unb 9?a^rnng geben. — 3o^ann ^etxmaxu LESSON XIII 33. Strong Declension of Nouns. I. ber ^unb,.dog. II. ber Bof^n, son. Sing. Plur. Sing, Plur. N. ber ^unb bie §unbc ber @o^n bie @5^nc G, be^ §unb(c))^ ber §nnbc be^ ©o^n(c)^ ber ®3f)nc Z>. bem ©unb(e) bengnnbcn bem ©o^n(c) ben ©B^nen A. ben ^^xxi^ bie §nnbe ben ®o^n bie ©B^ne III. bie ^anb, hand. Sing. Plur. bie ^anb . bie §5nbc ber |)anb ber^ftnbe ber $anb ben^anbcn bie ^anb bie ^iinbe Note. — For classes of nouns so declined, see Lesson XIX. Remarks: i. These three models are merely variations of the same type of noun declension (called the primary form of the ' strong declension '). C; 36 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§34 2. Feminines are invariable in the singular ; masculines and neuters take -C)§ in the genitive and -c in the dative singular. Notes. — i. The C of the gen. and dat. sing, is usual in monosyllables, less so in polysyllables, but C of the gen. is always retained after final § sound. 2. The C of the dat. sing, is omitted when a prep, immediately precedes : au8 §0^, * of wood'; but exceptionally, 311 §aufc, nac^ §aufe. 3. Nouns in -lli^ double the last consonant before an ending : iBeforg* nt)^, * anxiety,' gen. sing. iBeforgniffe^, nom. plur. iBeforgitiffe; so also g = ff after short stem vowel : glug, * river,' gluffe^, gliiff e. 3. All add -c in the plural with additional -n in the dative. 4. Many masculines with stem-vowel a, 0, u, aiif and all femi- nine monosyllables of this model, take umlaut in the plural. 34. Essential Parts. By observing the case forms which are identical, the full declension of any noun may be inferred from the nominative singular, genitive singular, and nominative plural, which are given in the dictionary for this purpose. 35. Compound Nouns. In compound nouns the last com- ponent only is declined ; they usually follow the gender of the last component : JVbm, Sing. Gen. Sing. Nom. Plur, ber §anbf(^ul), glove. be^ ^anbf(i)uKO^ i^t^ §anbf(^u^c ber Obftbaum, fruit-tree, be^ Dbftbaum(c)^ bie Cbftbaume Note. — Compounds with -Ittattn have as plur. -manner (individuals or occupations), or -IcutC (collectively): ©taat^manncr, * statesmen'; i^aitblcntC, * country-people.' 36. Rule of Gender. Most nouns in -tc!|, -\% -vx% -ling, and foreign nouns in -a(, -ti% -ar, -icr, -or are masculine. EXERCISE XIII N.B. The gen. sing. fem. is not given, being the same as the nom. ber 9lrm, -(e)^, -e, arm. befommen, befam, to get, re- ber 9lrjt, -e^, ^X, physician, ceive. doctor. brinoen, brac^te, to bring. § 36] LESSON XIII 37 ber gfug, -e§, h, river. \^^^ . I. I received a present yesterday from my father. 2. He sent me two dogs. 3. These were quite young and very handsome. 4. I am very fond of these animals. 5. They take a walk every day with me. 6. I get presents often from my father and my friends. 7. That is very pleasant for me. 8. I received two letters from my friend Albert to-day. 9. My brother brought them home. 10. In these letters Albert told (erjd^ten) me about (t)on) his holidays. 11. He spent them in the country. 12. His uncle has a house there. 13. His uncle has many animals — horses, cows, sheep, etc. 14. He has also many fruit-trees behind his house. 15. They are large and very fine. 16. The house is on (an) the shore of a river. 17. His uncle has also a ship. 18. My friend used to sail (ful^r) every day in this shipT" 19. Albert is the son of a physician in this city. 20. His father lives near (neben) us. 21. My father and his are friends. £. Sefeftiicf: IDanbrers ZTad^tlteb. ilber alien ©ipfetn Qn atten SBt^feln ^z^^^SAro^ ©pureft bu ' ~ Saunt etnen @an(^ ; }sS^^^3-W" !Dte 33c)gelein j^tDetgen int SBalbe. SBarte nur, balbe 9?n^eft bu auc^. — ©oet^e. §39] LESSON XIV 3.9 LESSON XIV 37. Perfect Indicative of tjaicn, fJJtcfeit* I have had (played, been playing), etc. ic^ f)abc gel^abt (gefpieft) lt)ir ^aben ^tijabt (gef^jiett) bu ^aft gel^abt (gefpielt) t^r t)abt ge^abt (gejpie(t) cr ijat Qtijaht (gefpielt) fie ^aben ge^abt (gefpielt) Formal : (gie ^abett ge^abt (gefpielt). Observe : i . Verbs conjugated with I)abcn form this tense by adding the past participle to the present of l^aben, as auxiliary. 2. The past participle of weak verbs is usually formed by pre- fixing gc- and adding -t (or -et after b, t, etc. ; see § 27) to the stem, e,g, fpiel-en, gC'fpieW;arbeit^en, gc-arbeit-ct Note. — The past part, of all strong verbs will be given for the present in the vocabularies. 38. Use of Perfect Tense. The German perfect corresponds to the English perfect, but also often replaces the English past, especially when referring to a period recently completed, or to an independent fact : Q6) t)abe e6 ge{)5rt. I have heard it. Qd} ijahc e^ geftern ge^ort. I heard it yesterday. 39. Pluperfect Indicative of ffaittif lobem I had had (praised, been praising), etc. ii) ^atte ge^abt (gefobt) iDtr fatten ge^abt (getobt) bu ^atteft ge^abt (ge(obt) il^r l^attet ge^bt (gelobt) er ^atte ge^abt (gelobt) fie Ijatttn ge^abt (getobt) Observe : Verbs conjugated with Ijabctt form this tense by adding the past participle to the imperfect of ^abcn, as auxiliary. 40 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§40 40. Word Order in Principal Sentences. Verb. @r ift l^eute ntc^t Iranf. ©er SSater be^ ®^uler^ tDar l^ier. §ter ift bet SSater be^ ©d^uler^. Qm ©ommer finb bie Saume [(^on. ®a^ Stub ^at ^eute nit^t t)tel gefptett. Observe : i . In principal sentences making a statement, the verb is the second idea (not necessarily the second word) . 2. Any member, except the verb, may occupy the first place. 3. When any member other than the subject precedes the verb, the subject, with its attributes and enlargements, is thrown after the verb, and occupies the third place. 4. The auxiliary is the verb in compound tenses, and the past participle comes last in the perfect and pluperfect. Notes. — i. The connectives mib, aber, obcr, betin, do not aflfect the word order. 2. The rules of word order are often disregarded in verse. 41. Cardinal Numerals. 21. ein unb stDanjig 22. 3it)et unb jtratijig 30. brei^tg 40. tjierjtg 50. funfstg • 60. [ecf)3ig 70. fieb(en)jtg 80. at^tgig 90. neunjtg 100. ^unbert loi. ^unbert (unb) etn^ 123. ^unbert (unb) brei unb jtDanjtg 200. gtDei^unbert looi. taufenb unb etn^ 1000. taufenb 1,000,000. etne aKilUo'n 1897. at^tje^n l^unbert [teben unb neunjtg, or taufenb a6:)t ^unbert fieben unb neunjig. Observe ; i. The form ciiti^ is used in counting. I. etn^ II. etf 2. jtDet 12. jn)5If 3. brei 13. bretje^n 4. t)ter 14. Dterje^n 5- fiinf 15- ftofjef)n 6. fed^^ 16. fet^sefin 7. fieben 17. fieb(en)je^n 8. ad^t 18. at^tge^n 9. neun 19. neunje^n 10. je^n 20. imnm §42] LESSON XIV 41 2. In compound numbers from 21 upwards, the units precede the tens, and are joined to them by UTlb: 25 = fitnf unb StDaujig (Eng. ^five and twenty') ; i56 = {)unbert fe(^^ unb fittlfjig. 3. §unbert and taufenb generally omit eitl before and may omit unb after them. 42. Multiplicative Adverbs. They are formed by adding -malf *time,' to the cardinals. (Sitimal; jtDetmal; je^nmal. Once ; twice ; ten times. EXERCISE XIV be^ 9lbenb^, in the evening. laffen, lie^, getaffen, to leave, abbteren, to add (arith.). let. 5)eutf(l){anb, n,,-^, Germany, ber ^Korgett,-^^ — , morning. ber T)e5ember/ December. be^ 3Jf orgen^, in the morning. btt)ibieren, to divide (arith.). multtplisteren, to multiply. huxd) {ace:), through, by. ba^ Sc^altja^r, -(e)^, -e, leap- (Snglanb, n,, -^, England. year. (Snglifc^, English (language). bte ©C^Itttettfa^rt, -en, sleigh- faft, almost, nearly. ride (drive). fitiben, f anb, gefunben, to find, f^reiben, f c^rteb, gef^rieben, geben, gab, gegebett, to give. to write. geftern morgen, yesterday fubtra^teren, to subtract. morning, tanjen, to dance, ^eute morgen, this morning. tun, tat, getan, to do. ba^ SSergniigen, -^, pleasure. Idioms: i. (Sine Sr^Uttcnfa^rt tttarfjcn, to take (go for) a sleigh-ride (drive). 2. %iSc^ l)abc tlici SJcrgniigcn gel)abt, I have enjoyed myself very much. A, Continue : i. ^i) ^abe {\)^iit) etnen @unb ge^abt, bu I)aft (^tteft), 2C. 2. ^i) ^abe (^atte) metnem greunbe etnen S3rtef gef^rieben, bu . . . beinent, 2C. 3. SBa^ ^abe ic^ geftern ntorgen getan ? 4. 9?euUc^ ^abe (^atte) \i) einen @|)a5tergang gentac^t. 5. §eute ntorgen ^abe ic^ ntetner 3Kutter :93tunien gefc^enft. 6. ^^ {)abe (^tte) biefe SBod^e tm ®arten gefptelt. 7. @in^ unb ein^ ntarfjt jmet, jtDei unb ein^ mad)t brei (con- 42 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§42 tinue up to thirty). 8. ^tDcimal eiti^ ift jtDci, 3lt)etmal jtDei ift Dier (continue up to thirty). B, Read in German : 2manitft22, 3 mat 12 ift 36, 4 tnal 8 ift 32, 5 mat 9 ift 45, 6 mal 7 ift 42, T x (mal) 10 ift 70, 8X11 ift 88, 9X12 ift 108, 10X10 ift 100, 11X11 ift 121, 12X12 ift 144. Slbbieren ©ie 2,341, 25,891 unb 989,346. ©ubtra^ieren ®ie 27,763 t)on 31,551. aKuItipUjieren @ie 591 mit 478. ®it)ibieren (Sie 2,581,640 bur^ 61. C I. 3. bemSorfCc) benSorfcm ^. ba^ 3:)orf bie S)3rfeir Note. — For classes of nouns so declined, see Lesson XIX. Remarks : i. The singular is after the §unb model (§ 33). 2. The !j)orf model differs from the ^unb model by adding •er in the plural (a, 0, tt, stems always with umlaut), and is called the ' enlarged form/ V. ber aWalcr, painter. VI. ber SSatcr^ father. Singular, PluraL Singular, Plural, N, ber SKaler bie SJJater ber SSater bte 3Sater 6*. be§ ajJaler ^ ber 9JJa(er be^ 3Sater ^ ber 3Sater D, bem 9J?a(er ben SD^alern bem 3Sater ben 3Sateni A, ben aJtaler bie 2Kaler ben 3Sater bie 3Sater 44 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§44 Notes. — i. For classes of nouns so declined, see Lesson XIX. 2. Nouns in -tt do not add -tt in dat. plur. : ©arten, ©cirten. Remark : These models differ from ^uttb and @Df)n only in the omission of e in the various endings, and are further varia- tions of the strong declension — called the 'contracted form/ 44. Rules of Gender, i. Most nouns in -tt, -cr, are masculine. 2. Collectives beginning with ^c- and ending in -e are gen- erally neuter. 45. Pres. and Impf. Indie, of {9nnen^ tttuffcil^ Present, Imperfect, I can, am I must, have I could, was I had to, was able to, etc. to, etc. able to, etc. obliged to, etc. i(J) fann t(^ mu§ i(^ fonnte ii^ mu^te bu lannft bn mu^t bu fonnte ft bu mu^teft er fann er mu§ er fonnte er ntupte n)ir f onnen tDtr miiffen iDir fonnten iDtr muBten i^r fonnt t^r miiBt i^r fonntet i^r mu^tet fie fonnen fie miiffen fie fonnten fie mu^ten Examples. ^6) fann l^eute nid^t fomnten. I cannot come to-day. @r fonnte nti^t laufen. He was unable to run. SBir miiffen bletben. We must stay. ®ie mu^ten fdimer arbetten. They had to work hard.-"**" Observe: i. These verbs govern an infinitive (without gu), which comes at the end in a principal sentence. 2. As the English *must' has no past tense, the German imperfect must be variously rendered as above. auf et^nmaf, at once, bie 9lyt, ^e^ axe. bebecft, covered. EXERCISE XV betbe, both. ber Serg, -(e)^, -e, hill, moun- tain. §45] LESSON XV 45 betrad^ten, to observe, consider, man {pron,)y one, people, etc. ba^ 3)arf), -(e)^, ^er, roof. ber 2)?ann, -(e)^, "tx, man. ber !Campfer, -^, ^, steamer, metirere (//.), several. benn {fonj^, for. morgen, to-morrow. bort, there, yonder. rei^t^, on the (to the) right. ei'nmaf, once. ba^ ®c^fog, -e^, "er, castle. fallen, to fell, cut down. ba^ @ege(fcf)iff, -(e)^, -e, sail- ba^ gelb, -e^, -er, field. ing-vessel, ship. ba^ ©ebirge, -^, — , mountain- fe^en, [a^, gefe^en, to see. range, range of hills. fo, so. leaden, to hew, chop, cut. ba^ @tro^, -(^)^r straw, ber §tntergrnnb, -e^, "e, back- ba^ 3:al, -(e)^, "er, valley. ground. ber^Taler,-^, — ,dollar(72cts.). ba^ §o{g, -e^^ "er, wood ber SSorbergrunb, -e^, ^e, fore- (material). ground, bte 8anbf(^aft, -en, landscape. n)a^ fiir? what kind (sort) of? lin!^, on the (to the) left. jerfatten, ruined, in ruins. A. I. Decline throughout like T)orf: ber SBafb, n)ef(^e^ §au^, biefe^ ®(J)Io^, mein -93u(^, !ein Sftann. 2. DecHne like abater: unfer 8el)rer, ba^ 33abe5tmmer, fein genfter, biefe^ SKdbd^en. 3. Dechne like SSater : biefer ©arten, unfere 9Jlut== ter, ^\fC ©ruber. 4. Supply the remaining cases of the fol- lowing : ©arten (w.), -^, ^ ; Slrgt (/«.)' -e^, ^e ; ganb^au^ («.), -e^, ^er ; gelb {n.\ -e^, -er ; S^iff («.X -e^, -e ; Slaler (w.), -^, — ; SEal (;/.), -e^, ^er ; ©ebtrge (;^.), -6, — ; §anb (/.), — , "e. 5. Continue : '^i) fann meine ©itd^er nic^t finben, bu . . . betne, 20. ^&^ !onnte {)eute morgen nteine 2luf gabe nic^t mad)en, bu . . . beine, xz. ^i) ntu^ ntorgen jur (g^ule ge* l^en. ^i) mu^te geftern Sriefe [(^reiben* B, I. ©etra^ten @ie biefe ganbfd^aft. 2. @ter Wnnen iDir fo t)iel auf einmat fe^en : (ginen "^XvS^f eine ©tabt mit Dielen §aufem, unb l)tnter ber @tabt ^elber unb SBScilber, Serge unb Slater. 3. 3^ 3Sorbergrunbe liegt bie @tabt an 46 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§45 ben Ufern eine^ ^luffe^. 4. 9luf bem gluffe faf)ren (gegel^ f^iffe, ©am^jfer unb Sa^ne, 5. 3^tn gintergrunbe fann man ein ©ebtrge fe^en* 6. Winter ber ©tabt liegen mel^rere ©or- fer. 7. S)ie ©cic^er ber §aufer in biefen !Dorfem finb ntit ®tro^ bebedt, 8. ©ort arbeiten bie 3Kanner flei^tg in i^ren ©arten unb getbern, 9. 9{ed^t^ auf bem 33erge Winter ben S)orfern fdnnen @ie einenSBalb [e^en. 10. Qn biefem SBalbe muff en bie SnecJ^te ^iiume fallen unb mit i^ren tjten §oIj ^aden- n. .^m §intergrunbe linf^ fann id) and) jmet ©i^Wffer fel^en. 12. S)iefe ©c^Ioffer muffen fe^r alt fein, benn fie finb beibe ganj jerfallen. C, Oral: i. Was liegt in dem Tale? 2. Was kann man auf dem Berge rechts sehen? 3. Wer wohnt da? 4. Was fiir Dacher haben die Hauser? 5. Wer arbeitet hier? 6. Wo arbeiten sie? 7. Was steht hinter den Dorfern? 8. Wer arbeitet dort? 9. Was miissen sie tun? 10. Was konnen Sie auf dem Berge links sehen? D, I. This, landscape is very fine. 2. One can see hills and valleys, towns and villages. 3. In the foreground on the right lie two villages. 4. The windows of the houses are small, and the roofs are covered with straw. 5. The houses in the villages in Germany are often covered with straw. 6. In the valley on the left lie two towns; can you see them? 7. The houses in the towns are larger and finer than the houses of the villages, but the gardens are smaller. 8. In the background one can see hills. 9. On the hills to the right stand two castles. 10. Castles usually stand on hills. 11. These castles are in ruins, for they are very old. 12. I can see two steamers on the river and also three row-boats. 13. In the fields [there] are cows and horses. 14. They are standing under the trees, for it is very hot. 15. The laborers are working in the fields and in the woods. 16. They are making hay, and felling trees with their axes. §48] LESSON XVI ^ dr 47 E, Lesestuck : Ein Maler hatte ein Bildnis vom Sohne eines Kaufmanns gemalt. Der Kiinstler war einmal bei dem Kauf- mann auf Besuch. Der Kaufmann zeigte ihm das Bild seines Sohnes und sagte : " Dieses Bild ist meinem Sohne sehr ahn- lich." Der Maler antwortete : " Das freut mich sehr, aber ich habe noch kein Geld von ihm fiir das Bild erhalten." Der Vater erwiderte : " Das ist ihm auch sehr ahnlich." LESSON XVI 46.. Present Indicative of toetben^ i(^ tDcrbe iDir trerbett X bu njtrft t^r tt)erbet er iDtrb^ fie iDerben Formal : ®ie iDefben* Observe : The t of the second and third singular. 47. Future Indicative of ^a6cn, tttad^eu* I shall have (make), thou wilt, etc. id) tuerbe ^aben (madden) tt)tr tuerben l^aben (madden) bu tDirft ^abeti (marf)en) i^r tDerbet tjaben (mac^en) er njirb ^aben (madjen) fie iperben ^abett (tnac^en) Formal : ®ie tDerben ^aben (mad)en). Observe : This tense is formed by adding the infinitive to the present indicative of tDerbetl, as auxiliary. 48. Future Perfect of j^aficn, tnad^ctt. I shall have had (made), etc. \i) tt)erbe ge^abt (gemad^t) tt)ir ttjerben ge^abt (getnad^t) ^ben ^aben bu mirft ge^abt (gemad^t) l^aben i^r tperbet ge^abt (gemac^t) ^aben er ttJirb ge^abt (gemad^t) {)aben fie merben ge^abt (gemad^t) ^aben 48 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§49 Observe : This tense is formed by inserting the past parti- ciple before the infinitive of the future. 49. Word Order. SBtr tDerben ^txt ijahtn. We shall have time. & tt)trb ^tit get)abt ^aben. He will have had time. Observe : In these tenses the infinitive comes at the end, preceded by the past participle if both occur. 50. Separable Prefixes. 9lu^f(^t(fen, afireifen. To send out, to set out. ^uma^ett, au;^gef)en. To close, to go out. Qii) \d)xdtt ba^ ®tnb an^. I sent the child out. 9teift er ^eute a6 ? Does he set out to-day? Wlaijtn ®te bte Znx ju. Close the door. . Q6) n)lmfd)e au^juge^en. I wish to go out. (Sr tt)irb morgen fnrtge^en. He will go away to-morrow.^5^- aSer t)at bie Xm aufgemat^t? Who opene'd the door? Observe: i. Certain prepositions and adverbs (such as au^^ tuit, naif), fort) are much used as prefixes to verbs, and are always stressed. 2. In the simple tenses these particles come at the end of principal sentences (including direct questions and commands). 3. They precede and are written as one word with the infini- tive (with or without ju) and the past participle, wherever these occur. 51. Inseparable Prefixes, i. The prefixes be- er-, tmp-, tni-f ge-, tier-, ser-, are always inseparable and unstressed. 2. Verbs with these prefixes omit the gc- of the past parti- Setrac^ten ®te ba^ ©i(b. Observe the picture. & ^at ba^ §au^ tiettauft. He has sold tlie house. § 52] LESSON XVI 49 52. Compound verbs are conjugated like the simple verbs from which they are derived: au^fc^icfett^ [d^idte au^, au^^* gefc^idt; au^ftetgen, ftieg au§, au^geftiegen. EXERCISE XVI auffte^en (ftanb, geftanben), ber Saffee, -^, coffee. to get up, rise. faufett, to buy. ber Slu^flug, -(e)^, "e, excur- ber ^or6, -e^, ^e, basket. sion, picnic. pacfen, to pack. an^padcUf to unpack. ber ^iai^, -e^, "e, place, au^fteigen, to get off, get out. ber ^roDta'nt, -(e)^, provisions, au^fuc^en, to pick out, select, fc^ott^ already. ber ©a^^of, -(e)^, k, sta- ber ©cfju^, -(e) ^, shelter, pro- tion.^^~' tection. begleiten, to accompany, go fogleic^, immediately. with. ftetgen, ftieg, gefttegen, to einpadett, to pack up. .mount, climb, einftetgen, to go aboard. bie Stra^enba^n, -en, street- erft, first, not before. railway, tram, bie ga^rfarte, -n, ticket (for ber STee, -6, tea. traveling). trittfen, trattf, getrun!en, to frii"^, early. drink, ba^ ®aftf)au^, -e^, "er, hotel, unterbeffen, meanwhile, in the inn. meantime. I^elfett (daf.), ^{f, ge^otfen, to Dietteic^t, perhaps. help. meit, far. l^offentlic^, it is to be hoped, I ber 3^g, -(e)^, "e, train. hope. 3urit(ffef)ren, to return. Idiom : ^inctt ^Ui^fKug tttati^CIt, to make an excursion, go on a picnic. A, I. §offentIi(^ it)irb ba^ Setter tnorgett fc^on fein. 2. ©ann merben iDir eineti 2lu^flug matfien. 3. 2Bir trerbeti frii^ auf ftet)en utib mit ber ©tra^enba^n pm Sa^n^of fa^ren. 4. J)er Se^rer tDtrb un^ begletten. 5. Dort t^erbett tvix erft unfere gat)r!arten faufen unb bann einfteigen. 6. Qn S(u* 50 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 52 tnenba^ tDerben n)tr au^fteigen. ?• 9?tc^t itjett don S. ift em 2BaIb neben bem (See, 8. ^fm SBalbe merbeti h)tr un^ etnen ^ta^ au^fui^en, 9. !t)ort tt)erben mir fogletc^ unfere ^orbe au^padtn ; SJiarie mirb un^ ^elfen. 10. ©eft^rn ^aben voir fd^on *iprot)iant fitr unferen Stuffing eingepadt, n. J)ann njerbeti mir SEee unb ^affee madden, 12. Unterbeffen tDer* ben bie ^inber ® lumen fur ben 2:if(^ ))p(fen. 13. S)ann iDerben n^ir effen unb trinfen. 14. S^ ft)trb Dtelletc^t regnen* 15. 2Ba^ iDerben @te bann tun? 16. ^m ®aftl)aufe be^ ©orfe^ iDerben n)ir S^u^ fu^en. 17. !De^ 2lbenb^ merben toir mit bem 3^9^ S^^ ©tabt juriicEfe^ren. ^. Continue : ^i) mad^e ^eute etnen Stuffing, bu, ic. ; id) mac^te geftern ♦ . ♦ 2c.; tc^ ^abe ^eute . , . gemai^t, ic; 16) ^atte geftern . . . gemad^t, ic; i^ n)erbe morgen ♦ . . ma^en, 2c.; i^ iDerbe . , . gemad^t l^aben, 20, Similarly continue in all the six tenses: i. Qi) fpiele im SQBalbe, 2C, 2. Q6) laufe meine ga^rfarte, bu . . . beine, 2c. 3. 3^ fu^e tm ©aft^aufe @(^ufe. 4- -3^ P^^^ ^rotiiant ein* 5. Q6) fu^e einen '^iai^ au^. C Oral : i. Wird es morgen regnen? 2. Wird das Wetter morgen schon sein ? 3. Was werden Sie dann tun ? 4. Machen Sie gern Ausfltige ? 5. Wer wird die Korbe packen ? 6. Wer wird sie zum Bahnhof bringen ? 7. Wie werden Sie fahren ? 8. Wer wird den Platz aussuchen ? 9. Werden Sie sogleich essen? 10. Was werden Sie erst tun? 11. Was werden die Kinder unterdessen tun? 12. Wann werden Sie zur Stadt zurlickkehren ? 13. Wie werden Sie zuriickkehren ? D, I. It is to be hoped it will not rain to-morrow. 2. No, it will be fine to-morrow. 3. Then I shall go on an excursion with my teacher. 4. He likes to go on excursions with us. 5. Many friends will accompany us. 6. Mother will pack the baskets this evening. 7. My sister will help her. 8. I shall go to the station in (mit) the street-railway. 9. Father and mother can §53] LESSON XVII 51 drive to the station. 10. The teacher will pick out a place in the woods. 11. My aunt will make the coffee. 12. Mother will unpack the baskets. 13. We shall eat and drink and play- in the woods. 14. Then the children will sing and dance under the trees. 15. We shall enjoy ourselves very much. 16. Shall you return with the train to the city? 17. No, we must return with the steamer. E. Lesestuck : Der Dichter Rossetti war auch als Maler be- riihmt. Ein Ftirst aus Indien besuchte ihn einmal und sagte zu ihm : " Konnen Sie mir ein Bildnis von meinem Vater malen ?" "1st Ihr Herr Vater jetzt in London?'* fragte der Kiinstler. "Nein, mein Vater ist tot," antwortete der Ftirst. **Haben Sie vielleicht eine Photographie von ihm?" "Nein, wir haben gar kein Bildnis von ihm." "Wie kann ich denn sein Bildnis malen ? Das ist unmoglich. Es ist lacherlich. Das kann ich nicht tun." " Weshalb ist es J^ch^ich ?" erwiderte der Ftirst. "Sie haben Casar, Hannibalund die zwolf Apostel gemalt ; warum konnen Sie denn meinen Vater nicht malen ? " LESSON XVII 63. Weak Declension of Nouns. VII. ber Snaic, boy. Singular, Plural, N, ber Snabe bte ^naben G, be^ ^naben ber ^naben D, bem^ttabcn ben Snaben ' A. ben ^naben bte Snaben VIII. ber @raf, count. Singular, Plural, N, ber ®raf bie ®rafeit G, be^ ®rafett ber ©rafen D, bem ®raf en ben ®raf en A, ben ©rafcn bie ©rafcn 52 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§54 IX. bie 25Iume, flower. Singular, Plural, N. bie :©Iume bie ©lumett G, ber :93Iuttte ber ©lumen D, ber Slume ben Slume n A, bie -33Iutne bie SSIutnen Notes. — i. For classes of nouns so declined, see Lesson XIX. 2. §err drops C before ~tt in the singular : Genitive, §errn, 2C* Remarks: i. These models are all variations of the same type of declension, called the ' weak declension/ 2. In masculines all cases of the singular, except the nomi- native, end in -n or -cn» 3. The plurals end in -n or -en throughout. 54. Mixed Declension of Nouns. X. ber 5Wame, name. Singular, ' Plural N. ber ?Jatne bie 9?amett G, be^ g^amen^ ber ^Jamen D, bem 9^ame n ben 9^ame n A, ben 9?amett bie Seamen XI. ber Setter^ cousin. Singular. Plural, N, ber SSetter bie SSettertt 6^. be^ 3Setter^ ber SSettern Z>. bem aSetter ben SSettern A, ben 3Setter bie SSettern XII. ba^ D^r, ear. Singular. Plural, N, ba^ O^r bie D^rett G. be^ D^r(c)^ ber D^rcn D. bem O^r(e) ben D^rctt A, ba^ O^r bie Dfjrcn Note. — For classes of nouns so declined, see Lesson XIX. §55] LESSON XVII 53 Remarks: i. Model X. is a variation of the Snabe model (§ 53), adding -^ in the genitive singular. 2. Model XI. follows the ^Mdhv model (§ 43) in the singu- lar and the Stiabe model in the plural. 3. Model XII. follows the §Uttb model (§ 33) in the singu- lar and the ®raf model (§ 53) in the plural. 55. Rules of Gender, i. Nouns in -ci, -f^tit, -fcit, -ft^faft, -nn^f -irtf are always feminine. Note. — The ending -itt is used to form feminine nouns from mascu- lines, often with umlaut; they double -tt in the plural : greunb, grcunbtlt, plur. grcunbimten; ®raf, ©rafin, ©rcifintten. 2. Foreign nouns in -age, -ic, -if, -cna, -tat, -(t)xon, -uv, are always feminine. EXERCISE XVII attrtd^ten, to do (damage). ber Slpfet, -^, % apple. ber 3lpfeIbauTn, -(e)^, "e, ap- ple-tree. ber ©auer, -n, -tt, peasant, countryman, farmer. ba^ :95eet, -e§, -e, garden-bed. ber :93trttbaum, -(e)^, "e, pear- tree. bte Strtie, -n, pear. btii^ett, to blossom, be in bloom. ber Stutnetigartett, -^, % flower-garden. bte S3(itte, -tt, blossom. bie Sortie, -n, bean. bie grbfe, -n, pea. graben, grub, gegrabett, to dig. ba^ ^i^f^'^t, -e^, -en, insect. bte ^irf^e, -tt, cherry. ber 3Jfenfc^, -ett, -en, man (human being). ba^ Obft, -e^, fruit (of gar- den or orchard). retf, ripe. ber 9?uf[e, -n, -n, Russian (noun) . faen, to sow. ber ©ante, -n^, -n, seed. ber (Sc^abe, -n^, -n or % damage, ber ©paten, -^, — , spade, ber 3:eif, -(e)^, -e, part, portion, bie JToniate, -n, tomato. ^ nmgraben, to dig up, dig over, unentbe^rfid^, indispensable. JUerft (adv,), first. Idiom : I^Uttge is used for ^nabc in addressing a boy. 54 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 55 A. I. Decline like Snabc: mein ^unge, biefer Saner. 2. Like Slume : tneine Sir[df|e, bie ^artoffeL 3. Like ®raf : fein 2J?enft^, \od6)t grau? 4- Like ^Jame: ber ®ame. 5. LikeD^r: biefe^ .gnfeft 6. LikeSSetter: unfer S^ai^bar. 7. Supply the remaining cases of the following : 9tofe (/.), — , -n; 9tuffe {m,), -% -n; aWann (^^.)> -^^f "^^J Srbfe (/.), — , -n; geber (/.), — , -n; Sett {n.\ -e^, -en; ©paten (m.), -0, — ; 2ln^fid^t (/), — -en. ^. I. §tnter nnferem §anfe l^aben tt)tr einen ©arten. 2. §ier ]^at nnfer ©drtner biefe 2Bo(f)e mit einem Snaben gearbeitet. 3. t)te[er Snabe ift ein $Rnffe, ber ©o^n eine^ Sanem. 4. ®er .^nnge l^at bie Seete ntit einem @|)aten nm- gegraben nnb ber ©cirtner l^at gefat nnb gepflanjt. 5. SSStdn 33ater l^atte i^nen ben ®amen gegeben. 6. ©er 3:eit be^ ©artene red^t^ ift fUr ba^ ©emitfe nnb ber Sletl linf^ fitr bie Slnmen. 7. ©eftern ^aben fie ^artoffeln nnb SEontaten ge- pflanjt, nnb an^ grbfen nnb So^nen. 8. 3=m Stnmengarten toerben bie Seild^en balb blitl^en. 9. Die Slpfet^ nnb Strn^ banme n)erben and^ batb in Slitte ftel^en. 10. ©ie ^irfdien n)erben im ^nni reif fein; bie Sirnen nnb tpfel im Dftober. II. goffentlid^ iDerben bie ^nfeften biefe^ .^a^r ni^t t^iel ®(^aben anric^ten. 12. 2Bir l^aben nte^r Dbft nnb ©emitfe al^ nnfere 5Wa(^bam. 13. ©emitfe nnb Dbft finb bem aJJen^ f^en nnentbe^rlid^. C, Oral : i. 2Bann beginnen bie 3Kenf(^en im ©arten jn arbeiten? 2. 2Ba^ inn fie gnerft? 3. 3Bie graben fie ben ©arten nm? 4. SBo liegt ^^x ©arten? 5. SBer ^at biefe 2Bo(^e im ©arten gearbeitet ? 6. SBer f)at mit i^m gearbeitet ? 7. 3iBa^ l^aben fie getan? 8. 2Ba^ fUr SInmen finb in 3^rem ©arten? 9. §at ber ^nnge gnglifd^ gelernt? 10. SBie alt ift er? II. SBeffen ®o^n ift er? 12. 3Ba^ fnr Dbft {)aben ©ie? 13. aSann toirb ba^ Obft reif? 14. 2Ba^ i^^^^ bie 3fnfelten? I 56] LESSON XVIII 55' Z>. I. Vegetables and fruit are uidispensable to (the) men. 2. They must have gardens. 3. They dig up the garden with a spade. 4. Then the gardeners sow and plant. 5. Our gar- dener is a Russian. 6. His father and mother were peasants. 7. Here on the left he will plant the cabbage and tomatoes. 8. Yonder he will plant the beans and peas. 9. He bought the seed"* yesterday. 10. He has already planted the potatoes. II. In which month do people plant them? 12. The pear-trees are in flower in April or May. 13. We have picked the cherries already. 14. We had more cherries this year than our neighbors. 15. In October we shall pick our apples and pears. 16. The insects do much damage in the garden^ £, gefeftud: j^^^^*|^.aiL ^ I^mW ©onnettf ^ettt unb :©tutenbuft, Unb bte <^^tnetterftnge ftc^ T)a^ ift ein 23ergnitgen ! Sluf ben §almen tDtegen: 2Bettn in bfauer SJfaienlnft 2lc^, tt)ie ift eTba fo fd^on ^oc^ bie Serpen fliegen. Slief im ®ra^ jn liegen- SBenn be^ Sa(^e^ SBetten [ic^ Unb junt §immel aufjufe^n ! liDurd^ bie «53Iumen f (^miegen, ®a^ ift ein 3Sergniigen ! LESSON XVIII 56. Declension of Attributive Adjectives, i. When not pre- ceded by a determinative, they take the endings of the biefet model (§ 31) throughout (Strong Form). Note. — The articles, possess., interrog., demonstr., and indef. adjs. are called * determinatives.' 2. When preceded by the definite article or a determinative of the biefer model they take the ending -c in the nominative singular of all genders, and in the accusative singular feminine and neuter ; otherwise -ctt throughout (Weak Form). 3. When preceded by a determinative of the mein model they take the endings -tv, -c, -t^ in the nominative singular, and -Ctt, -tf -t§ in the accusative singular; otherwise -ctt throughout (Mixed Form). 56 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§57 \ I. Strong Form. II. Weak Form. III. Mixed Form. M, K JV. M, F. -JV, J/. F. N, Sing, N, -er -e -e^ -e -e -e -er -e -e^ G. -e^ -er -e^ -en -en -en -en -en -en D, -em -er -em -en -en -en -en -en -en A, -en -e -e^ -en -e -e -en -e -e^ All genders. All genders. All genders. Plur. N, -e -en -en (9. -er -en -en 2^. -en -en -en A. -e -en -en Note. — In the mixed form, the adj. follows the biefer model only in the three places where the ntein model lacks distinctive endings, namely, nom. sing. masc. and neut. and ace. sing, neut.; otherwise it is like the weak form. 57. Paradigms with Nouns. I. Strong Form. Singular, Good soup, gntc ®up^e guterSnppe guter@np:pe gntc ©uppe Plural, Good wines, etc. gnte SBetne, @n^|)en, ©lafer gntcr SBeine, @np|3en, ©Icijer gnten 2Beinen, @nppen, ©tafern gnte SBetne, (Snpi^en, ©tdfer Notes. — i. Before a gen. in -^^ the adj. usually has -Ctt. 2. The ending -t^ of the nom. and ace. sing. neut. is often dropped in poetry and sometimes in prose. 3. Adjs. after pers. prons. are strong, exc. in dat. sing, and nom. plur., where weak endings are commoner : 2Rir armPtt SJiatllie. N, G, D, A, Good wine. gntcr SBetn gntc^(ctt)SBeine6 gnt cm SBetne gntctt aSein G. £>, A, Good glass. gntC)^ ®Ia^ gutC!^(cn)®Iafe^ gnt cm ®Ia[e gntC)^ ®Ia^ § 57] LESSON XVIII 57 II. Weak Form. Singular, The good man. The good woman. The good child. N, ber gutc aJJann bie gutc grau ba6 gute ^tnb G, be^ guten3Kanne^ ber gutcttgrau be§ gutcn tinbe^ Z). bem gutcn 2Kanne ber gut en grau bem gutcn Stnbe A. ben gutcn 3)iann bie gutc grau ba^ gutc Sinb PluraL The good men, etc. N, bie gutcn 3Kciuner, grauen, Sinber G. ber gutcn SKdnner, grauen, Sinber D, ben gutcn 3)?anuern, grauen, ^inbern ^. bie gutcn 9Kdnner, grauen, Sinber III. Mixed Form. Singular, My good hat. My good axe. N, meitt gutcr §ut meine gutc 2lyt G. meine^ gutcn §ute^ meiuer gutcn 2lft D, meiuem gut en §ute meiner gut en 2lf t A, meinen gutcn §ut meine gutc 2lft My good book. N. mein gutc^S3ud^ G, meine^ gutcn 53u^e^ D, meiuem gut en ® ucf)e A, mein gutc^Su^ Plural. My good hats, etc. N, meine gutcn ^v\tf 3tyte, -93itd^er G, meiner gutcn |)itte, Styte, Sitc^er D, meinen gutcn ^iiten, %iitxif Siic^ern A, meine gutcn |)itte, tyte, ^ii^er 58 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 58 Remark : Two or more adjectives qualifying the same noun follow the same form : ®utcr, alter, rotcr SBein ; be^ guten, altcn, roten Seined, ic. 58. Adjectives used Substantively. ©in alte§ S3U(^ unb ein neue^. An old book and a new one. J)er 9llte; bte 2l(te, The old man ; the old woman. ®ie 2Itten. The old people (ancients). £)a§ ®Ute unb ba^ ®d^5ne. The good and the beautiful. Observe: i. Attributive adjectives may be used substan-. tively, and are then written with a capital. 2. The English 'one' after such adjectives is not to be trans- lated into German. EXERCISE XVIII alfo, so, thus, accordingly. fe{)Ien (dat^, to be missing, ail. anfommen (fam, gefommen), fragen, to ask. to arrive. fit^Ien, to feel, ber Slppett't, -(e)^, appetite. ganj {adj.), whole, arm, "er, poor. gar nic^t, not at all. bte Slrjenei', -en, medicine, ge^en, ging, gegangen, to go, physic. walk, fieril^mt, celebrated, famous. I^ei^en, ^te^, ge^eigen, to be bitter, bitter. called, named, brett, broad, wide. ber ^opff^merj, -eg, -en, bag ©rot, -eg, -e, bread, loaf. headache (usually//.), barauf, thereupon, then. Iteb, dear, ber ©tener, -g, — , servant. ndc^ft, next, ber 3:)o!tor (Sr.), -g, -en, ber ^atie'nt, -en, -en, patient. doctor (academic degree). ber "iPutg, -eg, -e, pulse, etntreten (trat, getreten), to pitnftli^, punctual. enter. ber ©(^ulfanterab, -en, -en, enblt(^, at last, finally. school-fellow, school-mate, effen, a^, gegeffen, to eat. bie ©tra^e, -n, street, bag Effen, -g, meal, dinner. ber STrannt, -(e)g, "e, dream. § 58] LESSON XVIII 59 u'ngebulbig, impatient. tt)arten, to wait (for, auf , acc^). terfc^reiben^ t)er[(^rieb, Der- iDinten {dat^, to beckon. fct)rieben, to prescribe. jeigen, to show. tJorig {adj^), last, former. bie ^unge, ~n, tongue. Idioms: i. ^Ir^t = physician, medical man; ^oftor is the academic degree in any faculty. 2. SSic gc^t C§ 3^tteit, ^crr ^Oftor? How are you, doctor ? 3. %^ ^Cigc ^arl, My name is Charles; 9Bie ^Ct^t Ct? What is his name ? A, I. Decline in the singular in German: White bread, good cabbage, red ink. 2. In the plural : Rip^e apples, old books, beautiful hands. 3. In full : Which great river, my good friend, this fine view, your white rose, the small child, my little room. 4. Continue with similar examples. B, I. SSortgen 'Ctett^tag ging i(^ sum ^Irjte, §errn !j)r. 2lue. 2. 3^ iDar gar nidjt h)ot)L 3. -get) \^^i{z ^efttge ^opffc^tner* jen. 4. ©tefer gute §err tft ein after greunb unb @d^ut* fatnerab tneine^ lieben 3Sater^. 5. @ein neue^ §au§ [te^t in einer frf)5nen bretteti (gtrq^e. 6. ^c^ fam piin!tli(^ an, aber fc^on iDarteten tJtele Ungebutbige. 7. ©iefe tuaren arnte ^a* tienten be§ berii^mten Slrgte^. 8. 3lI[o mu^te t(^ eine ganje ©tunbe irarten. 9. ©nblid) minfte ntir ber a(te J)tener unb t^ trat ein. 10. „aBa^ fe^It 3^nen, ntein junger greunb?'' fragte ber Slqt. n. ^Sa^ fann ic^ 3f)^en nii^t fagen, gerr !J)oftor, ba^ mitffen @ie mir fagen/' 12. ,,§aben ®ie guten Slppetit ? " 13. „9^ein.'' 14. ,,§aben @ie ^opffc^ntergen nac^ bem effen?'' 15. ,,3an)o^r, fe{)r ^eftige. 16. ^^ fd^Iafe nid^t gut unb l^abe oft bofe Slraume.'' 17. !I)ann mu^te ic^ i^m nteine 3^nge jeigen unb er fiitjtte nteinen ^uf^. 18. S)arauf tjerfd^rieb er mir eine bittere Slrjenei unb fagte: wSommen ®ie nd(^fte 3Bo^e tt)ieber.'' C, Continue: i. SSorige SBo^e ging i^ ijum Slrjte, . . . gingft bu, :c. 2. ^c^ fam punftli(^ an. 3. 2Ba^ fe^Ite mir? 6o GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 58 . . . btr, tc. 4- S^ mu^te lange irarten. 5. ^c^ ^abe ben ©arten umgegraben. D, Oral: i. Was fehlte Ihnen? 2. Zu wem gingen Sie? 3. Wann? 4. Wie heifit er? 5. 1st er ein beriihmter Arzt? 6. Wo wohnt er? 7. Waren schon viele da? 8. Wer war da? 9. Was taten sie? 10. Wie lange mufiten Sie warten? II. Was sagten Sie zum Arzte? 12. Was tat er darauf? 13. Wann werden Sie wieder zu ihm gehen? £, I. My elder brother often has violent headaches. 2. Last week he went to an old friend. 3. This good gentleman is a famous physician. 4. He and our dear father are old school- mates. 5. My poor brother did not arrive punctually. 6. Acr- cprdingly he had to wait a long time. 7. The old servant at lain^eckoned to him to enter. 8. The kind old gentleman asked: "What is the matter with you?" 9. My brother re- pHed ; " I often have violent headaches, and do not sleep very well. 10. I also have bad dreams." 11. "Do you enjoy (use fi^meden) your (the) dinner ? " 1 2. " O, yes." 13. " Show me your tongue." 14. TRtb the doctor felt the patient's pulse, and said : "You have been eating too much. 15. Take a walk every morning in the fresh air. 16. Here is also a bitter medicine. 17. It is bitter, but it is very good. 18. Come again next Thursday. " F. Lesestiick : Man muB kleinen Kindern immer die Wahr- heit sagen. Dies ej:fuhr unser guter GroBvater einmal. Einer von seinen Enkeln "fSgte ihn : " GroBvater, warum ist dein Haar so weiB? " " Ich bin sehr alt," antwortete er. "Wie alt bist du denn, GroBpapa?" fragt© das Kind wieder. "Ach, ich war schon mit Noah in der Arche." " Dann bist du wohl einer von seinen Sohnen?" " Nein, das bin ich nicht." " Aber du kannst doch nicht seine Frau sein ; also muBt du eins von den Tieren in der Arche sein." 159] LESSON XIX 6i LESSON XIX 59. Summary of Noun Declension, A, Strong Declension. I. ©unbl II. @o]^n[ Models, III. §anbj IV. ©orf Model. [Primary Form.] Smg. N, — G, -(e)^ JD, -(e) A.— Bur. N, -e G,-t n, -en A.-t 2 2 ^^1 After I. are de- clined : Masc. mon- osylls. in App. A, i ; neut. monosylls. in App. A, 2 ; nouns in -^ai, -x^, -ig, -ing, -m^f -fa(; foreign mascs. in -a(, -an, -aXf Atx ; also in -or stressed. After II. are declined : Masc. monosylls., exc. as in App. A, I and A, 4; the neuts. ^f^^f Sl^or, and some- times ©oot ; those in -aft ; those in -a(, -an, -ar sometimes. After III., fems. in App. A, 3. [Enlarged Form.] N.— G. -(e)^ A.— N. -er G,-tx D, -ertt A. -er After IV. are declined : Mascu- lines in App. A, 4 ; neuter mono- syllables, except those in App. A, 2 ; nouns in -htm ; ba^ ^Regiment, ba^ §ofpttaI (or ®pital); nofem- inines; stems having a, 0, «, take umlaut in the plural. V. g^aler VI. 33ater Models. [Contracted Form.] D.— ^• — N.— G,— n.-n A.~ .5 a; i3 B a C/2 After V. are de- clined : MascuHnes and neuters in -d, -ctt, -cr (except those in App. A, 5); di- minutives in -dien and -Ictn; neuter collec- tives beginning with @c- and ending in -e; ber ^cife. After VI. are declined : The nouns in App. A, 5, and the feminines 3)iutter, 2:o^ter* 62 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§59 B, Weak Declension. C, Mixed Declension. VII. ^nabe 1 CO •» .• VIII. ®raf 1 X. g^ame Model. XI. 3Setterl| IX. «IumeJ ^ XII. O^r j| Sing, N, -(e) ■ §1 N. -(e) N.— G. -(e)n 6^. -(e)n^ \ a-(t)^ D, -(e)n i^. -(e)n . D. -(e) A, -(e)nJ A. -(e)tt ^. — P/^r. N, -(e)n] 3 iV. -(e)Ti] ^^ iV. -(e)n] ^ ^.-(e)n 6^.-(e)n OS ^. -(e)n Z^. -(e)n o ^. -(e)n o i^. -(e)n o A. -(e)n. "A ^. -(e)n. ;z; A. -(e)n. ;z; Thus are de- Thus ar( 5 de- Thus are de- clined: After VII., clined: Th( 3sein clined: After XI., mascs. in -c; after App. A, 7. the nouns in App. VIIL, mascs. of A, 8, rejecting c App. A, 6, many for- throughout; after eign mascs., all XII., those in App. ferns, (except as in A, 9, foreign mascs. App. A, 3, and those in unstressed -or* in -c) ; after IX., all fems. in -c» EXERCISE XIX ba§ Slbenbbrot, -(e)§, supper, au^rufjen, to rest, repose, bte 3lbenbluf t, " e, evening air. einf (^laf en (f (^Itef , gef (f)Iaf eti), atte (//.), all. to go to sleep, anfangen (fing, gefangen), to feuc^t, damp. begin. ba^ gutter, -^, fodder, food, ber 21'rbetter, -^, — , workman, bte §t^e, heat. aufl)Oren, to cease, stop. I^ungrtg, hungry, auffteigeti (ftieg, geftiegen), to in (ace), into. rise, mount. § 59] LESSON XIX 63 lomtnen, tarn, gefommen, to ber ©tatt, -(e)«, "t, stable. come. ber ®tern, -(e)^, -e, star, te^t, last. fu^, sweet. hudjttn, to shine. ber Stau^ -(e)^r dew. mube, tired, fatigued. ber Jei^, -(e)^, -e, pond-r^ ber 9lebet, -^, — , fog, mist. ber 3SogeI, -^, % bird. \ ber €)fi)\t, -n, -n, ox. ber SBagen, -^, — , wagon, car- rauc^en, to smoke. riage. bje^9?u^e, rest, repose. bie SBoIfe, -n, cloud, ru^en, to rest. ber ^^^^9^ -(^)^r -^^ branch, ber ©^ornftem, -{0^^ -^r bough. chimney. Idiom : ^^ hin fatt, I have had enough to eat. Review Lessons XIII, XV, XVII, XVIII. A. I. @^ n)irb 3lbenb. 2. S5ie SBoIfen unb ber ^imtnel tDerben rot. 3. ®te §t^e ^at aufge{)ort. 4- 3Som SKoffer be^ STei^e^ fteigt ein 9tebet auf. 5. S)a^ ®ra^ ift feurf)t Dom Stau. 6. Qn ber 3lbenbluft fpielen t)ie(e ^^nfeften. 7. T)ie 2S5get auf ben ^^^^^9^^ b^^ S3dutne fingen i^r le^te^, fiige^ Sieb. 8. S)ie 2lrbeiter fommen torn gelbe nadj §aufe. 9. Dd^fett unb Sit^e, ^ferbe unb ®(^afe ge^en in ben (Stall. 10. 2l((e finb ntiibe unb n)Unf^en au^juru^en. n. 3tber SJJenf^en unb Jttere finb auc^ ^ungrig unb iDarten auf t^r Slbenbbrot. 12. Salb merben fie aber alle fatt fein, benn ber ©c^ornftein raud^t unb bie SBagen bringen gutter. 13. S)ann Ibnnen fie gur 9tu^e ge^en unb einf^tafen. 14. ©ie ©terne tDerben batb anfangen ju leu^ten. B. I. Decline the following nouns throughout, prefixing a possessive pronoun and an appropriate adjective : ^U^, 53auni, 4Bett, §au^, 3SogeI, SBagen, ®(^af, (Stall. 2. DecHne with definite article or biefer and an adjective : 3JJenf(^, 8uft, ®ra^, Solfe, ^intmel, 3lbenb, 3lrbeiter, ^^f^^t. 3. Decline with an adjective only : 5?ebef, Seti^, (Btcxn, 8ieb, ^ferb, Od^fe^ ©ta.K, 2^ier, (Si^ornftein. 64 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 60 C, Oral on A. Z>. I. It (e^) is a beautiful evening. 2. Red clouds are in (an) the sky. 3. It is no longer so hot. 4. A white fog is rising from the water of a large pond. 5. The little birds are singing sweet songs in the green trees. 6. The tired work- men are returning from their work in the fields. 7. They are hungry ; but a bright fire is burning, and a good supper will be waiting for them. 8. Then they can go to (the) rest. 9. Soon the bright stars will begin to shine. E. gefeftitd: Kletrtstnarte. SJJJarte auf ber SBte[e, ^^^I^^^^^^S^^^^f^f^^^^^^i^ 3luf ber SBiefe aJJarie, Unb ben ©toden [o blau 2l((e ©rdfer unb tinmen Unb ben golb'nen $Rannn!eIn, bjt^ ®tnb grd^er al^ fie. @t, ma^ tc^ ba fd^anM / , . '' Wxt tt)trb f^on ganj bgag^ ©a^ ift fetne ©ternblnm'— SBetl i(^ nirgenb fie fe^', eiti ttjpflein ift ba«. ^i) ^ab' fie tjerloren, ^^ \)^V fie gefunben, SSerloren im ^(ee, ,^ ,^ , ©efnnben im ®ra^. --^-l>^\xy ^ _ 3o^anttc« Trojan. LESSON XX 60. Compound Tenses of fettt* Perf, Indie, Pluperf, Indie, I have been, etc* I had been, etc. t^ 6in geiDefen \i) ttiar getpefen "tVi bift ,, bu marft „ er ift ^ er tDar „ n)ir finb ^ xm tcaren ,, Voft feib ^ • if)r mart n fie finb ^ fie mar en n §62] LESSON XX 65 Fut Ferf, Indie, I shall have been, etc. i^ tDerbe getDefen fern bu wirft „ ,r er tt)irb „ ,, n)ir tDerben „ ,r i^r iDerbet „ „ fie tt)erben ,, ,, /Jf;/. /i^/;^. gelDefen (ju) fein, to have been. 61. Compound Tenses of fommctt. Ferf. Indie. Fluperf. Indie. I have ( come, etc. I had come, etc. t^ fitn gelotnmett x6) toar gefommeu bu bift tt bu tt)arft ft er tft ft er voax tt ttJtr finb ft voxx iDareu It i^r feib ft i^r tt)art n fie finb ft fie h^aren If Fut Ferf Indie. I shall have come, etc. i^ merbe ge!i ^mtneu fciti bu tDirft tf ft er tDtrb tf ft n)ir tDerbeu ft ft i^r tDerbet ft ft fie tDerbeu ft ft Ferf. Infin. gefoTUmetl (ju) feitt, to have come. 62. Verbs with f citt* The following classes of verbs are con- jugated with feiu as an auxiliary of tense : I. The two verbs of rest : fein, be. bleiben, remain. 66 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§63 2. Verbs of motion, such as : Begegnen, meet. fallen, fall. fommen, come, etlen, hasten. folgett, follow. laufen, run. fasten, drive, etc. ge^en, go. Note. — Some of these also admit l|atien when action rather than des- tination is expressed : S)er ^utf (^er f^at gu fd)neU gefa^rcn, * The coach- man has been driving too quickly.' 3. Those expressing a change of condition, such as : fterben, die. tr)acf)[en, grow. tDcrben, become. 4. The following impersonal verbs : geltngett, succeed. gefi^e^en, happen. gliicf en, succeed. Note. — Verbs conjugated with fcitt are indicated in the vocabularies and dictionary by (f.). 63. Present and Imperfect Indicative of tDoKett. Present Indicative. Imperfect Indicative, I will, etc. I would, etc. \i) n)ttl tDtr tDotlen i(^ tt)oHte xm moHten bu tDiflft tt)r tt)oHt bu tDoHteft i^r moHtet er tDitt fie tDotten er tDoHte fie tt)ot(ten 64. Use of ttioMetu ^^ tDiH '^ente abreifen. I will (mean to) go to-day. (5r tDttt nt(^t fommen. He doesn't intend to come. 2Bir n)oHten ba^in ge^en. We wanted to go there. Observe: i. This verb renders the English ' will,' * would,' when the latter expresses more than mere futurity (an exertion of the will of the subject). 2. It often equals ' want to,' * intend to,' ' mean to,' etc. 65. Infinitive of Purpose. 3^ ge^e au^, um ein Su(^ ju I am going out (in order) to fanfen. buy a book. §65] LESSON XX 67 Observe : Purpose is often expressed by an infinitive with jtt, governed by nm* EXERCISE XX abfa^ren (f-, fu^r, gefa^rett), ^erau^fotntnen ([♦, ^Civx, ge* to depart, set off, set out. fommett), to come out. anfe^en (fa!^, gefe^en), to look l^tnau^fa^ren (fO, to drive out. at. italienifc^, Italian (adj.). ba^ 3luge, -«, -n, eye. • laufen ([♦)/ li^fr gelaufen, to auger^alb (gen.), outside of. run. au^ge{)en (f., ging, gegangen), me^rmat^, several times. to go out. mteten, to hire, engage, begegnen (f,, da^.), to meet. bie 9J?tnute, -n, minute, ba^ ^ilb, -e^, -er, picture. mitbringen (brac^te, gebrac^t), bie 48itbergalerie', -n, picture- to bring along (with). gallery. nac^tjer, afterwards, bteiben (f.), btteb, gebtieben, ber ^axt, -^, -e or -^, park. to remain, stay. ber @aal, -(^)^/ ®ate, hall, ba'^iri, thither, to that place, ber ©C^Itttfd^U^, -(0^/ -^/ there. skate. bie ^Drof^fe, -n, cab. ©^Iittf(^u^ laufen ([.), to ba^ (Si^, -e^, ice. skate, fafleti (f.), fiel, gefatten, to bie SSiertelftunbe, -n, quarter fall. of an hour. geltngen (f ., impers., dat.), merben (f .), luarb or iDurbe, ge* gelang, gelungen, to sue- tDorben, to become, be. ceed. tDe^l^alb? why? gU (adv.), too. A. Continue the following : i. ^(^ bttt neultd) fratt! getDefett. 2. ^i) tuar miibe gettjorben. 3. ^6) bin au^gegangen, urn einen ^efuc^ jn ntac^en. 4- ^^ tDerbe ntorgen abgefa^ren fein. 5. ^i) bin (tbar) fc^nell gelaufen. 6. 3=(f) bin (mar) tneiner @d)n)efter begegnet. 7. ^i) bin (xoox) auf bent gife gefaflen. 8. (S^ ift (mar) nttr gelungen, ba^ -33uc^ 3U finben, e^ ift (tt)ar) btr, :c. 9. ^(^ bin (mar) Diet ju fpiit gebtieben. 68 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 65 B, I. 3f(^ bin geftern mit meinem alteti greunbe, fart 85ff(er, in ber ®tabt gett)e[en, nm ben !Jag bort p Derbringen* 2. 2Bir finb juerft mit ber ©tra^enba^n jur gro^en -93itber* galerie gefat)ren, 3. 3}Jein greunb tDar f(^on me^rmal^ bort gemefen, 4. 9Bir finb in ben italienifi^en ©aal gegangen. 5. 3^n biefem @aa(e finb tt)ir eine ©tnnbe geblieben nnb ^aben bie ©ilber angefe^en, 6. ®ann finb trir n)ieber ^er^ au^gefommen, benn nnfere Slngen tDaren miibe genjorben. 7. 9}?ein grennb n)o((te ben gro^en ^arf an^erf)alb ber ©tabt befu^en, 8. 2Bir ^aben eine S)rofc^fe gemietet, nm ^inan^- jnfa^ren* 9. .^n jtDanjig SKinnten finb mir bort angefommen* 10. S)ann finb tt)ir bnrdf) ben f(^onen ^ar! gegangen* n. 9^ad^ einer 3SierteIftnnbe finb tt)ir gnm fleinen See gefommen* 12. e^ n)ar fe^r !alt gen)efen nnb ba^ gi^ tDar ^^rcid^tig* 13. SBir fatten nnfere ©c^Iittfi^n^e mitgebra^t nnb finb eine ©tnnbe ©(^littfc^n^ gelanfen* 14. 9lnf bem ©ife finb t^ir einem @c^nT!ameraben begegnet, 15. 5ytad)^er finb \o\x jnr @tabt snriidgefe^rt, benn trir t^aren mitbe nnb ^nngrig ge- tDorben, 16. 2Bir tt)ot(en nd(^fte SBoc^e mieber jnr ®tabt fa^ren* C, Oral: i. Wo sind Sie gestern gewesen? 2. Wer war mit Ihnen? 3. Wie sind Sie dahingekommen ? 4. Weshalb sind Sie dahingefahren ? 5. Wie lange sind Sie in der Bilder- galerie geblieben? 6. Weshalb sind Sie nicht langer geblieben ? 7. Weshalb sind Sie zum Park hinausgefahren ? 8. Was haben Sie nachher getan ? D, (Render the past tense in this exercise by the German perfect.) i. Where were you yesterday, Albert? 2. I was in the city. 3. I was there too, but I did not meet you. 4. I was sorry not to have met you. 5. Did you go to the park first? 6. No, I went with my sister to the picture-gallery to see the German pictures, 7. How long did you stay there? 8. We staid there two hours. 9. Are you fond of the German § 67] LESSON XXI 69 painters? 10. Many of their pictures are splendid; I ad- mire them very [much]. 11. Had you been in the picture- gallery before (f(J)on)? 12. Oh yes, I had been there several times. 13. Did you go into the hall of the Italian pamters? f4. No, we had no time ; we wished to visit the park. 15. Did you drive there (ba()tn)? 16. Yes, we drove in a cab. 17. Afterwards we walked through the park. 18. We also skated. 19. We then returned home to eat and rest. E. 8efeftii(f: @^ blii^t ein [d)one6 ©tUmc^ett @^ it)et^ ntcf)t t)iel gu reben^ auf unfrer gritnett Iji^VAJiAi^Unb atle^ ma^ e^ [priest, (Settt 3lug' tft tt)ie ber §immel ^\\ immer nur ba^fetbe, ®o ^eiter utib fo blau. 3 ft nur : ,r2Sergt^ mein nic^t." — §offmann t)on galler^Ieben. LESSON XXI 66. Adjective Stems in -e, -el, -Ctt, -cr* i. Adjective stems in -e drop e before the endings : miibe, ' tired ' ; ber (bie, ba^) tniib-e; bie miib-en, etc 2. Adjectives in -cl drop c of the inflectional ending before a final -it, and drop c of the stem before other terminations ; so usually also adjectives in -ct preceded by a vowel : ebel, ' noble,' ebein, eble, ebler, eble^ ; teuer, ' dear,' teuern, teure, etc. 3. Adjectives in -cr preceded by a cons(.'nant usually drop c of the inflectional ending before -m or -Jt only : l^eifer, * hoarse,' ^eifertu, ^eifem. 4. Adjectives in -en may drop e of the stem before any ter- mination : golben, 'golden,' go(b(e)nen, goIb(e)ne, goIb(e)tte^/ etc. Note. — The above changes are euphonic, and serve to obviate the repetition of the weakened C sound in successive syllables (see p. xiv) . 67. Special Cases, i. The adjective ^0(^, 'high,' drops c when inflected : 3^er l)oI)e Saum. The high tree. 70 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§68 2. After etn)a^, 'something,' nic^t^, 'nothing/ t)iel, 'much/ tt)entg, '' little/ the adjective follows the strong declension, and is written with a capital : attva^ (nxd)t^) ®ntC§. Something (nothing) good. Tilt tDenig ®ntem. With little that is good. 3. After the plurals alle, ' all/ eintge, ttlid^t^ ' some/ ntani^e, ' many/ mel^rere^ ' several/ folc^e, ' such/ titele, ' many/ irentge^ ' few/ the adjective may have either weak or strong endings : SlHe gute(n) 3}Jenf(^en. All good men. 4. Adjectives in -er from names of cities are indeclinable, and are written with a capital : S5te i^onboncr 3^itungen- The London newspapers. ^artfer 2Koben. Paris fashions. 68. Adjectives as Nouns. The stranger (m.). The stranger (/.). The strangers. N, ber grentbe G. be^ gremben D. bent grentben A, ben gremben bie ^rentbe ber grentben ber gremben bie grembe bte gremben ber gremben ben gremben bte gremben A stranger {m^. A stranger (/.). Strangers. N. etn grentber G. etne^ grentben D. etnent gremben A. einen i^remben etne ^^rembe etner grentben etner ^remben etne grentbe i^retnbe grentber gremben gretnbe Observe : Adjectives and participles used as nouns vary their declension according to the rules for adjective declension (Lesson XVIII), but are written with capital letters. Note. — Many adjectives and participles are thus used in German, the English equivalents of which are nouns only : fremb, * strange,' ber i^pXt) grembe, 2C., *the strangef '; reifenb, * travelling,' ber 9^eifetibe, IZ., 'the traveller '; t)ertt)atlbt, * related,' ber ^enuaubte, :C., * the relative.' §68] LESSON XXI 71 EXERCISE XXI abreifen (f.)r to set out, start, f(i)Iafen, f^Iief, gefdjlafen, to depart, go away, ber Seamte^ official, ber Sebiente, servant, blinb, blind, bie !l)atne, -n, lady, beutfc^ (^#), German, ebel, noble, e^rtid^, honest, erft {adj}), first, granfreic^, n., -%, France, fremb, strange, foreign, greube tnac^en, to give pleasure, ber ®efanbte; ambassador. glUdlic^, happy, golben, golden, gold (^^*.). I^eifer, hoarse, ^ari'^, «., Paris, retd^, rich. ber 9teifenbe, traveler. sleep. f(^(e{^t, bad, poor. ba^ Spita'I, -(e)^, ^er, hos- pital. ber Staat, -e^, -en, state. ftattfinben (fanb, gefunben), to take place. [terben (f.), [tarb, geftorben, to die. teuer, dear, costly. Ubera'II, everywhere. u'ngIiidU(^, unhappy, unfortu- nate. ber 2SertDanbte, relative. ber SBein, -(e)^, -e, wine. bie SBeltau^fteltuttg, -en, in- ternational exhibition. SBien, n,, -^, Vienna. iDiltfo'mmen, welcome. bie SBurft, "e, sausage. A, I. 33iele ©entf^e mo^nen in unferer 8tabt. 2. Unfer 8e^rer ift ein ©eutfrfjer ; feine grau tft eine ©eutfc^e. 3. J)te ©entfcf)en ternen gem (gnglifc^. 4. SJfeine 2Ser* manb ten tDollen auf bem 8anbe tDoI)nen. 5. (gin S^eifenber mu^ oft in f(^lec^ten Setten [d)(afen. 6. S5ie[er arme ^linbe ^at nteiner Sliutter jirei ^Ubfc^e S'orbe gemadjt, benn fie ^at i^m t)ie{ ®nte^ getan. 7. Gr tat e^, nm i^r eine grenbe ju mac^en. 8. ©te erfte gonboner SBeltan^ftellung fanb im 3a^re 1851 ftatt. 9. ^arifer §anbf(^nf)e nnb SSiener SBitrfte finb UberaH berit^mt. 10. Dtefe Steifenben bett)un* berten bie fc^one ?anbf(^aft. n. J^rau 2)?ofer ift eine aSer^ 72 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§68 iDanbte unfere^ alien Slr^te^. 12. gin grember tft ntc^t immer iDiMotnmen* 13. I)er alte Sebiente. meine^ guten Dnfef^ tft geftorben, 14. ©er beut[(J)e Oefattbte tft abgeretft, um SSeriDanbte ju befut^ett, 15. ®te ©efattbtett t)ott grattf== ret(i) unb (gttglattb fittb angefommett, 16. SStamtt fittb bte ©tetter be^ ®taate^« 17. (Sitt Seatttter tttu^ e^rlid) feitt, 18. ©ie 9fei(^ett fittb nid^t itttttter gliidUd^, 19. Sluc^ 2{rttte fottttett glitcflirf) feitt. 20. ®er Slrjt n)i(I bettt uttglitdlic^ett ^rattfett gutett, attett SBeitt gebett. 21. 3=tt biefettt (Spitat fittb t)iele Stattfe. ^. Oral on the above. C. Supply the proper termination of the following stems : I. gttt ®eutf(^- 2. 9}?eittetit 23erlt)attbt- 3. ^^^^ ^t^i- fettb- 4. -3I)r ^ebiettt- . 5. ©e^ artttett Slittb-. 6. 2Be^ ttig @(^dtt-. 7. ®er berit^ttttett 9?eifettb-. 8. (gitt reii^er SSermattbt-. 9. ©ie artttett gretttb- 10. !j)ett gutett 33e^ biettt- II. !l)e^ beutf^ett ©efattbt-* 12. aSiele uttgtitcJ^ Iid)e Srattl- £>, Inflect, and give the proper orthographical form of the adjectives: i. gttt (golbett) 9iittg. 2. SKeiti (teuer) ©o^ti. 3. 3)te (ebel) ©attte. 4- S)ettt (ebet) ©efattbtett* 5. ©eti (^eifer) (Sc^itlertt. ^. I. I have many relatives in this village. 2. Where do your relatives intend to live? 3. The son of this German is a celebrated physician. 4. The blind are not always unhappy. 5. This noble German has done much good. 6. The London cabs drive very fast. 7. My aunt hkes Paris gloves very much. 8. Our old physician is a relative of (t»Ott) Mrs. Moser. 9. This German [woman] is a friend of my aunt. 10. Strangers and poor people were always \velcome at our house. 11. The German ambassador was a very noble man. 12. Ambassadors are the servants of the state. 13. The young may (!ottttett) die; the old must die; the patient has died. 14. I have sold § 69] LESSON XXII 73 my house to a rich man. 15. We have bought this dear wine for the patients in the hospital. 16. Good old wine costs a great deal. 17. Do you like (to eat) Vienna sausages? 18. This honest official was our neighbor. 19. Officials are not always honest. 20. Honest officials are not always rich. F, Lesestiick : Die Menschen wohnen in Hausern. Viele Hauser zusammen bilden eine Stadt oder ein Dorf. Eine Stadt hat lange und breite StraBen. Die Stadt ist groB. Die Hauser sind sehr schon gebaut. Die StraBen der Stadt sind gepfla- stert. Zu beiden Seiten stehen Laternen. Abends ziindet man sie an. In den Hausern sind oft Laden ; diese haben grolJe, schone Schaufenster. In den StraBen und auf den Platzen sieht man stets viele Menschen. LESSON XXII 69. Word Order of Objects, etc. 1. ^i) f(^i(fte i^m geftern ein I sent him a book yesterday. 2. ^i) fdjicfe S^ttCtt btefe^, I send you this. 3. gr t)at e^ mir gef c^id t. He sent it to me. 4- -Set) fc^idte mcittcm ©O^nc I sent my son a book, ein Suc^. 5. 3d) [(i)t(fte geftern ein I sent a book to him (to my :©u(^ an t^n (an meinen son) yesterday: '" ' ©o^n). 6. 3^^ ^be t^m geftern ein I sent him a good book yester- gnte^ :93uc^ gefc^icft. day. Observe: i. Pronoun objects without prepositions precede all other objects, adverbs, etc. 2. Personal pronouns precede other pronouns. 3. Of several personal pronouns, the accusative precedes. 4. Of noun objects without prepositions, the person precedes the thing. Ki/v(J 74 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 70 5. Prepositional objects follow other objects and adverbs. 6. Adverbs of time usually precede everything, except pro- nouns not governed by a preposition. 70. Word Order in Dependent Sentences. Qd) arbeite nidji, iDeit ic^ miibe I am not working, because I 6in> am tired. Qd) ^offe, ba^ er un^ Bcfud^cn I hope that he will visit us. tDirb. Qii) glaube, ba^ er ^tit gcliafit I think that he will have had fjahtn tDtrb. Jij"^- ©a id) miibe btn^ arbette id) As iam tired I am not work- nidjt ing. (Sr [agt, ba§ er fetne ^dt ge* He says he has had no time. t)abt (fiat). Observe : i. The verb comes last in a dependent sentence. 2. In compound tenses, the participle and infinitive immedi- ately precede the verb, i.e. the auxiliary. 3. If both participle and infinitive occur, the participle pre- cedes the infinitive. 4. The place of the subject in a dependent sentence is usually the same as in English. 5. The dependent is always separated from the principal sentence by a comma. 6. When a dependent sentence precedes the principal sen- tence, the subject of the latter is thrown after the verb. ^ 7. The tense auxiliary ijahtu or [eitt is frequently omitted in ' a ba^ clause. 71. Use of tactttt, aUf 'mann. SBetitt ic^ metne ^^idjt tue When I do (have done) my (getan ^abe)^ bin id) gliid* duty, I am happy. iid). -"^ ^d) befu(^te immer metne I always visited my friends greunbe, tocnn id) in ber when(ever) I was in town. ®tabt tDar. § 71] LESSON XXII 75 3cf) ging geftern au^, aW e^ I went out yesterday when it je^tt gefc^Iagett ^atte, had struck ten. ^ ^y id) iung tt)ar, mar ic^ [tar!. When I was young I was strong. SBann tt)ar fetn SSatcr ^ier? When was his father here? Observe : i. 'When ' = ttJcntt always with present or perfect. 2. ' When ' = toenn with imperfect and pluperfect of a habit- ual or repeated occurrence, state, or condition (= * whenever '). 3. * When ' = a(^ with imperfect and pluperfect only, of a sin- gle, definite occurrence, or of a state or condition once occurring. 4. ' When ?' interrogative = mann? Note. — Remember that tOCtin also = * if.' EXERCISE XXII befonber^, especially, particu- ba^ (2cf)aufpiet, -(e)^, -e, play. larly. ber ©c^aufpieter^ -^, — , actor. ia (^on/\), as, when, since. bic ©d^aufpielerin, -nen, ac- ba^, that (con/.). tress. enttiiufc^t, disappointed. ba^ ©piet, -(e)^, -e, play, act- bie (5nttduf(f)ung, -en, disap- ing. pointment. fpre(^en, fprat^, gefprod^en, to erfaltet fein, to have a cold. speak. ettt)a^, something, somewhat, ba^ @tii(f, -(e)^, -e, piece, geben, to act, present (a play). play, gefallen, Qt^id^ gefallen, to ba^ ST^eater, -^, — , theater. please, suit. itbeme'^tnen (itberna^m, Uber* gtauben, to believe, think. nommen), to undertake, ^errtic^, magnificent, splendid. tDarUTU? why? wherefore? I)Offen, to hope. iDCtt, because, liegen, lag, gelegen, to lie, be. luxM, back (a^v.), bic 9?oIIe, -n, part. Idioms: ^m X^catcr, at the theater; ittig XlfCattV gC^Ctt, to go to the theater. A. I. SBantt finb Sie tmbeutfd)en Sweater gemefen? 2. SBir fittb geftern 2lbenb bort gemefen. 3. aSarum finb Sie bafjin 76 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 71 gegangen? 4- 2BeU matKS^afefpeare^ §am(et gab. 5. Sir iDoKten befonbev^ gem bie beru{)tnte (Scf)au[pie(erin graulein W. in ber 9ioHe ber 0|)I)e(ia fet)en. 6. ©ie {)at 3f)nen if)r (Spief gefaHen? 7. aSir iDaren ettDa^ enttciufc^t, ba unfere ^Id^e fo iDeit juriid lagen, ba^ iDir ni^t gut t)oren fonnten. 8. 2lber id) fann 3^f)nen fagen, ba^ ba^ ©tad uM fonft fel)r gut gefaHen ijat 9. §at ber berit^ntte ®(J)aufpie(er @, ben §am* let gefpielt? 10. g^ein, §err S. mu^te biefe dtoik iiber^ ne^nten, ba §err ®. nid)t [pielen tonnte. n. 3)a^ tDar auc^ eine gro^e 6nttau[c^ung, aber i(^ I)offe, ba^ er morgen 3Ibenb fpielen iDirb, 12. Unb tDe^^atb !onnte er ni^t fpielen? i> S^ glaube, ba^ er erfaltet wax unb ni(^t fpre(i)en fonnte. 14. ginben ®ie nid)t, ba^ biefe^ ©t^aufpiel ^errHrf) ift? 15. ^atDoI)!! Sefonber^ iDenn ein guter ®(^aufpieler ben gantlet [pielt. 16. Sir iDoIIen ndd)fte SBoc^e tDieber in^ Sf)eater ge^en, urn §errn ®. gu fel)en. B. Oral exercise on the above. C. Complete the following sentences : i. Qd) tauu ^eute ni(^t fommen, meil ... 2. Sir tDerben ntUbe, inenn . . . 3. Sir tonnten I)eute !eine Sefu^e maiden, benn . . . 4. 9J?ein ^^^reunb glaubt, bap . . . 5- Qdj tDerbe Sie morgen befudien, menu ... 6. 3^1^ I)offe, ba^ ... 7. 55er Scf)iUer fontmt nid)t, ba . . . 8. ©r fonnte bie Slufgabe nid)t madjen, meil ... 9. Qd) bin il)nt begegnet, al^ . . . 10. ^c^ mid morgen jur etabt fa{)ren, um . . . £). 1. I like to go to the theater when I have time. 2. I wanted to go to the theater yesterday evening, for Miss M. was playing the part of (the) Ophelia. 3. But I was obhged to stay at home, because I had headache. 4. I was very [much] dis- appointed, as Miss M. is a celebrated actress. 5. People say that she plays this part especially well. 6. Were you there yes- terday evening? 7. Yes, but my seat was so far back that I couldn't hear well. 8. I was disappointed, as the celebrated §73] LESSON XXIII 77 actor S. didn't play. 9. They (man) say that he had a cold and couldn't speak. 10. I do not believe that he had a cold. II. When he was here last year he had a cold and couldn't play. 12. Perhaps he doesn't like to play in a small town. 13. If he is well to-morrow evening, I hope that he will play (the) Hamlet. 14. When will Miss M. play again in this town? E. Lesestiick : Ein Schauspieler spielte die Rolle des Geistes im Hamlet sehr schlecht und wurde ausgezischt. Nachdem er (>Y ' dies eine Zeitlang ertragen hatte, versetzte er die Zuhorer dadurch wieder in gute Laune, daB er sagte : "Meine Damen und Herren ! Es tut mir sehr leid, dafi ich bei Ihnen keinen Erfolg habe ; wenn Sie nicht zufrieden sind, so mufi ich den Geist aufgeben." 72. LESSON XXIII The Relative Pronoun bcr* Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern, Neut. All Genders, N. ber bte ba^ bte, who, which, that. G, beffctt ber en beffcn ber cn, whose, of which. D, bent ber bem ben en, (to, for) whom, which. A, ben bte ba^ bte, whom, which, that. Observe : These forms are the same as those of the defini article, except the added -en of the genitive singular and plural and the dative plural. 73. The Relative Pronoun >csst\^tx. Singular. Plural. Fern. n)eld)e Neut, n)el(i)e^ All Genders. tt)el(f)e, who, which, that. Masc, N, n)e(c^er D. tDelt^em iDelc^er n)eld)etn h)elc^en, (to, for) whom, etc A. tDe((^en mettle xot\6)t^ meli^e, whom, etc. 78 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 74 Observe : SBelc^er follows the bie[er model, but lacks the genitive, which is replaced by the genitive forms of bct (beffen, K.). 74. Relative Clauses. S)a^ tft ber Slrjt, ber (Wtiijtv) That is the doctor who was ^ter tnar. here. §ier tft ber StOcE, hen Here is the stick which you (tt)el(^en) Ste ge^abt ^aben. have had. §ier fittb <33itc{}er, bic (tDe((i)e) Here are books that are useful. nut^ti^ finb. ^ennen ®te bie J)ame, ber Do you know the lady we (tt)eld)er) tviv begegticten? met? S)a^ §au^ ttJOrin (= in bem) The house in which I live. i(^ iDo^ne. Observe : i. The relative agrees with its antecedent in gen- der and number ; the case depends on its use in its own clause. 2. Since all relative clauses are dependent, the verb comes last (§ 70). ■ 3. !j)er and tpeli^er refer to both persons and things; ber is more common than H)etc()er, which is chiefly used to avoid repetitions of ber. 4. 5)er and tvtldjtx, referring to inanimate objects, are some- times replaced by tt)0 (tDor before a vowel) preceding a prepo- sition. 5. The relative is never omitted in German. Note. — The gen. bcffCtt, 2C. always precedes the word on which it depends: ©in ^autn, bcffctt iBIdtter griin finb, *A tree, the leaves of which are green.' EXERCISE XXIII 2lbf(f)teb ne^tnen, na^m, ge^ etnpfangett, etnpfittg, emp* notnmen, to take leave. fcittgetl, to receive. bringen, brad)te, gebrac^t, to bie (grfrifrfjung, -en, refresh- bring, ment. etntaben (lub, gelaben), to ba^ (Srlebni^, -e^, -e, experi- invite. ence. § 74] LESSON XXIII 79 ber ©aft, -e^, "e, guest. bie 9Kitternac^t, "e, midnight, ba^ ®ebi(^t, -(e)^, -e, poem. f(^Iagen, fct)(ug, gefc^tagen, to bie ©ema^Utt, -nen, wife. strike, bie ®efefl[d)aft, -en, company, fingen, fang, gefnngen, to party. sing, tntereffa'nt, interesting. tjortragen (trng, getragen), to lennen, fannte, gefannt, to recite. know, be acquainted with. gnbringen, to spend, pass (time), luftig, gay, merry. pgegen, present.^ A, I. 3(^ bin geftern 9lbenb in einer ©efeflfi^aft getnefen, 3n n)e(i^er man mic^ eingelaben \)Oiiit. 2. S^er §err be^ §anfe^, in bem ic^ xoax, ift §err ©einge, beffen ®eniaf)Un etne SSermanbte t)on mtr (of mine) tft. 3. 2l(^ h)tr anfamen, empfingen nn^ bie 35anten be^ §anfe^. 4- Sine jnnge ©ante, , bie id) fe^r gnt fenne, n)ar (xvi6) gngegen. 5. Sie fpiette anf einem ^(adter, treli^e^ §err §einge feiner gran nenlid) ge=j f(^enft {)at. 6. gin Srnber ber 5)ame, tDelc^e gefpiett I}atte, fang etn pbfi^e^ 8ieb. 7- S)ann fpielten nnb fangen ntet)rere §erren nnb 5>amen, bie ic^ nt(f)t fenne. 8. (gin St^anfpieler, ben id) fd}on tm Jljeater gefel)en f)atte, trng ein fc^one^ ®e^ bidjt t)on ®oetf)e Dor. 9. SSiele ®afte n)aren pgegen, n)eld}e in ©entfi^tanb gemefen n)aren. 10. (giner t)on i^nen erjcifilte mtr feine griebniffe, bie fe^r intereffant njaren. n. 2l(^ e^ elf gefd}(agen t)atte, brai^ten bie Sebienten (grfrifd}ungen. 12. S)ie inngen §erren nnb ®amen, bie fefjr Inftig geiDorben maren, fingen an gn tanjen. 13. T)te ®dfte, melc^e einen fel)r angenet)men 3lbenb jngebrac^t fatten, nat)men erft jmei ©tnnben nac^ aKitternad)t 3lbf^ieb. B. Complete orally, supplying suitable relative pronouns : I. DieGaste, — zugegen waren. 2. DieGaste, — ereingeladen hatte. 3. Der Freund, — ich ein Geschenk schicke. 4. Das Buch, — auf dem Tische hegt. 5. Der Schauspieler von — ich spreche. 6. Die Dame, — wir begegnet sind. 7. Die 8o GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 74 Damen, — wir Blumen schickten. 8. Der Herr, — Haus ich gekauft habe. 9. Das Haus, in — er wohnt. 10. Die Nach- barn, mit — Kindern wir spielen. 11. Das Schauspiel, von — ich Ihnen erzahlte. 12. Der Schtiler, — der Lehrer lobt. 13. Der Lehrer, — den Schuler lobt. 14. Die Lehrerin, — Mutter gestorben ist. C. I. Mr. and Mrs. Heinze, whom I know very well, in- vited me to a party. 2. The party of (t)on) which I am speak- ing took place yesterday evening. 3. The house in which these good friends live is large and handsome. 4. Many ladies and gentlemen, whom I had never (yet) seen, were also pres- ent. 5. A young lady played on the piano and sang a song which pleased the guests very much (fe^r gut). 6. The piano on which she played was a new one, which Mr. Heinze pre- sented to his wife lately. 7. When she had sung, a celebrated actor recited a very beautiful poem. 8. The poem he recited was by (t)on) Goethe. 9. A friend of mine, beside whom I was sitting, and who had been in Germany, related his experiences to me. 10. When the servants had brought refreshments, many of (t)Ott) the older guests wanted to go home. 11. The young gentlemen and ladies, who remained in order to dance, took leave two hours after midnight. D, Lesestuck : Der Kronprinz Olaf von Norwegen ist ein rei- zender kleiner Bengel, ist aber zuweilen unartig. Seine Mutter, die Konigin, zlichtigt ihn immer selbst, wenn es notig ist. Eines Tages war der Klein e sich bewuBt, Strafe verdient zu haben. Als die konigliche Mutter ihn suchte, war er nirgends zu finden. Auch seine GroBmutter, die Konigin Alexandra von England, half mitsuchen. Als sie nun in ihr Schlafzim- mer trat, rief eine helle Kinderstimme unter dem Bette : " GroBmutter, suchen sie dich auch? Komm her zu mir; ich will dich beschtitzen.*' § 76] LESSON XXIV 8 1 LESSON XXIV 75. The Passive with tr)crben> Present Indicative, Imperfect Indicative, I am (being) praised, etc. I was (being) praised, etc. tc^ lt)erbe gelobt ic^ Ujarb or tDurbe gelobt bu iDirft bu iDcirbft or tDurbeft er tDtrb „ er marb or tDurbe „ tt)ir tDerben „ tDir inurben r, i^r tDcrbet „ t^r lt)urbet „ fie njerbett „ fie tDurbett ,, - Pres, Infin, gelobt (ju) iDerbetl, to be praised. Examples. @r trirb oft tJOn un^ gelobt. He is often praised by us. Der ®oben tuirb burd^ ben The soil is made fertile by the" ategen fru(f)tbar gemai^t. rain. Observe: i. The past participle of a transitive verb added to the verb tuerbett forms the passive voice of that verb, when- ever agency is implied or specified. 2. The personal agent of the passive takes the preposition t)Ott = ^ by '(+ dative) ; other agency is expressed by burtl| or mtt. Notes. — i. The past part, of a verb added to fctlt denotes a perma- nent condition resulting from the action of the verb, no agency being im- plied ; a participle so used is often purely adjectival in character (see Lesson XLIX) : S)a6 ge(b tft ge^pgt, *The field is ploughed'; 3cl) bttt befriebigt, *I am satisfied.' 2. ^att with the active voice often replaces the passive when there is no definite personal agent: Wan befteUt ben ^oben im grut)Ung, 'The ground is prepared in spring.' 76. Prepositions with Accusative. The following preposi- tions govern the accusative only : hx^ bttrc^ fiir gcgcit oI)nc mn tuibcr 82 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 77 77. f&x^f till, until (time), as far as (space). 53i^ 2lbenb; bi^ 9{om. Till evening; as far as Rome. Notes. — i. S3i^ is more commonly used as an adverb followed by a prep, of direction: iBi^ g^gen 2lbenb, *till towards evening'; bi^ gur @tabt, *as far as the town.' 2. With numerals U§ =*or' : ^ier bi^ fiinf^ 'four or five.' 78. ^nx^f through, by (means of). gr rettet burt^ ben SBalb. He ddes through the wood. ©urd^ einen Srief getDarnt. Warffed by a letterr-^s*- 79. ^ntf for, on behalf of. 5)er ;33rief ift fur i^n. The letter is for him. ^C^ fprei^e fitr @ie. I speak on your behalf. 80. ©cgctt, towards, against. (Sr rettet gegen bie ^riide. He rides towards the bridge. @egen at^t U^r. Towards eight o'clock. @te((en Ste ben ©tU^^t g^g^tt Place the chair against the bte SSJanb. wall. SBir fdmpfen gegen ben geinb. We fight against the enemy. 81. Olinc, without. SD^nt greunbe; O'^ne ®te. Without friends ; without you. 82. Xtntf round, around, at. 1. Of Place: & gef)t urn bte Stabt ^erunt. He walks round the town. Note. — The adverb l^erUttt is usually added after the object in this sense. 2. Of Time: Urn bte[e 3^tt ; um jnjei U^r. At this time; at 2 o'clock. 83. SSibcr, against, contrary to. 3Btber meinen SBunfd^. . Against my wish. ^ SBiber metn" ©rmarten. Contrary to my expectation?^ § 85] LESSON XXIV 83 84. Contractions. T)ViVd), fur, and uttt are generally con- tracted with the neuter of the unemphasized definite article, as follows : bur^^ (= bur^ ba^) fiir^ (= fur ba^) um^ (= um ba^) 85. ^a for Pronoun. With personal pronouns of the third person referring to inanimate objects, the pronoun is replaced by ba (before vowels bar) prefixed to the preposition (except bi^ and o()ne) and written with it as one word : Dte^ ift mein §Ut ; t^ ^abe This is my hat ; I gave ten itlju 9Kar! bafiir gegeben. marks for it. EXERCISE XXIV anber, other. locfern, to loosen. bie 2lrbeit, -en, work, labor. ber )Slax^, -e^, Indian com. au^ftreuen, to scatter. bie 9}?afd)me, -n, machine. bereiten, to make ready, pre- ttO(^ nid)t, not yet. pare. pflugen, to plough. beftedett, to till, prepare. bie (£aat, -en, seed, sowing. ber Soben, -^, ground, soil. ber ©dentann, -(e)^, ^er, sower. ba'mal^, then, at that time. ber (2onnenf(f)ein, -(e)^, sun- bie (Sgge, -n, harrow. shine. ba^ Qnbt^ -^, -n, end. tier^inbern, to hinder, prevent. fruc^tbar, fruitful, fertile. iDac^fen (f.), truc^^, gemacfifen, ba^ ©etreibe, -^, grain, corn. to grow. ber §afer, -^, oats. ber SBeijen, -^, wheat. ^eutjutage, nowadays, in these gte^en, jog, gejogen, to draw, days, now. juberfeu, to cover (up). I^in unb ^er, to and fro, back- wards and forwards. A. I. 5)a^ gelb iDirb gegen (5nbe 3Wcirg ober im 3lpn( fitr bie @aat bereitet. 2. Um biefe ^dt tt)erben SBeijen, §afer unb anbere^ ©etreibe gefdt. 3. ©pdter pflanjt man ^ar* toffeln, a}?at^, 2c. 4. 3^erft tDtrb ber iSoben ge|)flitgt. 5. 5)er Soben n)irb bann mit etner Ggge getocfert. 6. So iDirb er burd) ben 9iegen unb ben Sonnenfd)etn frud)tbar 84 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 85 gemac^t. 7- OI)ne Stegen unb Sonnenfc^ein fann bie (Saat nidjt it)a(f)fen, 8. 9^ad}^er tDirb ber ®ame ^eutjutage burc^ eine 2)Ja[djme gefcit, tDeli^e t)on "ipferben ober Ct^fen ^in unb {)er gejogen tvxxb. 9. grit^er tat man ba^ o()ne 3Kaf(i)ine» 10. !Damat^ murbe ber Same t)om ®aemann ge[at, ber ^in unb l)er gtng unb ben Samen au^ftreute, n. 92ac^^er tr)urbe ber Same burc^ bie Sgge gugebecft. 12. 3. I. Grain is sown towards [the] end [of] March or in April. 2. The field must first be prepared (use man). 3. The soil is ploughed, and then a harrow is drawn to and fro. 4. It is drawn by horses or oxen. 5. The soil is loos- ened by the harrow. 6. It is made fruitful by the rain and §86] LESSON XXV 85 sun. 7. Without rain and sunshine the wheat cannot grow. 8. In these days the seed is not scattered by the sower. 9. That used to be done (use man) formerly, but now it is sown with a machine. 10. Our field is not yet ploughed, be- cause we were hindered by the bad weather. 1 1 . We wanted to plough it earlier, in order to sow our wheat. 12. We mean to begin to plough it to-morrow, if the weather is fine. 13. We shall plant our potatoes and our Indian corn next week. 14. Our cabbage and our tomatoes are planted already. E. Lesesttick : Es ging ein Saemann aus, zu saen. Und indem er saete, fiel etliches an den Weg ; da kamen die Vogel und frafien es auf. Etliches fiel in das Steinichte, wo es nicht viel Erde hatte, und ging bald auf, darum, dafi es nicht tiefe Erde hatte. Als aber die Sonne aufging, verwelkte es, und weil es nicht Wurzel hatte, ward es diirre. Etliches fiel unter die Dornen und die Dornen wuchsen auf und erstickten es. Ediches fiel auf gutes Land und trug Frucht, ediches hun- dertfaltig, etliches sechzigfaltig, ethches dreiliigfaltig. LESSON XXV 86. The Time of Day. SBie Diet U^r ift e^? What time is it? 6^ ift ein^ (ein U^r). It is one o'clock. Urn 5lt)oIf Uf)r tnittag^ At twelve o'clock noon (at (nacf)t^). night). g^ ift ein SSiertel anf jmei. It is a quarter past one. @^ ift ^(6 JlDei. It is half- past one. G^ ift bret 55tertel auf jtDet. It is a quarter to two. Urn I)alb ein^ (ein U^r). At half-past twelve. Urn 23 3)iinuten nac^ ein^. At 23 minutes past one. @^ ift 21 3Jftnuten t)or JlDet. It is 21 minutes to two. 2l(^t Uf)r morgen^ (Dormit- tag^). Eight o'clock A.M. ©rei Uf)r nac()mtttag^. Three o'clock p.m. <£ec^^ U^r abenb^. Six o'clock p.m. / S6 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 87 Observe : i. The verb feitl in these expressions is singular. 2. U\^v remains uninfiected, and may be omitted. 3. *At' = ttm. 4. @itt remains uninfiected, but tin^ is used when Ul^r is pmitted. 5. The 'quarter past' is expressed by ein 3Siertet auf -f the \number of the hour following. 6. The ' half-past ' is expressed by Ijalli + the hour following. 7. The ' quarter to ' is expressed by brei 33iertel auf + the hour following. 8. The ' minutes past ' is expressed by nadf ; the * minutes to ' by nor. 9. The abbreviation ' A.M. ' = morgett^ or tJOrtntttag^ (abbre- viated 2?m.); * P.M. '= nad^mittag^ (abbreviated 9im.), abenb^, or tiac[)t^, according to the lateness of the hour. Notes. — i. Colloquially auf is often omitted after 33iertel. 2. The time may also, as always in railway time-tables, be expressed thus: ©in U^r fiinfje^n = 1.15; ein U^r breigig = 1.30; ein Ut)r fiinf* unbfiinfjtg = 1.55. 87. Genitive of Time. S)e^ 2^age^ ; be^ Slbenb^. By day ; in the evening. Qi) ging etne^ 2^age^ im I was walking one day in the ^axt park. SJJitttrocf)^ ^aben tDtr na(^' On Wednesdays we have no mittag^ !eme @^ule. school in the afternoon. Observe : i. Point of time is often expressed by an adverbial genitive singular, when denoting indefinite time, or time with reference to a habitual action, but only with Xa^, ' day,' days of the week, and divisions of the day, used with or without article. 2. When the article is omitted, the genitive is not usually written with a capital, except with days of the week. Notes. — i. With determinatives other than the art., the ace. must be used, except in the expression btefct SagC (gen. plur.) = * of late.' 2. ^a6:}tf though fem., is similarly used, with or without the masc. art. : (2)e«) "^adjt^ jd)Iaft man, ' We sleep by night.' § 87] LESSON XXV 87 EXERCISE XXV bebeuten, to signify, mean. ber (Btvii)^ -(0^^ -^, stroke, betnal)e, almost, nearly.^ mark. bamtt, with that, with it, etc. ber Stuttbettjetger, -^, — , bocf), yet, still, however. hour-hand, short hand. frei(icf), certainly, to be sure. bte 2^af(^e, -tt, pocket. ber aKmutenjeiger, -^, — , tragen, trug, getragen, to minute-hand, long hand. bear, carry, wear, ber ^ul^fc^Iag, -(e)^, ^e, pulse- bte ^aijl, -en, number, figure. beat. jci^ten, to count, bie 9tunbe, -n, round, circuit, ber 3^i9^^r -^f — ' hsLud (of ber (Sefunbenjeiger, -^, — , a time-piece). second-hand. bie ^tff^^/ -tt, figure. ftef)en, ftanb, geftanben, to ba^ 3iff^^Matt, -(e)^, ^er, dial, stand. face. A, I. Stragett (gte etne U^r? 2. ^airo^t, xi) ^abe tint in ber (my) 2:a[d)e. 3. 3^iS^^ ®i^ ^i^ ^^^ ^^ff^^^I^^t Qijvtx Uf)r. 4. 2Sa^ fefien ©ie auf bem 3ifferblatt? 5- Q^ [e^e 3a^Ien ober ^'ff^^^/ ^^^ ^i^^ &i^ 5tt)oIf. 6. SBa^ bebeuten biefe 3iff^^^? 7- ®i^ bebeuten bie ®tunben be^ Slage^. 8. 3lber ein XaQ ijat bod) 24 ®tunben, unb f)ter ftel)en nur jtDoIf. 9. gretltd^ ; aber ber fleine 3^tger, ber (gtunbenjeiger, nta(J)t stDeimat bte $Runbe in 24 ©tunben unb 2 x 12 ma(^t 24. 10. aSBa^ bebeuten bte fteinen @trid)e jiDtfc^en \)cn ®tunben? 11. 3)iefe bebeuten bie SKinuten; in jeber Stunbe [tub 60 SJJinuten. 12. 3Be^f)aIb [inb nur 5 (gtric^e git^ifi^en ten ©tunben? i3.'S)er groge 3^iger, ber aJJinutenjeiger, ntad}t bie SJunbe einntal in einer ©tunbe unb 5 x 12 nta^t 60. 14. U^ren ^aben gen)o^nIic^ auc^ einen ©efunbenjeiger. 15. S)ie[er tt)irb t)om Slrjte gebrauc^t, urn bie ^ul^fc^Idge eine^ Sranfen ju ja^Ien. B. Oral: i. Wie viele Stunden hat ein Tag? 2. Wie viele Ziffern hat eine Uhr ? 3. Was fur Zeiger hat sie ? 4. Wie vie! 83 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 87 Uhr ist es, wenn beide Zeiger auf 1 2 stehen (are at twelve) ? 5. Wie viel Uhr ist es, wenn der Minutenzeiger auf 6 und der Stundenzeiger zwischen eins und zwei steht? 6. Wenn der Minutenzeiger auf 9 steht und der Stundenzeiger beinahe auf 4? 7. Um wie viel Uhr gehen Sie gewohnlich zu Bett? 8. Wann sind Sie heute morgen aufgestanden ? 9. Wie viel Uhr ist es, wenn der Minutenzeiger auf 4 steht und der Stundenzeiger zwischen 6 und 7 ? 10. Wenn der Minutenzeiger auf 8 und der Stundenzeiger zwischen 8 und 9 steht? C, I. Can you tell me what time it is? 2. Yes, I have a watch in my pocket. 3. I will show you the dial. 4. I see that it is a quarter to eight, for the long hand is (fte'^t) at nine, and the short hand almost at eight. 5. What time is it when the minute-hand is at 6 and the hour-hand between 9 and 10? 6. It is then half-past nine. 7. How many hands has a watch? 8. Mine has three, one for the hours, one for the minutes, and one for the seconds. 9. Not all watches have a second-hand, but it is used by physicians in order to count the pulse-beats of their patients. 10. At what o'clock do you usually get up in the morning? 11. I usually rise at half-past seven. 12. Yes- terday evening I was working until after midnight. 13. I was too tired this morning to rise at the usual hour. 14. It was 20 minutes past eight when I got up. 15. Goethe, the great Ger- man poet, usually rose at 5 o'clock or at half-past 5 in the sum- mer, when he was (still) young. 16. The train for (nacf)) Berlin will leave at 9.10 a.m. and will arrive at 2.48 p.m. Z>. 8e[eftii(fe: 1. HatfeL 2Bte ^ei^t ba^ 35mg bort an ber Sanb? a^ fi^Iclgt uttb ^at bo(^ feine @aTtb ; 6^ pngt unb ge^t bo(^ fort unb fort ; (g^ gel}t unb fomntt bo(^ nid^t tiom Ort, 2. Um \c(i)^ UijV morgen^ iDerben bie Stfjitfer burrf) bie §< LESSON XXVI 89 ®(o(fe gemedt ; fie \md)tn auf unb muffen bann fofort auf* ftef)en; bann ti^afc^en fie §dnbe nnb @efirf)t unb gie^en bie £teiber an. ^i^ I)alb ad}t Ul)r (ernen fie il)re Stufcjaben ; um brei 25iertel auf ad)t frU!)ftitcfen fie ; nad) bem gritl)ftiicf ^aben fie eine ^Ibe ©tunbe frei. Um neun lU)r (je(}en fie in ha^ (2cf)u(5immer unb bleiben bi^ elf UI)r bort. 23on elf U^r bi^ f)a(b jmotf ift ^aufe. T)ann ^aben fie 3^i^^^f^^^^^ ^'^^^ arbeiten im ©tubierjimmer. Um ein U()r mirb ju SRittag gegeffen^ LESSON XXVI 88. Pres. and Impf. Subj. of fjaticn, fein, tncrben* Present, Imperfect, I have, may have, etc. I had, might have, etc. \d) I)abe iDir t)aben tc^ ptte iDir ptten bu ^abeft tl)r ^bct bu ptteft i{}r b^ittet er ^abe fie ^aben er ^iitte fie fatten I am, may be, etc. tcf) fet n)ir feten bu feieft tf)r feiet er fet fie feien I was, might be, etc. \i) tDare inir iDSren bu tDareft \\)X iDiiret er miirc fie tDiiren I become, may become, etc. ic^ tDerbe xo\x iDerben bu n)erbcft i^r tDerbet er merbe fie tDerben I became, might become, etc ic^ tDiirbe mir tniirben bu miirbeft i^r n)urbet er tDiirbe fie miirben Observe: i. The persistent c of the present endings; also the umlaut of the imperfect. 2. These tenses of ^aben, fein, and n^erben serve to form the compound tenses of other verbs, as below. 90 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§89 89. Subjunctive of marffen, ^ptcd}tn, fatten* Present. I make, may make, I speak, may speak, I fall, may fall, etc. etc. etc. id) madie id) fprec^e t(^ faOe bu mac^cft bu fpre(f)eft bu faKeft er Tnacf)e er fprei^e er fade lt)tr madien tDir fpred)en tDir fallen t^r tnadjct i^r fprec^et tl)r faHet fie mad)tn fie fprec^en Imperfect. fie fallen I made, might make. I spoke, might speak. I fell, might fall, etc. etc. etc. id) madjtt i^ fpra^e id) fiele bu mad)teft bu fprfidieft bu fieleft er mac^te er fprac^e er fiele tt)tr tnat^ten tt)ir fpracf)en tDir fieten i^r mad^tet t^r fprSi^et t^r fietet fie mai^ten fie f|3racf)eu fie fielen Perfect. I have (may have) made, spoken, I have (may have) fallen, etc. etc. id) ^abe gemat^t, gef^jrod^en id) fei gefallen bu ^beft gemad^t, gefproi^en bu feieft gefatlen er {)abe gemai^t, gefprodjen, :c. er fei gefallen, :c» Pluperfect, I had (might have) made, spoken, I had (might have) fallen, etc. etc. t^ ^atte gema(^t, gefproc^en id) iDcire gefallen bu ^dtteft gentac^t, gef|Dro^en, :c. bu tDareft gefallen, 20, § 9i] LESSON XXVI 91 Future, I shall make, speak, fall, etc. id) iDerbe madjen, f|)red)en, fatteti bu tDerbeft mail)en, fprecf)en, fallen er tuerbe mac^en, fprec^en, fallen, :c* Future Perfect, I shall have made (spoken), etc. t^ n)erbe gemac^t (gefproc^en) ^aben bu n)erbeftgemacf)t (gefprot^en) ^aben, it. I shall have fallen, etc. ic^ tDerbe gefallen fetn bu tDerbeft gefallen fein, :c. Observe : i . The persistent c of the endings. 2. The imperfect subjunctive of all regular weak verbs is the same as the imperfect indicative. 3. Strong verbs with a, 0, u in the imperfect indicative stem take umlaut in the imperfect subjunctive. 4. The compound tenses are formed by adding the past participle or the infinitive, or both, to the auxiliary, precisely as in the indicative (for word order, see § 49). 90. Use of Subjunctive, i. The use of this mood is con- fined almost entirely to dependent sentences. 2. The English forms with 'may ' and 'might' in the para- digms only partially and occasionally represent the exact force of the German subjunctive : ©r fagte, ba^*er Oelb ^be. He said he had money. ^&) ^be oft getDiinfc^t, ba^ il^ I have often wished that I had ®etb ^iitte. (might have) money. 91. Indirect Statements and Questions. @r fagt : ^^'C^ bin miibe." He says : " I am tired." ©r fagt, ba^ er miibe ift. He says (that) he is tired. 92 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 91 & fagte : „Qi) bin mube/' He said : " I am tired.'* @r fagte, ba^ er mlibe fei(mdre). He said (that) he was tired, gr fragte : „3[Ber ift ba ? '' He asked : " Who is there ? " (5r fragte, tt)er ba [ei (mdre). He asked who was there. Qii) fragte, ob er milbe fet I asked if (whether) he was (mdre). tired. ®ie f agten, ba^ fie tl)ren 3Sater They said that they loved their liebten^ father, ©r fagte, er fei (tDdre) mitbe. He said (that) he was tired. Observe : i . Indirect statements and questions are always dependent clauses, and have the word order of such clauses (§ 70). 2. The verb of the dependent clause is usually in the sub- junctive if the verb of the governing clause be in a past tense, and, unlike EngUsh, has regularly the same tense which it would have if the statement or question were direct. Note. — The indie, is used in indir. statement to express a fact as undisputed or as vouched for by the speaker. 3. Where the present subjunctive of a verb has no forms distinct from those of its present indicative, the imperfect sub- junctive is used instead of the present, as in the last example but one above. 4. 'If or * whether ' in dependent questions = ob. 5. The conjunction ba§ may be omitted in clauses of indi- rect statement, which then have the word order of a principal . sentence (verb second). EXERCISE XXVI anne^men (tta^m, genom== bie (Stnlabung, -en, invita- men), to accept. tion. befe^ten, befall, befot)tett, eittft, once (upon a time). {daif.)f to order, command, entbedett, to discover, berii^ren, to touch. franjofifi^, French, bicf , thick. fitri^tetl, to fear, be afraid of. §91] LESSON XXVI 93 gebenten, gebad)te, gebad)t, ber 9teDolDer, -^, —, revolver. to intend. ber ®cl)dbe(, -^, — , skull. ^o(en, to get, fetch, bring. ber Sc^eif, -^, -e, sheik, imftanbe fein, to be in a posi- fofort, immediately. tion to, be able to*^ fonbern (after neg,), but. (aben, tub, gefaben, to invite, toten, to kill, lebe'nbig, living. troi^bem, in spite of this (that), ber 8btDe, -n, -n, lion. nevertheless. ?}orb^3lfri!a, n,, -^, North bte Uberra'frf)ung, -en, sur- Africa. prise, reifeti (f., ^.), to travel, jour- u'nangene^tn, disagreeable, ney ; go (away), set out (on unpleasant. a journey). bie SBaffe, -tt, weapon. iDarnen, to warn. Idioms: i. S5ci Xi^d), at table, at meals. 2. 3tt ^ifd) laben, to invite to dinner. A, gitt franjofifd^er Offtjier, ber in 5yiorb^9lfrtfa retfte, tt)urbe einft Don einem (Si^ei! gu ^Tifcf) getaben. Tlan iDarnte i^n, ba^ biefer fetnen ®d[ten oft unangene^me Uberra[c^ungen bereite. Stro^bem [agte ber Offtjter, er tt)erbe bte ginlabung anne^tnen, ba er biejen 9)Zann nxi)t fitri^te. 311^ er nacf)^er bet Sl'ifc^ n)ar, fU^fte er, ba^ fetne git^e ettt)a^ Sebenbtge^ berii^rten. :©a(b entbedte er, bag e^ ein grower 8ott)e n)ar* ©ofort befa{)I er fetnem 5)tener, fetnen *$Ret)olDer ju ^olen. S)er ®c^ei! fragte, n)a^. ba^ bebeute. ©r fagte au(^, bag man ntit biefer fleinen SBaffe nic^t imftanbe fei, ben 8ott)en 5U toten, ber einen fe^r biden 'Sd:)ahei ^abe. !j)er ®aft anttt)ortete, er gebenfe ben Stedoloer nii^t gegen ba^ Sier, fonbern gegen ben (S(f)ei! 3U braucfjen. (Sr fagte, er n)erbe ben @(^eif fofort toten, n)enn ber Some unangenet)m mitrbe. ^. Oral : Turn the following direct statements and questions into the indirect form, prefixing ' man sagte, dafi ' to the state- ments, and either ' man fragte ' or ' man fragte, ob ' to the ques- tions. I. Sie sind mtide. 2. Der Offizier wird die Einladung 94 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§91 annehmen. 3. Das ist ein grower Lowe. 4. Dies sind groBe Lowen. 5. Das waren grolie Lowen. 6. Der Diener wird den Revolver holen. 7. Hat er den Revolver geholt ? 8. Wer hat den Revolver geholt? 9. Ist der Diener imstande, einen Lowen zu toten? lo. Wer gedenkt, die Waffe zu brauchen. II. Wird er den Lowen toten ? C. I. The officer told me that the sheik had invited him to dinner. 2. I warned him that the sheik was an unpleasant man. 3. The officer answered that he didn't fear the sheik. 4. He discovered that a big Hon was under the table. 5. At once he asked the sheik why the lion was there. 6. He (biefer) replied that it (e^) was a pleasant surprise which he had prepared for his guest. 7. The officer then said that he also had a pleasant surprise for the sheik. 8. Thereupon he beck- oned to his servant, and the servant got the revolver. 9. As (ate) he was giving it to his master, he warned him that a Hon had a very thick skull. 10. He said that it was impossible (utltnogUd)) to kill him with this weapon. 11. The officer replied that he would be in a position to kill the sheik if the lion became disagreeable. I), Lesestlick : Es kam einmal ein Bauer in die Stadt gefahren, hielt vor einer Apotheke an und lud eine grol^e Stubentiir vom Wagen ab. Als er die Tiir in den Laden trug, machte der Apotheker groBe Augen und fragte ihn, was er hier woUe ; der Tischler wohne nebenan. Der Bauer aber sagte, er wolle nicht zum Tischler, sondern zum Apotheker. Der Arzt sei bei seiner kranken Frau gewesen und habe ihr eine Arzenei ver- schrieben. Als der Herr Doktor aber das Rezept aufschreiben wollte, sei weder Feder, noch Tinte, noch Papier im Hause gewesen ; da habe er es mit Kreide an die Stubentiir ge- schrieben. Der Apotheker lachte, bereitete aber dem Bauern die Arzenei, der damit nach Hause zuriickfuhr und sie der Frau eingab. § 95] LESSON XXVII 95 LESSON XXVII 92. Prepositions with Dative. The following nine preposi- tions govern the dative only : an^ bet natii turn an^tv mit feit $tt gcgettiibcr 93. ^n^f out of, of, from. 1. Out of (motion) : (gr fommt au^ bem §au[e. He comes out of the house. 2. Of (material) : !Da^ §au^ ift au^ §0(3 gebaut. The house is built of wood. 3. From (origin) : (gr fommt au^ (Snglanb. He comes from England. 4. From (cause) : Qi) tue e^ au^ gurd^t. I do it from fear. 94. 5(ugcr, outside of, except. 1. Outside of (rest), more commonly au^er^alb + genitive : (Sr iDO^tit au^er ber Stabt. He hves outside the town. 2. Except, besides, but : Tadjik au^er einem ®tocfe. Nothing but (except) a cane. 95. 25ci, near (by), beside, at, with. 1. Near (by), beside : (Sr ftanb bei ber Xnx* He stood by (near) the door. 2. At (the house, etc., of = French c/iez), with : (Sr iDO^ttt beim DnteL He lives at his uncle's. 3. About (one's person), with : Qij ^abe ®elb bet mir. I have money about me. Note. — S5ci is generally contracted with unemphasized bent: bctUt = bci bem. 96 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 96 96. win, with, along with. 1. With (instrument) : Qii) fcf)retbe mit ber geber, I am writing with the pen. 2. (Along) with, in company with : gr fommt mit t^nett. He is coming with them. 97. ^ad), after, to, according to. 1. After (time, order) : 9Ja(J) ber (2d)ule. After school. (Sr !ommt naif) mir. He comes after (next to) me. 2. To (with proper names of places) : ©r retft nac^ 9f om (g^ina). He is going to Rome (China). 3. According to (may follow its case in this sense) : 9Jac^ meiner 9Jfeinung. According to my opinion. aKeiner 3Meinung nai). According to my opinion. 98. Sett, since, @eit bem Sriege. Since the war. (Sr tft [eit aijt "^aQCn "^ter. He has been here for a week. Note. — Observe the use of the pres. tense in this idiom. 99. ^oUf from, of, about, by. 1. From : (Sr fommt t)on ber @tabt. He comes from the town. 2. Of, about : SBir rebeten t)on 3^^nen. We were speaking of you. 3. Of (replacing genitive case) : SSater t)on Dter Stnbern. Father of four children. Notes. — i. The Eng. prep. * of with a noun must generally be ren- dered in Ger. by a gen. without a prep., whenever it can be turned into the Eng. poss., otherwise by tJOtt : 2)er ^'Opf etttCi^ §unbC§, *The head of a dog (a dog's head) '; !Dte ^hitter biejet JCinber, 'The mother of these children' ; SStr rebetl tlOtt bem TOibd)en, * We are talking of the girl.' 2. 35ott replaces the gen. with unqualified plur. nouns, as in the example under 3, above ; also to avoid repetition of genitives, and usually after partitives : 2)a^ §au^ tiout ^ruber meineg S^ater^ ; einer t}on meinen greunben. § I02] LESSON XXVII 97 4. By (with personal agent after the passive voice) : ©r iDUrbe t)om Sonig geIo6t« He was praised by the king. 100. 3ttf to, at, for. 1 . To (persons) : gr rebet JU mir. He is speaking to me. & ge^t 3U feinem greunbe. He is going to his friend (or to his friend's house). Note. — The Eng. prep. *to* with a noun must be rendered in Ger. by the dat. without a prep., whenever the noun can be turned into the Eng. indir. obj., otherwise generally by a prep., as in the examples above : ©ebeil ®ie mix ba^ ^UC^ : * Give the book to me (= Give me the book).' 2. To (places, if not proper names) : gr ge^t gur ®tabt. He is going to town. 3. At (with names of towns, etc.) : Sr iDO^nt gu ©eritn. He lives at Berlin. 4. At (of time, with ^^tt and ©tunbe, and with names of festivals) : ^ur rei^ten 3^tt (©tunbe). At the right time (hour). 3u SBei^nad^ten (Oftern). At Christmas (Easter). 5. At, of (price and measure) : JEuc^ JU 3K. 3.— ba^ 9)?eter. Cloth at 3 marks a metre, gin ^raten gu 10 ^^funb. A roast of 10 pounds. 6. For (of purpose) : 3uTn 3Sergnugen. For pleasure. 101. ©cgcttiibcr, opposite. SiJtemem §aufe gegenuber. Opposite my house, ©egenuber meittem §aufe. Opposite my house. Note. — This preposition usually follows its case. 102. ^a with prepositions replaces inanimate objects (com- pare § 85), but not with au^er, fett, or gegenuber. Note. — For other preps, with dat., see App. B, 2, 3; for idioms, App. B, 4, 5. ^8 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 102 EXERCISE XXVII abftetgen (fO/ to dismount, ber Omnibus, — , -ffe, omni- get out of (a vehicle). bus. bie SSant^ -en, bank. Oftern, Easter, befe^en, befa^, befe^en, to look ba^ 9tatl)au^, -e^, ^er, town- at, view. hall. beftettjen, beftteg, befttegen, to bie 9?etfe, -n, journey, voyage, mount, ascend, get into (a trip ; eine — mac^ett, to vehicle). take (go on) a journey. bie :93orfe, -n, Exchange. bie JReftauratio'n, -en, res- bie greunbin, -nen, friend. taurant. ber ®aft^of, -(e)^, ^e, hotel. f(J)auen, to look, gaze. ba^ ©ebciube, -^, — , building, fi^en, [a^, gefeffen, to sit. ba^ ©ebrcinge, -^, crowd, fobalb tDie, as soon as. throng, crush. bie Staffe, -n, cup. ber ^ut[c^er,-^,—, coachman, tierbringen, t)erbra(^te, t)er* driver. brac^t, to spend, pass (time). lang^ (gen., dat., or acc^, along. 3^it(ang (eine), for a while. ntog(i(^ possible. gn gu^, on foot. nai^bem {conj.\ after. 3U 3Jfittag effen, to dine. niemanb, nobody, no one. A, I. 3^ Oftern biefe^ ^^a^re^ ntadjte id^ eine 9leife nai^ gnglanb, ido i(^ [eit me^reren -^af)ren nic^t gemefen iDar. 2. ©ine greunbin begleitete mid^. 3. Unfer ©(f)iff fnt)r Don aWontreal nai) 8onbon. 4- 9?a(^ fieben 3:agen fanten xoxx in gonbon an. 5. ©obalb xoxt moglii^ fu^ren xoxx jn nnferm ©aft^ofe bei Scaring Sro^. 6. ©a e^ f)3dt abenb^ n)ar, gingen xovc balb jn Sett, na^bem \mx eine ^eitlang an^ bem genfter gefi^ant fatten. 7. i^^rit^ morgen^ gittgen xoxx an^, nnt bie ®tabt ein n)enig 5U be|e()en. 8. SBir beftiegen einen Dntni* bn^, nnb fagen bei bent Sutfc^er. 9. ©er Omnibus fu^r Icings bem „@tranb'' bi^ jnr Sanf t)on gnglanb. 10. S)a^ ©ebrdnge in biefer (Strafe xoax fef)r gro^, befonber^ bei ber § 102] LESSON XXVII ^ 53ant II. T)iefem ©ebdube gegenuber fte^t Me ©5rfe, bic beruljtnte Sonboner „@yc^ange," 12. §ter [tiegen tt)ir ab unb gtngeti 3U gu^ jum Sfat^aM ober „®uilb^at(/' iDte e^ ^ei^t, 13. 2Som 9?at()aufe gingen tt)ir ju etner 9teftauration, ido n)ir gu aJiittag a^en* 14. ®ann fut)ren mir mit einer ®rofrf)!e gu einem 9Serh)anbten. 15. Set i()m tDar niemanb 3U C^aufe, au^er [einer grau ©ema^Iin, 16. 9^a^bem tDir bei i^r eitie SEaffe S^ee getrunfen f)atten, fe^rten trtr jutn ©aft^ofe juriicf. 17. (So t)erbrac^ten mir ben Jag fe^r angenefjnt. ^. Oral : i. Wann machtest du die Reise, wovon du er- zahlst? 2. Wohin fuhr das Schiff ? 3. Wo kam das Schiff an ? 4. Wo steht der Gasthof, wo ihr abstiegt? 5. Wie fuhrt ihr dahin? 6. Weshalb seid ihr frlih zu Bett gegangen? 7. Weshalb schaut man aus den Fenstern? 8. Wo war das Gedrange besonders groB? 9. Welches Gebaude steht der Borse gegenuber ? 10. Sitzst du gem beim Kutscher? 11. Hat der Kutscher viel mit euch gesprochen? 12. Sprechen die Kutscher gern mit Fremden? 13. Wohin fuhr der Omnibus? 14. Langs welcher StralSe fuhr er? 15. Gehst du gern zu FuB? 16. Weshalb seid ihr zur Restauration gegangen? 17. Warst du heute bei deinen Verwandten? 18. Bei wem habt ihr Tee getrunken ? C. I. Miss Klein has told me of her journey to London. 2. She had not been in England for five years. 3. A lady, a friend of her[s], went with her. 4. Their ship did not go very fast, and only (erft) after ten or twelve days did they arrive in London. 5. They were tired from the journey, and went at once to their hotel at (bet) Charing Cross. 6. The next morning they mounted an orrfhibus, in order to see the city. 7. One can learn a great deal from the driver, if one sits beside him. 8. With the omnibus they drove through the streets as far as the town-hall. 9. Opposite this building stands a restaurant, where they drank a cup of tea. 10. Afterwards they went on foot to the Exchange and the Bank of England. lOO GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 103 II. At the bank the crush was so great that they- had to take a cab. 12. They then drove to the house of an aunt of (Don) Miss Klein, with whom they dined. 13. Thus they spent their first day in London very agreeably. D, Lesestiick : Ein Reisender war stundenlang durch eine o ie Gegend gefahren, ohne einem menschhchen Wesen zu begegnen. Endhch erblickte er eine elende Htitte, vor deren Tiir eine hagere Gestalt gegen den Tlirpfosten lehnte. " Mein Freund/' fragte der Reisende, *' haben Sie Ihr ganzes Leben hier zugebracht? " " Noch nicht ! " lautete die Antwort. LESSON XXVIII 103. The Simple Conditional. I should have, make, be. fall, etc. tc^ tDiirbe ^abeti ma^en [ein fotlen bu miirbeft „ ff tf tt er iPitrbe ,, ff ft ft tt)tr tnurben ,, ft ft ft i^r tnitrbet „ n ft ft fie it)urben „ tt tt tt Observe : The < simple conditional of all verbs is formed by adding their infinitive to the imperfect subjunctive of Werben. 104. The Compound Conditional with ^abetl* I should have had (made), thou wouldst, etc. id) tDitrbe jefjabt (gemai^t) l^afien bu miirbeft ge^abt (gemac^t) ^aben er iDiirbe ge^abt (gemacf)t) ^aben, 2c. Observe : The compound conditional of a verb conjugated with ^aben is formed by adding its past participle to the simple conditional of l^abeu (for word order, compare § 49). S io6] LESSON XXVIII lOI 105. The Compound Conditional with [cm* I should have been .(fallen), thou wouldst, etc. t(^ iDiirbe gemefen (gefallen) fcin bu iDiirbeft getDefen (gefatfen) feiti er iDitrbe getDefen (gefatlen) fein, :c» Observe: The compound conditional of. a verb conjugated,, with [eitt (see § 62) is formed by adding its past parfieiple tC the simple conditional of feitl (for word order, compare § 49) . 106. Conditional Sentences. SBenn tc^ ®etb ptte,(fo) tnitrbe If I had money, I should buy a id) ein §au^ faufen, • house. Qd) tDiirbe ein §au^ gefauft I should have bought a house, ^aben, Wtnn id) ®elb get)abt if I had had money. §dtte ic^ ^tit, [0 tDUrbe id) e^ If I had (had I) time, I should tun. do it. SBenn id) ®elb ^citte, !onnte If I had money, I could buy a tc^ ein ^au^ faufen. house. §citte id) ^dt ge^abt, fo ^iitte If I had had (had I had) time, id) e^ getan. I should have done it. (Sr tt)trb f ommen, tnenn er f ann* He will come if he can. Observe: i. Conditional sentences regularly consist of two parts : the condition and the result ; and either part may come first. 2. The subjunctive mood is required in the imperfect or pluperfect of the ' if clause, the result being then expressed by the conditional ; with other tenses the verb is in the indicative in both clauses (see last example above). 3. The imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive may replace the conditional in the result clause, if the latter follows. Note. — These shorter forms are used to avoid complicated construc- tions, as for example in the modal auxiliaries; see Lesson XXXVII. I02 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ io6 4. When the 'if clause precedes, the subject of the result clause is thrown after the verb (as in the first example above), the particle fo being usually inserted before the verb, but not translated into English. 5. SBcnn, = ' if,' may be omitted when the condition pre- cedes the result, in which case the verb begins the sentence, .and the result clause is introduced by fo* , EXERCISE XXVIII abge^en (fO^ to go away, set genefen (f.)/ getta^, genefen, out, start, depart. to get well, recover. abn)e[enb, absent. gating, enough, ac^ ! ah ! oh ! ba^ ©ef^aft, -(e)^, -e, busi- Serti'n, n., Berlin. ness. befe^t, occupied, full. !oftfpteItg, costly, expensive, beforgen, to take care of, see mitfommen (f .), to come along to, look after. (with). be^f)alb, for this or that reason, mttretfen (f .), to travel with, therefore, on that account. go with, come along (with). erfran!en ([.), to fall ill. bte SKtttel (//.), means, ber gait, -(e)^, ^e, fall, case. natiirlti^, naturally, of course, bte ©elegen^eit, -en, occasion, U'nf often (//.), expenses. opportunity. ^ \0^^X, true. tDO^I, probably, I suppose. Idioms : i. ^ommctt Stcj^ mi ! Do come along. 2. ^tt!^ SBetter iff^iJu, \\\^i ttialjr ? The weather is fine, isn't it ? A, 3Burben @te eine 9?etfe na^ ®ent[d)Ianb ma^en, iDenn @ie ©elegen^ett ptten? — ^^atDO^I! SBdre metn SSater nic^t erfranft, |o iDcire \^ \t%i f(J)on abgereift. — SJiiiffen @te be^^Ib p §anfe bletben? — 9Benn mein 9Sater !ranf ober abinefenb ift, ntn^ i^ feine ©ef d)af te beforgen. — ®a er mieber genefen ift, n)erben ®te balb abreifen, nt^t im^r? — 3^ tuiirbe ft^on biefe SSo^e reifen, \otxviX bie ©ampfer nt(^t alfe befe^t mdren. § io6] LESSON XXVIII 103 — Qti^t mitffen @te IDO^I hx^ ncic^fte SBod^e tDarten, — 3^! ^'c^ mill mit bent ©ampfer fat)ren, ber nad)ften SKittmo^ ab- ge()t. SBenn 8ie 8uft ij'dttcn mit jure if en, fo Mxt e^ ntir fe()r angene^m* — SBenn ic^ bie Witttl I)dtte, tnitrbe id) ©ie gerne begteiten, akr ic^ filrd)te, bie 9?ei[e n)urbe gu !oftfpieIig merben. — 2I(^ ! T)k Unf often finb tDo^I nic^t fo gro^, tt)ie (2ie glauben, — Qn biefem galle n)iirbe e^ mir tjieKeic^t ntdglid) fein. — J)ann f ommen ®ie mit ; ba^ ware prac^tig ! — (2ie n)llrben natitr(i(^ juerft :93erUn befud)en, nic^t ma^r? — ^a; tDenn i^ ^tit unb ®elb genug ^citte, fo n)itrbe i^ fpdter nad) (Snglanb reifen- B. Continue the following: i. Qd) miirbe f ommen, tvtmt idj 3eit ^tttr bu , * * , tnenn bu, 2c. 2. SBenn id) ®elegen^ ^eit I)dtte, fo iDiirbe id) dm 9{eife ma^en. 3. Qd) tt)iH ju §aufe bleiben, menn id) tann. 4- §citte id) ®elb genug ge* l^abt, fo Wit id) ba^ @au^ gefauft. 5. SBdre id) nid)t fran! gemefen, fo miirbe id) geftern gefommen fein, 6. SBitrbe id) gefalten fein, tt)enn id) ®d)(ittfc^u^ gelaufen njdre? 7. SBenn id) morgen iDo^I bin, fo tDerbe ic^ abreifen. C. Complete the following orally by adding a clause ex- pressing condition or result: i. Wenn die Kinder artig sind, so . . . 2. Hatte ich Feder und Tinte, so . . . 3. Ich wijrde Berlin schon besueht haben, wenn ... 4. Wenn sie nicht erkaltet gewesen ware, so . . . 5. Er wiirde schon abgereist sein, wenn ... 6. Wenn es morgen regnet, so . . . 7. Wir hatten gestern unser Feld gepfliigt, wenn ... 8. Wdnn die Unkosten nicht so groB waren, so . . . 9. Wir miissen bis nachste Woche warten, wenn ... 10. Es wiirde uns sehr angenehm sein, wenn ... 11. Wenn ich morgen nicht zu mtide bin, so . . . 12. Ich hatte Sie gem begleitet, wenn . . . D. I.I have a mind to take a trip to Europe this summer. 2. If I had had time and money enough, I should have gone (abreifen) at Easter. 3. If one has no money and no time, 104 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 107 one must stay at home. 4. I should travel much more, if I had the means. 5. Would it be possible for you to accom- pany me? 6. I should accompany you gladly, if my father had not been ill. 7. I hope he will soon be well again. 8. Perhaps ; and in that case it would be possible for me to go with [you]. 9. If the steamers are not all full, we can start next month. 10. I should have started already, if the steamers had not all been full. 11. We should of course visit Germany, should we not? 12. Certainly; and afterwards we should take a trip to London, where I have relatives. 13. That would be splendid. 14. We should be very welcome at their house. 15. You would enjoy yourself very much in London. E, gefeftitd: ©lodlein, 9lbenbglt)(f letn, laute grteben, greube 2ltten 2Jfen[(f)en ju ! §e(Ie la^ betn 8teb erfcfiatten Unb bring' alien (Sine fanfte 9tu^\ 9tu^e bem, ber f orgt nnb treint, $Ru^' bent greunb unb au^ bem getnb ! 2lHen 8teben bringe bu 9tul)e unb ^yx&^ mir baju! 107. LESSON XXIX Article with Noun in General Sense. %tx Sftenft^ ift fterblit^* Man is mortal. ^a;^ ®Ia^ ift bur(^fid)ttg. Glass is transparent. ^te ajfuft! ift etne tunft. Music is an art. %tX §unb ift ber treue greunb The dog is the faithful friend bC)^ a)Jenf d^en. ^ of man. Observe : A noun used in a general sense (' in general,* ' all,' * every,' etc., being implied with it) regularly has the definite article in German, though not usually in English. Notes.— i. This art. is frequently omitted in the plur.; also in enu- merations and proverbs : Sltern \\t\itX\, S^Xt ^tnber, * Parents love their § no] LESSON XXIX 105 children'; ®oIb UTlb @ttber ftub SD^etatte, *Gold and silver are metals.' 2. The art. is omitted when the sense is partitive, i.e. when * some ' or *any' is implied: §aben "Sie ^rot? *Have you (any) bread?' (Sr ftU* biert 2)^ufl!, * He is studying music' 108. Article with Proper Names. ®cr SSefut). Mount Vesuvius. 2)er Ontario. Lake Ontario. ®cr WCjtm. The (river) Rhine. 2)te @d)tt)etj ; btC SlUrfei'. Switzerland ; Turkey. ^a^ f^one granfreid^. Beautiful France. 2)cr fleine ^arl. Little Charles. Observe: i. Geographical names always take the article when masculine or feminine. 2. Place names are neuter, except countries in -ei and -5, and a few others. 3. All proper names require the article when preceded by an adjective. 109. Various Uses of Article. ^m ©omtner ; im Sluguft. In summer ; in August. ^ 2lm 3Dtontag. On Monday. * 3?n ber ^dntgftra^e. In King Street. , ^d bcm aJitttag^effen. At dinner. L K fyc /\ Snx ®(J)uIe ge^en. To go to school. Observe : The article is required before seasons, months, days of the week, streets, meals, and places of public resort. Note. — The art. is also used before @tabt, §immet, Srbc, and §otte. 110. Article for Possessive. ®thtn (Sic mir btC §anb. Give me your hand. Sllle ^abett ba^^ Seben Derloren. They all lost their lives. Observe : i. The definite article usually replaces the posses- sive adjective when no ambiguity would result as to the possessor. io6 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§iii 2. With plurality of possessor, the object possessed is usually singular, if it is singular .as regards the individual possessor. 111. Omission of Indefinite Article. & ift (tnurbe) 2Irjt» He is (became) a doctor. dx ift Citt guter Slrjt* He is a good doctor. Observe : The indefinite article is usually omitted before the unqualified predicate after [eitl and tDcrbetl when it indicates caUing or profession. EXERCISE XXIX ba^ 3lbenbeffen, -^, supper, abne^men, to take away, take off. bie g^emie', chemistry. bu'r(^[i(^tig, transparent, ba^ (Sifen, -^, iron. (Suropa, n,f -^, Europe, ber getertag,-(e)^,-e, holiday, bie griebri^ftra^e, Frederick Street, ba^ ®Ia^, -e^, ^er, glass, ba^ ®oIb, -e^, gold.-^ grit^en (ace), to greet, bow to. ijalh (adj.), half, ^ierjulanbe, in this country. ^Inabfa^ren (f., acc)^ to go (etc.) down, ^oflitf), polite, bie 8eute (//.), people. ber 5Ra(^mtttag, -(e)^, -e, af- ternoon. ber Ontario, -^, Lake Ontario. bie *^^t)fi'!, physics. ber 9?^etn, -(e)^, the (river) Rhine. bie ©clllDeij, Switzerland. f(i)tt)er, heavy, hard, difficult. bie ©eefitfte, -n, sea-coast. ftecfen, to thrust, put, stick. ber ©tube'nt, -en, -en, stu- dent. ftnbteren, ftnbterte, ftnbiert, to study. ba^ ©tnbinm, -^, -ten, study. treten (f.), trat, getreten, to walk, go, come. bie 3SergnUgnng^rei[e, -n, pleasure-trip. bie 3Jiebi5t'n, medicine. A. I. !j)a2^ ®Ia^ ift bnrd^fic^ttg; man ntat^t genfter an^ ®Ia^, 2. ©a^ ®oIb ift f(^tDerer at^ ba^ ©ifen. 3- Unfere Sinber ge^en frii^ be^ 9Korgen^ jnr @(^ule ; fie finb je^t in ber ®(^ute. 4. 3^re @d)ule fte^t in ber griebrit^ftra^e. 5. 2lm § III] LESSON XXIX 107 9Kttttt)0(f) unb (Sonnabenb ^aben fie be^ 9^acf)tntttag^ einen Ijaihtn geiertag. 6. 9^acf) betn 2lbenbeffen macfjen fie geit)d{)n* lid) il)re 3lufgaben, 7. SBenn fie in bie ®d)u(ftube treten, ndy men fie ben §ut ab nnb grii^en ben Se{)rer t)of(i(f). 8. ^dflic^e Snaben ftecfen bie §anbe nic^t in bie 3:afd)e. 9. !Der Heine ^art ift ein ^oflirfjer ^nnge. 10. ^c^ bin SJiater, aber mein 25etter ift Stubent; er ftubiert jeljt '^i)X)\it nnb gt)eniie» 11. ©r finbet ba^ ©tnbinnt ber ^^t)fif befonber^ intereffant^ 12. 9?ac^ften Sinter it)irb er in !l)eutfc^(anb SJJebijin ftnbieren* 13. Qn ben ^^^nen n)irb er eine 9teife nacf) ber (SdjWti^ ntac^en* 14. ^ierjnlanbe mai)t man tine 3Sergniignng^reife nad) bem Ontario ober nad) ber (2eetitfte» 15. Qn Snropa fal)ren t)ie(e Ceute ben 9ftl)ein ^inab ober befni^en bie ^djWtx^. 16. 2lnbere reifen nad) @ng(anb ober nad) bem fd)5nen g'^cinfreid)* B. Oral: i. Weshalb werden Fenster aus Glas gemacht? 2. Welches ist schwerer, das Eisen oder das Glas? 3. Gehst du heute zur Schule? 4. In welcher StraBe steht eure Schule? 5. In welchem Monate habt ihr Ferien? 6. An welchem Tage der Woche habt ihr einen halben Feiertag ? 7. Wie grlifien Sie eine Dame, wenn Sie ihr begegnen? 8. Ist es hoflich, die Hande in die Tasche zu stecken? 9. Sind Sie Student? 10. Was studieren Sie jetzt? 11. Welches Studium haben Sie gern? 12. Was wollen Sie sonst studieren ? 13. Wohin wollen Sie im Sommer reisen? 14. Wie bringen die Deutschen die Ferien zu? 15. Und die Leute hierzulande? C. I. Gold is dearer than iron. 2. Rings are made of gold. 3. Windows are made of glass, because it is transparent. 4. Children learn ; students study. 5. I am a student; little Max, my brother, is only (erft) a pupil. 6. He goes to school every morning in King Street. 7. He intends to become a painter. 8. I am studying physics and chemistry now, for I mean to be (nierben) a doctor. 9. The study of medicine is interesting ; it is also very useful to man. 10. When we io8 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 112 meet ladies in (auf^ dat) the street, we take off our hats and bow to them. 11. They bow to us, but they do not take off their hats. 12. In this country people generally take a pleasure- trip in summer. 13. A pleasure-trip is often better (beffer) for the health than a bitter medicine. 14. Last winter I visited Germany with my mother. 15. We intend to pass this summer in Switzerland. 16. If we have time afterwards, and if we have enough money, we shall go down the Rhine. D. Sprichworter : i. Ubermut tut selten gut. 2. Ubung macht den Meister. 3. Kleider machen Leute. 4. Borgen macht Sorgen. 5. Die Not ist die Mutter der Erfindung. 6. Hunger ist der beste Koch. E, Lesesttick : Ein Tourist, der einen entlegenen Teil von Irland bereiste und die Nacht in einem kleinen, wenig be- suchten Wirtshaus verbracht hatte, klagte dem Wirte am Mor- gen, dafi seine Stiefel, die er vor die Zimmertlir gesetzt habe, nicht angeriihrt seien. " Ach," sagte der Wirt, " in diesem Hause konnten Sie sogar Ihre goldene Uhr vor die Zimmertlir legen, und kein Mensch wtirde sie anrtihren." LESSON XXX 112. Expressions of Quantity. SSterutibjlDangig \3^H madden Twenty-four inches make two jtDei gu^. feet. 3Sier ^f unb ; tauf enb aWann. Four pounds ; a thousand men. '^\0t\ gtafd)en; Jtt)0lf Sllen. Two bottles; twelve yajds. gUnf 2)^arf, JtDangtg "iPfennig. Five marks, twenty 'pfennigs/ giinf ®Ia^ Sier. Five glasses of beer. . W\i jwei ^aar ®(i)Uf)en. With two pairs of shoes. ®rei 33?eter t)on biefem JEud). S[x metres of this cloth. 3)er ©tod tft einen gu^ lang. The stick is a footlong; Observe: i. Nouns expressing measure, weight, or number (except feminines in -e) retain the uninflected form of the singular, even when the sense is plural. § 114] LESSON XXX 109 2. Feminines in -c add -n in the plural. 3. The noun, the quantity of which is expressed, is usually in apposition to the noun expressing the quantity, unless pre- ceded by a determinative. 4. The measure of distance, weight, etc., is in the accusative. 113. Distributive Article. ^tDCimat bC)^ 3^f)^^^- Twice^^year. T)xdmal bic SBoc^e. Three times^a week. !l)ret 5Kar! bic 6IIe, Three marks^ yard. Observe : The Enghsh indefinite article is replaced by the definite article in German when used distributively (= * each '). Note. — In expressions of time, as above, masc. and neut. nouns are in the genitive, fems. in the accusative; in those of price the noun is in the accusative. 114. Remarks on Numerals, i. ©in is used adjectively after a determinative : S)er etnc ©ruber ; tnein etncr The one brother ; one of my ©C^U^. shoes. "^^ ■ 2. ^xn is also used substantivel3rwith the definite article, in both singular and plural : ©er etnc ober ber anbere. The one or the other. S)te einctt [agten bie^, bie Some said this, (the) others J anbern ba^» that. y 3. S3cibe, ' both,* is used substantively and adjectively ; sul> stantively it also has the neuter singular form bcibei^ : 2)?etne (SItern finb beibe fjkx. My parents are both here. ®te (meine) beibcn ©ritber. The (my)jwo brothers. 4Beibc^ ift tDa^r. Both (thingsjlxe true. EXERCISE XXX bie 9lbteilung, -ett, department, beftelten, to order. ^ au^reid^ett, to be enough, suffice. be3at){en, to pay. befomtnen, befatn, betotnmen, billtg, cheap, to get, receive, obtain. no GERMAN GRAMMAR [§114 bte ©onbon^ (//.), candy, candies. bte (Soufine, -n, cousin (/). ba^ ®amenf(eib, -(e)^, -er, lady's dress. ba^ T)u^enb, -e^, -e, dozen. ber gittfauf, -(e)^, ^e, pur- chase. f ertig, ready ; — feitt, to have finished (done). bte ^Iaf(^e, -n, bottle. grau, gray. bie 9Har!, mark (about 24 cts. ; abbr, m. or 2K!0* ba^ aJJeter, -^, — , metre. ba^ 2Ktttag^effett, -^, dinner. ba^ a}?u[ter, -%, — , pattern, sample. ba^ "?|3aar, -(e)^, -e, pair. ber ^fettnig, -^,-e/ pfennig,' (rio" P^^^ o^ ^ mark). ba^ *iJ5funb, -e^, -e, pound. bte 9te(f)ttung, -eti, bill, ac- count. bte 9{eil)e, -n, row ; turn. bie atofine, -n, raisin. ber SiotlDettt, -(0^^ -^t red wine, claret. bte @ac^e^ -tt, thing, matter, affair. bte @(^aif)tel, -tt, box (of cardboard, etc.). ba^ @otnmerfletb, -(e)^, -er, summer-dress. folDte, as well as, and also. ba^ Safi^etttuc^, -(t)^, "er, handkerchief. Uttgefci^r, about, nearly. bte aSerfdufertn, -nen, sales- woman. ba^ SBaarett^au^, -e^, ^er, de- partmental store. ba^ 3^^9/ -(^)^/ -^t stuff, ma- terial. ber 30IC -(^)^r -^r ii^ch. Set 3^^^^^ ~^r sugar, jule^t, last, gunai^ft, next, then. Idioms: i. ^infiiufe ttta(I)ett^ to make purchases, go shopping. 2. 5(tt tier OfJcilje fetn (an bie 0^eil)c fommcn), to be one's turn. A, SSorige SBoc^e trar eine goufitte t)otn Sanbe bei utt^ auf ©efud). ®ie !ommt getDo^ttlii^ jlDeimal be^ 3^^^^^ W ©tabt, uttt ©ittfaufe ju mac^ett. 9lm ©ontter^tag gittgett n)ir alfo jum gro^en SBaarett^aufe t)on garttnann unb ©o^ttv "S^ort fann matt [aft alle (Sad^ett befotrttnett, bie tttatt braud^t, o^tte it)eiter ,5U geljett. 3^^^ft Qtttgen tt)ir in bie 2lbteiluttg fUr ^amettfleiber. 'Die SSerfauferitt jeigte utt^ eitt SKufter ju eittem ®ommerf(eibe ju 2Ji. 3.— ba^ 2}?eter. ©ie fagte, ba§ § 114] LESSON XXX HI ungefa[)r 6 3Keter bat)oti au^reic^en tDiirben, ba ba^ SKufter 50 ^oli breit fei. 9JJetne Soufine faufte 8 SJieter bat>on, ba e^ fo biKig h)ar. ^undcf)ft faufte fie auc^ 6 2:afcf)entuc^er fur i^ren Sruber unb bejalitte 9J?, 12.50 ba^ I)u^enb bafiir. T)ann faufte fie jmei "ipaar §anbfc^u^e fitr bie a)iutter. ®ie toareti beibe fe()r fc^dn. 1)ie eiuen maren grau, bie anbern n)eiB» 3?ac^bem bie goufine fertig Wax, tarn id) an bie 9tei^e. Q6) beftettte 5 ^funb 9Jofinen, unb 10 ^funb ^ucfer gu 25 pfennig ba^ ^funb, foU)ie ein 35u^enb glafc^en 9^? otmein f iir ben OnfeL 2lt^ tt)ir fertig n)aren, fauf ten n)ir jtuei ©d)a(^tet 53 on- bon^ fiir bie ^inber unb beja^ften bie 9?ec^nung. ®ann fuf)ren iDir mit ber (gtra^enba^n jum 2)littag^effen nac^ §aufe, B, Oral: i. Wo steht das grolSe Waarenhaus von Hart- mann und Sohn? 2. Machen Sie gern Einkaufe dort? 3. Weshalb? 4. Wie oft gehen Sie dahin? 5. Wie fahren Sie dahin? 6. Wann waren Sie zuletzt da? 7. In welche Abteilung gingen Sie zuerst ? 8. Wie viele Meter Zeug braucht man ftir ein Sommerkleid ? 9. Wie breit ist dieses Zeug? 10. Wie viel kosten Taschentuciier das Dutzend? 11. Wie viel bezahlt man fur drei Paar Handschuhe, zu M. 2.50 das Paar? 12. Wie viel kostet guter Tee? 13. Wie viel Pfund Rosinen brauchen wir? 14. Fiir wen ist die Schachtel Bon- bons, die Sie gekauft haben? 15. Fiir wen sind die beiden Paar Handschuhe ? C. I. Hartmann and Son have a large departmental store. 2. You (man) can buy many things very cheap at Hartmann's. 3. My mother goes shopping there usually twice a week. 4. We can go there (bal^in) with the street-railway and come home before dinner. 5. Here is the ladies* dress department 6. Please show us several patterns for a summer-dress. 7. The material must be about 48 inches wide. 8. If it is wide enough, 7 metres will suffice. 9. This material costs 4 marks [and] 50 pfennigs a metre. 10. Give me 7 metres of it. 11. Next show us handkerchiefs, if you please. 12. They must 112 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 115 not be too dear; about 10 marks a dozen. 13. I shall take two dozen of these. 14. How much are (cost) these gloves a pair? 15. We sell them at 7 marks for 2 pairs. 16. Now it is mother's turn. 17. Send me 2 pounds of tea and 3 pounds of raisins. 18. How much is the sugar? 19. Twenty-five pfennigs a pound. 20. That is too dear. 21. We have also sugar at 22 pfennigs. 22. Then send me 10 pounds of it. 23. We must buy two or three boxes of candies for my little sisters. 24. I have finished now. 25. So have I (= I also). D, Lesestlick : Konnen Sie mir dieses Goldstuck wechseln ? — Was fur eine Munze ist das ? — Es ist ein amerikanisches Fiinf- dollarstiick. — Ich bedauere ; das mlissen Sie zur Bank tragen. — Haben Sie die Giite, mir vorher den Wert des deutschen Geldes zu erklaren. — Sehr gern. Hundert Pfennig machen eine Mark (in Silber), und eine Mark ist ungefahr so viel wert wie 24 Cents amerikanisch oder wie ein Shilling sterling. AuBer der Mark gibt es folgende Silbermtinzen : Zweimarkstucke, Dreimarkstucke (oder Taler), Fiinfmarkstlicke und Fiinf- zigpfennigstucke. Wir haben auch Goldstlieke zu je 10 und 20 Mark, sowie Papiergeld in Scheinen. EndUch gibt es Nickel- mlinzen zu 5 und. 10 Pfennig, sowie ein paar Kupfermtinzen von kleinerem Betrage. Also bekommen Sie ungefahr M. 20.80 flir Ihr Goldstuck, je nach dem Kurse. LESSON XXXI 115. The Imperative of l^afictt, fcin, tocrbctU ^at)e (bu), have (thou). fei (bu), be (thou). ^ 'Met him have. - , ' 'Met him be. t)abe er, J * fei er, ^aben tDir, let us have. feten tDtr, let us be. l^abt (if)r), have (ye). feib (i^r), be (ye, you), ^aben fie, let them have. feien fie, let them be. I)aben @ie, have (you). feien @ie, be (you). § ii8] LESSON XXXI 113 . /c N 1 /.u \ iDerben U)ir, let us become. lt)erbe (bu), become (thou). ^ . .n. ^^ / x ^^ ^^^^^ \ n)erbet(t^r), become (ye, you). ' (- let him become. trerben fie, let them become, toerben ®ie, become (you). 116. Imperative of madden, fttigcit* mac^e (bu), make (thou). finge (bu), sing (thou). ^ ^ ' ' let him make. c \ let him sing, ntad^e er, J fmge er, J ^ macf)en tt)tr, let us make. ftttgen tt)tr, let us sing. mac^t (i^r), make (ye, you). fingt (il)r), sing (ye, you). tna(J)en fie, let them make. fingen fie, let them sing. tnac^en @ie, make (you). fingen ®ie, sing (you). Observe: i. The only true imperative forms are the 2nd singular and the 2nd plural ; the remaining forms are present subjunctives used with imperative force. 2. The imperative of most verbs (weak and strong) is formed as above. 3. The pronoun of the 3rd singular more commonly precedes, but ®tc always follows ; the 3rd plural (=* let them ' ) is very rare. 4. The pronouns bu, i^r are not expressed, except for con- trast or emphasis. 117. Imperative with laffett* The imperative of the verb laffen, ' let,' is used as an auxiliary, with the force of an impera- tive, to replace the 3rd singular and plural and the ist plural, as follows : fag (2nd sing.) 1 lagt (2nd plur.) \ un^ bleiben, let us remain. taffen @ie (formal) J 118. Infinitive. Present Perfect (ju) ^aben, to have. ge^abt (5U) ^aben,to have had. (ju) fein, to be. getDefen (^u) fetn, to have been. (,;;u) tDerben, to become. geiDorben (;^u) fein, to have become. (ju) madden, to make. gemac^t (p) l^abett, to have made. 114 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§119 Observe : The perfect infinitive is formed by prefixing the past participle to the present infinitive. 119. Participles. Present Past l^ab enb, having. ge ^ab t, had. f et cnb, being. QC U)ef Ctt, been. Tttac^ cnb, making. flC tuac^ t, made, fing enb, singing. gc fung en, sung. Observe : i . The present participle of all verbs ends in -cnb* 2. The past participle of weak verbs is formed by prefixing gc- to the stem and adding -t; the past participle of strong verbs has gc- prefixed and ends in -en, usually also with change of stem vowel. Notes. — i. Both the present and the past participles are also used as attributive adjs. 2. For the fut. passive part., see § 296. 120. Omission of gc-. Foreign verbs in -icrcn and verbs with inseparable prefixes (see § 51) omit the prefix gc- of the past participle : ftubteren, study, ftubtert beja^ten, pay, bejal^tt entbecfeu, discover, entbecft t)ergeffen, forget, Dergeffen 121. Present of fottcn* Indicative. Subjunctive, \i) foH \m fotten tc^ [otte it)tr foCen bu foHft tf)r foHt bu [olleft tf)r folfet er foil fie foHen er foQe fie follen 122. Use of fotten. ^d) foil (tt)ir foHen) au^ge^en. I am to (we' are to) go out. ©otl i(^ bletben? Shall I (am I to) stay? J)U foHft ni(^t fte^fen- . Thou shalt not steal. 6r foK fommen. He is to (shall) come. Observe: i. In the first person fotten = 'am to,' etc., in statements, and in questions * shall ' or ' am to,* etc. § 122] LESSON XXXI 115 2. In the other persons, fotten is equivalent to an emphatic imperative (= 'shall' or *are to,' etc.), unless interrogative. EXERCISE XXXI auf !t)eutf^, in German. ber Sa^, -e^, "e, sentence, auf madden, to open. f (fatten, to resound. au^lDCnbig, by heart. fc^on {adv,), well, very well, ba^ -53(iiTn(ein, -^, — , little bie Seite, -n, page. flower. \\i), himself, herself, etc. ber ©tester, -^, — , poet. ber ©onttenftra^I, -(e)^, -en, eriauben {dat)y to permit, al- sunbeam. low. fprie^en ([.), fpro^, gefproffen, grtebrtt^, Frederick. to sprout, bud. bie grii^Ung^Seit, spring-time. t)oHe'nben, to finish, complete, ba^ ®rim, -^, green. t)orbei, past, gone, l^erfagen, to recite, repeat. t)0rlefen, to read aloud, bie §o^e, -n, height. bie SKinterqual, hard winter tauten, to sound, run, read. weather, lefen, to, gelefen, to read. ba^ Sort, -(e)^, ^er, word, ntit einem 9WaI, all at once. bie ^dit, -n, line (of writing), nennen, nannte, genannt, to ba^ 3^^^^'^^*' ~(^)^' "^"^^ v^^^- name. jerflie^en ([.), jerflo^, jer^' no(f) einmal, once more, again. floffen, to melt (away). nnn, now. jn Snbe, at an end. bie Stegenjeit, -en, rainy ju^tiren {dat), to Hsten. weather. 3Unia(^en, to close, shut. A, Sinber, ma^t bie 53ii(^er auf unb la^t un6 ba^ @ebi(^t auf ®eite 132 lefen. igagt mir, mie ba^ ®ebi(^t ^ei^t. — ©a^ ©ebic^t {)ei^t ,, ©er grlt^Iing'' unb ber S)icf)ter ^ei^t griebri^ :33obenftebt. — SJtarie, fange an, e^ mir t)or3u(efen. — ^itte, entfdiulbtgen (2ie mic^, grciutein :©auer, icf) bin erfdftet. — @ut, nxein Sinb; alfo fange bu an, Slara. — (Srtauben @te mir, e§ ^erjufagen ; id) \)cAt e^ au^menbig geternt. — ®d)dn; ^drt aufmerffam ju, Sinber. — Il6 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§122 . SBenn ber grii^Itng auf bie Serge fteigt Unb im ©onnenftra^t ber ®d)nee jerfltej^t, SBenn ba^ erfte ®run am Saum fic^ jetgt Unb im ®ra^ ba^ erfte Slitmlein fprie^t, SBenn t)orbei tm 2^al nun mit einem 3Kat 3lHe ategenjeit unb SBinterquat, ©c^allt e§ t»on ben §o^'n bt^ jum Stale n)ett: G Jt)ie iDunberfdjon ift bie grii^Iing^jeit ! — 35a^ {)aft bu [e(}r gut ^ergefagt, mein ^inb, 3=e^t foHt i^r bie -©iti^er mieber aufmad^en* 8eft nod) einmat 3^*^^ 5 unb 6. §ier fe^It etma^, nidjt 'wa\)v? Siubolf, nenne mir ba^ fe^Ienbe aSort,— iSa^ ^eitmort „finb" fe^tt, ^raulein ©auer. — ®an^ rid)tig, mein 3^unge; je^t t)ot(enbe ben Sa^.— 35er t)oHenbete Sa| miirbe tauten : „Senn alle ategenjeit, ufit)., t)orbei finb/' — 9^un, ^inber; bie ©tunbe ift ju @nbe ; i^r follt je^t nad) @aufe ge^en, — S3itte, erjdfifen Sie un§ erft ein 3Kardjen auf 3)eutf (^, grdulein Saner, — Qtt^t Ijabe ic^ feine 3eit, aber morgen tDitI id) ba^ gem tun, ba il)r fo artig gemefen feib. B, Continue the following: i. Qii) foil ^eute morgen ein ®thxi)t ^erfagen, bu • ♦ . 2c. 2. ®ofi ii) ba^ ®ebid|t Dor^^ lefen ober t)erfagen ? 3. ©r fagte, x6) folle ni(^t fo t)iel 8drm mad)en, er fagte, bu , ♦ . ic. 4. Qii) ^abe gu t)iel fiir ba§ Su^ be5af)tt, 5- 3^ ^be (^atte) ftei^ig ftubiert, C. Oral: i. Sollen wir die Blicher nicht jetzt aufmachen? 2. Wer hat dieses schone Gedicht geschrieben? 3. Wie nennt man einen, der Gedichte schreibt? 4. Wer soil zuerst lesen? 5. Wer soil das Gedicht hersagen? 6. Soil Marie jetzt an- fangen, oder Rudolf? 7. Sollen wir die Bucher wieder auf- machen? 8. Wer hat die Tur aufgemacht? 9. Wer soil sie wieder zumachen? 10. Wer will die Fenster zumachen? 11. Was sagt der Lehrer, wenn die Stunde zu Ende ist? 12. Wohin sollen wir jetzt gehen? § 125] LESSON XXXII II7 D. I. Tell me what poem you read yesterday, Clara, 2. Please excuse me, Miss Bauer, I was not at school. 3. Then you tell me (it), Charles. 4. It was a poem about (iiber^ acc^ spring. Miss B. 5. Do you know it by heart? 6. Not yet, Miss B. 7. Then learn it this evening, and recite it to me to-morrow, my boy. 8. Open your books, and let us read line[s] one to (bi^) eight. 9. Now close them again, and you recite me these hnes, Mary. 10. You are to hsten, chil- dren ; Mary is to recite them. 11. Please tell us. Miss B., what word is missing in line six. 12. The missing word is ^sind.* 13. Don't make so much noise, children. 14. Now go home. 15. Take your books with [you], and read the poem attentively. 16. You are to learn it by heart to-morrow. 17. Please read the poem aloud to us first, and show us the pictures you brought from Germany. 18. I shall do so (e^) to-morrow if you are good. 19. Charles, please shut the door when you go out (^inau^). LESSON XXXII 123. Prepositions with Dative or Accusative. The following nine prepositions govern the dative when they indicate locaHly merely, and answer the question 'where?' or 'in what place?* the accusative when they imply motion, direction, or tendency towards the object of the preposition, and answer the question 'whither?' or 'to what place or person?' tin Winter neben unter sttiifd^en auf in liber tior 124. Contractions. 5(tt and in are generally (in expres- sions of time always) contracted with the unemphasized bcm and bai^: am=ati bem, tm=tTt bem, attig=att ba^, itt!g=in ba^; auf is contracted with ba^ only : auf)g = auf ba^» 125. 5(n^ on, upon, to, at, in. I. Of place (surface non-horizontal) ; ' Il8 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 126 {d) With dative = on, upon (adjacent to), at — ©a^ Sitb pngt an ber SBanb. The picture hangs on the wall. ^C^ fi^e am %\\&}t. I am sitting at the table. (b) With accusative = on, to (towards) — Sr fiangt ba^ ^ilb an bie He hangs the picture on the 2Banb. wall. @r ge^t an^ genfter. He goes to the window. 2. Of time and date, with dative only = on, upon, in : 2Im aSormittag (Slbenb). In the forenoon (evening). 5lm jnjeiten -3uit. On the second of July. 126. 5Ittf, on, upon, to, for. 1. Place (surface horizontal) : (a) With dative = on, upon, on top of — ©ajg 4BU(^ tft auf bem Sifd^e. The book is on the table. (Jf) With accusative = on, to — 8egen ®te ba^ auf ben 5£tfd^. Lay that on the table. @r gel^t auf ben 2J?arft. He is going to the market. 2. Of future time, with accusative only = for : (Sr fommt auf jmei STage. He is coming for two days. Note.— S3i)g auf + ace. = * except/ 'but': (Sr ag aUe Spfcl bi)^ aitf cinen, * He ate all the apples but one.' 127. ^titter, behind. !Der §unb liegt l^tnter bem The dog lies behind the stove. Dfen. • @r Iriec^t l^inter ben Ofen. He creeps behind the stove. 128. Sn, in, into. I. Of place, with dative = in; with accusative = into : @r arbeitet int ©arten. He works in the garden, ©r ge{)t in^ 3^^^^^* ^^ S^^^ ^^^^ ^^^ room. § 132] LESSON XXXII Iig 2. Of time, with dative only = in : gr tat e^ in einer ©tunbe. He did it in an hour. 129. ^thtn, beside, by, near. 6r fte^t nebcn bem 2^tf(^e. He stands beside the table. ©teCe e^ neben bie Snir. Put it by (near) the door. 130. fiber, over, across, of, about, concerning. 1. Of place, with dative = over (above) ; with accusative = over (across). ®ie SBoIfe ^dngt iiber bem The cloud hangs over the hill. Serge. ^it SSxndc fU^rt iiber ben The bridge leads across the glug. river. 2. Of excess, with accusative only = over : * !Da6 foftet iiber etnen Xaler. That costs over a dollar. 3. With accusative only = of, about, concerning : gr rebete iiber feine 9teife. He spoke of his journey. 131. Unter, under, among. 1. Of place, with dative or accusative = under (beneath, below) : !iDte fcfjtDarge S^a^e irar unter The black cat was under the bem Xi\d)t. table. (Sie froc^ unter ben STifd^. She crept under the table. 2. Of number, with dative or accusative = among : 3)er graufame SBoIf ift nnter The cruel wolf is among the ben (Sc^afen. sheep. @r ift unter bie ©d^afe gegan^ He went among the sheep. gen. 132. ©or, before, in front of, ago. I. Of place, with dative or accusative = before, in front of: I20 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§133 3)er ®tut)t fte^t t)Or ber Znx. The chair stands before the door, ©telle xijU t)Or bie SEiir* Put it in front of the door. 2. Of order, with dative only = before (ahead of) : ®ie fommett t)Or mir* You come before (precede) me. 3. Of time, with dative only = before, ago : Qx fommt t)or ncicfifter SBoc^e* He comes before next week. dx tarn t)Or JtDei Jagen an* He arrived two days ago. 133. 3^tfr!)Ctt, between. S)er ®tU^t ftef)t JlDlfi^en ber The chair stands between the Xnx Uttb bem genfter. door and the window. ©teltetl ®te tl)n JlDtfdjen bie Put it between the door and %vix unb ba^ genfter. the window. 134. ^a with all these prepositions replaces pronouns used for inanimate objects (compare § 85). EXERCISE XXXII ' ba^ 9lnben!en, -^, memory. fontgltd^, royal, ber 3lu^(dnber, -6, — , for- bie ginbe, -n, linden. eigner. ber Suftgarten, -^, ", pleasure- bie San!, ^e, bench. garden, park, bie Sriide, -n, bridge. bie 9Kttte, middle, centre, ettitge, a few, several. ba^ 9?attona't'!Den!maI, -6, ber @intt)oI)ner, -^, — , inhab- ^er, or -e, National Monu- itant. ment. fU^ren, to lead. oftlii^, eastern, ber gu^ganger, -§, — , pedes- ba^ SReiif), -(e)^, -e, empire. trian. bie ©C^ilbtnac^e, -n, sentry, bie ^auptftabt, ^e, capital. ba^ ®(f)Io^, -e^, ^er, castle, bie ^auptftra^e, -n, main palace. street. bie @(i)Io^fret^eit, Precincts of ber ^aifer, -^, — , emperor. the Palace. § 134] LESSON XXXII 121 ber ®c^Io^^3la^, -e^, Palace ba^ Jor, -(e)^, -e, gate. Square. bte Uttttierfita't, -en, univer- bte S|)ree, the (river) Spree. sity. ber (Spring brunnen, -^, — , t)orbeige()en (f.), to go past fountain. (an + dat'^, ber 3:iergarten, -^, % deer- ber SBeg, -(e)^, ~e, way, road. park, park. tt)e[tU(^, western. A. Serttn Itegt an ber (Spree unb t[t feit 18U bte §aupt^ ftabt be^ ©entfc^en 9?ei^e^. ^z%i ^t e^ itber brei W\h Itonen ©intDo^ner. ®ie gauptftra^e 33erUn^ ^ei^t Unter ^^tn Sinben. 3n biefer Strafe fte^en Dier 9tei^en Stnben nnb be^^Ib ^ei^t fie [0. 3^n ber Wxiit jtDifc^en ben ginben tiegt ein breiter 5Beg fur ^^u^gcinger. Unter ben 33aumen ftel)en S3anfe, auf benen man fi^en !ann. 2lm CftUc^en (Snbe ber Strafe liegt ba^ !onigIid)e Si^fo^. 93or bent Sc^Ioffe, jtDifi^en jtrei 3lrmen be^ i^Iuffe^, ift ber 8uftgarten. 3ln ber (Sdjlo^frei^eit neben bent Sc^Ioffe fte^t ba^ ^lationaf- ©enfmat gum 3lnbenfen an Saifer SBil^elm ben ©rften. Winter bent ®d)Ioffe ift ber Si^lo^plafe, auf bent ein grower Spring- brnnnen fte^t. ©ine fd}one ©riide fit^rt t)om ®(f)toffe iiber ben i^Iu^ jur gauptftraj^e. 3)ann ge^t man n)eiter nnb an ber UniDerfitdt tjorbei. 2luf ber UniDerfitdt ftnbieren t)ier bi^ fiinftaufenb ©tubenten. ©i^ auf einige ^unbert Slu^Idnber finb biefe ©eutfc^e. 21m n)eftlirf)en (gnbe ber Strafe fte^t ba^ beriifjmte 53ranbenburger 2^or. ®urcf) iiiefe^ Jor ge^t man in ben 5Eiergarten. Sine Sdjilbmac^e fte^t immer barunter. B, Oral: i. Wann waren Sie zuletzt in Europa? 2. In welchen Landern waren Sie? 3. Wie heifit die Hauptstadt des Deutschen Reiches? 4. Wie nennt man die HauptstraBe Ber- lins? 5. Weshalb? 6. Wo liegt der Weg ftir FuBganger? 7. Wo steht das konigliche SchloB? 8. Wer wohnt darin? 9. Wie kommt man aus dem Tiergarten in die HauptstraBe? 122 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 134 10. Sind Sie gestern an der Universitat vorbeigegangen ? 11. Wie viele Studenten hat die Universitat? 12. Studieren auch Auslander auf der Universitat? 13. Zum Andenken an wen ist das National-Denkmal? 14. Wostehtes? 15. Wohin fuhrt diese schone Briicke? 16. Wo liegt der Lustgarten? C I. I was standing between my two (beibe) friends. 2. He did that exercise a month ago. 3. Put (ftelten) my chair in front of the door. 4. Don't put your hands into your pockets. 5. Let us put (ftecfen) the letter under the door. 6. We can see clouds above the hills. 7. They went past me on the street. 8. Let the coachman drive behind the palace. 9. Let us go to the market. 10. They will come in the even- ing. II. We are sitting at the table. D, I. I spent six months in Berlin last year. 2. I was studying at the University. 3. Accordingly I know this city very well. 4. It is situated on the Spree. 5. The Spree flows (fttefet) into the Havel (/.). 6. The main street of Berlin is called Unter den Linden. 7. It is celebrated among the streets of great capitals. 8. The royal palace is at the eastern end of the street. 9. At the western end stands the Brandenburg Gate. 10. I used to go past the palace every day on the way to the university. 11. Among the celebrated buildings in this street is the Berlin University. 12. The University has now more than 3000 students. 13. Among these are several hundred women. 14. In the middle of the street [there] are four rows of lindens. ^15. One can sit on the benches under these trees. 16. The middle of the street is only for pedestrians. 1 7. A fine park is situated in front of the royal palace. 18. Be- tween the palace and an arm of the river stands a monument in memory of the first German Emperor. 19. From the palace you (man) go over a bridge which leads into the main street. E. Sefeftitcf: Serene gtebe bt^ jutn ®rabe ®(^tt)or' t(^ bir mit §erj unb ©anb, § 136] LESSON XXXIII 123 2Ba^ xi) bin unb ma^ t^ ^abe !J)anf ic^ bit, mein 9SaterIanb ! 3liii)t in SBorten nur unb ?tebern 3^ft ntein ^erj gum T)an! bereit ; Mxt ber Jat h)itl ic^'^ ermibern ©ir in 9?ot, in ®ant|3f unb (Streit 3^n ber greube, tt)ie im 8eibe, SRuf i(^'^ greunb unb geinben ?u : ©mig finb t)ereint n)ir beibe Unb mein Stroft^ mein @IM bift bu- — Hoffmann Don gattcr«(cbcn. LESSON XXXIII JV.B. Before studying this and the following lessons, review carefully the verb paradigms of previous lessons, and remember that the compound tenses of all verbs are formed with either l^aben or fcitt (§ 62) as auxiliary. 135. Verb Stems. madden rcd^nen tabetn rcben ruber n fmgen Observe : The stem of a verb is what is left when the end- ing -ctt or -tt is dropped from the infinitive. 136. Infin. Weak Verb : mac^en Strong Verb: fiugen Observe: From the principal parts may be inferred the various forms of the stem, which is regularly changeable only in strong verbs. Principal Parts. Imp/, Indie. Past Part mac^te fang flcmac^t gcfungctt 124 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 137 137. Special Forms of Weak Verbs. 1. 3feben, 'speak' : reben, rebete, gerebet. Present Indicative. \i) rebe tt)ir reben burebeft i^r rebct er rebct fie reben Observe : Verb stems ending in -b, -t {e.g. reben, arbetten), or in any combination of consonants after which -t or -ft can- not be pronounced {e.g. atmen, rei^nen), retain c of the ending throughout. 2. 2^abetn, 'blame' : tabein, tabette, getabett. ®en)nnbern, 'admire': ben^nnbern, ben^nnberte, be^ n)nnbert. Present Indicative. Imperative, \i) table n)tr tabein tabefn tt)tr butabelft if)r tabelt table tabett er tabelt jie tabetn er table tabefn fie Present Indicative. ic^ betDunbere \m bett)unbern bu bett)unberft i^r betDunbert er betDunbert fie betDunbern • Observe : Verb stems in -t\ drop e of the stem in the first singular present indicative, and in the second and third singu- lar imperative ; verb stems in -c( and -er drop c of the ending -en. Note. — Stems in -c( drop C of the stem in the pres. subj. 3. Slanjen, ' dance ' ; reifen, ' travel.' Pres. Indie, bu tanjcft, bn retfcft. Observe : Verb stems in a sibilant {^^ fr^, \^ j^ 5) insert c in the ending of the second singular, but these forms are usually spoken and often written bU tanjt, bn reift, 2C. §138] LESSON XXXIII 138. Irregular Weak Verbs. Infin, Imp/. Indie. Imp/, Subj, Past Part brennen, burn. branute brennte gebrannt fennen, know. fannte fennte getannt nentien, name. nannte nennte genannt rennen, run. rannte rennte gerannt fenben, send. fanbte 1 fenbete j fenbete gefanbt gefenbet , iDcnbeti, turn. njanbte 1 n)enbetej tDenbete geiDanbt " getDenbet. bringen, bring. bra^te brac^te gebra^t benfen, think. ba^te bac^te geba^t 125 Observe : i. The change of the stem vowel to a in the imper- fect indicative and past participle. 2. Except in the last two verbs, the imperfect subjunctive has the same stem vowel as the infinitive. • 3. The shorter forms of fenben and tDenben are more usual. 4. The last two verbs have also a consonant change, and umlaut in the imperfect subjunctive. 5. Otherwise these verbs are conjugated regularly. EXERCISE XXXIII bte 9lbfi(^t^ -en, intention. begriiBen, to greet, befannt, well-known, einfteden, to pocket, ent^alten, ent{)ielt, ent^alten, to contain. erfUKen, to fulfill, erfennen, to recognize. ertDibern, to reply, folgen (f., dat,), to follow, freunbtid}, friendly, kind. fUHen, to fill. bte ®abe, -n, gift, present. ba^ ©etbftiid, -(e)^, -e^-coin. geit)t^, certain. bie §anbarbeit, -en, needle- work, knitting, etc. bte ^erjen^gitte, kindliness. ^^talien, «., -^, Italy. iebermann, -^, everybody, every one. bie Sonigin, -nen, queen. 126 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§138 Idt^eln, to smile. ber ©trutnpf , -e^, ^e, stocking, bie aJJajeftci't, -en, majesty. tabein, to blame, reben, to speak, talk. bie Ztdm, -n, tear, fetben, silken, (of) silk. tjerbrentten, to burn (/r.). ©ignora, madam. iDegen (g^n.), on account of. ftricJen, to knit. iDegne^men, to take away. Idiom : ^a§ ift Ott^ i^m gcttlorbCtt ? What has become of him? A. ®te f 5nigtn §e(ena t)OTi -Statieti ift tDegen t^rer §er^ gen^gixte iiberalf befannt. ©ie bentt immer an bie 3lrmen nnb UngtUdlii^en. ^ebermann bett)unbert btefe foniglic^e gran, eine^ Staged mad)te Qijvt Wlait]tat einen S^ajiergang im ^ar!. Sort begegnete i^r ein Heine^ ajJcibrfien. ©ie Sdntgin begrit^te ba^ aKab(^en frennbUc^ nnb fragte: ^SBa^ fitr §anb^ arbeit fannft bn nta^en?'' ,,^6) fann (Striimpfe ftriden/' er^ iDiberte bie ®(eine. ,,Sennft t>n mid), tleine?'' fragte bie Sonigin Icic^elnb. ' ,r®en)i^, ©ignora, t(^ f)abe ®ie fofort er== fannt; ®te finb bie Sonigin/^ ©ie Sonigtn fagte, bie Sleine foHe i^r ein "ipaar ©tritmpfe ftricfen nnb fie anf^ ©(^(o^ bringen. 9?a^ eintgen 3:agen ttinrben i^r bie ©tritmpfe ge- bra(^t. !3)te ^dnigin bac^te, bent ®tnbe etne gro^e grenbe jn maiden nnb fanbte it)ni ein ^aar feibene ©tritnt|)fe, fon)te einen S3rief. S)er eine bation trar mit :93onbon^ geflitit ; ber anbere entf)ielt me^rere Oelbftitcfe. ®en na^ften S^ag bracftte ba^ aJJabc^en folgenben «rief anf^ ©cfilo^: „Q\^vt ®abe, (gignora, l)at mid) t)iele Strdnen gefoftet. ©a^ ®elb ^at mein aSater eingeftedt; bie Sonbon^ ^t mein -93rnber gegeffen; bie ©trnm^jfe ^at meine 3}?ntter mtr iDeggenommen nnb ben ©rief l^at man Derbrannt.'' 3lIfo fann man fe^en, ba^ gnte 3lbfic^ten ni^t immer erfitllt n)erben. B, Continue: i. Qi) table ben 3'nngen, n)etf er bie ^on^ bon^ gegeffen t)at, bn, 2c. 2. 3. I. I am a poor Italian girl. 2. One day I was taking a walk in the park. 3. I met a beautiful lady who greeted me. 4. I recognized her at once. 5. Everybody knows (the) Queen Helena. 6. Her kindliness is [well-]known in Italy, as also in other countries. 7. She asked me if I knew her. 8. She asked me also where my father and mother lived. 9. Finally she said, smiling: "Can you knit stockings?" 10. "Certainly, signora, I often knit stockings." 11. Then she bowed to me and went on (tt)eiter). 12. I knitted her a pair of stockings at once, and sent them to her. 13. The next day a servant of the queen brought me a pair of silk stockings, which she had sent me. 14. He also brought me candies and several pieces of money. 15. The queen thought I should be very happy. 16. But good intentions are not always fulfilled. 1 7. The letter was burnt, and the candies were eaten by my brother. 18. My father pocketed the money, and the stockings were sold by my mother. E. Lesestlick : Als Charles Lamb im " India-House " war, sagte ein Vorgesetzter eines Morgens zu ihm : "Herr Lamb, ich habe bemerkt, daB Sie jeden Morgen sehr spat ins Bureau kommen." "Das gebe ich zu," erwiderte der Dichter, "ver- gessen Sie aber nicht, dafi ich jeden Nachmittag sehr friih fortgehe." 128 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§139 139. LESSON XXXIV Declension of Personal Pronouns. First Person. Second Person. Sing. N. %I. bu, thou. G, tneitter, of me. beiner^ of thee. D. mir, (to, for) me. bir, (to, for) thee. A. mid), me. bi(^, thee. Flur. N, tt)ir, we. i^r, ye, you. G. unf er, of us. euer, of you. D, un^, (to, for) us. eu(^, (to, for) you. A. un^, us. Third Person. Singular, eu(^, you. • Masc. Fem. Neut. N, er, he. fie, she. e^, it. G. fetner, of him. t^rer, of her. f einer, of its. £>. i^m, (to, for) him. i^r, (to, for) 1 her. i^tn, (to, for) it. A. i^n, him. fie, her. e^, it. PluraL N. fie, they. G. t^rer, of them. D, i^nen, (to, for) them. A. fie, them. Notes. — i. In poetical and archaic language, the following forms of the genitive are found : meiu, bein, fein, i^r, unfrer, eurer. 2. The gen. and dat. of the 3rd sing. neut. do not occur, except when referring to persons {e.g. SHabc^en, SRannlein, etc.). 3. ^CffCtt (gen. of \i^^^ replaces the neut. gen. feinet, referring to things : 3(^ erinitere mid^ beffen niC^t, * I don't remember it.' 4. For the use of ba before preps, instead of pers. prons. of 3rd pers., see § 85. 140. Agreement. The pronouns of the third singular must agree in gender and number with the nouns to which they refer. Note. — grSuIctn, ' young lady,* requires the fem. pron. ftc (as also the fem. poss.). §142] LESSON XXXIV 129 141. Pronouns of Address. 2Bie ge^t e^ bit, 2^ante? How are you, aunt? ^ift bu e^, Itekr greunb? Is it you, dear friend? SBa^ mac^t i^r, ^inber ? What are you doing, children ? 2Ba^mac^ftbu,mein§imbc^en? What are you doing, doggie? @Ott, ic^ ertenne ^X^ I I acknowledge thee, O God ! 3Bie ge^t e^ Stin^Wf ®^^^ ®- How are you, Mr. S.? Observe : i. 'J)u is used in familiar address, as to a near relative, an intimate friend, a child, an animal. 2. ^tt is used in exalted or archaic language, as in address- ing the Supreme Being, and in poetry ; also in fables and fairy tales. 3. ^^v (plur. of bu) is used in addressing a number of per- sons, each of whom would be addressed by bu» 4. In all other cases ^you,' whether singular or plural, is expressed by Sie (.^^rer, 3"^^^^^ ©i^)r the pronoun of formal address, the verb agreeing in the third plural. Notes. — i. All pronouns of address, as well as the corresponding poss, adjs., are spelled with capitals in writing a letter. 2. ^Xf (Bic (3rd sing, fern.), ^^t (2nd plur.) are used in archaic and rustic speech as prons. of address. 142. Impersonal Verbs. • g^ f riert (f df^neit, regnet)* It is freezing (snowing, raining). SSBie ge^t'^ bir? How are you? 9Ba^ gibt'^? What's the matter? @^ ift (tut) mir teib. I am sorry. 3)ii(^ ^ungert (f riert). I am hungry (cold). & fagte, ba^ tt)n ^UUgere. He said he was hungry. Observe : i. Impersonal verbs are used only in the third singular with t^ as subject. 2. Many verbs are used impersonally with a special sense. 3. Those denoting bodily or mental affection drop t^ if the object precedes the verb of a principal sentence, and also in dependent sentences. 130 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 143 143. Idiomatic Uses of t^^ 1. (&2 is often placed before a verb (especially feitt) to represent the real subject, which follows the verb, and with which the verb agrees ; thus used it frequently = ' there ' : aSBertfte^? e^ tft bte STante. Who is it? It is aunt. (g^ tDaren metne 33ettern. It was my cousins. a^ IeU(J)ten bie Sterne. The stars are shining. a^ ift eitl 93oget tm Scifig. There is a bird in the cage. a^ tiegen :©ii(^er ^ier. There are books lying here. 2. When, however, indefinite existence is expressed, or when the assertion is general, ' there is,' ' there were,' etc., must be rendered by c^ gibt, e^ gab, 2C., and the English subject be- comes the direct object (ace.) in German": (£^ gibt eintge SSogel, bie nic^t There ar^ some birds which fingen. do not sing. ge^te^ Qai^V gab e^ t)tete There were a great many ^irnen. pears last year. @^ gibt nut einen ©oetl^e. There is only one Goethe. 3. With fein, ' to be,' when the real subject is a personal pro- noun, the English order is inverted, and the verb agrees with the real subject : Qii) bin e^ ; bu bift t^, :c. It is I ; it is you, etc. @inb ®ie t^? Is it you? 4. After a verb, t^ often represents a predicate or clause, and corresponds to the English ' one,' or * so ' : 3fter3lr5t? Is he a doctor? Qa, er ift e^. Yes, he is (one). 53ift bu frei? ^t^ bin t^. Are you free? I am (so). SBir iDoHen fomtnen Utib i^r We will come, and you shall follt c^ aud). (do so) too. § 143] LESSON XXXrV 131 EXERCISE XXXIV. aCerbi'ng^, certainly, indeed. I^erettl ! come in ! be^ifflic^, helpful, of. assistance. Jebeqeit, always, ber Seruf, -(0^/ -^t calling, flopfen, to knock. profession. Ttdttg, necessary, needful, bitten, bat, gebeten, to beg, ber 9ff at, -(e)^/ advice. ask. raten, rtet, geraten, to advise, banfbar, thankful. ber Umftanb, -e^, "e, cir- betttl iadv^y then. cumstance. erm5glt(^en, to make possible. t)erbtenen, to earn, bte ga^igfeit, -en, capacity. t)orjtef)en, to prefer, freuen, to gladden ; e^ freut iDci^ten, to choose, select. mi^, I am glad. ba^ ^utrauen, -^, trust, con- gebenfen {gen,)^ to be mindful of. fidence. Idioms; i. 2Ste gel^t t^ ^Ijucn? How are you? 2. ^^ hxn miibC. — ^C^ Osxn t^) audi, I am tired. — So am I. A. 2c^m. @^ Kopft; ^erein! «ift bn e^, ^Robert? IRobert. ^a, x6) bin e6, §err ?e^rer. S. g^ freut nttt^, bt(J) gu fe^en, Sfobert; xoa^ gibt e^ benn? JR- ^6) n)oI(te@ie bit^ ten, mtr etnen guten SRai ju geben. ©^ ift ^o^e 3^tt, ba^ i^ einen Seruf xo'cdjit, benn x6) bin fcf)on fei^je^n 3=at)re alt. fi» SBarum gtaubft bu benn, ba§ id) btr in biefer ©ai^e raten fann? %. g^ ift niemanb, ber meine Untftcinbe unb nteine gaf)tg!etten fo gut fennt, iDie ®te. fi. g^ freut mid), ba^ bu fo t)tef 3utrauen gu mtr ^ft. 9Bef(^en Seruf n)itrbeft bu dor* gie^en? !R. ^i) mitrbe ba^ ©tubium ber SJJebtjin t)or5tef)en, abere^fe^fen mtr bte 9)?tttet ba^u. fi. ®a^ ift allerbing^ ein foftfpielige^ ©tubium, aber anbere finb e^ and). §eutgu== tage gibt e^ aber t^iele ©elegen^eiten, ba^ notige ©etb ju Der* btenen. OfJ. J)a^ miirbe e^ mir t)iel(ei(^t ermogtidjen, ^rjt ju iDerben; id) ^be e^ mtr fange gett)itnfc^t. 2- (S(^5n; e^ tt)irb mid) ieberjeit freuen, bir in biefer ^kai^t bef)ilflid^ ju fein. 9(1. 3d) I^ii^ -3^nen fe^r banfbar bafiir, ba^ ®ie meiner fo freunblid) geben!en. 132 GERMAN GRAMMAR . [§ 143 • B, Oral: i. Hat es geklopft ? 2. Wer war da ? 3. War es Robert oder sein Bruder ? 4. 1st es schwer, einen Beruf zu wahlen? 5. Was sagte Robert dariiber ? 6. Freute es den Lehrer, seinem Schiiler zu helfen ? 7. Wird der Lehrer immer dieses Jungen gedenken ? 8. 1st Roberts Vater Arzt ? 9. Willst du auch Arzt werden ? 10. Fehlen dir die Mittel dazu? II. Wird es Robert moglich sein, Arzt zu werden? 12. Wollen Sie mir einen guten Rat geben ? C, I. There is a book lying on the table. 2. There are six chairs in this room. 3. How are you to-day, dear friends? 4. How are you to-day, Mr. Aue? 5. I am always glad to see you. 6. I am unhappy ; so am I ; f>o are we. 7. We praise Thee, O God ! Thou art always mindful of us. 8. Was it you, dear aunt? I didn't think it was you. 9. Sing, little birds, sing. 10. Do you hear me, dog? 11. Is Mr. Aue very cele- brated? He is. 12. There are always enough doctors, but there are never enough good ones. D, I. Robert's teacher, Mr. Aue, was sitting at the table. 2. There was a knock [at the door]. 3. "Who is there? Come in," said he. 4. It was one of his pupils. 5. "I am glad to see you, my boy; what can I do for you?" 6. " You can perhaps give me (a) good advice, Mr. Aue. 7. I must choose a profession ; it is high time now, for I am over sixteen years old." 8. Mr. A. asked him what profession he preferred. 9. "I prefer the study of medicine," repHed the boy, "but I haven't the means." 10. "It is an expensive study, to be sure, but so are others. 1 1 . But there are many opportunities to earn money nowadays." 12. " Perhaps it will be possible," replied Robert. 13. " My father was a doctor, and I mean to become one also, if I can. 14. It is a noble calling." 15. His teacher said he would help him. E, Lesesttick : Ein Pfarrer in Schottland fiel eines Abends in ein tiefes Loch und. rief um Hilfe. Ein vorbeigehender Arbeiter horte ihn rufen und fragte, wer es sei. Der Pfarrer § 145] LESSON XXXV 133 nannte seinen Namen, worauf der Arbeiter erwiderte : " Na ! Regen Sie sich nicht unnotig auf; Sie haben bis nachsten Sonntag Zeit und heute ist erst Mittwoch." 144. LESSON XXXV The Strong Conjugation. Prin, Parts : bleibetl, remain. blteb geblteben fittgen, sing. fang gefungen frteren, freeze. fror gefroren Observe : Strong verbs form the imperfect indicative by a change of stem vowel, without adding a tense ending ; for the past participle see § 119. Note. — Remember that, apart from the lack of tense ending in the imperfect indicative and subjunctive, the simple tenses of strong verbs have the same endings as those of madden, and that their compound tenses are formed exactly like those of weak verbs. 145. Vowel Changes of Present Stem. ©pred^en, speak. ©tel^ten, steal. gaCeti, fall. Pres, Indie, Pres, Indie, Pres, Indie, \i) fprei^e t(^ ftefjle \^ fatte bu f<)ri^ft bu ftte^Ift bu fSttft er fprid^t er ftie^tt er fStrt mtr fpred^eti tt)tr fte{)tett n)tr falteu i^r fpred^t i^r fte^rt t{)r faltt fie fpre^en fie fte^Ieu fie fatten Imperative, Imperative, Imperative, fprit^ fttefjl fatte er fpret^e er fte^te er fatte fpredjen it)tr fte^Ien xm fatten n)tr fprec^t Mm fattt fpre^en fie ftet)(eu fie fatten fie 134 GERMAN GRAMMAR [f 146 Observe: i. Many strong verbs change short e of the in- finitive stem vowel to if and long c to ic, in the second and third singular present indicative and the second singular impera- tive, and also drop -c of the latter. 2. Some strong verbs with a, 0, of the infinitive stem take umlaut in the second and third singular of the present indica- tive, but not in the imperative. 3. Hence the principal parts of such verbs are as follows : In/in, Impf. Ind. Past Pari. 2 Sg., 3 Sg, Pr, Ind, Impve, geben fpred^en fef)en fte^Ieti fallen fdjiagen gab fprac^ \m fiel f(f)Iug gegebett gefproc^eti gefel^eti gefto^Ien gefafien gefc^Iagen gtbft, gtbt fprt(f)ft, fprt(f)t fte^ft, fie^t ftie^Ift, ftie^It fallft, fadt fc^Iagft, f(^Idgt gib fprttfi fie^ ftief)f fatle f(i)Iage Note. — The whole pres. indie, and impve.- should be practised. 146. -Sittben, bind. i(f) bitibe bu bittbeft er bttibct tDir btnben i^r binbct fie binben Stems in -b, -t, 2C. Present Indicative, Sitten, beg. bitte bttteft bittet bittet bttteti gedjten, fight, fei^te ftc^tft fi(^t fe^ten ferf)tet fei^ten 9fatett, advise. rate ratft rat • raten ratet rateti ©et^en^ bite, bet^e betgt betpt bei^en bet^t bei^ett Observe: i. Stems in -ti, -t, without vowel change in the present indicative, retain -c before -ft, -t. 2. Stems in -b, -t, with vowel change, drop -c of the ending in the second singular and -ct in the third ; in other forms they retain the -e and -ct* 3. Stems in sibilants usually drop -ci^ of the second singular. .148] LESSON XXXV 135 147. Formation of Imperfect Subjunctive. t^ UkU ii) ffinge tc^ friire t^ fcf)Iuge Observe : The stem of the imperfect indicative regularly serves for the imperfect subjunctive, but with added umlaut when the imperfect stem vowel is a, o, or u. Note. — In some verbs the vowel of the impf. subj. does not correspond with that of the impf. indie: ^clfen, *help,' l}alf, imp. subj. ^itlfe ; some have double forms: gett)innen, *win,' gctrami, impf. subj. gemdttne or getriituic ; such forms occur only in Classes 9, 10, 11 (§ 148); see also Alphabetical List in App. D. 148. Classes of Strong Verbs. For convenience of reference, the principal strong verbs are arranged here in classes, accord- ing to their vowel changes, exceptional forms and peculiarities being given in the notes : I. SBeigctt Model. Far^s : bei^ett ^ hx^ gIei(J)en, resemble, rei^etl/ tear. gleiten/ glide. greifen/ grasp. fneifen/ pinch. leiben/ suffer. pfeifen/ whistle. 1 Stem -^ becomes ff after shortened vowel in the parts, unless final. 2 After short i stems -f and -t are doubled. ^ Stem -b becomes -U» reiten,^ ride. fd)Iet(^en, sneak. f(J)Ieifen/ grind. frfimetBen/ fling. gebtffen bite fi^tteiben,^ cut. frf)reiten,^ stride. ftretcf)en, stroke, ftreiten/ contend. iDcidjen, yield. 2. SBIcibctt Model. Far/s : bleibeti blicb (lebei^eti, thrive. fd)etben, part. letf)ett, lend, meiben, avoid, ^reifen, extol, reiben, rub. fc^eineti, shine. fd)retben, write. f(^reten, scream. geblicbett remain fdjlDcigen, be silent, fteigen, mount, tretbett, drive, treifen, show. 136 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§148 3. fjrterctt Model. Parts : f rtereti f ror btegen, bend. I^eben/ lift, bteten, offer. fc^ieben, push, fliegen, fly. fc^tt)5ren/ swear, flie^en, flee. t)erlieren, lose. 1 l^ob or l^ub. 2 f^ttjor or td^iDur. gefroren freeze iDdgen, weigh (/r.). tDtegen, weigh (intr.). gie^en,' pull (/r.), move (intr.), 8; 4. S^ic^cn Model. erf(f)al(en, resound, frtei^en, creep, flie^en/ flow. rierfjen, smell, gente^en/ enjoy. faufen,^ drink gte^en/ pour. (of beasts). 1 Consonant changes of stem as in bct^Ctt model 2 and 3 sing. pres. indie, fdufft; jduft. 'mf 9qogcn. gef(^o[fen shoot f(f)Ite§en/ lock, triefen/ drip. Derbrie^en/ vex. Moff,gejoffcn; 5. fjcflitctt Model. Farts : f e^tetl fdi^t gefo(J)ten ft^tft fi^t fight ertCfd^en, become extinguished. fle(f)ten, weave. metfen, milk, quellen, gush. fc^meljen, melt. f^lDellen, swell. 6. effett Model. Farts: effetl ag gegcffen' i^t t§ eat freffen, eat (of beasts), geben, give. tneffen, measure, fi^en/ sit. tretett,^ tread. t)ergeffen, forget. 1 Note the inserted g, tritt, p. pple. getretcn. ► ' fag, gefcffen. 3 Pres. trittft, trttt, impve. § 148] LESSON XXXV 137 7. (Sc^Ctt Model. Parts: fe^eti \^\) gefc^en ftcl^ft fte^ see bitten, beg. Itegen, lie. gefc^efjen, happen, lefen, read. genefen,^ recover. 1 Pres. gcnefcft, geneft, impve. gencfe. 8. (S^jrer^en Model. Parts: fprei^eti f^Dra^ gefijro^en fprt^ft fl^rid^ speak fpric^t bredien, break. ne^meti/ take. treffen/ hit. erfc^reden/ be ftec^eti, sting. frightened. 1 Impf. erjd^rof. 2 na^m, genommcn, ntmmjl, nlmmt, tiimm. 8 Impf. traf. 9. ©tcl^lctt Model. /izr/i".- fte^Ien [ta^t geftol^Ien fttc^tft ftiefjl steal ftie^It befe^Iett; command. empfe^Iett, recommend, fommett/ come. ^ !am, fommft, fonimt (rarely with umlaut). 10. Stinnett Model. Parts: f^jintiett f|)ann gefponnen spin beginnen, begin. rtnnen, flow. finnen, think. geiDinncn, win. frf)tt)tmmen, swim. 11. ^clfctt Model. Parts: ^elfeti l^ttlf ge^otfeti ^ttfft l^ilf help mi brefd^en/ thresh. f(^eltett, scold. t)erbergen, hide, gelten/be worth. fterben, die. t)erberben, spoil. n^erben/ become. 1 Impf. brafcf) or brofd^. 2 impf. ttjarb or trurbe in sg., pi. hjurbcn, etc., only; pres. 2 sg. and 3 sg. ItJirft, tuirb ; impve. ttJCrbc. 138 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 148 12. Singctt Model. Parts: fitigen fang gefungen sing binben, bind. rittgen, wring. fpringen, spring, bringen, press. |(i)Ung en, twine; swallow, trinfen, drink, finben, find. fc^lDtnben, vanish. tt)tnben, wind, gelingen, succeed. f(^n)tngen, swing. gtDingen, force, flingen, sound. finfen, sink. 13. 8(^(agctt Model. Parts: fi^Iagen fd)Iug gefc^tagen f(^fag[t ft^Iage strike fc^ISgt baden/ bake. laben,^ load ; invite. tragen, carry, fasten, drive. f(i)affen/ create. tDad^fen, grow, graben, dig. ftel)en/ stand. n^afdien, wash. 1 Impf. bu!, or more usually bacfte. ^ 2 sg. and 3 sg. Icibft, Icibt or rabeft, \^\itX. ^\^Vi\, fc^afffc fdjafft. * ftanb (ftunb, obsolete), geftanben. 14. fallen Model. Parts: faCen fiet gefaflen faKft faCe fall fallt blafen, blow. ^angen/ hang. raten, advise, braten, roast. ^anen/ hew. rnfen,^ call, fangen/ catch, ^et^en, bid ; be called, fi^fafen, sleep, ge^en/ go, walk. laffen, let. fto^en, knock. f)alten, hold. laufen, run. 1 Impf. fing. 2 gtng, gcgangen. ^ i^pf. {jing, * tjieb, l^aufS l)aut. 5 ntffl, ruft. 15. Anomalous Verbs. Parts: fetn tt)ar getpefen be tun tat getan do § 148] LESSON XXXV 139 EXERCISE XXXV N.B, It is not intended that the following exercise should be com- pleted at this stage, but that its various parts should be used from time to time at the discretion of the teacher, for drill in the conjugation of strong verbs. For the vocabulary of this and following exercises, see end of volume. A, Review § 148, i, and translate: i. As the woodcutter was grinding his axe, it slipped out of his hand. 2. When I was young I suffered much from (an, dat.) toothache. 3. Mary- has torn (jerret^en) her new dress. 4. The thief was seized (ergretfett) as he was sneaking into the house. 5. That bad boy has pinched his httle brother. 6. Charles was punished because he whistled in school. 7. The boys have flung their books on the ground. 8. Two officers were riding with the emperor through the park. 9. The farmers were cutting their wheat last week. B, Review § 148, 2, and translate: i. The emperor as- cended the throne in the year 1888. 2. You thought I was in the wrong because I was silent. 3. Would you stay here if I staid with you ? 4. The poor girl screamed when the dog bit her. 5. Where are the books which I (have) lent you? 6. The tree was not thriving, because the soil was too poor. 7. The teacher has proved to us that we were wrong. 8. He seemed to be angry with (auf, ace.) us. 9. I staid at home because I was suffering from headache. 10. The sheep were being driven to the pasture. 11. I have already copied my exercises. 12. I hope I have avoided (t)ermeiben) all mistakes this time. C, Review § 148, 3, and translate : i. The birds have flown into the wood. 2. The students have lost much time this winter. 3. The witness swore that he recognized the thief. 4. The enemy fled when they were attacked. 5. I picked up a book which was lying on the table. 6. Robert weighed more a year ago than he weighs now. 7. I have offered a thousand marks for this picture. 8. The children are not dressed yet. I40 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 148 9. My parents have (are) moved into another street. 10. This pen is bent; I cannot write with it. 11. I should be sorry if I lost this beautiful ring. D, Review § 148, 4, 5, and translate: i. Has the gar- dener watered the flowers and cut the grass? 2. A river swells when the ice melts. 3. This river is always swollen in spring. 4. This basket was woven by a bhnd man. 5. The cows are already milked and have been driven to the pasture. 6. The doors are locked ; I locked them myself. 7. It vexed me that this pretty bird had been shot (use man). 8. Have you smelled those roses? They smell very fine. 9. The cat drank the milk which I poured into a cup. io„ The dog has (is) crept behind the stove because he was * cold (f rterett). II. We have not swum in the river, because it was flowing so fast. E, Review § 148, 6, 7, and translate : i. Have you seen my gloves? 2. Yes; they are lying on the table. 3. What has happened to your little sister? 4. She stepped on a piece of glass and cut her foot. 5. This happened in the holidays, and she recovered very slowly. 6. She has now quite recovered. 7. Don't forget, my boy, that the door is locked at ten. 8. It often happens that the professor forgets his umbrella. 9. This student reads many books, but he soon forgets what he has read. 10. The horse was eating his oats in the stable, while his master was dining. 11. Don't step on the ice, Robert; it is very thin, the sun has melted it. 12. Charles, please give this letter to your uncle. 13. The stranger trod on my foot, but at once begged my pardon. 14. Please read (t30rlefen) this poem to me, Sarah. 15. The newspapers tell us what is happening in the world. 16. See, my child, how brightly the sun shines. F, Review § 148, 8, 9, and translate: i. One officer com- mands many soldiers. 2. The officer commanded his soldiers to shoot, and they shot. 3. Thin ice breaks when one treads § 148] LESSON XXXV 141 on it ; take care, child. 4. The child was frightened when it saw the soldiers. 5. Speak louder, my boy, I cannot hear you. 6. I spoke as loud as I could. 7. This man speaks French and German well. 8. I have often met this gentleman ; I met him yesterday at my brother's. 9. You have taken my book, Mary ; take this one. 10. My watch was stolen from (au^) my room. II. The doctor has recommended me to go (jteljen) to a warmer climate. G, Review § 148, 10, 11, and translate: i. That fruit is bad (spoiled) ; throw it away, my child. 2. Honor is worth more than life. 3. This coin is not current here. 4. The good man repays evil with good. 5. Why do you scold us, dear mother? 6. One gladly helps one (eitiem) who helps himself. 7. This boy has swum over the river. 8. You have reflected long enough. 9. The boy was ashamed, and hid his face. 10. The farmer is threshing his oats to-day. 11. The wheat is already threshed. 12. When did your uncle die? 13. When a good king dies, the people (SSoI!, n,) mourn. 14. My youngest brother won a prize at (bei) the examination. 15. One should always finish what one has begun. H, Review § 148, 12, and translate : i. Have you succeeded in learning (to learn) German? 2. The traveler jumped from his horse and tied him to (atl) a tree. 3. I have found the money I lost yesterday. 4. The telephone was invented by Mr. Bell. 5. My pen has disappeared ; do you know where it is? 6. Here it is; I have brought it to you. 7. I should be much obliged to you if you sang that song again. 8. The women on the shore screamed and wrung their hands, when the boat sank, in which their husbands were (fid) befitlben). 9. They were at once swallowed up by the waves and were drowned. 10. I have been forced to sell my house. 11. Clara's voice sounded very hoarse, as she had a cold. y. Review § 148, 13, and translate : i. Has the clock struck yet? 2. It is just striking ten. 3. This train goes 142 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 149 very slowly. 4. Are you invited (etulaben) to the ball at Mrs. Braun's? 5. The gardener is digging a large hole in the gar- den. 6. Yesterday he was digging (uTUgraben) a flower-bed. 7. This tree is growing fast. 8. It grew two or three feet last year, but it bore no fruit. 9. God created the earth and all that is therein. K. Review § 148, 14, and translate : i. The ship struck on a rock and sank. 2. The wind was blowing violently. 3. The captain did not leave (tierlaffett) his ship until it was sinking. 4. The child fell and knocked its head on the ice. 5. The woodcutter was cutting down a big tree. 6. What was the name of the gentleman whom we met yesterday? 7. Are you still asleep, John? I have called you twice. 8. My father never lets me sleep later than seven o'clock. 9. Our doctor advises me to rise early. 10. Mine advised me to rise late. T I. My father's picture hangs over my writing-table. 12. How do you like this town? 13. When did you begin (atlfattgen) to learn German? 14. This train stops at all stations (©tatiott,/.)- 15. If you had run more quickly, you would have won the prize. 16. Adolf runs quicker than you. LESSON XXXVI 149. Reflexive Pronouns and Verbs. ©irf| loben, to praise one's self. Sirf| etttbilben, to imagine. Pres, Indie. Fres. Indie, \&j lobe mic^ tc^ bilbe tnir ein bu lobft bic^ bu bilbeft btr ein er lobt fief) er bilbet fid) ein tt)ir toben un^ tr)ir bilben un^ ein i^r lobt end) i^r bilbet eucf) ein fie toben \x6) fie bilben fid) ein ©ie toben fid) ®ie btfben fid) ein Per/. Indie, P^rf, Indie. \^ ^abe mid) getobt, :c. t(^ \)^^t mir eingebitbet, 2C., 2C. § 152] LESSON XXXVI 143 Observe : i. The pronouns of the ist and 2nd persons have no special form for reflexive action. 2. Those of the 3rd person (including the formal (Sie) have the form fid) for both dative and accusative of all genders and both numbers. Note. — Transitive verbs in English are frequently also used intransi- tively; such verbs are usually reflexive in German : S)a§ ^Setter l)at fid| gednbert, 'The weather has changed'; 2)ie Xiix offnete flc^, * The door opened.' 150. Goverament of Reflexives. ^'C^ f(^amte mi(^ feiner. I was ashamed of him. ©rbarme bid) ber Slrmett. Take pity on the poor, ^egnugen ®te fid) batntt. Content yourself with that. Qd} tann mir ba^ bentetl- I can imagine that. Observe: i. The reflexive object is usually in the accusa- tive, the remote object being in the genitive, or governed by a preposition. 2. The reflexive object is sometimes in the dative and the remote object in the accusative. 151. Reciprocal Pronouns. @te tDerben ftd^ iPieber fe^en. They will see each other again. SBir begegneten un^ (^^z.). We met each other. SBir (ieben cinanben We love one another. Observe: Reflexive pronouns are used in the plural to ex- press reciprocal action j but in case of ambiguity einattber re- places them for all persons. 152. Emphatic Pronouns. !Du fag ft e^ fclfift You say so yourself. (grfennt euc^ fcI6cr. Know yourselves (not others). ®ct6ft ber ?e^rer fagt e§. Even the teacher says so. Observe : The indecHnable [elbft or [etber is used to em- phasize pronouns and nouns ; fetbft is also used adverbially (=au(f) or fogar, *even'), and then precedes. - 144 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 152 EXERCISE XXXVI Idioms: i. Jpabeit Sic ftri^ gut ttittcr^altcn? Did you enjoy your- self? 2. SSie })at 3l|ttCtt t>a^ @ff ctt gcfrfimcrft? How did you enjoy your dinner? 3. (Bi^ auf bCtt 2Bcg ntatf)Ctt, to set out (on a walk, etc.). A. §eute ertt)a(^te ii^ [i^ott urn ijalh fed^^ U^n 3^^ f^anb fofort auf unb fteibete micf) f(f)nell an, benn t(^ ^atte befc^Ioffen, eitten ®pa5iergang ju mac^en, 9J?utter riet mtr, mid) iDarm an5U5ief)en, fonft tDiirbe i(^ mic^ erfcilten. ^c^ meinte aber, ba^ fei nt^t nottg. „^u trrft bii^, liebe S%ra/' fprad^ fie, ,,ba^ SBetter ijat fi^ geiinbert; e^ ift fe^r fait getDorben/' 911^ ic^ burcf) ben ^arf ging, begegnete ic^ meiner greunbin 6Ife» J)a^ n)unberte mxfi) nictit, benn tt)ir treffen nn^ oft an btefer ©telle. SBtr begrii^ten un6 unb freuten nn^ itber btefe^ ^ufammentreffen, benn ©Ife ^atte fief) au(^ 5U einem frit^en ®|)a3tergang entfi^Ioffen. 3tuf bem SBege nnter^ielten tDir nn^ prd(J)ttg. 5yjac^bem wix eine ®tunbe gegangen tnaren, fe^ten toxx un^ auf eine ®anf am SBege, um un^ ein n^enig au^5uru^en. ©a e^ aber anfing ju fi^neien, er^oben toir un^ balb unb mad^ten un^ auf ben §eimn)eg. Untertreg^ trennten tt)ir un^ unb i^ fe^rte atlein nac^ §aufe juritd. B. Continue the following: i. Qii) faun mtd^ fefbft au^ fteiben, bu . . . bid^, ic. 2. Qd) tDerbe mi(^ iDarm anjie^en. 3. Qij ijaht mi(^ fe^r barltber gelDunbert. 4. -^(^ fonnte mt(^ ni(^t baju entfc^Iie^en. 5. SBir ^aben un^ oft ^ier.ge- troffen. 6. Qdj fc^dme mi(^ meine^ ^etragen^, bu ♦ ♦ ♦ beine^, :c* 7. Q6) befanb mid^ gar ni^t mo^f. C Oral: i. Wie geht es Ihnen heute? 2. Wie befindet sich Ihr Herr Vater? 3. Glaubst du, daB das Wetter sich heute andern wird? 4. Haben die Kinder sich schon ange- kleidet? 5. Konnen sie sich selbst anziehen? 6. Wo haben sich die beiden Freundinnen getroffen? 7. Wozu hatten sie § 152] LESSON XXXVI 145 sich beide entschlossen? 8. Wollen Sie sich nicht auf diese Bank setzen? 9. Hast du deine Aufgabe nicht selbst ge- schrieben? 10. Schamst du dich nicht deines Betragens? D, I. The weather has changed. 2. We must dress more warmly, if we mean to go out. 3. Otherwise we shall catch cold. 4. I think you are mistaken ; the weather is warmer now. 5. I don't wonder at that. 6. The weather often changes quickly in this country. 7, Well (ttUTt), have you made up your mind to take a walk? 8. Certainly; and I shall be glad to accompany you. 9. We shall set out at once. 10. Who is that lady you bowed to? 11. Oh, that is a friend of my sister's. 12. They know each other very well. 13. She and I always bow to each other when we meet. 14. I am tired. 15. So am I. 16. Sit down on this bench and rest a little. 17. I fear it will begin to snow soon. 18. In that case we must go home. 19. I am sorry that we must part now, but we have enjoyed ourselves very much (gut). 20. It is to be hoped we shall meet again this evening. ^. SefeftM: ^rt^ft bu :93 lumen, fet 6ef^eiben, gfjttnm nt(^t gar fo t)tele fort ! ©ie^', bie ^(umen mitffen'^ leiben, ©ocf| fie jieren il)ren Drt. 5Kttnm eitt paar unb Ia§ bie attbern (gte^n im ®ra6 unb an bem ®trauc^ ! 2lnbre, bie t)oriiber tDanbern, greu'n fid) an ben Slumen auc^. 9lad^ btr fommt titelletc^t ein mliber aOSanb'rer, ber be^ 2Bege^ jte^t 2^ritben ®inn^ ; — ber freut \\&) wieber, SBenn er au^ ein 9ti3^Iein fie^t. 146 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§IS3 LESSON XXXVII 153. Mixed Conjugation. Lifin. Impf. Indie. Fast Part, Pres. Indie, Meaning, miffen iru^tc gett)ugt tDei^ know biirfen burfte geburft barf may lonnen fonnte gefonnt fann can mogen mo(f)te gemoi^t mag may miiffen mu^te gemu^t mng must foHen foflte gefoHt foil shall n)oflen iDolIte getDoIIt \M will Observe : The im] perfect indicative and past participle have the weak ei idings -te, , -t, without umlaut. Note. — The imperative is wanting in all, except tt)tffen, tt)iffe, IZ,, and U)oEett, tt)oEe, , :c* 154. Present Indicative. \i) n)et^ barf !ann mag mn^ foK iDtH bu trei^t barfft fannft mag ft mn^t fotlft tDtllft er \^t\% barf fann mag mu^ foH trill iDtr tDtffen biirfen fonnen mbgen miiffen foHen tpotlen tf)r iDi^t bitrft fonnt mogt mix^t font iDoIIt fie iDiffen biirfen fonnen mogen miiffen foHen iDoIIen Observe : I. The vowel change in the singular (except follen) and the absence of personal terminations in the first and third singular. 2. The plural is formed regularly from the infinitive stem. 155. Subjunctive. Pres. \i) itiiffe, bitrfe, fonne, moge, miiffe, folle, n)ofle, 20. :C. 2C. 2C. 2C. 2C. 2C. Impf, \i) loit^te, biirfte, fonnte, modE)te, mit^te, follte, iDoItte, 20. 20. 20. 20. 20. 20. 20. Continue the paradigm with regular subjunctive endings. Observe : The absence of umlaut in f oHte and inotlte. § 158] LESSON XXXVII 147 156. Compound Tenses. Perf. Ind, \i) ^abe, bu ^aft, 2c. getDU^t, geburft, it. Per/. Subj. id) f)abe, bu f)abeft, 2C» geiDu^t, geburft, :c. Plupf. I/id, t(^ ^atte, bu ^atteft, 2c. getDU^t, geburft, 2c, Plupf, Subj, x&f ptte, bu I)atteft, 2c. gett)u^t, geburft, :c. Put Jnd, t^ merbe, bu mirft, zc, tt)iffeu, burfeu, 2C. 7^///. 6'///^/. t(^ merbe, bu i^erbeft, 2C» tDiffeu, bitrfen, :c. Put Perf. Ind, \6) merbe, bu xovc]i, :c, geiDU^t, 2c., ^aben. PuUPerf.Subj. \^ iDcrbe, bu merbeft, :c. getDU^t, 2c,, ^aben* Simp, Condi, i^ tDurbe, bu iDUvbcft, 2C. miffen, bilrfen, 2c. Comp, CondL id) miirbe, bu murbeft, 2c. geit)u^t, 2c,, {)aben. /V;/. /«/;/. geiDU^t f)abeu, geburft I)aben, 2c. 157. Modal Auxiliaries. The verbs bitrfeu, f5unen, tuogen, TUitffen, foHen, tnoHeu, with the verb laffen, are called ' modal auxiliaries,' since they form constructions equivalent to various moods ; they all govern an infinitive without ju: ^6) fauu lefeu. I can read {potential), ^i) mod)te ge^en. I should like to go {optative), ?affeu @ie un^ ge^en. Let us go {imperative), 158. General Remarks on Modals. i. These verbs, unlike their English equivalents, have an infinitive and past participle, and are hence capable of forming a complete set of tenses : ^d) tDerbe arbeiten mliffeu. I shall be obliged to work. gr tpirb ni(^t tommeu f ouneu. He will not be able to come. 2. After a governed infinitive, in the compound tenses, the past participle takes the form of an infinitive : Sr ^at tttd^t fpieleu fBnnen. He was unable to play, ©r ^at e^ fd)icfeu laffen. He caused it to be sent. Note. — The verbs l)5rCttand fcl)Ctt (and less commonly l)eigen, ^e(fen, Iel)ren, (crnen, mad)en) also share this peculiarity : 3(^ \^Q\it i^n fommen l)oren (fet)en), 'I heard (saw) him come.' 148 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ I59 3. They may also be used independently (without a governed infinitive), and even as transitive verbs, and have then the regular forms of the past participle in compound tenses : @r ^at Titd^t flctoottt. He was not willing. Qd) ijabt nit SBeitl Qtmodft I have never liked win&. 4. Owing to the defective conjugation and limited meaning of the English modals, German modal constructions are vari- ously rendered into English (see next section and §§ 174-180). 5. The imperfect subjunctive is regularly used for the simple conditional : Qd) bitrfte e^ tun. I should be allowed to do it. Qd) tndd^te e^ tun. I should Hke to do it. 6. Distinguish carefully between 'could' (='was able'), fonnte (indie.) and 'could' (= 'would be able'), fiintlte (condl.) : (Sr !onnte e^ ntrf)t tun, ba er He couldn't (was unable to) franf tDar. do it, as he was ill. dx fSnnte e6 ni^t tun, inenn He couldn't (would be unable er and) iDOttte. to) do it, even if he would. Note. — The infin. of a verb of motion (especially fomntett, gcl^en) is often omitted after the modals when an adverb or adverbial phrase denot- ing * whither ' is present: ^d) tt)iE ^eretn, *I wish to come in'; (Sr fott na(^ §aufe, * He is to go home.' 159. Primary Signification of Modals. The following para- graphs contain examples of the commoner uses of modals ; for the construction of the compound tenses and the more idiomatic distinctions, see Lesson XL : 1. S)itrfen (permission, concession): !j)arf t(f) @ie begteiten? May I accompany you? SBir biirfen 9?omane Ie[en. We are allowed to read novels. 2. Sbnnen (abihty, possibility) : (Sr fonntc md)t f(^n)immen. He could not swim. S5a^ fann fetn. That may (possibly) be so. gbnnen (2te J)eutfd}? Do you know German? § i6o] LESSON XXXVII 149 3. SWogen (preference, concession) : (Sr moc^te nid)t arbeiten. He did not like to work. @r mcic^te (gem) bleiben. He would like to stay. gr mag bleiben. He may (let him) stay. 4. SftUffen (necessity, obligation) : SBtr mitffen atle fterben. We must all die. SBir iDerben irarten miiffett- We shall have to wait. 5. @oHen (obligation, duty) : Qii) [ott tnorgen abreifen. I am to start to-morrow. SJa^ [oHten tDtr tun? What were we to do? S)a^ foHte er nic^t tun. He ought not to do that. Note. — The obligation is that imposed by the will of another. 6. SBoIten (resolution, intention) : @r tciir nxd)t iDarten. He is unwiUing to wait. Qd) n)ill morgen fc^reiben. I mean to write to-morrow. 7. !^affen (with imperative force, § 117) : ?a[fen ®te mic^ bleiben. Let me stay. 160. English ' shall ' and ' will.* 3cf) tDcrbc ertrtnfen unb nte== I shall be drowned, and no- manb hitrb nttc^ retten. body will save me. Qij tottt ertrtnfen unb nie* I will be drowned, and nobody manb foil mic^ retten. shall save me. Observe: i. The English 'shall* and 'will' must both be rendered by tuerben when they express mere futurity. 2. But if they express obligation or resolution, they must be rendered by follen and tt)oHen respectively. EXERCISE XXXVII A. Qii tt)tH pr @tabt fa^ren ; millft bu mtt, (gmtt? — 55a« moi^te id) tt)of)(, menu ic^ biirfte, aber eigent(t(^ foHte tc^ arbeiten. 3d) mu^ ben i^ater erft fragen, ob ic^ mitfa^ren barf. I50 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ i6o — S)ann Tniiffen iDtr un^ beeilen, — @oHen toxv 5um ©a^n^of ge()en ober faf)ren? — 8a^ un^ lieber fasten, fonft mbc^ten tDtr ben 3^8 t)erfautnen, — 35a [inb it)ir am Sa^n^of, — 8a^ un^ je^t bie gaf)rfarten faufen; e^ tft ^o^e ^eit. — 3l(^, t(^ mug meitt 'iportemonnaie ju §aufe gelaffen f)aben ; fonnteft bu mir ettra^ ®etb t)orf(^tegen? — 9JJit SSergniigen, aber ic^ ijaht nur tDentg bet mir, — ®ann miiffen mir britter Piaffe f a^ren, fonft moc^te e^ ni(f)t au^rei^en, — SBeigt bu tt)ie tiiel ^eit tDir in ber @tabt ^aben? — Uber brei ©tunben. — S)ann merben iDtr bem gupallfpiet beitro^nen fonnen, — ©a^ moc^te id) nic^t; id} mag biefen ©port ni(f)t ; ic^ mo(J)te tieber ba^ 2JJufeum be^ fuc^en> — 3l(^ ! xii) tt)ugte nic^t, bag bu bi^ fitr fo etiDa^ inte^ teffierteft, — Sir iDerbenun^ alfo am ©at)n^of trennenmiiffen. — Sann unb tDO folten irir un^ mieber treffen? — Um 5.45 auf bem ^a^n^of,— ®ut ; alfo auf SBieberfe^en ! B. Continue: i. Qd) tt)eig uxiji, \va^ ba^ bebeuteu foIL 2. Qd) rnugte nxd)t tna^ id) moHte, bu * . . bu, :c, 3. Qd) m'6d)te au^gel)en, tDenn ic^ bitrfte, bu . ♦ . bu, tc. 4. Qdj fann fe^r gut ©eutf^. 5. Qd) Unntt tint 9?eife madjen, tt)enn ii^ iDoIIte, bu . * . bu, 2c. 6. Qd} n)erbe morgen nxdjt lommen fonnen. 7. Qd) ^abe biefen SKenfc^en nie gemoc^t. 8. Qd) U)ar !ranf unb fonnte ni^t arbeiten, 9. Qd) n)erbe biefe 3lufgabe madien mitffen. 10. Qd) foflte ba^ eigentlii^ je^t tun. C, Oral: i. Konnen Sie Deutsch? 2. Kann Ihr Bruder Deutsch lesen? 3. Konnte er diesen deutschen Brief lesen? 4. Wohin mochten Heinrich und Emil gehen? 5. Diirfen wir mit (gehen)? 6. Mochten Sie nicht Heber erster Klasse fahren? 7. Darf ich mich auf diese Bank setzen? 8. Mogen Sie das FuBballspiel nicht? 9. Werden Sie heute dem Spiel beiwohnen konnen? 10. Diirften Sie nicht ausgehen, wenn Sie woilten? II. Wo konnte ich Sie wieder treffen? 12. Wissen Sie, wie viel Uhr es jetzt ist? 13. WuIJten Sie nicht, wie viel Uhr es war? § i6i] LESSON XXXVIII 151 D, 1. Henry and Emil mean to go to town. 2. They would like to attend the football game. 3. They don't know whether they may. 4. They really ought to work to-day. 5. Father, may I go to town? 6. Might Emil and Robert go with [me] ? They would like [to go] along (mit). 7. Yes, but you will have to come back early. 8. I don't know whether we can ; we will come home as soon as possible. 9. Emil wanted to buy a ticket, but couldn't find his purse. 10. Henry had to advance him some money. 1 1 . Will they be obliged to travel third class ? 12. I think (glauben) not ; they must have money. 13. Robert doesn't wish to attend the football game ; he doesn't like the game. 14. He has never Hked it. 15. Neither have I (id) aud^ ntd)t). 16. He prefers to visit (t)efu(^t Iteber) the museum when he is in town. 17. We didn't know that; we thought he meant to accompany us. 18. Here we are at the station. 19. We must part here. 20. But we could meet again at the (am) museum, couldn't we? 21. Certainly, and let us go home at 6 o'clock. 22. We have to be at home before seven. E, Lesestiick : Der tlirkische Gesandte in London wohnte einst einem lebhaften FuBballspiel bei. Er folgte dem Spiel mit groJBem Interesse. Als es voriiber war, fragte ihn sein Begleiter : " Nun, was denken Sie vom FuBballspiel ? " Der Gesandte antwortete : " Ich bin noch nicht im klaren dariiber ; flir ein Spiel scheint es mir ein biBchen zu viel und fiir eine Schlacht ein bifichen zu wenig." LESSON XXXVIII 161. Possessive Pronouns. They are formed as follows from the stems of the corresponding possessive adjectives : — 1. With endings of btefer model, without article (see § 31, 2). 2. With definite article and weak adjective endings : 152 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§162 Singular, Masc. Fem. Neut. iV. ber meinc bie metnc ' ba^ meinc G, be^ meincn, it. ber meincn, :c, be^ meincn, iz. Plural. bie mettien ber meincn, ic. 3. With definite article and ending -ig -f weak endings : Singular. Masc. Fem. Neut. N, ber metntgc bie meintGC ba^ meintge G. be^ meinigcn, :c, ber metntgen, iz. be^ meinigcn, 2c* Plural. bie tneinigen ber tneinigen, ic. Note. — In unfrlge and eurige the C of the stem is always omitted. 162. Use of Possessive Pronouns. S)er §ut ift meiner (ber meine, The hat is mine. ber meinige). 3d) ^cibe meinen §nt, aber fie I have my hat, but she has not l^at (ben) i^r(ig)en nxijt hers. Observe: i. The three forms given in the previous section are interchangeable, without difference of meaning, the first (or shortest) form being the most usual. 2. The stem of the possessive pronoun depends on the gender, number, and person of its antecedent. Notes. — i . A possessive pron. used as predicate may also have the uninflected form: S)iefe S3u(f)er ftnb fcttt^ * These books are his.' 2. Observe the following idiomatic uses of the possessive pronoun : %\t 3)lein(ig)en, bie ®ein(ig)eri, *My (his) friends, family,' etc.; 3(^ trerbc bag 3D^ein(ig)c tun, * I shall do my part.' § i63] LESSON XXXVIII 153 3. The forms mcittC^gleidjCtt (beinc^glcic^en, etc.), meaning * a person, or persons, like me, you,' etc., are used as indeclinable substs. : SSir trerbeit fcinci^g(cicl)Cit nie mieber erbliden, * We ne'er shall look upon his like again/ 163. Possessive Dative. ©^ fiel t^m auf bctl ^0)3f . It fell on his head. gin 5Rage( jcrri^ mir ben 9?o(f , A nail tore my coat. gr [(^iittelte feinem alten He shook the hand of his old greunbe bie §anb. friend. @r fc^nitt firff ben ginger ab. He cut off his (own) finger. Observe: i. With parts of the person, clothing, etc., the possessive adjective is commonly replaced by the dative of the personal pronoun or of a noun + the definite article. 2. If the possessor is the subject, the reflexive pronoun is used when the action is reflexive. Note. — But when there is no reflexive action, the refl. pron. is omitted : ^X fc^iittelte ben ^'Opf, * He shook his head.' EXERCISE XXXVIII A, 211^ etn arnter gol^^aner etne^ 2^age^ ant Ufer etne^ gfnffe^ ©cinnte fcittte, glitt i^m bie Slyt au^ ber §anb nnb fiet in^ tiefe Saffer. „^d) Ungliicftirfjer," rief er, ^inie foH it^ je^t Srot fUr bie 3Keinigen tierbienen?'' (5r fe^te fic^ ^in nnb meinte lant. !j)a ranf(f)te ba^ SBaffer ; etne ^i^t erfcfiien nnb fragte i^n, ina^ i^m gefrf)e^en fei. „3l(^!" eriDiberte ber 3lrnte, „bie 2lyt ift mir in^ SBaffer gefallen." „Sei rn{)ig/' ^pvadj fie, ,Ad) tt)ill ba^ aKeinige tnn, bir bie 9lft n)ieber jn tjerfi^affen." S)ann tand)te fie nnter nnb fant mit einer gotbnen 9l^*t ()eranf. ,,3ft biefe 3l^t bein?" fragte fie. „^d) nein!" ermiberte ber ^o(5f)aner, „ba^ ift bie meinige nic^t." SBieber tjerf^manb bie 9Jife nnb brac^te eine fifberne ^eranf. „3ft ba^ bie beine ?" fragte fie. „anc^ ba^ ift nic^t nteine/' tierfefete er ; bie 154 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 163 meittige ift au^ &\tn." ^06:} etntnal taudjte fie unter unb erfc^ien mit ber ridjttgett, ^SBeil bu fo et)rUc^ getDefen bift, iDifl id) bit auc^ bie golbne unb bie filberne l^i f(^enfen/' ^pxad) fie* gro^ banfte il)r ber §o(5f)auer unb fel)rte ju ben ©einen juriicE* B. ©mil tna(^t je^t toilette, 3^^^ft 5^^^^ ^^ ^^^ 9^*^* ^^^* ^uncti^ft tt)afd)t er fic^ forgfctltig bie |)anbe unb ba^ ©efic^t, S5ann biirftet er bie 3^^^^ ^^'^ fantmt fic^ bie §aare, ©eftern gerri^ i^m ein 5yfage( ben 9?o(f, §eute unrb er n)o{)I einen anbern anjieljen mitffen. Start, bift bu fertig, au^5ugef)en? Qd) gie^e ntir foeben ben Uber3iet)er unb bie §anbfd)ul)e an. Senn greunbe einanber begegnen, [0 ne()men fie ben §ut ab ober geben fic^ bie §anb. !Ca^ 3:rottoir ift ()eute fe^r glatt ; man fdnnte teit^t au^gleiten unb fi(^ ba^ ^ein brec^en. C. Continue: i. Wliv ift bie 3lyt au^ ber §anb geglitten, bir, 2c. 2. ^c^ l)aht ntir f(^neH ben diod ange^^ogen, bu * . . bir, 2C. 3. Qd) iDerbe mir }e^t bie §anbe lDafd)en, bu . * . bir, 2c, 4. Qd) bin au^geglitten unb ijahe mir ein :Sein gebrot^en, bu ♦ . ♦ bir, 2c» 5. Qd) tDill ba^- SJJeinige tun, bu * . . ba^ ©einige, 2c. £>. I. The woodcutter sat on the bank of a river and wept aloud. 2. A water-sprite appeared and said ; "What has hap- pened to you? Why are you weeping?" 3. He replied that his axe had slipped from his hand and fallen into the river. 4. The unhappy man had no axe, and could earn no bread for his [family]. 5. Thereupon the sprite dived and brought up a silver axe. 6. She asked him if this axe was his. 7. He said it was not his, since his was of iron. 8. Then she showed him a gold axe, which she had brought up out of the water. 9. The woodcutter was very honest, and would not accept this one. 10. He wanted only [what was] his [own]. 11. At last she brought up his and gave it to him. £. 1. This book is mine. 2. I have my pencil, and you have yours. 3. Emil has eaten his pear and also (a) part of § 1 64] LESSON XXXIX 155 mine. 4. Everybody loves his own [relatives, etc.]. 5. Henry, have you washed your face and combed your hair? 6. We shake hands with one another. 7. How did Robert break his leg? 8. Take off your hat, Emil. 9. Henry has torn my coat. 10. Put on your gloves. 11. A stone fell (^perf.) on my foot. 12. It hurt me very much. K gefeftiid: ®te^t etti ^trd^Iein im J)orf, ge^t ber SBeg bran t^orbei, unb bie §u^ner, bie ma(J)en am 3Beg ein ©efc^rei. Unb ber SBagen t)oH §eu, ber fommt t)on ber SBiefe, unb oben barauf fi^t ber §an^ unb bie gtefe. ^Cie iobein unb {uc^jen unb lad^en aHe beib', unb ba^ f(tngt burd) ben 3lbenb, e^ ift etne greub'! Unb tDdr' ic^ ber S5nig, gleid) tudr' id) babei unb na()nte jum 5:f)ron ntir einen 3Bagen t)oH §eu. - Robert ^einid. LESSON XXXIX 164. Degrees of Comparison. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. Xtxi), rich Xt\6)tX ret(^ft neu^ new neuer neucft fii^, sweet filler fiiBeft breit, broad breiter breitcft 156 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 165 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. ebel, noble ebfer ebelft teuer, dear teurer teuerft tniibe, tired tuuber mubeft aTigenef)m, agreeable atigenel)mer angene{}mft frfjne II, quickly [(^tieller fc^nellft Observe : i. Adjectives and adverbs form their comparative and superlative stems by adding -(e)r and -(e)ft to the positive stem. 2. Stems ending in a vowel (except c), a sibilant, -b or -t, re- tain c in the superlative. 3. Those in -cl, -en, -cr, drop c in the stem of the compar- ative. 4. Those in -c add -x and -ft only. 5. The endings are added regardless of length. 165. Umlaut in Monosyllables. gro^, great grS^er gri5^(ef)t !Iug, wise flitger flitgft arm, poor firmer firmft oft, often Sfter flfteft Observe : Most monosyllables with a, u, u (not au) in the stem take umlaut ; for exceptions, see dictionary. 166. Irregular Comparison. balb, e^e, soon ef)er ef)eft l^otf), high l^ijl^er ^o^ft gern(e), gladly Iteber Uebft na^e, near ndl)er ncic^ft gut, good, well) ^r. ^.^ t)iel, much mel)r meift iDoI)!, well J ' tDenig, little minber mtnbeft Notes. — i. SJle^r and mtttbet are invariable. 2. SBcnig has usually the regular forms mettiger, Wettigft. 167. Declension of Comparative and Superlative. Sin flet^tgercr ®(i)itler. A more diligent pupil. ^tX flet^tgere @cf)Uler. The more diligent pupil. S)er flei^igfte @(^uler. The most diligent pupil. § 1 69 J LESSON XXXIX 157 Observe : The attributive adjective has the same endings in the comparative and superlative as in the positive (see Lesson XVIII). 168. The Comparative. & ift dJter, al^ tc^. He is older than I. ^dj bin (cbcn) fo alt, tote er. I am (just) as old as he. 3e (befto) langer bie 9?a^t ift, The longer the night is, the bcfto (umfo) fiirjer ift ber shorter is the day. Jag. Observe: i. 'Than' = ali3 in a comparison of inequality. 2. 'As . . . as,' 'so . . . as' = fo . . . mtc in a comparison of equality. 3. 'The . . . the' before comparatives = jc or bcfto . . . jc, bcfto or umfo, and in complete clauses the former clause has the word order of a dependent sentence (verb last), the latter of a principal sentence (verb second). Notes. — i. The form with IttC^t, 'more/ is used when two qualities of the same object are compared : ®ie ift mc^t tlug aU fd^on, * She is more clever than pretty.' 2. The English * more and more ' = imtltcr 4- comparative : 2)er (Sturnt U)lrb immcr ^eftigct, *The storm grows more and more violent.' 169. The Superlative Relative. !j)er ®ee ift breiter al^ ber The lake is broader than the glu§, aber ba^ 9JJeer ift am river, but the sea is the breitcften. broadest. QVX ^'Uni ift ber Sag am The day is longest in June. Idngften* ©iefer 5*Iu^ ift ber breitcftc This river is the broadest (l^Iu© in 3lmerifa. (river) in America. (Sr lieft am bcftcn. He reads best. Observe : i. The relative superlative of adjectives does not occur in uninflected form, even in the predicate. 2. When no previously expressed noun can be supplied, the 158 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 170 superlative adjective is expressed in the predicate by the form with om, which is also the superlative form of the adverb. 3. If a noun can be supplied from the context, the superla- tive is expressed in the predicate by the definite article + the superlative with adjective inflection. Note. — The superl. adj. is regularly preceded by the def. art. or other determinative. 170. The Superlative Absolute. (gr ift Sufterft gitttg. He is most (exceedingly) kind, (gr ^at fcl^r flug ge^anbeft. He has acted most wisely. Observe : English * most/ indicating a quality in a very high degree, but without comparative force, is expressed in German by an adverb of eminence. Notes. — i. The superl. absolute of advs. may be expressed also by attf§ (=aitf ba^) prefixed to a superl. adj. ;• (Sr beforgt alleg aufj^ bcftc, *He attends to everything in the best possible manner.' 2. Advs. in -tg, -Hd), -fatlt, and a few monosylls., use the uninflected form in the superl. absolute : dx Idgt freunblic^ft griigen, *He v^^ishes to be most kindly remembered'; l)Od)ft, lilngft, * most highly, long since.' 3. A few superl. advs. end in -Ctt^ with special meanings: §i3d^ftcn§, *at most'; tnetftCUi^, 'for the most part'; Ttad)ftCtt§, 'shortly'; ttJenigfteUi^, ' at least.' 4. There is also a compar. absolute : (Sin (Ottgetet ©pa^tergaug, ' A somewhat long walk.' EXERCISE XXXIX ^. @te l^abett fe^r t)tel gereift, nid^t tt)a^r, §err 9}f. ?— ^an)o^I, aber metftett^ in (guropa. — ©lauben ®te tttdjt, ba^ matt auf amertfant[(J)en (Sifenba^ttett f^neller unb bequetner reift al^ m ^uropa ? — ?Jetn, f lonelier nic^t; bie f(^nellften 3iige trtfft man in (Snglanb, fo [agt man menigften^. — Unb \vk ift e^ in gran!rei(^ ? — 3tn(^ ber ©(^netfjng t)on Calais nac^ ^ari^ ge^ort jn ben fd)nel(ften ber 9BeIt. — gnnben ®ie bie fleinen 9lbtei(e nxd)i l)od)ft nnangenel)m, in meldje bie europa- ifdjen (5i[enba^nti3agen eingeteilt finb ? — '7fid)t im geringften ; im ®egentei(, man reift auf biefe 9Beife Diel ruljiger unb iDirb § lyo] LESSON XXXIX 159 t)iel tDentger t^on ben a}?itreifenben geftort, al^ bei nn^. — ®inb unfere Sd)(aflt)agen nic^t beffer al^ bie europdif d}en? — (grower freilid) finb fie, aber in ben Sd)Iafn)agen briiben ^aben \t jtDei 9?eifenbe einen 2lbtei( fiir fid), mo fie anf^ bequemfte fdjfafen unb au^ i^re 2:oi(ette mad)en tonnen. — ^^n -SSejng auf bie ©eforbernng be^ ©epiicf^ t)aben wiv e^ ^ier bod) mit nnfern @epacff(^einen bequemer, nid)t iDa^r? — .^n (Jnglanb finbet man allerbing^ biefe ginric^tnng auf fel)r lt)enigen 3^(1^^^ aber in ben meiften europdifdjen 8anbern er^d(t ber 9?ei' fenbe }e^t immer einen ®epd(ffd)ein, — -Sann man bort ebenfo bi((ig reifen, iDie ^ier? — ®ogar billiger, n)enn man jtpeiter ober britter Piaffe fd^rt ; am bitligften unb am lang- famften fdf)rt man mit bem fogenannten ,,Summe{jug/' wtU ^er an {eber Station anl}dlt. ^'e langfamer man fdl)rt, befto billiger fd[)rt man, — :33eften S)an!, §err SS*, fiir Qijxx ()od)ft tntereffante 3Jfittei(ung, B. Oral exercise on the above. C Insert comparative and superlative forms respectively in the blanks : i. Qd) bin mitbe, bu bift — , er ift — . 2. ®ie breite ®tra^e, bie — ©tra^e, bie — ©tra^e, 3. SBir arbeiten gut, xijv arbeitet — , fie arbeiten — . 4. Qii) fpiele menig, bu fpietft — , £ar( fpie(t — . 5. gine angene^me 9Jeife, eine — 9teife, bie — SReife. 6. Sfara ift flug, 3Karie ift — , aber Sari ift —. D. I. I find traveling (ba^ Steifeu) most interesting. 2. Traveling is most agreeable in summer. 3. The days are longest then, one can see more, and it is much pleasanter. 4. I like to take a somewhat long journey by (ju) water. 5. The fastest steamers go in less than five days from New York to Europe. 6. Germans travel a great deal, but in this country people travel still more. 7. One can travel second class very comfortably in Europe. 8. Most people (bie meiften ?eute) in Germany travel second class, even the wealthiest. 9. Over there you (man) can travel as comfortably second class as first l6o GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 170 class in America. 10. Besides, it is much cheaper. 11. You can travel cheapest third class, but the mixed trains (^erfoTtetl- 3Ug, :w.) often go very slowly. E, I. The European express trains are among (ge^dretl ju) the fastest in the world. 2. Is it not very disagreeable to travel with baggage? 3. Not at all; in most countries you now get checks. 4. In England, however, this arrangement is found on very few trains. 5. I find the compartments most pleasant. 6. You are much less disturbed by your (the) fellow- travelers. 7. The European sleeping-cars are smaller than ours, but one can at least sleep most comfortably in them. 8. I hope to be able to take a trip to Europe next summer. 9. You will find traveling just as cheap as in America and not less comfortable. 10. In Germany as in America, the farther you travel the more it costs. F, Lesestlick : Ich packe meinen Koffer und meine Hand- tasche. Ich miete einen Wagen. Ich fahre nach dem Bahn- hof. Ich bezahle den Kutscher. Ich gehe an den Schalter. Ich lose eine Fahrkarte nach Berlin. Ich rufe einen Gepack- trager. Ich gebe mein Gepack auf. Ich bekomme einen Gepackschein. Ich trete in den Wartesaal. Ich warte auf die Abfahrt des Zuges. Ich gehe auf den Bahnsteig. Ich steige in einen Wagen. Ich setze mich. Der Zug fahrt ab. LESSON XL 171. Compound Tenses of Modal Auxiliaries, i. The fol- lowing condensed paradigm illustrates the compound tense forms of the modal auxiliaries (including laffetl) with a governed infinitive : Perf. Lidic, x^ ^abe f^tetett bitrfcn, fdnnett, mogen, 2c. bu f)aft ,, ,, „ Perf, Subj\ t(^ ^abe bu ^abeft ,, ,, Plupf. Indie, \i) ^atte Phipf, Subj. \i) ^atte § 172] LESSON XL l6l Observe : The past participle here has the form of an infin- itive. Note. — The last form above replaces the compound conditional, which is not in use. 2. The following examples show the use of the pluperfect subjunctive as a shorter compound conditional : Q6) Ijdttt e^ tutt bUrfen. I should have been allowed to do it. Qd) ^dtte e^ tun !onnen. I could have done it. Qd) i}'dttt e^ tun mogen. I should like to have done it. Qi} ijdttt e^ tun muffen. I should have been obliged to do it. Q6) Ijdttt e^ tun follen, I ought to have done it. Observe : In all these examples, except the fourth, the German modal has the compound tense, and the governed in- finitive the simple tense ; whereas in English the modal has the simple, and the infinitive the compound tense. 3. These verbs have also another form of the perfect and the pluperfect, with the modal in a simple and the infinitive in a compound tense. The following parallel examples show the respective meanings of the two forms : 6r ^at e^ nt(f)t tun lonnen. He has been unable to do it. (Sr !ann e^ getan l^aben. He may possibly have done it. (Sr i)at e^ ni(J)t tun mogen. He didn't like to do it. 6r mag e^ getan ^aben. He may possibly have done it. dx l)at e^ tun ntliffen. He has had to do it. gr mu^ e^ getan ^aben. He must have done it. 6r t)at e^ tun tDoHen. He meant to have done it. dx tt)tll e^ getan {)aben. He pretends to have done it. 172. Word Order. In a dependent sentence with compound tense and governed infinitive, the auxiliary of tense (l}aben or tDerben) does not come last, but precedes both the participle and the governed infinitive ; i62 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§173 (Sr fagte, ba§ er e^ ni(^t fiafic He said that he had not cared tun mogeti- to do it. SBenn er ^atte !ommen tDoIIen. If he had wanted to come. ^d) iDCiB ntc^t, ob id) iDCrbe I don't know whether I shall fommen fdnnen* be able to come. 173. Various Uses of Modals. The following sections con- tain, for reference, examples of the idiomatic uses of the modal auxiliaries. 174. ^iirfett* S)arf id) fragen, tna^ er xoxU ? May I ask what he wants ? ®itrf te id) ®te bitten ? Might I request you ? S)u barf ft je^t gel)en. You may go now. 5)a^ biirfte f(f)on fein* That might possibly be. Qi) barf bel}aupten, ba^ biefe I venture to assert that this ?^ad)rtd}t nt(i)t n)at)r tft. news is not true. S5a^ barf id) nidjt. I am not allowed to do that. Observe : 1-3 indicate permission ; 4, 5, modest assertion ; 6 shows the absolute use. Note. — ^iirfett renders the English *may,' * might' in questions, as in I and 2 above. 175. ^ijttttcm Qd) I)atte fommen fdnnen. I could have come. S)a^ fann fetn. That may be. (Sr fann bie Seftion ntdjt. He doesn't know the lesson. Qd) ()abe nid^t gefonnt* I have not been able. Observe : i denotes abihty ; 2, possibility ; 3, the transitive use ; 4, absolute use. 176. WlHtn. Sftoge ber §tmmet ba^ geben! May Heaven grant that ! ^d) m5d)te gem bleiben. I should like to stay. (5r \}at nie arbetten mogen. He has never liked working. Qd^ ^Citte ba^ fe^en mijgen. I should like to have seen that. 3)n magft ben ©all be^alten. You may keep the ball. § 178] LESSON XL 163 ®te mtid^ten \xd) bod} tDoljl Perhaps you are mistaken after irren. all. (Sr tnac) 3e^n Qa\)Xt ait fein* He may be ten years old. J)a^ mag fein. They may be (but I doubt it). 3^cf) mag btefe^ SSnd) nxd)t. I don't like this book, ^c^ ge()e morgen,au^, mag e^ I am going out to-morrow regnett ober nid)t. whether it rains or not. 9Sie bem auc^ feitl mag. No matter how that may be. Observe : i denotes a wish ; 2-4, preference or hking ; 5, permission ; 6, modest assertion ; 7, 8, concession ; 9, tran- sitive use; 10, II, special idioms. Note. — The adverb gcrtt further emphasizes the idea of liking or preference, as in the second exaniple above. 177. SKiiffciu Sllle 3}?enf(^en mitffen fterbeti. All men must die. Qd) ^abe au^ge^en miiffen. I have had to go out. Qn atom mUB e^ ft^on fetn. It must be beautiful in Rome. g^ mu^ [el)r fa(t getDcfen fein, It must have been very cold, ba ber See jugefroren t[t. as the lake is frozen over. Qd) Ijaht gemu^t. I have been obliged to. Observe : i denotes necessity ; 2, compulsion by another person ; 3, 4, inference ; 5, absolute use. Note. — *To be obliged, compelled,' aftef a negative in simple tenses, is usually rendered by brauc^en : (Sr braud)t nic^t 5U ge^en, 'He is not obliged to go.' 178. epKctt. T)U fodft ntc^t tiJtett. Thou shalt not kill. (5r foil nid)t au^ge^en. He shall not go out. & i^attt gel)en follen. He ought to have gone. 9Ba^ fo(( geft^el^en? What is to be done? SBa^ fotlte ic^ tun ? What was I to do? (5r foH fe^r reic^ fein. He is said to be very rich. 3'C^ tDei^ nicf)t, tva^ id) fott. I don't know what I am to do. 9Senn er tommen foUte. If he should (were to) come. SS?a^ foH ba^? What does that mean? 1 64 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§179 Observe: i, 2 denote command; 3, duty or obligation; 4, 5, submission of the speaker's will ; 6, statement not vouched for by the speaker ; 7, absolute use ; 8, conditional use ; 9, special idiom. 179. noUtn, & iDiII nt(^t ge^ort^en. He won't (refuses to) obey. Sr iDill morgen abretfen. He means to go to-morrow. (Sr tDoHte eben ge^en. He was just about to go. ®a^ (Si^ tt)ill bre(f)en. The ice threatens to break. & iDtIt in 3"^^'^^ gett)e[en He asserts that he has been in fein. India, ^^d^ iDtK ba^ ^U(^ nt(^t. I don't want the book. Qd) i)aht nic^t geiDolIt. I didn't want to. Observe : i denotes exertion of will on the part of the sub- ject; 2, intention; 3, 4, impending action or event; 5, asser- tion or claim not vouched for by the speaker ; 6, transitive use ; 7, absolute use. 180. Saffcn. Saffen ®ie un^ fortge^en. Let us go away. SIZan ^t i^n reben laffen. He has been allowed to speak. J)er §auptmann lie^ ben The captain ordered the soldier (Solbaten beftrafen. ♦ to be punished. Qii) Ite§ ba^ ^nd) btnben. I had the book bound. 6^ lii^t ft(^ ni(f)t leugnen. It cannot be denied. 6^ IciBt ftc^ Iei(J)t madden. It is easily done. Observe: i, imperative use; 2, permission; 3, 4, causative- use; 5, 6, impersonal reflexive use. Note. — After (affcn the infinitive of transitive verbs has passive force, as in examples 3, 4, 5, 6, above. EXERCISE XL A, I. 311^ id} jnng tt)ar, fonnte id) fet)r gnt (gdjlittfd^n^ lau* fen. 2. Qd) I)citte geftern in^ JI)eater ge^en tonnen, iDenn id) § iSo] LESSON XL 165 gctDoHt t)atte. 3- 511^ ^i^i> mn^it t(^ immcr frii^ ju :Sett ge^cti- 4. ^tnn \mt utifere Slufgaben ntd)t mac^ten, fo iDiirbcn mx p C^aufe bkiben muffett. 5. SBir ^abett unfere Slufgabeti forgfcittig [c^reiben miiffen. 6. 9Bir luerben nod) gtDei ©tutibeti baratt arbeiten miiffen. 7. Sir iDiirbeu fie abf^reiben miiffeu, wtnn wix fie fc^tec^t mad)ten. 8. Modjttn n tt)m tjdtteft ^elfen iDolIen, fo l^dtteft bu e^ lei^t tun f5nnen. 14- 8affen @ie bie Uf)r nic^t fallen, B, I. gaffen ®ie ben ^affee jefet ^ereinbringen. 2. :33ei iDelc^em ©c^neiber ^aben ®ie biefen Uberjie^er ntad)en laffen? 3. 3^ ^abe biefe SBoc^e nic^t au^ge^en fonnen ; id) wax frauL 4. mx fjdtten biefe^ ^au^ fiir 9)1.20,000 faufen fonnen, iDenn voix gemollt {)dtten. 5- 3^fet fonnten tt)ir e^ nic^t fo l)i(ag befomnten. 6. aSir ^ben nid)t getDoIIt, aber n)ir {)aben gentu^t. 7. Sbnnten ®ie mir tt)ol)I eine geber Iei{)en? ^(^ modjte gern an nteinen 3Sater f(^reiben» 8. ^c^ n)dre pr ©tabt mitgefal)ren, menu id) geburft ptte. 9. J)er ge^rer fagte, ba^ id) nic^t mit bixrfe» 10. SBenn ieberntann tdte, tt)a^ er foHte, fo mitrbe bie SBelt t)iel beffer fein. n. T)iefe Same foil fe^r reic^ fein. 12. ®ie mill oiele S^ijxt in 3^nbien gelebt fjaben. 13. 3Kan f)dtte Un ©ieb ni(^t entfommen laffen foHen. C. Continue : i. Ich diirfte diesen Roman lesen, wenn ich wollte, du . . . 'wenn du, etc. 2. Ich hatte es ihm sofort sagen konnen. 3. Ich hatte ihn das nicht tun lassen soUen. 4. Dies ist der Uberzieher, den ich mir habe machen lassen, . . . den du dir, etc. 5. Ich hatte so einen Brief nicht schreiben mogen. 6. Ich werde mir ein Sommerkleid machen lassen. 7. Ich l66 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ i8o mochte heute gern spazieren gehen. 8. Ich habe das nicht tun wollen. 9. Ich muB es wohl getan haben. 10. Das mag ich vielleicht gesagt haben. D, I.I could write better if I had a better pen. 2. You have never been able to write well. 3. I should have had to stay at home if I hadn't done my exercises. 4. I should not have been able to go with you to-day. 5. As [a] child I didn't like to go to school, but I had to. 6. I have not cared to go out to-day. 7. These children were never allowed to stay up late. 8. I might stay up late this evening, if I wanted to. 9. Shall we be allowed to go out to-morrow? 10. The teacher said we ought not to go out in (bet) this cold weather. II. Where is the overcoat which you have had made ? 12. The tailor will have it sent to me to-morrow. 13. He has not been able to send it to-day. E, I. Mary could have written her exercise, if she had wanted to. 2. Charles has had to write his. 3. We always had to copy our exercises when we had done them badly. 4. When I was young, I could have learnt German, but I wouldn't. 5. Now I should like to learn it if I could, but I can't. 6. If the weather had been cold, we should have been compelled to stay at home. 7. We have never been allowed to stay out late. 8. We always had to come home earher than we liked. 9. You should have dressed more warmly. 10. The weather has changed, and you might easily have caught cold. 11. Don't play when you should study. 12. This man is said to have learnt German, but he knows nothing of it. 13. He pretends to have been two years in Germany. 14. Where is the house which this gentleman has had built for himself ? F, Lesestlick : Der Dichter Gilbert begegnete eines Tages einem aufgeregten Herrn, der ihn fragte : " Haben Sie einen Herrn mit einem Auge namens B. gesehen ?" " Nein," erwiderte Gilbert, "wie heifit denn eigentlich sein anderes Auge ? " § 183] LESSON XLI 167 LESSON XLI 181. Declension of Place Names. N, ber W^txn, the Rhine. N, bte (S^njeij, Switzerland. G, be^ m^tm{t)^. G, ber @c^n)et5. D. bem 9J^ein(e). D, ber (2cf)n)et5, ^. ben SR^eitt. A, bie ©^metj* iV. ©eutfd^Ianb, Germany. N, Berlin, Berlin. G, ©eutfc^lanb^. G. Sertin^. Observe: i. Proper names of places which are never used without an article (§ 108) are declined Hke common nouns. 2. If not generally used with an article or determinative, they take no ending except -^ in the genitive singular. Note. — S5uit may replace this gen., and must do so if the noun ends in a sibilant : 2)ie ©tragen tlOtt ^ari^, * The streets of Paris.' 182. Apposition. N, bie ©tabt 8onbon, the city N, ba^ ^5ntgret(^ *ipreu^en, of London. the Kingdom of Prussia. G. ber ®tabt Sotibon. G, be^ Sontgreid)^ ^reu^en. Observe : When a place name is defined by a common noun preceding it, the two nouns are in apposition, but the common noun only is inflected. Note. — The word %\Vi^ is regularly omitted in names of rivers : !l)cr mjtXXl, bic (gibe, *The (river) Rhine, Elbe.' 183. Adjectives and Nouns of Nationality. — i. Adjectives of nationality end in -ifrf|, except beutf^, and are used sub- stantively only of the language, being then written with a capital : !©eutfrf) ; gransbfifcf). German ; French (the language). Note. — They are also written with a capital when forming part of a proper name: 2)ag 2)eutf(^e 3Jieer, *The German Ocean.' i68 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 183 2. After the preposition auf, language names are used with- out article, and remain undeclined ; after other prepositions they take the article, and are declined : 2luf Deut[(^; im ©eutfc^en* In German. 3. Nouns of nationality end either in -c (^ttabe model), or in -er (WcAtV model), except ©eutfc^, which follows the adjec- tive declension : ®er granjofe; ein ^Xtn^t. The Frenchman; a Prussian. &n (Sngldnber (2ltneri!ancr)» An Englishman (American). 3)er S)eutfd)e; ein S)eutf(^er. The German; a German. Note. — The Eng. plur. adjectival noun, indicating all people of a par- ticular nationality, is always, except in the case of 2)cutf(i), rendered in German by the noun of nationality : 2)ie gran^ojen flnb Icb^after al^ bic ^nglcinber Ober bie 2)eutfd^en, *The French are more vivacious than the English or the Germans.' EXERCISE XLI A. (SOitt ber 8anb!arte ju ftubteren.) ®a^ ©eutfdie dttxd), ober T)eutfd)(anb, mie e^ gen)oI)n(i(^ ^ei^t, ift im 9^orben tiott ber 9iorbfee, tion ©cinemar! unb t»on ber Oftfee begrenjt ; im Often Don 9fiu^Ianb unb Ofterretrfj^Ungarn ; fiiblii^ t)on Ofterrei^ unb ber ®(^n)et5 ; bie n)eftlid)e ©renje bi(ben granfrei^, 33elgten unb goHanb. ©a^ J)eutf(^e 9?et(^ tDurbe n)d^renb be^ beutfc^^ franjofifd^en S'rtege^ im Qaljvt 18U gegriinbet unb SBil^elm ber (£rfte, S5ntg t)on ^reu^en, n)urbe bamal^ al^ erfter S5eutj(f)er Saifer proMamtert. @^ umfagt Dter Sontgreii^e, namlti^ : ^reu^en, ^at)ern, ®ad)[en, SBiirttemberg unb neun^ je^n fletnere Staaten, fotDte bie brei freien 9tei(J)^ftdbte, §am* burg, Bremen unb Siibed. S)ie §aupt[tabt 1)eut[d)Ianb§, fotDie be^ Sonigreii^^ ^reu^en, ift Berlin. Berlin ubertrifft fc^on an ginnjo^nerja^t bie ©tabt 'ipari^, ift aber nod) ni(f)t fo gro^ n)ie bie ©tabt Sonbon. ©ie §auptftabt ®al)ern^ ift aJiiind)en, unb ^ei^t auf (Snglifd) ,Mvinid)," ®ie §au|)tftabt § 1 83] LESSON XLI 169 be^ ^ontgretc^^ ©ac^fen ift ©re^ben, ®ie imi grb^ten gtuffc Don J)eutfd)Ianb finb bar 9Jt)ein unb bie iilbt. B, Oral on the map of Germany (see p. xxvi). C. I. The inhabitants of Germany are called Germans ; those (bie) of (t)on) England, Englishmen ; those of France, French- m,en. 2. Enghshmen speak English, Frenchmen speak French, and Germans speak German. 3. Do you speak German? 4. Not very well, but I can read it a little. 5. Then you should know something about Germany and the Germans. 6. We will take a look at (fic^ attfefjett) the map of the German Em- pire. 7. You see that Germany is situated between France, Belgium and Holland on (in) the west and Russia on the east. 8. Yes, and to the south lie Austria and Switzerland. 9. The Baltic, Denmark and the North Sea form the northern boun- dary. 10. Of the rivers of Germany the two largest are the Rhine and the Elbe, which both flow into the North Sea. II. The Rhine is celebrated for (iDCgen, ^tr ant 19. be^ tieben 33ater^ ©eburt^tag. gr er^ielt t)iele ^ubfcl)e ©efcfjenfe, barunter eine f(^one 3tu^^ gabe t)on @()afefpeare^ SBerfen in 10 Sanben, n)(>t)on bie erften brei bie Xrauerf|)iele, ber t)ierte, fiinfte unb fe(})[te bie '?uft- fpiele, unb ^^Vc^ T bi^ 9 bie I)iftorifc^en ®d)aufpiele entt}alten^ ma^renb fid^ ini 10. Sanbe bie @ebid|te befinben. (g^ mar fein 49. ©eburt^tag, "t^ er ant 19. Dftober 1858 geboren nmrbe. 9lnt miedietten 'J^atiember l^aft ®u eigent(id) ©eburt^- tag? ^i) ^abe teiber ben Sag tergeffen. @eute itber ac^t 5tage, ben 30. b^., erinarten UJir tneinen atteften :93ruber au^ gngfanb. §offent(i(^ ujerbc \^ fpateften^ ant 10. J)e;^ent^ ber ju ®ir tommen fonnen, unt S^ir ben tange t)erf|jro(^enen 53efu(^ absuftatten. 3lIfo auf SBieberfe^en ! 9}Jit J^erglit^en ®rii|en ^"^ Seine fieben gftern Derbleibe id^ ftet^ Seine !©i(^ innig liebenbe g^reunbin glifabet^ 2J?et)er. B. Oral: i. SBa^ ift \t%i bie gibreffe ^^re^ 53ruber^? 2. ^^n tt^eld^em @to(f n)ot)nt er? 3. Sim mietiielten gebenfen ©ie untjujie^en? 4- Sen ujiedielten ^aben \m f)eute? 5. Ser tt)iet3ielte ift tnorgen? 6. SBa^ fiir ein Saturn ift beute itber ac^t Sage? 7. 2Bann mirb ber ©eburt^tag 3^re^ atteften :33ruber^ gefeiert? 8. 3n meldieni ^^\(tt murbe er § i86] LESSON XLII 173 geboren? 9. Qn tDcIc^em :33anbe biefer 3lu^ga6e finbet matt bie Jrauerfpie(e ? 10. SBelc^e ©cinbe ent^altett bte guftfpiele ? II. aBeId}e Sattbe ^abett ®ie f^on gelefett? 12. Sottttett @ie tttir fageti, iDatttt ®oetI)e geftorbett ift? C. I. What day of the month is it to-day? 2. What date is this day week? 3. Of what date is Elizabeth's letter? 4. I have read the first and the second volume, but not the third. 5. Bring volume[s] three to (bt^) five with [you] when you come. 6. Sunday is the first day of the week, Monday the second, etc. 7. January is the first month of the year, Febru- ary the second, etc. 8. Goethe was born in seventeen hundred and forty-nine, on the 12th of August. 9. Give the ordinals corresponding to the cardinals in § 41. Z>. 40 Hall St., Chicago, August 27 th, 1 9 10. My dear friend (/.) : You will certainly wonder why I have not written you sooner, as your interesting letter from Dayton arrived on the 15 th of this month. But I must tell you that I have been extremely busy in the last two weeks. In the first place, my eldest brother's birthday was celebrated on the 20th, and we had a great many visitors (sing.). Secondly, we intend to move on the I St September. Our new address is No. 115 Farewell St., second story. There is (gibt) a great deal to do, but the work will be finished by the (6i^ guttl) 3rd or 4th of September. You will then pay us the promised visit, will you.not? Mother hopes you will come on the loth, or still earlier. With kind regards to your dear mother, Your loving friend, Anna Lehmann. £. Lesestiick : Im allgemeinen sind die Deutschen im brief- lichen Verkehr viel umstandUcher als wir. Erstens, was die Anrede betrifft, so redet man in Briefen nie einen Herrn als "Herr" oder "lieber Herr" an. Man schreibt "Sehr geehr- 174 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 187 ter Herr" oder "Verehrter Herr.'* Eine verheiratete Dame wird als " Gnadige Frau " oder " Verehrte Gnadige Frau " ange- redet ; eine unverheiratete als ** Gnadiges Fraulein," oder auch " Sehr geehrtes Fraulein " (Bauer, usw.). Warm man an Ver- wandte oder Freunde schreibt, so gebraucht man ungefahr die- selben Redensarten vvie im Englischen. Zweitens, was SchluB und Unterschrift betrifft, so schreibt man an einen Fremden ungefahr so : Indem ich mich ergebenst empfehle, Verbleibe ich hochachtungsvoll W. H. oder ktirzer : Ergebenst (der Ihrige) W. H. Die englische Redensart : "Yours affectionately," von einem Sohne z. B. an seine Mutter, lautet etwa wie folgt : Dein Dich innig liebender Sohn Wilhelm. LESSON XLIII 187. Declension of Person Names. Qi) ^abe ®eorg^ geber. I have George*s pen. ^ier ift (Baxa^ ^Uppe, Here is Sarah's doll. !l)a^i[taKayen^(8utfen)^)«U(^. That is Max* (Louisa's) book. Qii} ijaht e^ 3Kaj: gegeben* I have given it to Max. S)e^ gro^en Safari S^aten. Great Caesar's deeds. S)te :^rtefe hc^ gicero. The letters of Cicero. "^a^ «U(f) bC)g fleinen tarl. Little Charles' book. Observe; i. Names of persons are inflected only in the genitive singular, usually by adding -)§♦ 2. Those ending in a sibilant add -Ctt§, and feminines in -e add -tt§» 3. The genitive usually precedes its governing noun, and is then inflected ; if the genitive follows, it has the article and remains uninflected. § i893 LESSON XLIII 175 Notes. — i. The name "Jesus Christ" is usually declined thus: N. 3efu^ d^rifttt^, G. 3eftt et)rifti, D. 3eftt St)rifto, A. ^efum (S^riftum, Voc, 3eju e()rifte» 2. Family names are used in the plur. with added -«§, but without art. : (Sc^mibt)^ finb nad) ^ari« gcreift, *The Schmidts have gone to Paris.' 188. Person Names with Titles. ^ontg ^etnric^^ ©ij^ne. King Henry's sons. S)ie ®i3{)ne be^ ^ontg^ ^arl. The sons of King Charles. ^er gd(f)er ber grau :93raun. Mrs. Braun's fan. Observe : i . Person names in the genitive, preceded by a common noun as a title, take the genitive ending, the title remaining uninflected and without article, if the governing word follows. 2. If the governing word precedes, the title has the article, and, if masculine, the genitive ending, the proper name remain- ing uninflected. Note. — The title ^tXX always takes -it in the sing., except in the nom.; throughout the plur. it takes the art. and -Ctt: §errtt ©(^tnibtS §au^, *Mr. Schmidt's house'; bie §errcn ®. unb ^., * Messrs. S. and B.' 189. Ordinals with Person Names. The ordinals after proper names of sovereigns, etc., are written with a capital letter, and must be declined throughout, as well as the article : 'N. Sari ber grfte. Charles the First. G, tarl(6) be^ grften. Of Charles the First. n, Sart bem (Srftett. (To, for) Charles the First. A. Sari ben grften, Charles the First. Note. — The Roman numerals I, II, etc., after such names, must be read as above: ^arl V.= UtiXl t>tX gttttftc, 2C. EXERCISE XLIII A. Otto gbuarb Seopolb t). (= t)on) ©i^tnarcf trurbe uttter ber gtegterunc; Sontg ??rtebrtc^ aBtlfjelm III. am 1. Slprit 1815 ju ®c^dn^aufen in ber 3Jiarf -33ranbenburg geboren- ®r toar 176 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 189 ber ciltefte ©o^n i^erbinanb^ t). ^x^mavd unb SBtl^elminen^, geborener TOenden, aSom 11. bt^ jum 19. geben^ja^re ftu- bierte er juerft in ©ottingen, fpciter in Berlin, .^m 3a^)^^ 1847 I)eiratete er ^^ciutein 3*^1)^^^^ ^- ^uttfamer, obgleiif) 3^ot)anna^ SSater anfang^ fe^r bagegen trar. S5nig SBil^elm I., 3]ad)fo(ger gviebrid) SBil^etnt IV., beftieg 1861 ben |}reu^ ^ifdjen Xijvon unb am 28. September 1862 iDurbe :93i^marcE erfter SJJinifter. SBci^renb feiner 2lmt^tatigteit fanben brei gro^e ^riege ftatt: berbiinifi^e 1864, ber cJfterreiiJ)if(^e 1866, unb in ben ^'aJiren 1870-18U ber gro^te Srieg un[erer ^dt, ber beutfc^^fran^ofifdje. 5?ac^bem am 18. ^'anuar 18Y1 ber ^5nig Don "ipreu^en ©eutfc^er ^aifer gen)orben t^ar, irurbe ^i^mard ber erfte S'anjier be^ S)eut[{^en 9?eid)e^ unb er^ielt gugleii^ ben Jitel eine^ giirften. 53i^ nad) bem Jobe ^aifer griebrid) III. be^ielt ^i^mard biefe^ 3lmt, n)urbe aber t)om je^igen Saifer 9BiI()eIm II. am 18. Wdx^ 1890 enttaffen unb ftarb ben 30. ^uli 1898 in feinem 83. geben^ja^re. B, Oral on the above. C (Titles and numerals in full.) i. William II, King bf Prussia and German Emperor, was born at Berlin on the 27th of January, 1859. 2. He is the eldest son of the Emperor Frederick III. 3. He passed several years as a student in the University [of] Bonn. 4. In 1881 he married Augusta Victo- ria, daughter of Frederick, Duke (§erjog) of Schleswig-Hol- stein-Augustenburg. 5. On the 15th of June, 1888, he ascended the throne. 6. The great Prince Bismarck was then Chancellor of the German Empire, an office which he had retained during the reigns of WiUiam I and Frederick III. 7. Bismarck had been appointed as (at^) first minister of Prussia by William I, September 28th, 1862, and had remained in office since that time. 8. On March i8th, 1890, Emperor William II dis- missed the prince and gave (t)er(ei^en) him the title of (a) Duke of Lauenburg. 9. The eldest son of William II and of Au- § 192] LESSON XLIV 177 gusta Victoria is Frederick William, the present crown-prince of the German Empire. D, Lesestuck : Kaiser Wilhelm I war auISerst pflichtgetreu. Als er schon hochbetagt war, hatte er einmal sein Erscheinen bei einer Parade angektindigt. Sein Leibarzt riet ihm dringend abzusagen, da bei dem schlechten Wetter das SchHmmste zu beflirchten sei. " Dann sterbe ich im Dienste," antwortete der Kaiser. " Ein Konig von PreuBen, der nicht mehr die Pflich- ten seines Amtes erfullen kann, mtifite die Regierung nieder- legen," und er ging zur Parade. LESSON XLIV 190. Demonstratives. 1. biefer, this, that. 5. berfelb(tg)e, the same. 2. Jener, that (yonder). 6. foI(f)er, such. 3. ber, that, the one. 7. bergletcfjcn, of that kind. 4. berjenige, that, the one. 191. ^tcfct, jcttct. I. Both follow the biefer model, whether used as adjectives or pronouns. 2. The English demonstrative 'that' is not rendered by jencr, unless when remoteness or contrast is indicated. 3. "Siicf er = ' the latter,' the nearer or last mentioned of two objects ; jcncr = *the former,' the more remote : 3rtarie unb ^lara [inb @C^tr)e- Mary and Clara are sisters ; the [tern; btefe ift alter at^ icnc> latter is older than the former. 192. Declension of bet* t. As adjective bcr is declined precisely like the definite article, but is always stressed ; "^tX aWa'Ttn. The man. ©e'r 9)iantt. That man. S)ie ?eu'te. The people. !j)ie' 8eute. Those people. 1 78 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§193 2. ^ct as pronoun is declined thus : Singular. Plural Masc. Fern. Neut. All Genders. N. ber bie ba^ bie G, beffen berett beffctt bercr (bercn) n, bem ber bem bencn ^. ben bie ba^ bie Observe the enlarged forms in the genitive, and in the dative plural. 193. Use of bctt I. As pronoun it has the force of an emphasized personal pronoun of the 3rd person, and often im- pHes contempt or depreciation : ^ennen @ie ben? Do you know that man? ^cm tDitrbe \^ fein ®elb lei^^ I wouldn't lend that fellow any en; ber beja^It nie. money; he never pays. 2. ^cr or berjcmgc (§ 194) renders the English 'that^ before a genitive, and before a relative clause : ajfein §ut nnb ber ntetner My hat and that of my wife. gran, ©tef er ^anb nnb ber, n)elc^er This volume and that (the one) f)ier liegt. which is lying here. Notes. — i. The form bcrctt (gen.plur.) = * of them' : Sie t)iclc ^ilt* ber ^at er? @r f)at bercn bret, 'How many children has he? He has three (of them).' 2. It is also used as substitute for a plur. possess, (comp. § 199) : Utlferc S^ettern unb berett ^inber, *Our cousins and their children.* 194. Declension of berjentfle* Singular, Plural Masc. Fem. Neut. All Genders. N. berjentge biejenige ba^jentge btejenigen G. be^Jentgen berjentgen be^jentgen berjentgen D, bemjenigen berjenigen bemjenigen benjenigen A, benjenigen biejenige ba^jentge biejenigen Observe: These forms are made up of the definite article and jctttg with weak adjective endings. § 199] LESSON XLIV 179 195. Use of bcriemgc* It may replace ber (for emphasis or clearness) before a genitive, and before a relative clause : S)te6 tft mein ^urf), nicflt ha^- That is my book, not that of jcntgc meiner grau. my wife (my wife's). J)tefer Sanb unb bcr(icnifle), This volume and the one that ber bort liegt, is lying there. Note. — The idiomatic omission of the demonstrative before a pos- sessive in English is permissible in German only before a person name : 3)^ein §au§ unb SStl^elm^, ' My house and William's.' 196. ^crfetbe^ It is declined Hke berjentge (berfelbe, bic* fetbc, bdi^felbe, 2C.), and is used as adjective or pronoun : I)a^ tft berfclbe ajJann. That is the same man. SBeli^en JRocf tragen (Ste? Which coat are you wearing? ^cnfclbcn, ben id) gefterntrug. The same I wore yesterday. 197. So(rf|» When used alone, fo(rf) follows the btefer model; after ein, it follows the mixed declension of adjectives; before ein, it is undeclined : ©olc^er SBein ; ein f oI(^cr Such wine ; such a wine ; such SBeitt ; folrf) etne grau ! a woman ! Note. — Su(d) with citt is often replaced by fo : So ein $3ein ; ein fo guter SSein. 198. ^erglciti^ctt* It is used as indeclinable neuter substan- live or adjective : ^ergletdjett gefc^te^t oft ^ier* That sort of thing often hap- gutanbe. pens in this country, ©ergleirfjen 3Bein(e). Wine(s) of that sort. 199. Demonstratives as Substitutes. i. ^icfct and ber= fclbc are used instead of a personal pronoun of the 3rd person to avoid ambiguity, particularly in reported speech : ©er 5Rebtter bemerfte, §err 21. The speaker remarked that Mr. ^abe gefagt, ba^ er (ber A. had said that he (the 9{ebner)biefen(^rbenfelben) speaker) had slandered him t)erleumbet ijaht. (Mr. A.). i8o GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 200 Note. — Similarly also the gen. of bCt, referring to things (§ 139, n. 3) : 3d) crinnere mic^ bcffcn nic^t, * I don't remember it.' 2. '^erfclbc is used instead of a personal pronoun to avoid awkward combinations of sounds, such as i^n ♦ ♦ . ^^nett, ©ie . . . fie, 2C,: ®er Safe tft gut ; ic^ fann The cheese is good ; I can 3^^nen bcnfclfien eni|)fef)Ien, recommend it to you. 3. The genitive of ber and bcrfelbc is used instead of the possessive adjective of the 3rd person, to avoid ambiguity : @r fam mtt ®eorg unb beffcn He came with George and with ©ruber (or bem ©ruber his (George's) brother, be^felben)- 200. ^a and l^ter for Demonstratives. !Da6 and jene6 are replaced by ba (bar before a vowel), and bte^ by l)ier, prefixed to a preposition and written as one word with it : ®at)OU iDet^ id) md)t^. I know nothing of that, ^iermit tDtll i^ f(^Iie^en» With this I will close. Note. — This substitution of bu for t>(l§ is not made before a relative: 3rf) bac^te an ha^, U)a^ ®ie fagteu, * I was thinking of what you were saying.' EXERCISE XLIV A. 3fuugen^, 3^uugen^ ! rief ber ge^rer, jefet bin i(^ bfife Quf eu^. §at e^ female foli^e 2lufgaben gegeben? Qii) l^abe beren f(^on me^r aU bret !Du^enb t^erbeffert unb fetne gefunben, bte ganj rtrf)tig tft. ^nm ©eifpiel, ic^ finbe in biefer menigften^ fec^^ntal ,,niir'' ftatt ,,ntic^" gefc^rieben. T)enft einmal, ift e^ nic^t f^redlid^, benfelben ge^Ier fei^^mal in einer unb berfelben 3lufgabe gu ntai^en? T)k, wtldje id) je^t in bie §anb ne^me, ^at „Ia^ mir ge^en" ftatt „Ia^ nti^ ge{)en'' u. bgL m. (unb bergleit^en me^r). 3^ene Slufgabe, bie id) eben in ben "ipapierforb tuerfen moHte, ift bie fc^Iimntfte t)on atten. ®o eine fc^ted^te fjabe ic^ nod) nie gefe^en; i^ gtaube § 200] LESSON XLIV l8i bie tft dtohtxt^; bte tDitnmeft t)ott ge()(ern, ^e^t tnu^ i^ tni) eitie tud)ttge (Strafe aufer(egen, 3^erft gebe id) eu^ bie 2luf* gaben guriid unb bann fod Jeber mir fagen, n)ie Diele gel){er er \)at !Cer, totldjtx tjott 3eI)Tt bi^ fUnf^e^n ijat, foK bie 3Iuf* gabe einmat abfcf)reiben; berjenige, tDetd^er tion fed^je^n bi^ jtrangig i)at, [oil fie ^tDeimaf abfc^reiben; unb bie{enigen, bie tne^r a(^ JtDan^ig i^d)kx ^aben, mitffen biefetbe breimaf ab* fd^reiben unb eine ©tunbe nad)fi^en. B. Oral : i. Weshalb war der Lehrer auf die Schiller bose? 2. Hatten die Schiiler denselben Fehler oft gemacht? 3. In welcher Aufgabe fand er MaB mir' statt Mafi mich'? 4. Fand er sonst dergleichen Fehler darin? 5. Welche Aufgabe war die schlimmste? 6. Was sagte der Lehrer davon? 7. Wessen Aufgabe war die? 8. Welche Schiiler muBten die Aufgabe einmal abschreiben? 9. Welche mufiten sie zweimal abschrei- ben? C. I.I have never seen so fine a ring. 2. It is much finer than my sister's. 3. This is a beautiful flower; where did you (@ie) find it? 4. These are not my books; they are my brother's. 5. You are mistaken; they are George's. 6. He who says that sort of thing is no friend of mine. 7. Those who are richest are not always happiest. 8. Which Mr. Meyer do you know? 9. The one who lives in Hall St. 10. That is the same Mr. Meyer whom I know. 11. Wines of this sort are always dear. 12. The castle on that hill (yonder) is more than five hundred years old. 13. I cannot believe that fellow any more ; he has deceived me so often. 14. George was traveling with my cousin and his (my cousin's) brother. 15. He is ashamed of his conduct ; he is ashamed of it. 16. Mary has written to Clara that her mother was expecting her (Clara). 17. Goethe and Schiller were German poets; the latter died in 1805 and the former in 1832. jD, I. Our teacher was very angry with us yesterday. 2. He said he had never seen such exercises. 3, Those we had 1 82 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 201 written were the worst he had ever seen. 4. There were more than three dozen of them, and all were bad. 5. The worst ex- ercise was Robert's ; it teemed with mistakes. 6. He had writ- ten ' mir ' instead of * mich ' five or six times. 7. It is very bad (jd^Iimm) when one makes the same mistake more than once in the same exercise. 8. I myself had written MaB mir' twice instead of * laB mich,' and more [mistakes] of that kind. 9. I don't know how I could make such mistakes. 10. Those of us who had done our exercise worst had to stay in for an hour. II. Those who had fewer mistakes had to copy it. jE. Lesestiick : Ein Gelehrter sagte eines Morgens zu eini- gen Bekannten : " Ich bin soeben von einem Menschen rasiert worden, der in Oxford und Heidelberg die hochsten Ehren davongetragen hatte, und auBerdem als sehr gebildeter Mann allgemein bekannt ist. Und doch kann er einen nicht ordent- lich rasieren ! " " Aber weshalb in aller Welt ist denn ein so ausgezeichneter Mann Barbier?" fragten sie. " Ach ! der ist gar kein Barbier ! Ich habe mich heute morgen selbst rasiert." LESSON XLV 201. Interrogative Adjectives. 1. totl^tx? which? what? 2. tt)a^ fitr ein? what kind of? what? 202. Declension, i. SScI^cr? follows the biefer model. 2. 2Bai^ ffi? citt is declined as follows : Singular. Plural, Masc. Fem. Neut. All Genders. N. tt)a^ fiir ein tt)a^ fitr eitic n^a^ fitr ein tDa^ fiir G, „ „ einc)^ ,, „ einer „ „ einc^ „ „ D. ^ „ eincm „ „ eincr ,, ,, einem „ „ A, „ „ einen „ „ eine ,, „ ein „ „ § 2o6] LESSON XLV 185 Observe : ©iit only is declined, agreeing with its noun, and being omitted in the plural. 203. Use of Interrogative Adjectives. aBeI(^cr 9}?ann tt)ar ^ter ? Which man was here ? 3Son tvtiijtt Same f priest er? Of what lady does he speak? 5Ba^ fur eincn §ut ^at fie ? What kind of (a) hat has she ? aSBa^ finb ba^ fur Slumen? What flowers are those? 3Ba^ fur §0(3 ^at er? What kind of wood has he? 9Be((^(C!^) SSergniigen ! What pleasure ! 3Ba^ f iir Setter ! What weather ! aSetc^ etn (Sturm ! What a storm ! Observe : i. 9Bai3 filt citt is often divided, the fUr em with its noun following the verb. 2. @ttt is omitted after tt)a^ filr with names of materials. 3. 2&e(d)cr and toa§ fitr (tin) are also used in exclamatory sentences, the neuter lt)elcl)e^ often dropping the termination, and always before etn* 204. Interrogative Pronouns. 1. irelc^er? which? which one? 2. totx? who? 3. tua^? what? 205. Declension of tocld^cr. As pronoun it follows the biefer model, but lacks the genitive. 206. Use of mid)CV ? SBeld^er t)Ott 3^nen ift Slrjt? Which of you is a doctor? SBelc^cr Don btefen !j)ameu To which of these ladies does ge^5rt ber gadder? the fan belong? SBetc^er (melc^e) t)on eud^? Which of you? SBelc^C^ [tub QijXt ^ritber? Which are your brothers? Observe: i. 9Bc(d|ct? asks 'which?' of a number of per- sons or. things, and agrees in gender with the noun for which it stands. l84 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§207 2. The neuter singular toti^c^? is used directly before the verb fein, irrespectively of the gender or number of the subject. 207. Declension of tner ? and tt)a^ ? Masc, and Fern. Neuter, N, iDer? who? tt)a^? what? G. meffen (n)e^)? whose? iDeffeti (tDe^)? of what? D. tnem ? (to, for) whom ? — A, tt)en ? whom ? lt)a^ ? what ? 208. Use of tticr? and UJa^? aSer ift biefe^ Sinb? Who is this child? SScr finb btefe SKcinner? Who are these men? 2Ben meinen ®ie? Whom do you mean? aSa^ ^at er gefagt? ^ What did he say? aSoDon fprtd^t er? What is he speaking of? aSoran benfen ©te ? What are you thinking of? aSc^^alb? tne^tDegen? On account of what? Observe: i. 293er? is used of persons only, for all genders and both numbers ; tnai^ ? is used of things. 2. In the dative or accusative with prepositions, ttiai^? is replaced by ttiD (tt)or before vowels, except in toatUTU, *what for?' ' why ?') prefixed to the preposition and written as one word with it. 3. Prepositions governing the genitive prefix ttie^. EXERCISE XLV A. ©utett 3J?orgen, §err iSraun. — ©uten 2}Jorgen; barf i(^ fragen, mit mem \^ bte g^re f)abe, ju fprecf)en? — .^rf) ^ei^e ®uftat) 9J?et)er unb ^be einen (Smpf eljlung^brtef an ®ie. — aSon tDem ift ber Srief ? — aSon .^^rem greunbe, bem ^errtt S)lttmer. — SBelt^en germ ©ittmer meinen ©ie ? Sen 2Bein== l^dnbler? — g^ein, ben ®eiben{)dnbler in§amburg. — Unb ma^ tDunfrfien @ie t)on mir? — 3^(^ fnc^e eine SteKung nnb moc^te § 2o8] LESSON XLV 185 ®ie urn 3iat unb S3eiftanb bitten* — SBa^ fUr eine @te((ung? — (Sine ©tefiung al^ t^qUxd)cn, bcrglcid^en* (gin 9)?ann, bc^gleii^en (^af.) A man the like of whom I tc^ noc^ nie begegnet bin. have never yet met. (Sin 9J?ann, bei^gleidien norfi A man the like of whom has nie gelebt ^at. never yet Hved. Sinber, bcrgleirfjen, 2C. Children the Hke of whom, etc. I90 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 214 Observe : These forms are indeclinable, the former referring to a masculine or neuter noun in the singular, the latter to feminine or plural nouns. 214. Agreement in Person. !3)er Slrjt, tt)elc^er ^ier mar. The doctor who was here. Qfi), bcr id^ bein greunb bin. I who am your friend. 23ater unfer, bcr 2)tt im §im== Our Father who art in heaven, met bift. Observe : If the antecedent is in the first or second person, the relative (in this case always bcr) is followed by the personal pronoun of that person. Note. — The pers. pron. of the 2nd pers. may be omitted, in which case the verb is in the 3rd pers. : £) @ott, ber im §immel ift ! 215. SBic as a Relative. @oIi^ etn or fo ein is often fol- lowed in German by toit (='as '•) and a personal pronoun agree- ing in gender and number with its antecedent ; the f otd^ or fo may also be omitted : (©old), fo) ein ^rtef, toic tDir Such a letter as we expected. t^n erU)artetett. (®ol(^e) grit(i)te, ttlic fie in Such fruits as grow in India. 3:nbten n)ad)fen. 216. Word Order of Relatives, i. A relative must immedi- ately follow its antecedent when the latter precedes the verb of a principal sentence : ©er SKann, bcr geftern "^ter The man who was here yester- mar, ift tDieber gefomnten. day has come again. !5)en SRann, bcr Je^t rebet, I do not know the man who is fenne ic^ ni(J)t. speaking now. 2. So also when a separation would cause ambiguity : Qi} traf einen grennb, ben tc^ I met a friend, whom I had lange ni(f)t gefe^en ^atte, bei not seen for a long time, at f einem ^rnber. his brother's. § 21 6] LESSON XLVII 191 3. Similarly when the antecedent is the subject of a depend- ent clause : Qd) glaube, ber 9)tann, bcr, tc. I think that the man who, etc. 4. In other cases the relative need not immediately follow, and the relative clause should not needlessly interrupt the sentence : Qd) \nijtt ben §Ut au^, ber I picked out the hat I liked tnir am beften gefiet, best. & tt)tH 5Ur ®tabt juritcf, He means to return to the in Ujclcffcr er geboren n)nrbe. town in which he was born. EXERCISE XLVII A, 5l(^ ber per[tfd}e ©tester (Saabi einntal ju (Sc^iff auf bent 9Beere fn^r, fa^ man ein SBoot, n)elcf)e^ anf ba^felbe jnfam. g^e biefe^ aber ba^ ®(^iff errei^en fonnte, brac^ e^ entjtpei, nnb gttjei 9Kdnner, bie firf) bartn befanben, fielen in^ SBaffer. ©in SJJJatrofe f|)rang t)om @d)iffe in^ SBaffer nnb rettete ben einen, n)a^renb ber anbere nmfam. @aabi fragte ben 5Katrofen : ,,.ffie^^atb I)aft bvi bemjenigen, ber fc^mimmen lonnte, ba^ ^tbtn gerettet?'' „3Ba^ id) tun fonnte, ba^ l^abe id) getan/' antmortete jener, „benn ic^ fonnte nnr einem f)elfen. S)iefe 2ften[c^en maren jmei :©rUber, bie ic^ fannte : 3^^^^i^ ^^^ 21U. 3)iefer ^at mir ftet^ nnr ®nte^ ern)ie[en, nnb mic^ tt)a^renb einer fdjmeren Sranf^eit gepf(egt, n)a^ idj i()m je^t tiergolten Ijaht ; jener be^nbelte mid) immer mie einen §nnb un\> id) lie^ i^n ertrinfen. SBer mein geinb gemefen ift, fann nicf|t ermarten, t>a^ id} i^m e^er ^elfe, a(^ einem grennbe/' r,D ®ott, ber bn gerec^t bift!'' rief Saabi, ,,n)er anberen ®nte^ tnt, tut \id) felber ®Vitt^ ; totx aber anberen 53i)fe^ tut, anf ben fcillt ba^ ®ofe jnrlicf, tt)a^ er an anberen Derbroc^en f)at." i?. Oral exercise on the above. C I. He who studies much will learn much. 2. Those who study most will learn most. 3. The best that I have is not too 192 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 216 good for you. 4. Whoever has done that is no friend of mine. 5. We had to stay in [after school], which was a pity, as the weather was so fine. 6. Make a pudding like the one (= such as) you made last week. 7. Saadi was a poet the like of whom the world has seldom seen. 8. He lived in a city the name of which I have forgotten. 9. I do not know the novel the title of which you have nam^d. 10. What I have said I have said. II. Ali was the man whose life the sailor saved. The one whom he did not help has perished. 12. We praise Thee, O God, who art in heaven ! D, I. The Persian poet Saadi was once in a ship at (on the) sea. 2. He saw a small boat which was approaching the ship. 3. This boat, in which were two men, broke to pieces. 4. Only one of the unfortunates who were in it could swim. 5. A sailor who was in Saadi's ship jumped into the sea. 6. He saved the one who could swim, and let the other drown. 7. Saadi asked him why he had saved the one who could swim, and not the one who could not swim. 8. " The man whose life I saved," said he, " has always treated me well. 9. The one I allowed to perish was his brother, who always treated me badly. 10. He who doesn't help me, cannot ex- pect that I should help him." 11. The good that we do to others is repaid (tiergelten) to us. 12. The sailor did what he could. 13. We should always do what we can to help others. E, Sprichworter (the forms of tt)er and tt)a^ are very com- mon in proverbs and maxims): i. Wer A sagt, muB auch B sagen. 2. Wer Gott vertraut, hat wohl gebaut. 3. Wem nicht zu raten ist, dem ist auch nicht zu helfen. 4. Wer steht, sehe zu, dal5 er nicht falle. 5. Wer viel saet, wird viel ernten. 6. Was man nicht hat, kann man nicht geben. 7. Wer anderen eine Grube grabt, fallt selbst hinein. 8. Wer zuletzt lacht, lacht am besten. 9. Wer nicht arbeitet, soil auch nicht essen. 10. Wer seine Arbeit fleiBig tut, dem schmeckt auch seine Suppe gut. II. Wer lernt am Morgen, hat abends keine Sorgen. § 2i8] LESSON XLVIII 193 LESSON XLVIII 217. The Indefinite Pronouns. 1. man, one, they, people, etc. 6. nidjt^^ nothing. 2. iebermann, everybody, etc 7. etn paar, a few. 3. jemanb, anybody, some one, etc. 8. einer, one, some one. 4. niemanb, nobody, not anybody, 9. feiner, no one, none, etc. neither. 5. etlDa^, something, anything. 10. tDetdjer, some, any. 218. Wlan. i. This pronoun has the force of 'one,* 'they,' * we,' ' you,* ' people,' etc. (compare French on), and is used only in the nominative : aWan [agt, ba^ ber ^ontg They (people) say the king is !ran! t'ft. ill. £)I unb SSaffer tann man nid^t One (we, you) cannot mix oil jufammen mifd)en. and water. 2. 2)Zan must not be replaced by a personal pronoun : SSKan n)irb miibe, tvtnn man A man (one)* gets tired when tange arbeitet. he works a long time. 3. ©ittcr sometimes replaces man in the nominative, and always in the other cases : 2Benn cincr miibe ift, fann er When a man (one) is tired, he nt(J)t gut arbeiten. cannot work well. 6^ tut elncm leib, n)enn, 2C. One is sorry when, etc. 4. The possessive adjective and the reflexive pronoun corre- sponding to man are fcitt and fic^ respectively : SJfan follte fic^ fcincr ge^Ier One (we) should be ashamed fc^dmen. of one's (our) faults. 5. The man construction may replace the passive forms with tt)erben, but only when the agent is indefinite or unknown : SBie fd)reibt man ba^ SiJort? How is the word written? SRan ertaubt un^, ju tanjen. We are allowed to dance. 194 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§219 219. 3i<^t>ctmatttt, jcmanb, ttiemaitb* They are used in the singular only, and have as genitives jebermanni^, jematlbc^, ntemanbe)^^ ^^ebertnattn^ (Sad^e tft nie- Everybody's business is no- manbei^ ©a(^e* body's business. @agen @te e^ nteTnanb(eTn), Don't tell it to any one. §aben @ie JeTnanb(en) gefe^en ? Have you seen any one? Note. — 3emanb and ntemanb sometimes take -cm or -tU in the dat. and -Clt in the ace. 220. ^itoa^, nxd^i^. i. These are indeclinable forms : -3(^ ^abe tttt>a^; er ^at I have something; he has nt(f)t^. nothing. 2. SttDa^ = ' some ' before nouns in the singular, and also colloquially as a pronoun : ^ttoa^ Srot. Some bread (i.e. not much). §at er ®elb ? (Sr ^at Cttoa^. Has he money? He has some. 221. (Bin paax. This form is indeclinable ; paar is not written with a capital : 3Ktt ein paat STalern. With a few dollars. 222. fitter, feittcr* i. For declension and general use, see § 31- 2. They may replace jemattb and ntemanb, respectively, and always do so before a genitive or t)On: S^ flo^ft Ctttcr. Somebody is knocking. Reiner t)On un^ glanbt t^m. Not one of us believes him. 223. SBetr^cr. For declension, see § 31 ; it often has the force of ' some,' referring to a preceding noun : §at er SBein ? 6r \)at tddd^m. Has he wine ? He has some. § 223] LESSON XLVIII 1 95 Note. — The indeclinable irgettb is prefixed to a number of words with intensive indefinite force : irgeilb jemanb or irgcnb eilter, * anybody (at all),' 'somebody (or other)'; irgcnb ettt)a§, 'anything (at all),' 'some- thing (or other)'; irgcnbtro, 'somewhere (or other),' etc.; gar is similarly used before negatives: gar fcin(er), 'none at all,' 'no one at all'; gar nic^t^, ' nothing at all,' ' nothing whatever.' EXERCISE XLVIII A. SBetin irgenb etnem ettt)a^ ®ro^e^ gelungen ift, fo gfaufit iebermann, er ijattt ba^ aud^ tun f5nnen, tpentt er irgenb ®e* legen^eit ge^abt l^atte, !j)a^ meinten auc^ bie f^antfc^en §df' tinge, al6 ^oluntbu^ nac^ feiner gntbedung 9lnieri!a^ attgemein beiDunbert tDurbe, 3)ian gab i^m gu g^ren ein gro^e^ ©aft- ma^L :33ei bie[er ©elegen^eit fagte jemanb gu ^otumbu^: „^a^ ift ni^t^ Sefonbere^, eine neue 3BeIt ju entbeden; ba^ t)dtte irgenb einer tun fbnnen.'' ^otumbu^ na^ni ein @i unb fragte ben §errn, ber neben i^m fa^, ob er ba^felbe aufrec^t ftellen fonne. ytad) einigen SSerfuc^en gab biefer e^ auf, ©ann t)erfu(^ten e^ bie anberen ^erren ber 3{eif)e na(^, aber niemanben gelang e^. ©nbli^ na^m ^olumbu^ felber ba^ & unb [e^te e^ mit einem teii^ten @to^e auf ben Zi^d), fo ba^ bie (Senate nat^gab unb ba^ gi aufred^t ftanb. „@o etma^ ptten ®ie auc^ mof)( tun fonnen, nteine §erren/' fprad) er, ,,aber feiner t)on .^^nen {)at e^ getan ; ba^ ift ber Unterfcf)ieb jtrifc^en mir unb 3^^nen/' unb Jeberntann mu^te i^m rec^t geben. B. Oral exercise on the above. C. I. Everybody knows that America was discovered by Columbus in 1492. 2. Before his time people knew nothing of the new world. 3. It was believed (use man) that there was no land beyond the sea. 4. After this discovery people admired and praised him. 5. As usual many people said that this was no great thing (nothing great). 6. Almost everybody thought he could have done the same [thing], 7. So 196 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 223 it is (ge^^t) always when anybody succeeds in doing anything special. 8. When Columbus returned from America a great banquet was given him. 9. At (bei) this banquet he heard somebody say : " I could have done that, too, if I had only had an opportunity." 10. Columbus took an egg and said : ** Can any one of you set this egg on end?" 11. Everybody at the table tried it; nobody succeeded. 12. At last some one asked Columbus if he could do it himself. 13. "Certainly," said he, "nothing is easier." . 14. With a shght blow on the table he set it upright. 15. "(My) gentlemen," he said, " anybody at all could have done it, but why did nobody do it ? " D, I . Doctors say that people take cold most easily when they are tired. 2. People should assist not only their friends, but (fonbertt) also their enemies. 3. Is there anybody at the door? 4. I donH see anybody. 5. Will you [have] some meat? .6. No, thank you, I still have some. 7. May I give you anything else? 8. Has he any money? 9. He has some, but only a few marks. 10. I can give him nothing at all. 11. Nobody believed that Columbus could discover America. 12. None of the courtiers could have discovered America. 13. Not one of the gentlemen could set the egg -upright. 14. Could any one of you have done it? 15. I believe I could have done it if I had been Columbus. E, Lesestiick : Zwei Stunden nach Mitternacht, es war am 12. Oktober, riefen zwei Matrosen : "Land! Land!" Sie hatten auch die Kiiste in der Tat entdeckt. Sie waren nur noch zwei Meilen davon entfernt. Bei Tagesanbruch sah man eine schone flache Insel. Kolumbus kleidet sich in Scharlach. Er befiehlt, die Anker fallen zu lassen, die Boote zu bemannen, und mit einer Fahne in der Hand, die man zu diesem Zwecke verfertigt hatte, betritt er das Boot. Kolumbus stieg zuerst ans Land, fiel auf die Kniee und betete. Seinem Beispiele folgte die ganze Mannschaft, die mit ihm gelandet war. Auf diese Weise wurde Amerika entdeckt. § 226] LESSON XLIX 197 LESSON XLIX 224. The Passive Voice. The passive voice is the active voice inverted, that is, the direct object of the active becomes the subject of the passive, and the active subject becomes the agent ; hence only transitive verbs can have a true passive. 225. Passive with toerben* i. This passive is formed by means of tDerben (= * become') + the past participle of the verb to be conjugated, as in the paradigm below. 2. In accordance with the meaning of iDCrbetl^ this form of the passive indicates a passing into and continuing in a state or condition. 3. It is used whenever agency is specified or implied ; the personal agent is denoted by t)On + dative ; other agency by burd^ or mtt : ^tnber tDerbetl tlPtl i^ren &- Chil'dren are loved by their tern geliebt. parents. @r tnurbe beftraft. He was (being) punished, ©in ^tnb Itiirb tntmer hid^t A child is always easily led by burd^ ®Ute geleitet. kindness. 226. Passive of (oben^ to praise. Present. Indicative. Subjunctive. I am' being praised, etc. tcf) merbe gelobt ic^ merbe gelobt "t^yx iDirft „ 2c. bu tDcrbeft ,, zc. Imperfect. Indicative. Subjunctive, I was (being) praised, etc. \i) tourbe (tt)arb) gelobt ^ tc^ n)urbe gelobt bu tDurbeft (marbft) „ :c. bu njitrbeft ,. :c. 198 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 226 Perfect. Indicative. Subjunctive. I have been praised, etc. \i) bin gelobt tDorben \i) fei gefobt raorben bu bift „ n ^c, bu feieft „ ,, 2C, Pluperfect. Indicative, Subjunctive, I had been praised, etc. \i) tt)ar gelobt toorben td^ tDdre gelobt tt>«3rben bu tDarft „ ,, :c. bu iDdreft ,, » ic. Future. I shall be praised, etc. ic^ iDerbe gelobt merben ic^ merbe gelobt U)erben bu tt)irft ,, „ 2c. bu iDerbeft „ ,, 2C, Future Perfect. I shall have been praised, etc. tc^ trerbe gelobt tDorben fein t(J) U)erbe gelobt tDorben fein bu iDirft ,, ,t n zc. bu merbeft ,, ,, ,, it* Conditional. Simple. Compound, I should be praised, etc. I should have been praised, etc. \6) miirbe gelobt merben x6) tDitrbe gelobt tDorben fein bu miirbeft „ „ :c. bu n)urbeft „ „ ,, :c. Infinitive. Fres, getobt (ju) ttJerben^ to be praised. Ferf. gelobt tDorben (ju) fein, to have been praised. Imperative. iperbe gelobt, 2C., be praised, etc. Observe : The prefix gc- of geUJOrben is dropped throughout in the passive. Notes. — i. The impf. and plupf. subj. are usually substituted for the condl. 2. The fut. perf., comp. condl., perf. infin., and impve. passive rarely occur. § 228] LESSON XLIX 199 227. The Passive with fetlt* i. A passive is also formed by means of the various tenses of fcitt+ the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. 2. This form of the passive indicates a state or condition re- garded as complete and permanent, and as resulting from the action of the verb ; it is never used when agency is expressed or implied, and must be carefully distinguished from the passive with trerbett: 'J)ie Saben ttJCtbcn um je^n The shops are closed at ten Ut)r gefd)Ioffett» o'clock. ®ie ftttb frf)OTl gefc^Ioffen, They are closed already. 2)a^ §au^ ift Derfauft. The house is sold. Qd) bin bef^cifttgt gcttiefcn. I have been busy. 228. Limitations of the Passive, i. When the direct object of a transitive verb is a thing (not a person), the thing becomes the subject in the passive, the person remaining as indirect object : & t)erfpra^ mir §Ufe. He promised me help. §ilfe tDUrbe mir t)on i^m I was promised help by him. t)erfpro(^en. 2. Verbs having only an indirect personal object in German (often transitive in English) have no passive form : 6itt greunb begegnete mir. I was met by a friend. 3. Purely intransitive verbs can have a passive in the im- personal form only : (5^ tDUrbe geftern getanjt. There was dancing yesterday, ©eftern tDurbe getanjt. " " " " Qd) glaube, ba^ je^t getanjt I think there is dancing going iDirb. on now. Note. — @^ of this construction is omitted, unless it immediately precedes the verb; the impers. construction is sparingly used, and is usually replaced by the matt constr. (§ 218, 5). 200 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 228 4. The passive is much less used in German than in English, being often replaced by a matt construction (§ 218, 5) and occasionally by a reflexive, especially with laffen: a^ tDtrb firfl |cf)On finben. It will doubtless be found. S)a^ laftt firfl leid^t madjen- That can easily be done. EXERCISE XLIX ^. Sn ytom lebtett t)or alter ^dt ^wd blittbe -Settler, TdQ^ ixd) fonttte man ben ettten in ben ©tra^en rnfen ^oren : „SBem @ott ^ilft, bent ift ge^olfen!'' S)er anbere aber rief : „2Bent ber Saifer ^ilft, bent ift ge^olfen!'' 2ln(^ ber S'ai[er ^orte ba^, nnb lie^ ein ^rot baden nnb ntit ©otbftitcfen fitflen. S)a^ ©rot murbe auf feinen -Sefe^I bent -33Iinben gegeben, ber be^ H^aifer^ SKat^t gepriefen ^atte» %U jener ba^ ft^ttjerc ©einit^t be^ ^rote^ fitl)Ite, t)er!anfte er e^ bem anberen ©linben, SSon biefent mnrbe e^ nai^ @anfe getragen nnb erbro(^en, liber ba^ ®oIb, wtldjt^ barin entf)alten tdav, wav er jnglei^ erftannt nnb erfrent, & banfte ®ott nnb ^orte anf, jn betteln. !J)er anbere Settler n)ar aber no($ imnier gejiDnngen, ^n bettetn. gr iDnrbe be^^alb jnnt Saifer bernfen nnb tjon i^nt befragt, marnm er noij imnier bettle, nnb tva^ an^ bem ©rote gemorben fei, ba^ man i^m l)abe geben laffen. gr antit)ortete, ba^ ©rot [ei t)on i^m feinem Sameraben t^er* fanft morben, ba er ba^felbe fnr teigig ge^alten {)abe. !Der Saifer aber rief: ^^n ber J^at, iDem @ott ^ilft, bem ift ge* Ijolfen!'' nnb ber Slinbe mnrbe fortgejagt. B, Oral : i. Von welchen Bettlern wird hier erzahlt? 2. Von welchem wurde Gottes Macht gepriesen ? 3. Womit war das Brot gefiillt, das der Kaiser backen lieB ? 4. Welchem Bettler ward es gegeben? 5. Wem wurde es verkauft? 6. Was ward zunachst aus dem Brote? 7. Worliber war der zweite Blinde erfreut? 8. Wozu war der andere gezwungen? 9. Zu wem wurde er berufen? 10. Was fragte der Kaiser? 11. Was § 228] LESSON XLIX 201 wurde ihm geantvvortet ? 12. Was sagte der Kaiser dazu? 13. Was geschah endlich diesem Bettler? C Continue: i. Ich bin vom Lehrer gelobt worden, du, etc. 2. Ich werde von ihm bestraft werden. 3. Ich ware dazu gezwungen worden. 4. Es wird mir nicht erlaubt werden, aus- zugehen, . . . dir, etc. 5. Mir ist nichts davon gesagt worden, dir, etc. 6. Man glaubt mir nicht, . . . dir, etc. 7. Meine Aufgabe ist schon abgeschrieben, deine, etc. 8. Mir wird geholfen, dir, etc. Z>. I. Two bhnd [men] were forced to beg in the streets of Rome. 2. One of these continually extolled the power of the emperor. 3. The power of God was extolled by the other. 4. The emperor had a loaf baked. 5. By his order[s] it was filled with gold-pieces. 6. This loaf was then sent to the beggar by whom the emperor had been extolled. 7. When it was brought (use man) to him,, he said it was heavy and doughy. 8. It was sold by him to his comrade. 9. When it had been broken open by the latter, he was rejoiced at the gold which was contained in it. 10. He had become rich, and ceased to beg. II. The other was still (no(f) immer) forced to beg. 12. The emperor caused this man to be summoned. 13. The beggar was asked what he had done (mad)en) with the loaf. 14. The blind man replied that it had been bought by his comrade. 15. The unfortunate man was driven away and was compelled to beg agaia. E, I. If I had lost my position, I should be forced to beg. 2. The letter is already written and will be copied at once. 3. Is this house sold? 4. When was it sold? 5. We are not allowed to go out when it is raining. 6. Are you allowed to read novels? 7. When I said that, I was not believed. 8. It was not formerly believed that the earth is round. 9. Nothing has been said to me of the matter. 10. If they did what they should, they would be helped. 11. He has been promised help by everybody. 12. This officer has been thanked by the 202 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 229 emperor. 13. There will be dancing at (in) the party to-mor- row. 14. I have been told that Mr. Sauer is ill. F, Lesestiick : Ein Soldat war von einer Flintenkugel ver- wundet worden. Die Arzte machten mehrere Einschnitte, um sie herauszunehmen. Der Soldat verlor zuletzt die Geduld und fragte, warum sie ihn so qualten. *'Wir suchen die Kugel," sagten sie. "Warum haben Sie mir das nicht friiher gesagt ? Ich habe sie in der Tasche," erwiderte der Soldat. LESSON L 229. Indefinite Pronominal Adjectives. 1. all, all (the). 5. eittige, some, a few. 2. gang, all, whole, the whole 6. etlii^e, " " " (of). 7. mehrere, several. 3. Jeber (}ebtt)eber, ieglti^er), 8. genug, enough. each, every. 9. me^r, more. 4. manc^er, many a (one). 10. t»te((e), much (many). II. tt)enig(e), Httle (few). Remark; All the above may be used as adjectives or as pronouns. 230. 5tU. I. This word expresses number as well as quantity ; when declined it follows the bie[er model : 3lffe^ Srot ; aHc tinber. All the bread ; all (the) children, gr ^at alle^, tua^ er tt)itn|(^t. He has all he wants. S)te Snaben finb alle {)ier. The boys are all here. Note. — 5(tt is never followed by the unstressed definite article. 2. With a possessive adjective it always precedes, and re- mains uriinflected in the singular : Sfff i^r ®elb ; aUc i^re §Ute. All her money ; all her hats. §233] LESSON L 203 3. 5(U stands appositively with a noun or pronoun : Qij fenne fie aHc* I know all of them. 231. (Ban^. i. This adjective expresses quantity, not num- ber, and denotes an object as complete and undivided ; when, therefore, the English ' all' = * the whole,* it must be rendered by gans : Qd) arbeite ben gan^cn ZaQ. I work all (the whole) day. 2. ®an5 is declined like an adjective, and always follows the determinative : 55er ganje Zaq. The whole day. 3)Zein qanic^ gigentum. The whole of my property. 3. Before proper names of places, unaccompanied by an article or other determinative, it may remain uninflected : ©anj (or ba^ gan^e) gnglanb. The whole of England. Bu^: ©ie ganje ©C^lDeij. The whole of Switzerland. 232. 3ci»cr (jcbtticbcr, jcglidicr). i. Qtbtx (biefer model) is used to denote each individual belonging to a class : 3cbcr SSanm I)at Sfte. Every tree has branches. 2. It is sometimes preceded by ein, and then follows the mixed adjective declension : (Sr ^at einem jebcn gebanft. He thanked each one. 3. It replaces iebermatttl before a genitive or twit : (Sin) jcber t)On ben §erren. Every one of the gentlemen. Note. — 3cbtt)eber, jcgUdier are less common substitutes for jeber. 233. 9Jlan(i^er (btefer model) may remain uninflected before an adjective : SJJanc^e^ 3"^^^ ift tierfloffen. Many a year has gone by. 9[)?an(J)e iDaren gugegen. Many (people) were present. dJlanijcx gutc (man(^ gntcr) Many a good man. maun. 204 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 234 234. ©ittigc, ctlidjc, i. They follow the biefer model, and denote a small number : 9Sor etntgcn (etlicfjen) ^ci^ten, A few years ago. ©inige maren un^ufrieben. Some were dissatisfied. 2. They are used in the singular, but only before nouns of quantity, material, etc., to denote a limited amount : Qd) \}aht etnige!^ ®elb. I have some money (not much). Note. — Unless the idea of limited quantity is emphasized, * some ' and * any ' are omitted when rendering into German. 235. @ett«o, mc^r* i. They are indechnable, and are also used adverbially : @r tft tvtit genug gegangen. He has walked far enough. -3cf) f)abe melir ®elb al^ ©te» I have more money than you. 2. ®enug always follows its adjective or adverb, but may precede or follow its noun : J)a^ tft f(f)ItTnm gcnug. That is bad enough. ®elb genug (or genug ®elb). Money enough. 236. aWeljrerc is mostly used in the plural (biefer model) : 3Ke^rerc (Seute) murben franf. Several (people) fell ill. Note. — The neut. sing. mt^XtXt^ is sometimes used as a pron. : Tlel}Xext§ ift gefd)ei^en, * Several things have happened.' 237. S^fcl, ttJcntg. i. They usually remain uninflected in the singular when used adjectively: S^i) ^abe tt)entg (t)tel) ®elb. I have little (much) money. 2. ©in iDCtttg (uninflected) = *a little ' : 3}?it em trienig ®elb. With a little money. §aftbu®elb'? gin tpetltg. Have you money? Alittle. 3. They are usually declined in the plural, and always so when used pronominally : SBaren t)telc Seute jugegen? Were many people present? g^ trarett nur iDenige ba. There were only a few there. § 237] LESSON L 205 EXERCISE L A. @^ ift in ber Zai fc^recflic^, menn bie fefte (5rbe einem unter ben git^en bebt nnb jittert. gin jebe^ f)eftiGe^ grbbe- ben toftet Diefe 3)?en[d)en(eben, aber fetten fo t)ie(e Staufenbe, tT)ie ba^ienige, \od&}t^ am 28. S)e5ember 1908 in ^talien ftatt* fanb nnb bie ganje Sett ntit ©ntfe^en erfUHte, ©anje (gtdbte in S'alabrien nnb (gijilien tt)nrben babnr(^ i)erni(J)tet nnb nnr iDenige 35orfer blieben nnbefc^cibigt. 3ln^ einer ©tabt fam bie fnrc^tbare 9^ac^ri(^t, ba^ famtHc^e ginmo^ner nm^ Seben ge^^ fommen feien. 3n 9)^^lTitta maren in fnrjer ^di faft al(e gro^en ©ebiinbe fomie manege t)on ben Meineren ^cinfern ganj jerft5rt nnb ntan(^ alter Jempet jerrltttet. 2ln ntancf)en Drten maren fo menige 9Wenfd^en nnDerle^t geblieben, ba^ beren nic^t genng iDaren, nm ben anberen bei^nfte^en. 33iele tion biefen genten Dertoren aCe^, ni(^t nnr alt i^re ^aht, fon* bern and) Seib nnb Sinb, bie nnter ben SCrltntmern begraben lagen. J)iefe^ grbbeben ^at t)iel me^r 2Kenf c{)enteben gef oftet, at^ ber ganse bentf(^=fran5ofifc^e ^rieg. B. Oral exercise on the above. C. I. All the pupils have come. 2. All my relatives live in Germany. 3. Mr. B. is quite poor now ; he has lost all his money. 4. Could you not lend me some money? 5. I have only a few marks, but I will lend you all I have with me. 6. Pardon me ; I had quite forgotten your name. 7. When any part at all of the earth trembles, the whole earth trembles more or less. 8. Every one of the courtiers tried to set the egg upright. 9. Many tried it, but only a few succeeded. 10. If one [man] does evil, many suffer by it (babnrc^). 11. Many a good man suffers for others. 12. A little is better than nothing at all. 13. Some of the pupils are here ; the others have not come yet. 14. They should be here every morning at 9 o'clock. 15. I visited Sicily some years ago. 16. Money lost, little lost ; friends lost, much lost ; courage lost, everything lost. 2o6 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 238 D. I. It is something terrible when the earth trembles under one's feet. 2. Almost every year earthquakes take place in some part or other of the world. 3. Some of them are not very violent. 4. By others whole towns are destroyed and many thousands perish. 5. Among the most violent earth- quakes of our time was that of (t)on) San Francisco in 1906. 6. On that occasion almost the whole of the city was destroyed by fire. 7. Several hundreds of the inhabitants lost their lives. 8. The earthquake in Italy in 1908 was something much more dreadful. 9. Many of the towns and villages of Sicily and Calabria were entirely annihilated. 10. In a few minutes the whole city of Messina lay in ruins. 11. Very few of the inhabitants remained uninjured. 12. Many children lost their parents. 13. Many a father had lost wife and child. 14. Almost all had lost all their possession[s]. 15. All Italy was filled with horror. 16. It cost more human Hves than all the earthquakes of the last hundred years. E, 8e[eftii(f : ®er bu t)on bem §immel btft, Sltle^ 8eib unb ©djmerjen [tiHeft, ®en, ber boppelt etenb \\i, ©oppelt mit (Srqutdung fiideft, 9ld), icf) bin be^ Sl^retben^ mitbe ! Sa^ foil aH ber ©cfimerg unb 8uft? ©ii^er grtebe, ^omm, ad) fomm in metne 4Bruft! LESSON LI 238. Adverbs, i. Most adjectives may be used as adverbs without change ; for comparison of adverbs, see Less. XXXIX. 2. The ordinary rules for the formation and derivation of adverbs are omitted here ; adverbial forms are best learned by observation and from the dictionary. 3. The following sections contain examples of the more diffi- cult idiomatic uses of certain adverbs. §243] LESSON LI 207 239. 5luri|. 3luc^ id) trar gegen iijU. Even I was against him. 3)iein ^ruber wax nidjt tniibe, My brother was not tired, and unb id) and) nic^t, I was not tired either. Qd) bin ntube. — Qd) and). I am tired. — So am I. 240. @r it)irb bo'^ fommen. & iDtrb bo^ fo'Tttmen. §abe tc^ e^ bod) gefa'gt! §aft bu e^ nxd)t geprt? ©o'di ! Qd) ijabt e^ nic^t getan. ®ie ^aben e^ bo'd) getan. ^ommen @ie boc^ herein. He will come after all. He will come, I hope. I said so (didn't I) ! Didn't you hear it? I did. I didn't do it. Yes, you did. Pray (do) come in. Observe : i. In exclamatory sentences with hod) (see third example) the verb often begins the sentence. 2. T)od) gives an affirmative reply to a negative statement or question. 241. ©ben. '©a^ ift eben, ica^ id) merne. That is just what I mean. Sr ift eben angefommen. He has just arrived. 24». grft ben!en, bann fprec^en. gr fomtnt erft am greitag. ®ie ift erft jtrei ^^a^re alt. 243. ®crtt. Qd) effe gem ^i^d). S)a^ mag gem feitt. Qd) tDlirbe e^ gem tun. gr morf)te Ueber nid)t fommen. Sr fame gem. First think, then speak. He isn't coming before Friday. She is only two years old. I am fond offish. That may well be. I should gladly do it. He would rather not come. He would like to come. 2o8 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 244 244. Sa. Jun @te e^ ja'* Be sure to do it. dx t[t ja metn SSa'ter. He is my father, you know. ©a^ f)atte id) [a tjergeffen. Why, I had forgotten that. 245. mod^. ©tub ®ie nO(f) t)ter ? Are you still here ? Qd) wax nO(J) nie bort. I was never there. 9foc^ t)eute ; noc^ geftern ; nod^ To-day at the latest; only yes- immer* terday ; still. ^od) tint Xa]\t; noc^ glDCt. Another cup; two more. 9^od^ einmaf fo ttieL As much again. Observe : ^od) precedes the negatives nie, nirfjt, IC* 246. ^ttr. ^ommen ®ie nur herein. Just come in. SBa^ tDiinfcf)en ®ie nur ? What do you want (anyway)? 247. 8(!)iJtt. ©inb ©te [c^on ba? Are you there already? @^on ^eute. Not later than to-day. 3ft fie f(^on in 9tom getnefen? Has she ever been in Rome? ^C^ bin f(^on ad)t Zag^t ijitx. I have been here for a week. 2)a^ ©d^iff ift f(J)on geftern The ship arrived (as early as) angefommen, yesterday. (5r mirb f(^on !omnten. He will surely come, gr ift je^t f(^on ba. He is there by this time. 248 ^ol)l ©ie finb mo^I ntitbe. I suppose you are tired. Sranf ift er tDoI}!, aber nic^t He is ill, to be sure, but not gefa^rlit^. dangerously. T)a^ ift tt)0l)I ma^r. That is no doubt true. J)a^ mag IDO^I fein. That is very hkely so. § 249] LESSON LI 209 249. Bucrft. 3)iefe^ ®(^tff fatn juerft an. This ship arrived first. Qi} gel)e juerft (erft) gum I am going first to the tailor's, @cf)neiber, batin jum ^ndj- then to the bookseller's. ^anbter. EXERCISE LI A, gin ©Iciubtger fatn eine^ 9}Jorgen^ ju etnem T)ii)ttv, aU btefer no(^ ju ^ett (ag, unb ijattt f(J)on ba^ ganje 3^^^^: burc^fuc^t, al^ berfelbe ermacfite, — SBa^ iDoHen ®ie nur? fragte er. — Seien ®te boi^ f o gut, biefe Stec^nung gu begleicfjen. — (2e^r gerne, aber fet)en @te erft in {ener ©c^ubtabe nac^, ob ba ®elb liegt. — 'I)a^ I)abe ic^ erft eben getan. — S)ann tierfudjen ®ie e^ borf) mtt ber anberen. — 2lu(^ ba tft nid^t^ ; ba ^abe id) juerft gefud)t, — 3luf bent SEtfc^e ()aben @te tDo^t nic^t nad)^ gefe^en? — Dod^ ; aber ba ift eben fo tt)entg gufe^en. — §aben (gie au^ int @cf)retbtif(^ gefui^t ? — 3luc^ ba, aber t^ergeben^. — §abe id)'^ tntr bod) gebad)t! ©^ wax nod) geftern 3lbenb ntd)t^ barin. !Dann ntuffen ®te woijl ntetne Za^djtn burt^^ fud)en. — S)a^ tft auft fd)on gefi^et)en. — ®a^ tft Jd unglaub* Ud) ! 9Ja, trenn fic^ ujeber in ben (2d)ub(aben no(^ fonft irgenbtt)o @elb beftnbet, fo fann tc^ Ste unnti^gUd) bejalilen. Sontmen (2ie nur noc^ etnntal unb t^ergeffen @ie [a ntd)t bte 9te(^nung ntitjubringen. 2l(f o, auf ffiteberfel)en ! B, Oral exercise on the above. C, I. Speak louder, I pray you ; I can't hear you. 2. Just read the letter, if you wish (to). 3. Uncle has just arrived ; aunt is not coming till Monday. 4. I would rather not go to the theater this evening. 5. First (the) business and then (the) pleasure. 6. Be sure not to take that book ; I have only read the half of it. 7. Who arrived first, your uncle or your aunt? 8. Your cousin must have arrived in Berlin by this time. 9. I should like to know whether he is there already. 10. That is 2IO GERMAN GRAMiMAR [§250 just what I should like to know myself. 11. I have only ten marks left (= still). 1 2. Do take another piece of roast, Miss L. 13. Why, I have twice as much as I can eat. 14. You surely don't mean that! 15. Yes, I do. 16. I haven't seen Mr. Braun since Easter. 17. Neither have I. 18. I suppose he isn't in town. 19. Yes, he is ; my wife saw him only yesterday. D, I. The tailor has come and wants his money. 2. He should not have come when I am still in bed. 3. I suppose you didn't tell him I was sleeping. 4. O yes, I did. 5. He • has been here for the last hour. 6. He says he would hke to have his money not later than to-day. 7. I should gladly pay him if I could. 8. Only yesterday I had to pay several bills. 9. I must pay two or three more to-morrow. 10. They are twice as large as this one. 11. I shall pay these first and the tailor's afterwards. 12. He might wait another week. 13. A week is not a (!ein) very long time, after all. 14. That he must (do), I suppose. 15. Just tell him he is to be sure to come back (tt)teber) next week. 16. But I shall not be at home before Friday. 17. I shall surely have enough money then. LESSON LII 250. Prefixes of Compound Verbs, i . The prefixes of com- pound verbs are either stressed or unstressed, i.e, the principal stress falls either on the prefix or on the verb stem : Stu'^ge^en; tiergc'^en. To go out; to pass away. 2. Unstressed prefixes are inseparable (see § 51) : ^^ ^abe e^ tjerfproi^en. I have promised it. 3. Stressed prefixes are separable (for word order, see § 50) : ^i) ge^e ^eute au^. I am going out to-day. ^arl tft eben au^gegangen, Charles has just gone out. ^ommen @ie bo(^ l^erein. Pray, do come in. § 252] LESSON LII 211 Note. — The difficulties of detail explained in the following paragraphs depend upon the principles stated above. 251. Quasi- Prefixes, i. Besides the ordinary verb prefixes, many words and phrases in common use have practically the function of separable prefixes, and follow the same rules of word order. 2. Such are nouns as objects, with or without prepositions : ©lb barauf arfft Pay heed to it. gr [agte, ba^ t(J) nii^t atj^tgebe. He said I was not paying attention. 5Kimm bic^ in ad^i Take care. Note. — Nouns so used are now usually written with a small letter, and often in one word with the governing preposition. 3. So also certain adjectives : Saffen ©ie mtd^ lo^. Let me go. Sr iDurbe freigefproi^en. He was acquitted. Notes. — i. Some adj. prefixes are insep., even when stressed, and retain the prefix gc-: dv fing an 5U tuci^fagett, * Hehegan to prophesy'; (Bit Ijat fl(^ gercd^tfertigt, * She has justified herself.' 2. ^oUf except in the literal sense, is unstressed and insep. : Sr l)at hd^ 2Ber! tJoUenbct, 'He has completed the work'; (gr ^at ha^ @(a^ tioU' gcgoffen, * He has poured the glass full.' 252. Double Prefixes, i. Separable -f- separable ; both sep- arable : gr ijat ba^ tiotau'^gefagt. He predicted that. 2. Separable + inseparable ; the former alone separable : Qd) 9eftef)e ba^ jm I admit that. (Sr erfannte e^ an. He acknowledged it. 3. Inseparable + separable ; both inseparable : -^c^ bea'bfi(^tige, e6 ^u tun. I intend to do it. (gr ^at ba^ tiera'nftaltet. He has arranged that. 212 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§253 253. ^cr, l)itt. i. The simple prepositional prefixes of direc- tion, ab-, an-, auf-, au^-, ein-, nieber-, itber-, utn-, unter-, t)or-, are used only when the compound verb denotes motion in a general way, without specifying or implying a starting-point or destination, or when there is no idea of motion : (Sr ift eben au^gegangen* He has just gone out. ®ie tamen geftern an* They arrived yesterday. 9Bir rei[en morgan ah. We are off to-morrow. SBa^ 5ie{)en ®ie tior? What do you prefer? 2. The prefixes l|cr~, 'hither,' and Ijin-, 'thither,' indicate direction, respectively, to or from the speaker or spectator : ^omnten ©ie ^en Come here (to me). dv [oil I|ingef)en. He is to go there. 3. 2ln^-, t)or-, and also ab- in the sense of ' down,' require l)tX- or !f)tn- prefixed, when a starting-point is implied but not specified; the others (an-, anf-, 2C.), when a destination is implied but not specified : gr gtng gnr Znv (finan^. He went out at the door. Sr jog etn Sucfl t|Crt)Or. He produced a book. ®e^en (Ste l^tnnnter (^inab). Go down (stairs). dx ift l^cranfgefommen. He has come up (stairs). 4. When the starting-point or destination is specified, these compound prefixes are used when the preposition and prefix do not correspond : 2Str fn^ren oft nac^ gollanb We often crossed over to Hol- Ijinuficr* land. & fiel t)ont ©ac^e fieraft* He fell (down) from the roof. 5. When preposition and prefix correspond, the compound prefix may be used : dx gtng an^ bent 3!^^^^ ^^ ^^"^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^ (^inan^), al^ t(^ eintrat. entered. § 254] LESSON LII 213 254. Prefixes with Varying Stress, i. The prefixes burd^-, itber-, um-, Uttter-, are sometimes stressed (separable) and sometimes unstressed (inseparable). 2. Some of these compounds are used both separably and inseparably, usually with different meaning : (Sr ift ^ier bu'rrfigeretft. He passed through here, ©r f)at ba^ 8anb burd)ret'[t. He has traversed the country. T)er (Strom ift u'ficrgetreten. The stream has overflowed. @r iibertra't ba^ ®ebot. He transgressed the command. 3. Some are used inseparably only : 90?ein ^lan ift burd^freu'jt. My plan is thwarted, ^'c^ Uberla'ffe ba^ 3^^)^^^- I ^^^^^ t^^t to you. Unterbre'c^en ®te mic^ nid^t. Don't interrupt me. 4. Others are used separably only : (Sr ift u'mge!e^rt. He has turned back, ©er ^effet foi^t u'6cr* The kettle is boihng over. Notes. — i. The insep. transitive compound is often replaced by the simple verb + the prefix as prep. : (Sr burd)fc^ritt ba^ Xox or (gr frf)ritt burd) ha^ Xov, *He passed through the gate.' 2. Winter- as prefix is insep.; ttlicbcr- is insep. only in WkhtX^o'Un, * repeat ' : (gr t)at mid) I)interga'ngen, ' He has deceived me ' ; (Sr ^tnterlie'g nid)t«, *Heleft nothing'; 3c^ l)abe e§ tDieberl)o'U, *I repeated it.' 3. The prefix lltt^- has varying stress, but is insep., except in the past part, of some verbs, and in the infin. and past part, of others. For details, see dictionary. EXERCISE LII A, 5Wi!o{aM I. t)on Sfu^Ianb ging oft in feiner ^auptftabt ^eter^burg auf 3lbenteuer au^. 2luf biefe Seife gebac^te er, bte geben^meife feiner Untertanen ju beobac^ten. )Rnx felten tDnrbe er bei btefen ©dngen erfannt, benn er t)erffetbete fid) in etnen gen)of)nItc^en Offtjier^manteL gtnmat ^atte er fid) in eine 3Sorftabt ^inau^begeben, ^atte aber babei nid^t auf ben SBeg a^tgegeben. gnblid) tt)urbe er gema^r, bap er fid) tjerirrt 214 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§254 l^atte, g^ blteb i^m alfo nid^t^ itbrig, al^ m etner J)rof(^!e an5Ut)ertrauen, & rief eine ^erbei, ftieg ein unb bebeutete bem £utf(^er, if)n jur ®tabt ^meinjufa^ren unb il)n am SBittter^alat^ absufe^en, Sort angetommen, [tieg ber ^av au^, 2lt^ er aber beja^len iDoIIte, ftellte e^ fief) ^erau^, ba^ er a(I fein ®elb t^erau^gabt fjatte, „aSarte nur ^ter/' fagte er gum ^utf(J)er unb tDoKte tn^ (S(^Iog eintreten, „td) ttJtH btr ba^ ®elb fofort ^erau^fc^iden.'' „9^etn, 2Saterd)en/' unterbrat^ ttju ber a^ann, n\o ^aben mi(^ bte §erren Dffistere f^on ein ^jaarmat ^tntergangen. @ie gtngen gur 3Sorbertur ^inein unb bann gur §tntertur ujieber ^tnau^, unb [o fam i^ um mein gute^ ®elb, Uberfa§ mtr nur beinen 3JfanteI ; fif)t(f ft bu mir ba^ ®elb ^erau^, [o fdjtde trf) i^n btr fogleti^ ^tnein." S)er Saifer tt)ar alfo gejiDungen, bem ^utfdjer ben 9J?antet ju uberlaffen, benn er eriannte an, ba^ ber 9Kann rerfit {)atte» B. Oral : i. Weshalb ging der Kaiser oft auf Abenteuer aus? 2. Warum wurde er dabei selten erkannt? 3. Wie kam es, daB er sich verirrte ? 4. Wohin hatte er sich begeben ? 5 . Was tat er also? 6. Welchen Befehl gab er dem Kutscher? 7. Wes- halb bezahlte er nicht sogleich den Kutscher? 8. Was ver- sprach ihm der Kaiser? 9. Von wem war dieser oftmals hin- tergangen vvorden? 10. Wie hatten sie ihn betrogen? II. Wozu war Seme Majestat gezwungen? 12. Weshalb tat er das? C. I. Have you observed the conduct of this man? 2. I shall not be recognized. 3. Take care, or else we shall be recognized. 4. Betake yourself to the country. 5. Take care of (auf, ace.) your health when you are young. 6. Take care, the train is coming. 7. I have entrusted all my money to a friend. 8. Get into the carriage. 9. Get out of the carriage. 10. Order the cabman to drive into the city. 11. The Czar got out [of the carriage]. 12. We shall have spent all our money. 13. Do you wish to enter the palace? 14. Come in § 254] LESSON LII 215 at the front-door. 15. Send the cabman in at the back-door. 16. First send me out my money. 17. The emperor did not cheat the cabman. 18. It is impossible to be in the right always. 19. The cabman was in the right, and the emperor was obliged to acknowledge it. 20. Even emperors are not always in the right. D. I. Nicholas I once betook himself to a suburb of St. Petersburg. 2. He didn't give heed to the way, and went astray. 3. He w^as forced to trust himself to a cab. 4. The cabman drove him into the city, and set him down at the palace. 5. When he had arrived there, it turned out that His Majesty could not pay. 6. He searched all his pockets and found nothing. 7. He told the cabman he had spent all his money. 8. " I will go into the palace and bring you out your money." 9. "Oh, no ! In this way I have often lost (foTtttnen urn) my money. 10. It is very easy to go in at the front-door and out at the back-door. 11. I have been cheated only too often. 12. Just hand over your cloak to me." 13. *^Youare right ; I will entrust it to you. 14. But promise to hand it over to the servant, when I send you out your money." 15. The Czar sent out the money, and the cloak was handed over to the servant. E, Lesestuck: Am 14. Oktober 1806 saB Hegel, der berlihmte Philosoph, der damals Professor in Jena war, am Schreibtische und arbeitete an einer Abhandlung, als der Schreibtisch plotzlich von groBen Eisensplittern liberstreut wurde. Er rief das Stubenmadchen und sagte argerlich : " Was ist das fiir eine Unordnung?" Das Madchen teilte ihm mit, da{5 die PreuBen und Franzosen in den StraBen kampften und dais dies die Ursache der Storung sei. "• Das ist mir gleich,'* sagte Hegel, " das interessiert mich gar nicht ; sorge, daB ich in Ruhe arbeiten kann." Das war am Tage der groBen Schlacht bei Jena, wo das preuBische Heer von Napoleon beinahe vernichtet wurde. 2i6 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 255 LESSON LIII 255. Conjunctions. Conjunctions are either coordinative, connecting sentences of the same rank or order, or subordina- tive, connecting a sentence with another on which it depends. 256. Connectives, i. The coordinative conjunctions proper are the common connectives, and do not affect the word order : aber, but. benn, for. fonbern, but, on the alletn, only, but yet. ober, or. contrary. Unb, and. 2. When two principal sentences connected by Uttb have a common subject, the verb of the latter sentence usually follows the conjunction immediately : aWein greunb ift frani unb My friend is ill and has to tnuft ba^ §au^ i^ixttn. stay in the house. 3. If any other member of the sentence introduced by utlb precedes the verb, a personal pronoun must follow as subject : 3)?em greunb ift frattf unb My friend is ill, and so he must be^^atb mu^ cr ba^ §au^ stay in the house, pten. 4- ®enn never introduces a dependent sentence, except in indirect statements with ba^ omitted : dv fagte, ba^ er nicf)t fame, He said he wasn't coming, bcnti er fei franf. for he was ill. 5. 3lber often follows the verb of its sentence (especially when another conjunction is present), and then = ' however ' : (Sr fomtnt tt)O^I nt(^t, tDentt er He will hardly come ; if he after fommt, 2C. should come, however, etc. 6. ©onbern corrects or contradicts a preceding negative statement : @r tDtrb ntdjt fterben, fonbcrn He will not die, but (on the genefen. contrary) he will recover. § 258] LESSON LIII 217 257. Adverbial Conjunctions, i. Adverbs and adverbial phrases often have the function of a connective conjunction, and introduce a sentence coordinate with the preceding sen- tence ; they then throw the subject after the verb : dv ift Iran!; alfo fommt er He is ill; hence he won't nid^t. come. 2. These adverbial conjunctions may also follow the verb as ordinary adverbs : (Sr ift !ran!; er fommt alfo He is ill; hence he won't nid^t. come. 258. Special Cases, i. 3lud^does not cause inversion of verb and subject when it modifies a member of the sentence which precedes the verb : %n^ mein SSater Dertte^ mtc^. Even my father forsook me. 2. ©Ctttt = 'unless ' never begins a sentence : Qij fomme morgen, e^ fet benn I shall come to-morrow unless ba^ e^ regnet. it rains. 3. 5yiuit in the sense of * now ' implies a relation to a preced- ing statement ; Je^t denotes time only : 9lUtt fommt e^ oft t)or, 2c. Now, it often happens, etc. 3e^t ift e^ 3^it. It is time now. 4. Adversative adverbial conjunctions, e.g. alfo, freitirf), ttUtt^ 2C., followed by a pause (indicated by a comma), cause no inversion : ^reilic^, ba^ mag toaijX fein. Of course, that may be true. EXERCISE LIII A. gin getDiffer :93anfier brauc^te einen 8aufburfc^en an feiner Sanf unb ^atte be^^alb eine 2lnjeige in bie ^^^^^^9 einfe^en laffen. 5)arauf melbeten fic^ am anbern 2^age ettra 60 Snaben. ©ogleic^ fd)i(fte er fie atte fort, bi^ anf einen. 2i8 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§258 ©^ fatten stt)ar emtge t)on t^neti fe^r gute (Stnpfe^tung^briefe, allein er entlie^ fie unb iDci^Ite einen, ber gar feinen Srief Ijattt. ®a fagte ein §err, ber sufdlltg babei tDar : „3)ie[er 3unge ^atte boc^ feinen ©mpfe^Iung^brief, nnb tro^bem ^aben @ie i^n betior^ngt, SSarum taten ®ie ba^ eigentUd)?'' „®riefe ^atte er freilii^ nxd)t/' fautete bie 2lntn)ort, „bagegen f)atte er eine 2J?enge (gmpfe^Iungen. Qd) bemerfte, jum ©ei- fpiel, ba^ er bie ©tiefel abpnfete, unb au^erbem ^ob er eine ®te(fnabel t)ont <33oben auf ; f otgtirf) ift er jugteic^ reintic^ nnb forgfditig, Slnrf) na^nt er bie Wni^t ab unb antrt)ortete ntir ft^nell unb rii^tig ; baf)er ntu^ er nic^t nur ^oflirf), fonbern auii) !(ug nnb aufmerffam fein, gr briingte [i(^ ni(^t t)or, alfo ift er and) befdjeiben* Ubrigen^, ifi) gebe nief)r anf ba^, tna^ i(^ an einem 9)Zenf^en beobac^ten !ann, at^ anf bie beften (Sntpfet)Iung^briefe," B. I. The pupils came late, and therefore had to stay in. 2. I did not keep his letter, but threw it into the waste-basket. 3. Don't come in at the front-door, but at the back-door. 4. I can't come to-day, but I can come to-morrow. 5. My brother saw the advertisement, and at once made application. 6. The •banker said the boy pleased him, for he was so polite. 7. Many had good recommendations ; nevertheless they didn't get the position. 8. You have no recommendations ; consequently I can't give you the position. 9. He took off his cap, hence I am sure he is polite. 10. Besides, he didn't press forward like the others. 11. Moreover, I observed that he wiped his boots when he came in. 12. Hence he must be tidy. C. I. Nearly every one knows the story of M. Laffitte, who was a celebrated French banker. 2. When he was (still) quite young, he applied to (bei) a Paris banker, and asked for a posi- tion in (an) his bank. 3. It is true he had letters of recom- mendation. 4. Nevertheless the banker dismissed him, for he didn't need even an errand-boy. 5. As young Laffitte was going out, however, the banker observed that he picked up a pin, which § 259] LESSON LIV 219 lay on the floor. 6. Consequently he thought : " At least this boy is careful." 7. Accordingly the banker wrote him a letter in which he said : " I find that I have after all (bO(f)) a place for you. 8. It is not a very important (tDirf)tig) one, to be sure, but still it is better than nothing at all. 9. So then, I shall expect you to-morrow m.orning." 10. Naturally Laffitte accepted the place with pleasure. 11. Afterwards he became a very wealthy man. 12. He was besides one of the most celebrated ministers of France. LESSON LIV 259. Subordinative Conjunctions, i. Those most commonly occurring are : at^, as, when, than. obgfetrf), (al)though. al^ ob, al^ menn, as if. obf(^on, " auf ba^, (in order) that. obtt)O^I, " bet)or, before. feit(bem), since, bi^, until. fobatb, as soon as. ba^ as, since, when. folange, as long as. bamit, in order that. fotnte, as soon as, as well as. ba^, that. unterbeffen, while, e^e, before. n)al)renb, while, fatte, in case. IDCU, because, inbem, while. tuenn, if, when, inbeffen, " tvtnn au(^, (al)though, even if. Tta^bem, after. ' tDenngleic^, " " " " ob, whether, if. hjennfc^ott, " " " " ob aucf), (al)though. tt)ie, as, like. tt)ietDO^I, (al)though. 2. These conjunctions connect a subordinate sentence with a principal sentence, or with another subordinate sentence, and throw the verb to the end : ' Q6) glaube, ha^ er fommt. I think he will come. Qd) tDei^ nic^t, ob e^ n)a^r ift, I don't know whether it is true ba^ er Ucrrcift. that he is going away. 2 20 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 260 260. Special Cases, i. ' As ' in the sense of 'while' = ttlbettl (inbeffen, unterbeffett): dx [djiief, inbem id) tDai^te* He slept while I watched. 2. ' As ' or ' since ' indicating cause = ba: (Sr faun ^eute nt(J)t fommen, ba He can't come to-day, as it is e^ regnet. raining. 3. * Since 'as preposition = feit; as subordinative conjunc- tion of time = [eitbem (or feit) : (Sr tft fd^on feit t)ortger SBod^e He has been here since last ^ter. week. Qd) ^abe i^n nic^t gefe^en, I have not seen him since he fettbem er angefommen ift. arrived. 4. ' Since ' as adverb or coordinative adverbial conjunction = feitbem: ©eitbcm fd^retbt er nic^t. He hasn't written since. 5. 9lte = ' but ' after negatives ; nt(f)t^ iDeniger at^ = ^any- thing but ' : 9?t(^t^ aU Unglitd . Nothing but bad luck. 9lt^t^ toenigcr aU retd^. Anything but rich. 6. ^'nbeffen, unterbeffen are coordinative in the sense of ' meanwhile ' ; subordinative in the sense of * while ' : Qd) tDadjte; ittbeffcn frfilief I watched; meanwhile my metn greunb. friend slept. Qd) mai^te, unterbeffen metn I watched while my friend greunb ft^Itef. slept. 7. Ob = ' if ' or ' whether ' in indirect questions : grage i^n, oh er miibe ift. Ask him if he is tired. 8. In obgletd^ (tDenngleidf), obft^on, zc,)/ though," although/ the latter part may be separated and placed after the subject ; aud^ is always so separated : Dfigle^ er rei(^ tft. Although he is rich. Dti er fllet^ (aucf), :c.) retd) tft. '' " '' " § 26 1] LESSON LIV * 221 9. The ob or IDetlU may also be omitted in these conjunc- tions, and in aU ob, al^ iDCntt; the verb then begins its sentence : Q^t er gleic^ reii^. Though he is rich. (S^ fi^emt, a(^ fame er. It seems as if he would come. 10. SSt\)OX expresses time only ; e^e also expresses preference : @^c (betior) e^ buttfel iDtrb. Before k gets dark. @^c ic^ ba^ tue, trete ic^ lieber Rather than do that, I will au^. resign. 11. Distinguish carefully between 'after' and 'before* as prepositions and as conjunctions : mad^ bem «aKe. After the ball. 9lat3^bcm er fort iDar. After he had gone. SJor bem 3lbenbeffen. Before supper. ©l^e (bet)or) id) tf)ti fa^. Before I saw him. 261. Correlative Conjunctions, i. These conjunctions con- sist of two parts, the second being necessary to complete the first ; the following are the most important : balb . . . balb, at one time . . . at another; now . . . now (then). (chtn) fo . . . iDte, (just) as ... as. befto (ie) . . . befto ({e, um[o), the . . . the. fo . . . |o, as . . . as. 2. In sentences introduced by folDO^l . . . at^ (aui)) the verb agrees with the last subject : ®0tt)0^I id) at^ (and)) tnetn Both my cousin and I have SSetter ift angefommen. arrived. etitlt)eber . . . ober, either . . . or. treber . . . nod), neither . • . nor. nic^t nur . . . fonbem and), not only . . . but also. fon)of)f . . . al^ (au^), both . . . and. 222 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 261 3. !j)eftO and je are used interchangeably in either member of a proportional clause ; the former member is subordinate, the latter principal, but with inversion of subject and verb. ^C (befto) e^er er fommt, The sooner he comes, the bcfto (Je) et)er !ann er ge^en. sooner he can go. 4. ®0 ♦ . ♦ fo introduce correlative clauses containing ad- jectives compared together in the positive degree, the former being subordinate : (Bo gro^ er ift, fo feige tft er* He is as cowardly as he is big. (Bo gerne itJ) fame, fo un- Gladly as I would come, it is Ttldgtic^ ift e^, quite impossible. EXERCISE LIV A. 911^ etn alter ?otfe eitie^ ftUrmifc^ett Sage^ mtt anberen am Ufer be^ 2JJeere^ ftanb, fa^ er brau^en etn gro^e^ ©egel- f ct)tff t^orbetf a^ren, 35a er erfannte, ba^ ba^felbe falf c^ gefteuert tDarb, rief er aM: „@ntlDeber mu^ bie ®rtgg einlenfen, ober fie mirb am SSorgebirge f(^eitern, Qii) mu^ ^inau^, bamit id) ben ©teuermann tvaxm." „3Benn bn and) ^tnau^fii^reft/' er* n)tberte man i^m, „fo fonnteft bu boi) nx(i)t ^elfen, ba betn ^oot fofort fentern trlirbe, nnb bu t)erfinfen mil^teft,'' ^SoIIte e^ gletc^ metn Seben foften, fo miH 16) t[)m tpenigften^ jurnfen, tt)k er ftenern mn^. Senn e^ aui^ mein letter 9luf tft, fo bleibt mir ntc^t^ itbrtg, al^ ben 9Serfud) jn maiijtn." 2l{fo ^olte er fein (2prad)roI)r nnb ftteg in fein fletne^ ^oot ein, ©obalb ba§ (gegel aufgelji^t ttiar, flog ba^ 33oot pfeilfi^neK oor bem (gturme bal)in. .^m Slugenbltde aber, ba ba^felbe au^ bem ©dju^e be^ 3Sorgebirge^ f)eran^fd)o^, fd)Iug e^ nm» ^^nbeffen ^tte er nod^ eben bem ©tenermann jnrnfen fonnen: „8inf^ mit^t t^r ftenern*'' SBii^renb bte Srigg n)etterfn^r, tierfan! ber ^elbenmitttge Sllte in. bte S^tefe* ©oi^ wax fein ©elbenmnt nic^t t)ergeben^ gemefen, ba ba^ ®^iff mit §nnberten oon § 26 1] LESSON LIV 223 2)?enfc^en(eben gerettet mar, @o gro^ ba^ Opfet ttjar, \o grop tt)ar and) ber 8o^n. ^. Oral exercise on the above. C. Complete the following sentences : i. Ich habe ihn nicht gesehen, seitdem ... 2. Seit . . . muB meine Tante zu Hause bleiben. 3. Wir studierten, unterdessen ... 4. Nachdem . . . , muB ich noch eine Aufgabe schreiben. 5. Wir mtissen vor . . . abreisen. 6. Der Lotse versank, ehe ... 7. Wir gehen nicht ins Konzert, da . . . JD. I. It seems as if the ship must (sufy\) be wrecked. 2. Even if the pilot goes out in his boat, perhaps he will not be able to save it after all. 3. Neither he nor his boat will ever return. 4. While the others were talking, the old man got (I)oIen) his speaking-trumpet. 5. After he had got it, he embarked in his little boat. 6. As soon as everything was ready, he hoisted the sail. 7. Although the storm was very vio- lent, the heroic pilot resolved to make the attempt. 8. If his boat capsizes, he will certainly lose his life. 9. He must warn the steersman, before the latter comes too near the promon- tory. 10. Even now it seems as if he would be (fomtnett) too late. II. Meanwhile the storm became more and more violent. 12. It is anything but easy to steer a small boat through a stormy sea (^ee,/.). 13. Not only will the ship be wrecked, but also hundreds of men will perish. 14. Either the pilot must warn the steersman or the ship will be wrecked. 15. At one time it seemed as if he would succeed, at another it seemed as if his boat would capsize. 16. The greater the danger, the greater is the heroism of the pilot. 17. Before his boat sank, however, he called to the steersman through his speaking-trumpet. 18. As the latter now knew how he should steer, he saved the brig. 19. Even if the old man lost his life, still he had his reward. 20. After he was dead, his heroism was honored by every one. 224 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§262 E. 8efeftU(J: 3ur @(^mtebe gtng etn {unger §elb^ gr ^atf ein gute^ ®cf)it)ert beftellt* S)od^ al^ ert tDog in [einer ^anb, J)a^ ©(^iDcrt er t)iel ju firmer erfatib* J)er alte ®(^mteb ben :33art fic^ ftreid^t: ,,J)a^ ®(^it)ert ift nti^t ju f^mer, no(^ Ietcf)t; 3u fc^marf) ift euer 2lrnt, irf) mein'; S)od^ morgen foil ge^olfen fein!'' 3ein, ^euf ! bei alter 9?itterfcf)aft! !j)urd) meine, ni(^t bur^ genera ^raft!" ©er ^fiingling fpri(^t'^, il^n Sraft buri^bringt, S)a^ (gdfitDert er ^od^ in 8itften f^tDingt, LESSON LV 262. Agreement of Verb and Subject, i. This agreement is, in general, the same in German as in English ; for exceptions, see below. 2. With several subjects, the verb may agree with the nearest singular subject, especially if the subjects follow the verb, or are grouped together, or form a climax : SSorbei ift SBinb unb 9?egen. Wind and rain are past. @elb unb ®Ut ift f)in. Money and wealth are gone. 33erm5gen, 9Juf, 8eben ftcl^t Property, reputation, life are at auf bem ©piele. stake. 3. With titles of rank and compliment, the verb is often in the third plural in address and in official documents : SBa^ tDitnf (^en gnabige gran ? What do you wish, madam ? ©eine 2)iaj;eftdt ^abcn gern^t, His Majesty has been pleased, 2C. etc. 4. The agreement of a verb with a collective is in general the same as in English. § 264] LESSON LV 225 263. Appositive Noun. i. A noun in apposition with another usually agrees with it in case : ^arl, meiniiincjftcr^Sruber, tft Charles, my youngest brother, fratif. is ill. !Die Sranf^eit ^arl^, meine^ The illness of Charles, my {ilngften Sruber^. youngest brother. Qii) begegnete ^arl, feinem I met Charles, his youngest iiingften Sruber. brother. 2. The case of a noun in apposition after a(^ or toxt depends upon the sense, the indefinite article being omitted after al^ before an unqualified noun : Qi) fannte t^n aU Snabe I knew him as a boy (when I (= al^ id) ein Snabe iDar). was a boy). Qiij fannte i^n ati^ Snaben I knew him as a boy (when he (= a(^ er ein ^nabe n)ar). was a boy). @r \}at feinen befferen greunb He has no better friend than I. ginent 9)?anne tote Sic (e^ A man like you is not to be finb) ift ntt^t gn tranen. trusted. Notes. — i. %i^ indicates identity and ttlic comparison: (Sr !ommt ai^ MniQ, * He comes as a king ' (and is one ) ; (Sr fommt Wic till MnXQ, *He comes like a king' (though he may not be one). . 2. P"or apposition in expressions of quantity, see § 112, 3; in titles and proper names, §§ 182, 188. 264. Appositive Adjective, i. An uninflected adjective or participle may stand in apposition to a noun (usually the sub- ject) : !j)te "iPferbe, t)om 3^ge cr= The horses, frightened by the frfircdt, gtngen bmij. train, ran away. 2. Unless the apposition is with the subject, the Enghsh ap- positive construction should be rendered into German by a subordinate clause : Q(i) ^be bte U^r t)erIoren, bte I have lost the watch given me SSater mir fd)enfte. by father. 2 26 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 264 Notes. — i. The appositive adjectival construction, frequent in Eng- lish, is but sparingly used in German. 2. The appositive construction may be replaced by the attributive con- struction, for vi'hich see § 298. EXERCISE LV A, I. A large number of guests had been invited to the ball, but only [a] few were present. 2. Not more than a dozen had come at 9 o'clock. 3. Among these was the sister of (the) Count B., the German ambassador. 4. [Your] Majesty is always in the right. 5. Do you want the carriage at once, madam (gncibtge grau) ? 6. The eldest daughter of Henry the Seventh, King of England, married James the Fourth, King of Scotland. 7. These were the grandparents of Mary Stuart, Queen of Scotland. 8. The city of Dresden is the capital of the kingdom of Saxony. 9. Have you ever seen William the Second, the present German Emperor? 10. I saw him as a boy, but not since he has become Emperor. 11. When I saw him, he was riding through the park with Prince Henry, his younger brother. 12. A multitude of human beings lost their lives by (bur(f)) the earthquake. 13. The greater part of the inhabitants of Messina perished. B, I. Dear father and (dear) mother, I am sorry you have had to wait for us so long. 2. I asked you, as my oldest friend, to assist me. 3. You were right; you have no better friend than I. 4. Yes, indeed, one can always trust a friend like you. 5. The name of my brother George's teacher is Moser. 6. To do right and to be happy is one and the same [thing]. 7. The German people (3SoI!, n^ are (is) most intelligent and industrious. 8. I gave the beggar 20 pfennigs, and he went on (tt)eiter) quite happy. 9. A dozen silver spoons costs forty marks. 10. Indignant at (iiber^ acc^ his conduct, I went away at once. 11. Messrs. Schmidt and Braun have a large departmental store in Schiller Street. 12. I was not speaking with Elsa, your eldest sister, but with Clara, your youngest sister. 13. The teacher is satisfied with the exercises written by his pupils. §267] LESSON LVI 227 C Lesestiick : Ein Professor kam eines Abends nach Hause und sagte zu seiner Frau : " Siehst du wohl, wir Professoren sind doch nicht so vergeBlich, wie man glaubt. Ich habe meinen Regenschirm diesmal doch nicht vergessen ! " " Aber," erwiderte seine Frau, "du hast deinen Regenschirm nicht mitgenommen ; du hast ihn zu Hause gelassen." LESSON LVI 265. Nominative. 1. The nominative is the case of the subject, and is also used as a vocative. 2. Verbs indicating a state or transition, such as fein, totxitu, bleiben, ^ei^en, take a predicate nominative : (Sr hlitb (Solbat. He remained a soldier. Sr t}d^t SarL His name is Charles. Note. — With trcrben, 511 is often used to indicate transition: 3)a§ SBaffer tDUrbe 511 ®i^, ' The water turned to ice.' 266. Accusative, i. The accusative is the case of the direct object of a verb. 2. Se^ren, ' teach/ takes the accusative of the person taught, as well as of the thing taught : Qi} Ie{)re fie ^^l)fi!- I am teaching them physics. Note. — When both person and thing are mentioned, untCtric^ten itt + dat. is more usual : 3ci) uuterrtd)te fie in ber $t)t)ftf. 3. gragen, ' ask,' takes an accusative of the person, but only a neuter pronoun or clause as accusative of the thing : 3(f) tnill <2ie ettra^ fragen. I want to ask you something. (Sr fragte, ob irf) fame. He asked if I was coming. 267. Predicate Accusative, i. Verbs of naming, calling, etc., have a second accusative with predicative force : Qd) nannte i^tt einen 9Jarrcn. I called him a fool. 228 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 268 2. Some verbs of regarding, considering, declaring, etc., similarly take an accusative with al^ : Qi) betrac^te tf)n aU einen geinb. I consider him an enemy. Note. — ^oltctt takes fiir + ace. : ^d) \)altt i()n fitr einen guten 9J?ann, * I consider him a good man.' 3. Verbs of choosing, electing, appointing, etc., usually take JU + article, but sometimes have an accusative with at^ : 3J?an tDCi^Ite i^tt geftern sum They chose him as chairman (aU) SSorfi^enbem yesterday. Note. — The predicate ace. in all these constructions becomes a nom. in the passive: §einrii^ I. tDurbe ber 5^ogIer (Fowler) gennant; (Sr lt)urbe al^ ^orfi^enbcr gett)dl)lt. 268. Adverbial Accusative. The accusative is used adverbi- ally to express time 'when ' and * how long,' price (§ 29), and measure (§ 112, 4) ; also way or road after verbs of motion : SBel^Ctt SBeg ge^en ®k ? Which way are you going? 269. Accusative Absolute. The accusative is often used absolutely to form adverbial phrases, either with or without an adjective or participle : ^etl §Ut in ber §anb. Hat in hand. 2)ie gdttbe emporge^obett. With hands uplifted. EXERCISE LVI A. I. As a child I always used to say that I meant to be a soldier. 2. I entered the army at (mtt) twenty (years) as lieu- tenant. 3. I remained a lieutenant ten years, but now I am a captain, and I expect to become a general in the course of (the) time. 4. Among Englishmen the Duke of WelHngton is called "the Iron Duke." 5. They regard him as one of the greatest generals that ever lived. 6. The Germans call Bis- marck " the Iron Chancellor." 7. In 1862 Prince Bismarck § 269] LESSON LVI 229 became prime minister of Prussia and in 187 1 chancellor of the German Empire. 8. He was made (eruentten) a duke by the Emperor William II, when the latter dismissed him in 1890. 9. Ask that stranger what his name is. 10. He says his name is Meyer, and that he is a commercial traveler. 11. Here we must part ; you must go your way, and I will go mine. 1 2. Our neighbor's son is anything but pohte ; this morning he came in at the front-door, his hat on his head and his hands in his pockets. B, I. One of my brothers is a physician and the other is a merchant. 2. When I was at (auf, dat^ the high-school, Mr. B. taught me English and Mr. S. taught me chemistry. 3. Everybody thought Mr. B. an excellent teacher. 4. On this account he was chosen headmaster. 5. In the elementary schools the children are taught reading (Jnfin.), writing, and arithmetic. 6. The fool remains a fool his [whole] life long. 7. When water freezes it turns to ice ; when ice melts it turns to water again. 8. The Niagara Falls are regarded as one of the wonders of the world. 9. As a young man Abraham Lin- coln was a clerk in a store ; later, however, he became a law- yer. 10. In the year i860 he was elected President of the United States. 11. In 1794 Napoleon was appointed general- in-chief of the French army in Italy. 12. In 1799 he became first consul and afterwards emperor. C. Lesestiicke : i. Ein Fremder vom Lande auf Besuch in London wollte einem Konzerte beiwohnen. Er erkundigte sich am Schalter nach dem Preise der Sitze. " Vordersitze, zwei ShiUing; Riicksitze, einen Shilling; Programme, einen Penny." " Na, dann geben Sie mir ein Programm : darauf sitzt sich's schon ganz bequem," sagte der Fremde. 2. Ein Dichter sandte einen Band seiner Gedichte an einen Bekannten und bat denselben, ihm zu sagen, was er davon halte. Er erhielt folgende Antwort : " Ich habe Ihr Werk gelesen und habe selten ein Buch mit grofierem Vergnligen niedergelegt." 230 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 270 LESSON LVII 270. Genitive. The use of the German genitive is much the same as that of the English possessive, or the objective with * of.* 271. Position of Genitive. The genitive more usually follows the governing noun, unless the genitive is a person name : !Da^ $au^ meine^ greunbe^. My friend's house. ©C^tller^ SBerfe. The works of Schiller. 272. Genitive with Adjectives and Verbs, i. Some German adjectives govern a genitive, usually corresponding to an *of' construction in English : @r tft fetner ©ac^e getri^. He is sure of his case. ltn[ercr 9lcf)tung tPltrbtg. Worthy of our respect. !De^ 5Korbe^ f d^ulbig. Guilty of murder. Note. — 2o^, * rid of,' takes ace. : 3d) mod)te U}n log tDerbeu, * I should like to get rid of him ' ; with Uoll, * full of,' the ace. is more usual : 2)a§ ©lag ift tioU SScht, * The glass is full of wine '; gettli^, * certain of,' mitbe, * tired of,' take ace. of neut. pron., but gen. of noun: 3d) bin C^ getDi§/I am certain of it'; 3(^ bin t>C§ ^axUn§ miibe,-*I am tired of waiting.' 2. The German equivalents of many Enghsh transitive verbs take a genitive : 6r gebai^te biefcr SCatfai^e. He mentioned this fact. Qd) bebarf ^'^rer §i(fe. I need your help. 3. Verbs of accusing, convicting, acquitting, depriving, and some others, take a genitive of the remoter object : SRan !Iagt xi}n \>t^ SJJorbe^ an. He is accused of murder. 2)er ^flt^t entbunben. Relieved of duty. 4. Impersonal verbs expressing mental affection take a geni- tive of the remoter object (the cause of the emotion) : @^ iammert mtc^ fetner. I pity him. Wid) rent mettter ©itnben. I repent of my sins. Notes. — i. Some of these verbs are also used personally with the cause of the emotion as subj. : @r jammert mid) ; tneiuc (Siinben reuen 2. For the gen. after refl. verbs, see § 150. § 276] LESSON LVII 231 273. Adverbial Genitive, i. The genitive may express ad- verbial relations of place and manner, mostly confined to fixed phrases : (Seinc!^ 28egei^ ge^en. To go one's way. 8in!er§anb; trocfticn gU^C;^. On the left hand ; dryshod. 9D?etne^ ©rac^ten^. In my opinion. ^tDeitcr Slaffe reifen* To travel second class. ®utcr T)mge fein. To be of good cheer. Note. — For gen. of time, see § 87. 2. The adverbial genitive with -tt)etfe is a common mode of forming adverbs of manner from adjectives : ©tUcEUd^erineife. Fortunately. 274. The Dative. The dative is the case of the indirect ob- ject, and denotes the person for whose advantage or disadvan- tage a thing is or is done, corresponding not only to the English ' to * or * for,' but also to ' from ' : ®ie gab bcm ^inbc 53onbon^. She gave the child candy. 6r fauft mir ©itc^er. He is buying books for me. (Sr l)at mir ®elb gefto^ten. He stole money from me. 275. Dative with Adjectives. German equivalents of English adjectives followed by ' to ' (with some others) take the dative ; 6r b(ieb mir treu. He remained faithful to me. C §anblung- An action to be praised. 297. Participle of Time and Cause, i. The English present participle often has the force of an adverbial clause of time or cause, and when so used is rendered in German by a sentence introduced by a subordinative conjunction. 2. The conjunctions thus used to express time are ba, at^, * when,' inbetn, tDii^renb, ' while ' : ^U (ba) id) i^n lommen fa^, Seeing him coming, I went to gtng \6) xt}m entgegen, meet him. gnbcm er \id) fammelte, fu^r Recovering himself, he con- er fort* tinned. ^6) traf ttjU, al^ (toafirenb, I met him when (while) travel- inbem) x6) in (guropa reifte. ing in Europe. 3. For time, expressed by the English perfect participle, nat^bem, ' after,' or at^, ' when,' is always used, followed by the pluperfect : Slad^bem (al^) li) ben Srief Having read the letter, I threw gelefen l^atte, tt)arf id) xiju it away, ioeg. 4. To express cause, ba, inbem, ' as,' * since,' or loeil, ^ be- cause,' is used : S)atci)il^nnt(^t gefunbenl^atte, Not having found him, I went gtng xi) fort. away. gnbcm Xfi) l^offe, ®ie jn fe^en. Hoping to see you. aScil er el^rli^ ift, fann man Being honest, he is to be i^m tranen> trusted. 298. The Adjectival Participle. i. The English present participle with the force of a relative clause is rendered in Ger- man by a relative clause : § 298] LESSON LXI 247 Qi) begegnete einer grau, bie I met a woman carrying a ein S'inb trug. child. (Sin 2)fantt, ber t)orbetging, A man passing by bowed to gru^te mid^, me. 2. A German participle used attributively very commonly replaces the construction employed in the last example above : gin t)OrtiCtgcf|enbcr Ttann A man passing by bowed to grii^te mxii). me. Note. — Attributive participles and adjectives immediately precede the substantive qualified. This construction is very common in modern jour- nalistic style : !Die ®tabt 5l(gier (iegt an ber SBeftfeite etner gerdumigen, t)on ^ap ^efcaba im SBeften unb. ^ap 3Ratifu im Often begrenjten, natf) S^orbcn geoffneten ^errltd)en i8u(f)t, * The city of Algiers lies on the west side of a spacious and magnificent bay, bounded by Cape Pescada on the west and Cape Matifu on the east, and open towards the north.' EXERCISE LXI A. I. The lost ring has been found. 2. The view from our veranda is charming. 3. Sleeping dogs do not bite. 4. Clara is a charming Httle girl. 5. The child stood weeping before the closed door. 6. A ruined castle stands to the left on the hill. 7. Our fellow-travelers were all Englishmen. 8. Let us not think of the past. 9. A soldier came riding along (balder). lo. Turning to me, the beggar asked for alms. 11. He went away complaining that I had given him very little. 12. BeUeving what my friends said, I followed their advice. 13. Not having had experience enough, I knew not what to do. 14. The bad news received yesterday has made us all very sad. 15. I have found all the letters, yours included. B. I. This young man has already earned a considerable sum of money. 2. Honored Sir : Your long-expected letter has arrived at last. 3. Our professor is a very learned man. 4. The thief came in through a broken window. 5. We have not had time to make our intended excursion (in)to the woods. 6. Smiling, he began to read the letter, but before finishing it 248 GERMAN GRAMMAR [§ 298 he was raging. 7. The coachman came driving up as we were at the door. 8. I shall show you the mistakes to be avoided. 9. It is to be regretted that you did not ask me for advice be- fore beginning this exercise. 10. Having no hope of passing the examination, I went home. 11. The famine occasioned by war is often worse (f(i)Itmm) than war itself. 12. He con- tinued praying, his hands raised to heaven. C On a certain occasion, Frederick the Great found that the enemy was opposed to him with a superior force. Being very anxious regarding (UTU) the outcome of the battle, which was to take place on the next day, he resolved to make a round through the camp by night. This he did in order to ascertain the state of mind prevaiHng among his troops. While doing so (that) he observed a soldier seeking to avoid him, and acting generally in (auf) a suspicious manner. Halting, he called the soldier to him (refi,). The latter, seeing no possi- bility of escaping, stood still, saluting. ** Where are you (@r) going?" asked the king, looking him in the face. "To tell the truth, [Your] Majesty, I was just on the point of deserting." Instead of calUng the guard to arrest the soldier, the king said : " Just try (use (Sr) your luck once more with me. In case of our losing, we will desert together." D. Lesestiick : Die Mause hatten einmal Krieg mit den Fro- schen. Nach vielen blutigen Schlachten wahlte endlich jeder Teil seinen groBten Helden, um den Streit in einem Zweikampfe auszumachen. Als alles fertig war, traten die beiden Kampfer auf. Sie griffen einander mit der groBten Tapferkeit an. Der Frosch teilte Ohrfeigen aus wie ein Bar. Die Maus bifi wie ein Lowe. In dieser Kampfwut bemerkten sie aber nicht, daB ein hungriger Habicht tiber ihnen schwebte. Plotzlich stiirzt dieser auf die Kampfenden herab. Er packt mit der rechten Kralle den Frosch, mit. der linken die Maus. Da liefen alle Zuschauer davon. Der Krieg hatte ein Ende. APPENDIX. A, REFERENCE LISTS OF NOUNS. N.B, In the following lists words of less common occurrence have been omitted. I. Masculine monosyllables of ^ttttb model (§ 33). %at, eel. ^rm, arm. 55orb, shelf. S)OC^t, wick. 2)0(C^, dagger. 2)om, cathedral. ®rab, degree. §a(m, blade (grass). §uf, hoof. §unb, dog. 2ad)^, salmon. lOaut, sound. Wloxh, murder. £)xtf district. $fab, path. ^o(, pole. ^Utg, pulse. ^Utlft, point. (B6)Vil), shoe. @toff, material, ©traug, ostrich. Zaq, day. S;aft, bar (music), X\)ton, throne. 3ott, inch. Note. — The above list contains only nouns with stem vowel a, 0, U, dVi* 2. Neuter monosyllables of ^ttttb model (§ 33). SBanb, tie. SBeet, garden-bed. SBctI, hatchet. 33ein, leg. ^oot,i boat. 53rob, loaf. !J)ing, thing. (Srj, ore. geU, hide, geft, festival, gloi^ raft. ®ift, poison. §aar, hair. §ecr, army. §eft, handle. 3a^r, year. 3od), yoke. 1 Also ^nie, knee, ^reuj, cross. lOanb, province. 2o^, lot. 9Jia6, measure. 9}iecr, sea. 9^et5, net. 61, oil. ^aar, pair, ^fcrb, horse, ^futlb, pound. ^Ult, desk. 9ierf)t, right. ^eid), empire. $Riff, reef. S^og, horse. (Ball, salt. Sote. 2 Also 249 ®d^af, sheep. @(i)iff, ship. @c^tt)ein, pig. ®eil, rope. @teb, sieve. ®)3tc(, game. @tii(f, piece. 2^au, cable. 2^ei(, share. %m, animal. Xor, gate. Serf, work. 3elt, tent. 3cug, stuff. 3icl, goal. with umlaut. 250. APPENDIX 3. Feminines of ^attb model (§ 33). ^ngft, anguish. 3lugf(ud)t, evasion. Sljct, axe. ^anf, bench. iBraut, bride, ^ruft, breast, gaiift, fist. §rit({)t, fruit. @an8, goose. @ruft, grave, ^anb, hand. §aut, skin, ^luft, cleft, ^raft, strength. ^U^, cow. I^unft, art. !i?uft, air. I^uft, desire. SJ^ac^t, power. SD^agb, maid-servant. SRaug, mouse. 9^a(i)t, night. And nouns ending in -nt§ and D^a^t, seam. 9^0t, need. 9^(Ug, nut. ®^nur, string. ©tabt, town. SSanb, wall. SBurft, sausage. 3unft, guild. 3ufatnmen!unft, meet- ing. 4. Masculines of ^orf model (§ 43). ^ofcn)i(f)t,i villain. @eift, spirit. @ott, god. 2tibf body. bcr Met, field, ber 5lpfel, apple, ber ^oben, floor, soil, ber i8ogen,i bow. ber iBruber, brother, ber gaben, thread, ber ©arten, garden. ber ©raben, ditch. Tlann, man. Ort, place. 9Janb, edge. S5ormunb, guardian. And nouns in -tum« 1 Also of §unb model. Nouns of fBaitV model (§ ber §afen, harbour, ber §ammer, hammer. ba^ ^(ofter, cloister, ber !?aben, shop, ber Tlanielf cloak, bie 9}lutter, mother, bcr 5RageI, nail, ber Ofen, stove. 1 Also of SJ^aler model. SKalb, forest. SSurm, worm. 43). ber battel, saddle, ber ®c^nabel, beak, ber @C^rt)ager, brother- in-law. bie Xo&jtex, daughter, ber ^ater, father, ber ^ogel, bird. 6. Nouns of @raf model (§ 53). S5dr, bear. S8urf(^, lad. Shrift, Christian, giirft, prince. @efeE, fellow. @raf, count, b, hero. §err/ master, ^irt, herdsman. §ufar,2 hussar, ajlenfd^, man. ^axx, fool. 9?^rt), nerve. Ddj^f ox. ^fau, peacock, ^rtnij, prince. @^a^, sparrow. Sor, fool. SBorfal^r, ancestor. 1 Sing, adds -n only. 2 Also of Ol)r model. APPENDIX 2SI 7. Nouns of ^amt model (§ 54). SBud^ftabe, letter (Sebanfe, thought. ^amt, name. of alphabet. gun!e(n),2 spark. @amc(n),2 seed. ge(«/ rock. @Iaube(n),2 faith. €)C]^abe(n),3 injury. griebe(n),2 peace. §aufe, heap. SBtUe, will. And ha^ §er;j, heart, C ^crgettS, ^. §eq. 1 Also ^clfcn (WlaUv model). 2 Also of Tlakx model. 3 Also of 35ater model. 8. Nouns of Setter model (§ 54). ha^ %\iQt, eye. ber S3aucr/ peasant. ha^ (Snbc, end. ber @et)atter, godfather. 1 Also adds -n throughout sing. ber ^onful, consul, ber 9^ad)bar, neighbor, ber ^antoffe(,2 slipper, ber ©faciei, sting. 2 Also maltv model. 9. Nouns of D^r model (§ 54). ber ^^n, ancestor. ba« 33ett, bed. ber gorft, forest, bag §emb, shirt. ber §ufar,^ hussar. ber 3J?aft, mast. ha^ £)\)X, ear. ber @d^mer3, pain, ber @ee, lake, ber @taat; state. 1 Also of @raf model. ber (Stra^(, beam, ber Untertan/ subject, ber B^n^f interest. B. REFERENCE LISTS OF PREPOSITIONS. I. Prepositions with the Genitive. The prepositions governing the genitive are chiefly nouns used ad- verbially; they are easily recognizable because, with a few exceptions, the corresponding English locution is followed by *of.'. The following are those of common occurrence : anftatt, ftatt, instead of. aiiger^alb, outside of. biegfeit, on this side of. l^atb(en), ^alber, for the sake of. inmitteit, in the midst of. inner^alb, inside of. jenfeit, on the other side of. fraft, by virtue of. taut, in accordance with, mittelft, by means of. ober^alb, above. urn . . . iDillen, for the sake of. ungeac^tet, in spite of. unter^alb, below; untreit, unfern, not far from. tjermittelft, by means of. toermoge, by means of. trd^renb, during. toegen, on account of. 252 APPENDIX Notes. — i. §afb(en), l^alber always follows the gen. 2. With uttl ♦ . , tt)iUen the gen. stands between um and ttJillcn. 3. Utigea(l)tet, tt)egen, gufolge may precede or follow the gen. 4. Before ^alb(en), iregen, , ♦ ♦ tDiUen, the gens, of the pers. prons. have the forms meinet-, beinet-, jetnet-, unfert-, euret- i^ret-, 3l)ret- : meinet^a(b(en), unfert= iregen, um 3{)rettt)iUen, 5. To the above list may be added a number of adjectival abverbs, such as: gelegetttUd), 'on the occasion of; l^inftc^tUd^, *in regard of; unbej(^abet, 'notwithstanding.' 2. Additional Prepositions with the Dative. entgegcn, contrary to. ncbft, famt, together with, glcic^, like. gutriber, contrary to. ncid^ft, gundd^ft, next to. Note. — (Sntgegen, gund(^ft usually follow the dat.; gtctd^ may precede or follow. 3. Prepositions with Varying Case. bttttten, within {of time) i gen. or dat, entlang, Idttg^, along, gen,, dat., or ace, gemd§, agreeably to, gen. or dat. ob, above, at, concerning, gen. or dat. tro^, in spite of, gen. ; as well as, dat, gufolge, in consequence of, gen, or dat. Notes. — i. (gntlang, Idttgg, may precede or follow. 2. ®emag takes gen. or dat. when it precedes; dat. only when it follows. 3. 3l^f'^i9^ takes gen. when it precedes; dat. when it follows. 4. Equivalents of English Prepositions. English and Germa.n differ widely in the idiomatic use of prepositions. For convenient reference, the most commonly occurring English preposi- tions are given below in alphabetical order with examples showing their German equivalents. About. ^aben ^\t ®e(b bet fid) ? Have you money about you? Bag VOt\%\ bu tlOtt i^m (iibcr i{)n)? What do you know about him? ®ie ftritten ftd^ untig ®elb. , They quarrelled about the money. UttgCfa^r (CtttJa) m. 10. About (nearly) 10 marks. APPENDIX 253 At. 3m Sl^eater (Concert). 5(m Zi\d)e ; bci Xifc^. Sin ber Xiir. 3u (in) ^^ari^. 5luf bent SJlarfte (33aUe). 5(uf ber ^oft (5r ftubiert auf ber Unitjerfttat. ^r ift *!Profeffor an ber Unit)erfitdt 5lttf aUe gdUe. 3^n bie^em 3lugenbU(f. Um f)atb t)ier. S3ci jtage^anbrud^; hci ^adjU Bur reci)ten 3^tt (^Stunbe). 3tt SBeinac^ten (Cftern). 2:ee p 3JL 5 ba« ^funb. Um ben (jitm) ^alben ^rei«. At (in) school (church). At the theatre (concert). At the table; at table. At the door. At (in) Paris. At the market (ball). At the post-office. He is studying at the University. He is a professor at the University. At all events. At this moment. At half-past three. At daybreak; at night. At the right time (hour). At Christmas (Easter). Tea at 5 marks a pound. At half (the) price. By. (gr n)arb l^ott 9?anbern getotet. ^urd) bie ^:poft. ^urd) ^ranfbett tjer^inbert. 2Wit ber (Sifenba^n reifen. SBci (an) ber §anb ergreifen. »ei Xage^Ud^t ; bet ^a(i)t. 3tt ?anb ; 3U ®d^iff. He was slain by robbers. By post. Prevented by illness. To travel by rail. To seize by the hand. By daylight; by night. By land; by ship. For. 3(^ tat c§ filt i^n. (Sd)one« ^Better pm ^pa^ieren. Sr reift jum 33ergnugen. Qnm ^eifpieL Sr ift fcit ijmei ^agen l^ier. ^dj tjerreife auf ad)t Xagc. dv wax einen 9Jionat l^ter. j^nx§ erfte. ^um ^meiten SJJate. Sum @eburt^tag. I did it for him. Fine weather for walking. He travels for pleasure. For example. He has been here for two days, I am going away for a week. He was here for a month. For the present. For the second time. For a birthday present. 254 APPENDIX In. 3ittt §aufe ; tit cittcr Sod^c. ^m §ittimel ; am ^immel. 5luf ber Strogc. 5(uf bent ?anbe, 5(uf biefe 355eifc. 5(uf bie S)auer. Uttter tarl V. 3u 3Sagen ; bci faltem SBettcr. ai'leiner 9Jieinung nari)* Snm @ebdd)tni6 (ju (S^ren). 3(3^ f^rcd^c uott i^m. 3)er ^onig t^on ®panien. (Sitter Uutt ttteittett greuttben, ^er 35ater tiou Oier ^itabeit. Snv Zixx ^ittau^» 2)ie ®d^(a(^t bci ^rag, attt 9^tL SBa« fott aui^ ntir tuerben? In the house; in a week. In heaven; in the sky. In the evening. In the street. In the country. In this manner. In the long run. In the reign of Charles V. In a carriage; in cold weather. In my opinion. In memory (honor) of. Of. I speak of him. The king of Spain. One of my friends. The father of four boys. Out of (at) the door. The battle of Prague, of the Nile. What will become of me ? On. 5lttf bem ^Xifd^e (ber ^an!). 5(uf ber @rbe ; ouf (Srben. 9luf ber 5Reife ; am gittger. S)en (am) ^meiten Wixxi. 2)ie ©d^tffe auf bem gtuffe, ^tw ^2)or! Uegt ont ^ubfoti unb ant SD^eere. 3tt $ferb ; $u gug. ma gteig. Sm 33egriffe. f&tx biefer @elegenl)ett. Utitcr biefer iBebitiguttg, On the table (the bench). On the ground; on earth. On the journey; on the finger. On the second of March. The ships on the river. New York is on the Hudson and on the sea. On horseback; on foot. On purpose. On the point of. On this occasion. On this condition. to. ^6) ttJiE 5ttnt ^ater ge^en. ^ad^ @uropa ; ttad) bonbon. @e^e ttt bie (pr) @tabt. I will go to my father. To Europe; to London. Go to the city. APPENDIX 255 Sr ge^t attfi3 ?anb. He goes to the country. @el)ft bu 5ttr ®C^ulc? Are you going to school ? ©r ging in§ (.^nm) X\)eattX, He went to the theater. @e^e an^ (^vitn) genfter. Go to the window. 5(ttf ben (sum) SJlarft gcl^cn. To go to the market. 5(ttf bic Unitjcrfltat gc^cn. To go to the University (as a stu- dent). 3ttt UnltJerfltcit gcl^cn. To go to the University (building). With. Wit einem @tocf fd^tagcn. To strike with a stick. S^on gangem §cqcn. With all my heart. 3tt biefer Slbfic^t. With this intention. 5. Prepositions with Verbs, Adjectives, and Nouns. The object of many verbs, as well as the complement of nouns and adjectives corresponding with them in signification, is indicated by prepo- sitions. The proper use of prepositions in such cases must be learnt from practice and from the dictionary ; but below is given, for convenient reference, the regimen of particular classes of verbs, etc., which differ most widely from their English equivalents. At, of. Of joy, vexation, wonder, etc. = iibcr + accusative: 2Bir drgcrn un8 iiber i^n. We are vexed at him. ^r !(agt iibcr bie §11^6. He complains of the heat. (Sr tad^te iiber un8. He. laughed at us. 3^r (Srftaunen iibcr bic 9^ac^ri(^t. Her surprise at the news. Note. — Sijfc takes auf + ace. of person: 3rf) trar bbfe auf t^tt, *1 was angry at him.' For. 1. Of expectation, etc. = auf + accusative: <©ic ttJar ni(i)t barauf gefagt. She was not prepared for that. SSir l^offcn auf gutc8 Setter. We hope for good weather. (Sr tnartete auf @ie. He was waiting for you. 2. Of longing, inquiry, etc. = uad^ : 2)urft na6;i SBet«f)ett. Thirst for wisdom. Ot bem Xoht. I am in dread of death. 5*. Of disease, etc. = att + dative : ^m gteber er!ran!t. Sick of a fever. To. I. Of address, etc. = ait + accusative: 3c^ fc^reibe ait einen greiinb. I am writing to a friend. (Sin an mtd^ abreffierter 33rief. A letter addressed to me. SSenben ®le fid) ait i^n. Apply to him. APPENDIX 257 2. After many nouns and adjectives signifying an affection of the mind = fiCgClt : iBarml)er5ig gegcit bie 5(rmeu. Merciful to the poor. iSr ift freuublic^ gcgCtt mic^. He is friendly to me. vi tDtrft cr tDirb xo'xx iDcrben i^r tt)crbet fte iDcrben Imperfect. I became, etc. ttjarb (tDurbc) id^ tDarbft t>\x (tDurbeft) cr cr tt)arb (murbe) tt)ir tDurben i^r ftjurbet tt)urben id) bu tDiirbe t>\x tDiirbcft cr tDiirbc xo'xx tt)urben i^r tDiirbet jie tDiirben fte Perfect. I have become, etc. id) bu cr bin bift ift tt)ir ftub il^r jeib fte ftub ic^ fei bu feieft cr \tx xo'xx fcien i^r feict fte jeien id) ttjar bu tDarft cr tt)ar tt)ir ttJarcu f i^r trart fte iraren Pluperfect. I had become, etc. CO 3 id) trdre bu trdreft cr trdre iDir tt)dreu | il)r tDdret fie ttJdren 26o APPENDIX Future. Indicative. Subjunctive, I shall be, etc. Future. Indicative. Subjunctive, I shall become, etc. id^ tDerbe t(^ tuerbe id) tDerbe id^ tDerbe bu tt)irft bu tDerbeft bu njirft bu tDerbeft er tt)irb -^ er raerbe r& er tDirb f er tDerbe 3 trir iDerben » tt)ir tDerbeu S' tt)ir tDerbeu % tDir tDerbeu ■ % Vcfc tDerbet il^r trerbet il)r tDerbet i^r tDerbet J4 fie tt)erben ^ fie tt)er beu fie tDerben ^ fie tDerbeu ^ Future Perfect. Future Perfect. I shall have been, etc. I shall have become, etc. t(^ tDerbe icf) it)erbe t(^ tDerbe ^ id^ tDerbe CO bu ttjirft g bu toerbeft ^ er ttierbe ' ^ tt)ir tDerben en ?3 bu tDirft § bu tDerbeft 5 er tDirb tt)ir h)erben er tDirb tDir tDer beu |, er tDerbe S tDir tDerbeu o i^r tDerbet 1^ % trerbet j5* i^r tDerbet "2 i^r tDerbet 2 fte tt)er bcu fte tDerbeu fie tDerbeu ^ fie tDerbeu S* Conditional. • Conditional. Simple. Compound, Simple, Compound. I should be, etc. I should have I should become, I should have been, etc. etc. become, etc. • id^ tDiirbe id) rt)iirbe id^ tDiirbe id^ tDiirbe en \iVi tt)urbeft bu triirbeft bu tDiirbeft bu tDiirbeft 5 er tDurbe -^ er tniirbe er tDiirbe 5 er tDiirbe o tt)ir triirbeu S* rtiir triirbeu ' s tDir tDiirbeu ^ tDir tDiirbeu ^ ^ 3 i^r triirbet i{)r triirbet J3 il)r tDiirbet ii)r tDiirbet <^ fte tDiirbeu fie njiirbeu fie tDiirbeu fie tDiirbeu s* Imperative : fei, feib, feieu @ie, be. tDerbe, tDerbet, tDerbeu ®ie, become. Infinitive : Pres., Stxxi, to be. " tDerbeu, to become. Perf., getDefeu \t\v., to have been. " getDorbeu ieiu, to have become. Participle : Pres,^ jeienb, being. Past, getDefeu, been. " tDerbeub, becoming. " getDOrbeu, become. APPENDIX 261 2. Auxiliaries of Mood. Prin. Parts : bitrfcn burftc gcbiirft (biirfcn, after infin fbuneu !ouutc ge fount (fonueu « {( mogeu mod)tc gemot^t (mogeu « it nti] ffeu mugte gemugt (miiffen ti (( jollcu foUte gejoUt (foEen (( i( iDoEcn ttjottte gcmoUt (ujolleu (( tt Present Indicative. Id) barf faun mag mug foil tDiU bu barffl tannft magft mugt foUft tniEft tx barf faun mag mug foil lt)tU tt)ir biirfen i !onuen mogeu miiffen t folleu tt)otteu i^r burft fount mogt miigt foUt tt)oUt fic biirfeu fonueu mogeu miiffen fotten ujollen Present Subjunctive. id) bitrfe tonne mbge miiffe foUe tt)oIIe bu biirfeft tonneft mbgeft miiffeft foUeft UJoUefl cr bitrfe tonne moge miifie foUe tDoUc 2C» K. 2C. :c. ac. K. Imperfect Indicative. id) burfte tonnte modjte mugte foUte trotttc bu burfteft tonnteft mod)teft mugtejl foUteft ujolltefl 2C. JC. JC. :c. tc. tc. Imperfect Subjunctive. id) burfte tonnte . mod)te miigte foUte tnoHtc bu burfteft tonnteft moc^teft miigteft foUteft troUteft K. K. 2C. :c. :c. K. Compound Tenses. Per/, ic^ l^abe geburft (gefonut, gemod)t, gemugt, gefoUt, getroUt) " tc^ ^abe bietben biirfen (fonueu, mbgen, miiffen, foUen, ttjollen) F/up/. id) !)atte geburft (gefonnt, gemoc^t, gemugt, gefoUt, gemoUt) " id) ^atte bleiben biirfeu (fonueu, mogeu, miiffen, foUen, mollen) Fu^. [(i) merbe biirfen (fonueu, mbgen, miiffen, folleu, trollen) Fu^. Per/, id) trerbe geburft (gefonnt, gemodjt, gemugt, gefollt, gettiollt) l)aben. 262 APPENDIX 3. Weak Conjugation. Principal Parts: loben, lobtc, gclobt. Infinitives: Pres.^ loben, to praise; Perf.^ gelobt l^abctt, to have praised. Present. Imperfect. Indicative. Subjunctive, Indicative. Subjunctive, I praise, etc. I praised, etc. id^ lobe ic^ lobe id^ lobte ic^ lobte bu lobft bu lobeft bu lobteft bu lobteft er lobt cr lobe er lobte er lobte tDir loben n)ir loben xoxx lobteu tt)tr lobten i^r tobt % lobet il)r lobtet il)r lobtet fie loben fie loben fie lobten fie (obten Perfect. Pluperfect. I have praised, etc. I had praised, etc. id) ^abe ' \&) I)abe Id) ^^Mt id) ^atte ^ bu l)aft bu l^abeft bu ^atteft bu ^dtteft er bat ^ er ^o^it er ^atte ^ er ^tte 2. tt)ir l)aben 1; njir ^aben o" cr roit f)atteit 0^ tDir fatten cr il)r l)abt if)r babet tl)t ^attet i^r \)Mt\ fie ^aben . fie ^aben . fte l^atten fte l^dtten Future. Future Perfect. I shall praise, etc. I shall have praised, etc. \^ tDerbe id) ttjerbe td, trerbe id) njerbe bu mirft bu trerbeft bu ttJirft :^ bu trerbeft er tt)irb o" er trerbe er tt)irb S: er trerbe 0* loir merben f ^ tt)ir ttjerben ^ i^r merbet tl)r roerbet tl)V tt)erbet ^ if)r tDerbet fie tDerben fie merbeu fte trerben fie tDerben Conditional. Imperative. Simple. Compound. I should praise, I should have lobe, praise. etc. praised, etc. lobt, praise. id^ tt)iirbe i(^ miirbe loben ®ie, praise. bu miirbeft bu luiirbeft Participles. cr ttjiirbe o" er tiiiirbe crs lt)ir triirben 2 U)ir tDurben Pres., lobenb, praising. i^r miirbet i^r miirbet cr Past, gelobt, praised. fie miirbeu fie rciirbeu s APPENDIX 263 4. Strong Conjugation. Principal Parts : ftngen, fang, gcfungen. Infinitives: Pres., fmgcn, to sing; Per/,, gefungcn l^abcn, to have sung. Present. Imperfect. Indicative. Subjunctive Indicative. Subjunctive, I sing, etc. I sang, etc. id) fmgc \^ fmgc id) fang id) fdngc bu fingft bu fiugejl bu faugft bu fciugcfl er ftugt cr fiugc cr faug . cr fciuge \oxt ftugcu n)ir ftugcu it)ii : \o,x^%t\x tuir fdugcn i^r fingt i^r ftuget il)r faugt il^r fdugct fie ftugcu fic ftugeu ftc (augcn ftc fdugcu Perfect. Pluperfect. I have sung, etc. I had sung, etc. i(^ l^abc td^ ^abc id) \)^\it \^ \!;mt bu ^aft « bu '^^^t\i CO bu ^attcft « bu ^dtteft cr ^at ^ cr ^abc ^ s^ cr ^attc ^ cr ^dttc lt)ir l)abcu « tt)ir \)o^itxi ' w irir ^)^i\tx\. " « trir \) er fei t er trar ^ er tDdre tt)ir finb ^ tDir feien « mir iBtttcn « n)ir ttiaren tl)r feib ^ i^r feiet « lf,r tDaret ^ il)r tt)dret fie finb .. fie feien .. fte tDaren fie n)aren Future. Future Perfect. I shall fall, etc. I shall have fallen, etc. t(^ ttJerbe i(^ njerbe id) tDerbe id) tDerbe bu mirfi bu tx)erbeft bu tDirft 5, bu tDerbeft er tDirb 'u er inerbe "0 er \0\X\i & er inerbe ttJir merben 1^ tt)ir ttjerben 2 wir >Derben ^ tt)ir n)erben i^r merbet 't^r iDerbet if)r irerbet 1^ it)r trerbet fte n:)erben , fie tDerben . fte ttjerben fie tnerben Conditional. Imperative. Simple. Compound. fatte, fall. I should fall, I should have fattt, fall. etc. fallen, etc. fatten @ie, fall. t(^ n^iirbe i(^ triirbe bu tDiirbej^ bu ti:)urbeft CO Participles. er ttJiirbe "o* er tpiirbe PS Pres., fattenb, falling. njir tDiirben 2 trir tDiirben s Pasty gefatten, fallen. il)r iDiirbet il)r triirbet "^ fie tt)iir bei ti . fie tt)iirb en APPENDIX 265 6. Passive Voice. Infinitives: Pres., gelobt merben, to be praised; Perf.y gelobt tt)orben fein, to have beea praised. Present. Imperfect. Indicative. Subjunctive Indicative, Subjunctive. I am praised, etc. I was praised, etc. it^ ttjerbe id) trerbe id^ tDurbe ic^ triirbc bu trirft bu ttjerbeft bu tt) It rbe ft bu tDurbeft cr n)irb 2, cr tt)erbe CO er tt)urbe 2, cr tt)iirbe Xo'xx ttjerben c^ tt)ir trerben ■ 0^ <3* tDir tDurbeu 1^ tDir ttJiirbeu t^r merbet t()r tt)crbet i{)r tDurbet i^r tDiirbet ftc merben fte trerbeu fie tDurbeu fie ttJiirbeu Perfect. Pluperfect. I have been praised, etc. I had been praised, etc. id) bin « td) fet CO \^ tt)ar ^ id) tDdre bu bift g^ bu feieft bu trarft %: bu tDdreft cr ift S^ cr fei & er tuar ^ er tDCire XOXX flttb g tDir feieu ■ 5 tuir tDarcu g tDir tDdren i^r feib % \\)x, feiet 5" i^r traret % \\)x tDdret ftc pnb ^ fie feieu ?J fie ttjaren ^ fie tDdreu Future. Future Perfect. I shall be praised, etc. I shall have been praised, etc. \^ tDcrbc ^ id) iDcrbc CO ic^ tt)erbe 2, id) tDerbe bu tt)trft %: bu ttjcrbeft bu trirft % bu tDcrbeft cr iDirb S^ cr tt)erbe C^ cr tt)irb 5 cr tDcrbc tDir tDcrben § mir tDcrbeu ■ 5 trir tDcrbeu S^ tDir tDcrben i^r rt)crbct % \\)x tt)erbet il)r trerbet ^ il^r tDcrbet fie tt)crbcn Co ^ fte tDcrb'eu NDITIONAL. ?J fie tDcrbeu Ii §• fie tDcrbeu kIPERATIVE. Simple. Compound. I should be I should have praised, etc. been praised, etc. ^ ic^ tDiirbc g^ bu tt)iirbeft S^ er tDiirbc § tDir tDiirben 3- il)t tt-iirbet ^ fie roiirbcn Id) tDiirbc bu tDiirbeft er ttjiirbe tDir tDiirben | tl)r tDiirbet fte tDiirben ttJcrbc getobt, be praised. tDCrbet gelobt, be praised. tDcrben @te gelobt, be praised. Participles. Pres.^ gU lobenb, to be praised (as adjective only). Past, gelobt tDOrben, been praised. 266 APPENDIX D, ALPHABETICAL LIST OF STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 1. The following list contains only verbs in common use. 2. Compound verbs are omitted, as a rule, and their conjugation is to be inferred from that of the corresponding simple verb, e.g. t)erbinben, see binben ; betriigen, see triigeu ; but compounds which have no cor- responding simple verbs will be found in the list. 3. The vowel of the 2nd and 3rd sing. pres. indie, and of the 2nd sing, imper. is given only when it differs from that of the infin. 4. The vowel of the impf. subj. is given only when it differs from that of the impf. indie. 5. Forms in parenthesis are less usual. 6. Verbs followed by f. are conjugated with feitt only; those followed by f., f). are sometimes conjugated with l^abetl (§ 62, 2, note) ; all others with f)aben only. Infinitive. baden, bake befe'^ten, command befletgen, r^., strive beginnen, begin beigen, bite bcrgen, hide berften, \., burst betregett,^ induce biegen,2 bend bteten,2 offer binben, bind bitten, ask blafen, blow bleiben, \., remain braten, roast brec^en, break brennen, bum bringen, bring benfen, think bref(^en, thresh Imperfect. bn! or bacfte befal)t beftig begann big barg barft or borft bettJog bog bot banb bat blieg blieb briet brad) brannte brafrf) or brofd^ p. Part. Pr, Ind. Impve, Impf. Subj. gebacfen a befo^Ien beftiffen begonnen gebiffen geborgen geborften betDogen gebogen geboten gebnnben gebeten geblafen gebtieben gebraten gebrod)en gebrannt gebrad^t gebad^t gebrofd^en le ie d or b i t t(e) i(e) a or i I t t brcnntc APPENDIX 267 Infinitive. bringen, f., \)., press biinfcn, seem biirfen, may cmpfe^Icn, recom- mend; jCX-, jcr-, are separable, unless otherwise indicated. 10. The stress (') is marked only in exceptional cases. 11. The meanings given are usually confined to those used in this grammar. ^Benb, m.y -c^, -e, evening; bed 2lbcnb6 or abenbd, in the eve- ning. 5!bcnbbrot, «., -c«, supper. 5l&enbcffcn, w., -d, supper. 5(bcnbgWrflcin,«., -^, — , evening- bell. 5lbcnbtuft, /., ^e, evening air. 516entcucr, w., -«, — , adventure. ahtv, but; however. ah^affttn, 5/., f., to depart, set out, start. 5(6fa^rt,/., -en, departure. abgc^cn, st.y f., to go away, set out, start, depart. 5(6^anb(ung, /., -en, treatise, paper. oBIabcn, st., to unload. abnc^mcn, st., to take away, take off. aB^U^cn, to clean, wipe. abtCtf Ctt, fv to set out, start, depart, go away. abfagen^ to decline (an invita- tion, etc.). 5Cbf(i^tcb, m., -c8, departure; — ne^men, to take leave. ab^tifia^tn, st., to refuse, deny. aBf(i^rciBcn, st., to copy (out). abfe^Ctt, to set down. 5(bfld^t,/., -en, intention. abftattett, to pay (a visit). abftcigcn, st., f., to dismount, descend, get out of (a vehicle). 'Hhttilf m., -t^, -c, compart- ment. 5(btcUung, /., -en, department. a'bttiefenb, absent. a^ifl ah' oh! alas! %^t, /., care, attention. a^i^tbttif St., to give heed, pay attention. 273 274 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. abbtcren, to add (arith.). abicu [pr. abi'o'], good-bye. 5lbrcffc,/., -n, address. a^nlid^, like, similar (to). aUf all (the), the whole. attci'n, adj.f alone; conj.j but, only. attcrbi'ngi^, certainly, indeed. attgcmci'n, general, universal; im — en, in general. tttt^umat, all together. al)^, than, as (a), when. ai^Of so, thus, accordingly, so then. alt, -^cr, old; Dor — cr 3^^*/ '^^ old(en) times. ^mcrtfa, «., -^, America. amcrifaniftti, American. %mi, n., -e^, -^er, office. ^mt^trittgfctt, /., tenure of office. an {dat. or ace), on, upon, to, at, in, beside, by, of, for; — (dat.) tiorbeige^en, to go past. ^nbcnfcn, «., -^, memory; gum — an (ace), in memory of. anbcr, other; bie — n, the others, others; htu — n ^ag, the next day. anbern, refl., to change (intr.). anbert^alii, one and a half. anerfcnnett, irr., to acknowledge, recognize. anfangctt, st., to begin, anfang^, at first. angcnc^m, agreeable. angrctfen, st., to attack. an^atten, st., to stop, draw up. Slnfcr, m,y -g, — , anchor; ble — fallen laffen, to cast anchor. anfleiben; refl., to dress one's self. anlommtn, st., \,, to arrive. anfunbigcn, to announce. annc^mcn, st., to accept. 5Cnrcbc,/., -n, (mode of) address. anreben, to address, speak to. anric^tcn, to do (damage). anrii^ren, to touch. anfd^auen, to look at, gaze at. anfe^cn, st., to look at. anftctten, to appoint; angeftettt fein, to have a position. ^nttOOXtff., -en, answer. anitOOXitXlf to answer, reply. ant)crtrauen, to entrust. tlngetgc,/., -n, advertisement. an^iel^cn, st., to draw on, put on {of clothing); \i6) — , to dress (one's self). an^Unbcn, to kindle, light. 5t^fel, m., -^, ^, apple. 5l^fel6aum, m., -t^, ^t, apple- tree. 5(|J0ftc(, m., -^, — , apostle. 5l^0t^cfc, /., -n, drug-store. 5lpotf)efcr, m., -8, —, druggist. 5l)J^cti't, m., -e«, appetite. 5lpril, m., April. 5l'rfieU,/., -en, work. arbeitcn, to work. 5(r6citer, m., -g, — , workman, laborer. %x6)t,f., -n, ark. arger(t(!^, angrily. 5lrm, m., -e6, -t, arm; branch (of a river). arm, -^er, poor. arttg, well-behaved, good. ^Irjcnet,/., -en, medicine, physic. ^Ir^t, m., -eg, -^e, physician, doc- tor. Sift, m., -eg, -^e, bough, branch. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 275 audi, also, too, even; — baS ift nic^t mein, that is not mine either; — ha ift nid^tg, there is nothing there either. Slue,/., -Tl; meadow. auf {dat. or ace), on, upon, to, for, at, in, by; cin 3Siertet — jmei, a quarter past one; brei SSiertd — jtDei, a quarter to two. aufcrlcgctt, to impose upon, as- sign. aufcffctt, St., to eat up. OUffrcffctt, St., to eat up, devour. 5(ufga6e,/., -n, exercise, lesson. aufgcBctt, st., to give up, aban- don; give in charge. aufgc^en, st., f., to rise (of the sun, etc.); spring up (of seed). auf^cBcn, st., to pick up. auf^iffcn, to hoist (a sail, etc.). ouf^iircn, to cease, stop. aufmat^cn, to open. aufmcrffam, attentive. auf^affen, to take care, look out. aufrc(!^t, upright; — ftellett, to set on end. aufrcgcn, to excite; refl., to be- come (get) excited. oufft^lagcn, st., to open. auffc^rciben, st., to write down. auffc^cn, St., to look up( wards). 5Jufftanb, m., -t^, ^t, insurrec- tion. aufftC^Ctt, St., f., to rise, get up. aufftcigcn, st., f., to rise, mount. auftrctcn, st., f., to come forward, appear. auf tun, irr., to open. oufttJat^cn, \,, to awake {intr.). aufwacftfcn, st., f., to grow up. 5luQe, »., -3, -n, eye; grogc — n mac^en, to stare. 5iu8(e)(etn, n., -^, —, little eye. 5(ugcnbUrf, w., -e«, -c, moment. Slugu'ft, m., August. au^ (dat.), out, out of, of, from. 5(u^flug, m., -c8, ^t, excursion, picnic. 5(u^gaBc, /., -n, edition. au^gc^cn, st., f., to go out. au^ge^eic^net, eminent, distin- guished. au^glcttcn, st., \,, to slip. au^graficn, 5/., to dig up. 5lu^l(tnber, m., -^, — , foreigner. an^madicn, to settle, decide. an^padcrif to unpack. au§tt\^tn, to be enough, suflSce, be sufficient. au^rufcn, st., to call out, exclaim. aUi^ru^cn, intr. or refl., to rest, repose. auger {dat.), outside of, except, but, besides. aufterbem, adv., besides, more- over. auftet^atB, prep, (gen.), outside of. ttufterft, extremely. 5(u^fi(^t, /., -en, view, prospect. au^ftetgen, st., \,, to get off, get out (of a vehicle). au^ftreuen, to scatter. au^furffen, to pick out, select. au^teiten, to deal out, distribute. ^ufter, /., -n, oyster. au^treten, st., f., to retire, resign. au^menbig, by heart. au^5te^en, st., to draw out; take off (a coat, etc.). au^5if(^en, to hiss (tr.), 5(st,/., ^t, axe. 276 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY S3a(^, m.y -eg, ^t, brook, rivu- let. S3ocfe, /., -n, cheek. hadm, St., to bake. JBiidcr, m., -^, — , baker. JBabcjimmcr, w., -g, — , bath- room. S3a^n^of, w., -c8, -^C, station (rail- way). S5a^nftcig, w., -eg, -e, platform (railway). l^alb, el^er, am e^eften, soon, pres- ently; — . . » — , at one time ... at another. SBatt, w., -eg, -^e, ball. 93anb, m., -eg, -^e, volume. fiangc, afraid; tnir tt)irb — , I (be- gin to) feel alarmed, etc. S5anf,/., ■"•C, bench. f8antf /., -en, bank, banking- house. S5anficr [pr. banfie'], w., -g, -g, banker. f8At, w., -en, -en, bear. SBarbie'r, w., -eg, -e, barber. S3art, w., -eg, -^e, beard. Bauen, to build. 23aucr, m., -g or -n, -n, peasant, countryman, farmer. S3aum, w., -eg, ^t, tree. S3ai)ern, »., -g, Bavaria. S8eamt(er), adj. subst., official. hthtn, to quake, tremble. bebaucrn, tr., to pity; intr., to be sorry. Bebcrfen, to cover. Bebeuten, to signify, mean; order, instruct {dat.). 25ebient(cr), adj. subst., servant. beetten, refl., to make haste, hurry. S3cet, n., -eg, -e, garden-bed. S3efe^(, m., -eg, -e, order, com- mand. Befe^lcn, st. {dat.), to order, com- mand. Bcfinben, st., refl., to be found, be (situated); be {of health)', tDie — ©ie [ic^? how are you? S3cforbcrung, /., -en, forwarding, transportation. Befragen, to ask, question. Befiird^ten, to fear, apprehend. S3cgcBen^eit, /., -en, event, inci- dent. begegncn, \, {dat.), to meet. Begciftert, enthusiastic. Bcgtnnen, 5^, to begin, commence. ibegleit^en, 5^., to pay, settle (an account). Begleiten, to accompany, go with. S3eg(etter, m., -g, — , companion, attendant. iDcgraben, st., to bury. Begren^cn, to limit, bound. Begriiften, to greet. be^alten, st., to keep, retain. be^anbeln, to treat. be^ilflirfi; — fein, to be of assist- ance. bet {dat.), near (by), by, beside, at, with, about, on, of; — ^if(^, at table; — meinent Onfel, at my uncle's (house, etc.); — mlr, with me, about me, at my house; — biefem ^Better, in this weather. beibc, both, (the) two; allc — , both. a3cin, n., -eg, -e, leg. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 277 Bctttal^C, almost, nearly. S3cif))tc(, «., -t^, -t, example. Bet^en, 5^., to bite. S3ciftanb, m., -eS, assistance, help. bciftc^cn, St. (dat.), to assist, help. BcinJO^ncn (dat.), to be present at, attend. Bcfannt, well-known. S3cfannt(cr), adj. suhst., acquaint- ance. bcfpmmcn, st., to obtain, get, re- ceive. JBetgicn, «., -«, Belgium. licmanncn, to man. bcmcrfcn, to remark, observe. bcmit^cn, to trouble. JBcngcl, m., -^, — , urchin, chap. beo'bat^tcn, to observe, watch. l&cquc'm, comfortable; e^ — ^aben, to be convenient, etc. bcrctffncn, to calculate, compute. bcrctfcn, to travel through. iiereit^ ready, prepared. bereiten, to prepare, provide. SBcrgr ^^-j -^^, -^, hill, mountain. JBcrU'n, n., -^, Berlin. S3eruf, w., -t^, -t, calling, pro- fession. Bcrufcn^ St., to call, summon. berit^mt, celebrated, famous. bcrii^rcn, to touch. bcfc^aftiflt, occupied, busy. bcfdjeibcn, modest. Bcfc^licfecn, St., to resolve, deter- mine. bcfrfjil^cn, to protect. befe^en^ 5^, to look at, view. bcfc^t, occupied, full. Ibcfonbcr, special, extraordinary. bcfonberiS, especially, particu- larly. Bcforgcn, to see to, look after. bcflJrec^cn, st.y to discuss, talk over. ficffcr {see gut). bcftC^cn, St.; — auf {ace), to in- sist on. ficftcigcn, st., to mount, ascend, get into (vehicle). bcftcttcn, to prepare, till; order. bcftrafen, to punish. 23efu(^, m., -t^, -t, visit, call; visitor (s); auf — fcitt, to be on a visit. bcfut^cn, to visit. bcten, to pray. betrat^tcn, to look at, consider, observe. S3etrag, w., -c«, -"-c, amount, sum. JBctragcn, «., -«, conduct, be- havior. bctreffcn, st., to concern, regard; iDtt^ it)n betrifft, as far as he is concerned. bctrctcn, st., to tread on, enter. betritbt, afiHcted, sorrowful. betriigcn, st., to cheat, deceive. S3ctt, n.y -t^, -en, bed; ju — ge^en, to go to bed; gu — Ucgen, to lie (be) in bed. ftetteln, to beg. Settler, w., -«, — , beggar. BetJOrjUgen, insep., to give prefer- ence to. bemunbem, to admire. betDU^t, conscious. beja^ten, to pay. S3c5Ug, w., -e^, reference; in — auf, with respect to, regarding. S3ilb, n., -eg, -er, picture. bilbcn, to form. 278 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY JBilbcrgalerie, /, -n, picture-gal- lery. S3ilbni^, n.y -eg, -c, portrait. hiUXQ, cheap. S3irnbaum, w., -eg, -^t, pear-tree. S3trnc, /., -n, pear. h'l^ {ace), till, until, up to, as far as; — gu, — nac^, as far as, even to, up to, until; t)ier — fiinf, four or five; — auf, ex- cept. Bift(i^cn (eln), a little. bitten, St. J to ask, beg, request; (ic^) bitte {lit. 'I beg'), if you please, please. Bitter, bitter. hiaHf blue. hhibcn, St. J f., to remain, stay, be. SBteiftift, w., -e6, -e, (lead-) pen- cil. Btinb, blind. Btii^en, to blossom, (be in) bloom. Slitmt^en, w., -g, — , little flower, floweret. 23(ume,/., -n, flower. S3tumengartett, w., -g, ^, flower- garden. S3(umenfo^I, w., -eg, cauliflower. Sliimtein, »., -g, — , little flower, floweret. a3Iut, n.y -eg, blood. SBliite, /., -n, blossom, bloom. JBlutenbuft, w., -eg, -^e, fragrance of flowers. Blutig, bloody. S3oben, w., -g, •«•, ground, soil; floor. S3o^ne,/., -n, bean. f8onhon^f pi., candy, candies. 93oot, n., -eg, -e or ^iite, boat. S3ot0ett, n., -g, borrowing. S3iJrfe, /., -n, Exchange(-build- ing). biife, bad, cross, angry. brau(^en, to use, need. Braufen, to roar, thunder. brec^en, st., to break; pick, gather (flowers, etc.). bteit, broad, wide. Brennen, irr., to burn. S3rief, m., -eg, -e, letter. briejlirfi, epistolary; — er 3$erle]^r, correspondence. S3rigg [pr. brif],/., -g, brig. bringen, irr., to bring, take. S3rot, «., -eg, -e, bread, loaf. f8tMt,f., -n, bridge. S3ruber, m., -g, -^, brother. SBruft,/., -^e, breast. S3u(f|, «., -eg, -^er, book. S3urf|erf(i^ranf, w., -eg, -^t, book- case. SBuc^fii^rer, m., -g, — , book- keeper. Sii^fe,/., -n, rifle. S3ummel5ug, w., -eg, ^e, slow train. S3unb, m., -eg, -e, bundle, bunch. S3urea« [pr. biiro'], «., -g, -g or -J, office. S3urger, w., -g, — , citizen. JBitrgermeifter, m., -g, — , mayor, biirften, to brush. Sutter,/, butter. G^iifar, w., -g, Caesar, dent, m., -g, -g, cent. G^^emie',/., chemistry. G^oufme,/., -n, cousin. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY ^ ba^ adv. J there, in that place; here; then; conj., as, because, since, when. babet, near it, by it, etc.; at the same time, while doing so; — fein, to be present, be there. ^arf|, n., -eg, -^er, roof. baburc^, through it, by it, etc. bafiir, for it, etc. bagegen, against it, etc.; on the other hand. ba^er, hence, therefore. ba^erjic^cn, st., f., to come on. baljitt, thither, to that place, there. bol)infal)tcn, 5/., j,, to drive there. ba^inftiCQCn, st.y f., to fly away. ba^infommcn, 5/., f., to go (get) there. WmaU, then, at that time. ^amc, /., -It, lady. ^amcnflcib, »., -c«, -cr, lady's dress. bamit^ with it, etc.; conj., in order that. ^ampfcr, w., -«, — , steamboat, steamer. ^ttncmarf, n., -«, Denmark. biimfc^, Danish. ^antf m., -e«, thanks; beftcn — , many thanks. banfbar, thankful. banfcn (dat.), to thank; owe; 'vi) banfc, no thank you. bann, then, next. baran, on it, at it, etc. barauf, on it, etc.; thereupon. barin, in it, etc. baruber, over it, about it, at it, etc. 279 barum, therefore; — , bag, be- cause. barunter, under it, among it, etc. ^a^ {see ber). ba^, that, in order that. Saturn, «., -«, T)ata or ^atett, date. bat)on^ of it, from it, about it, etc. bationlaufcn, st., f., to run away. batjontragcn, st.y to win. baju, to it, for it, etc.; moreover, into the bargain. ^egcn, w., -g, — , sword. bcin, poss. adj., thy, your. bcinct^ poss. pron., thine, yours. bcimgc (ber, bie, bag), poss. pron.y thine, yours. bcnfcn, irr., to think, fancy; — an (ace), think of. bcnn, conj., for; adv., then. bcr, bic, ba^, def. art., the; rel. pron., who, which, that; de- monstr. adj., that, etc.; de- monstr. pron., the one, he, she, it. bcrcn, of them, their; of which, etc. bergtet(!^en^ the like of whom, etc.; of the same kind; fonft — , others of the same kind. bcrjcnigc (bic — , ba^ — ), demonstr. pron., he, the one, etc. bcrfctbc (bic — , ba^ — ), the same; he, she, it, etc. bc^ftalb, for this (that) reason, therefore, on that account. bcutfrff, German; ber ^Deutfd^e, the German; ein 2)eutf(^er, a Ger- man; !Dcutf(^, n., German {the language); auf — , in Ger- man. 28o GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. bcutft^-franspflfti^, Franco-Ger- man. ^CUtfd^tanb, w., -^, Germany. ^t^tmhct, m., December. bic^, thee, you. ^tti^tcr, m.y -g, — , poet. hid, thick. bie {see bet). ^teB, m., -t^, -t, thief. Wiener, m., -g, — , servant. ^tenft, w., -e6, -e, service. ^icn^tag, w., -^, -t, Tuesday. biefcr, this, that; the latter; this (man, etc.), he, etc. ^ing, n., -t^, -e, thing. t>itf (to, for) thee, you. bttJtbtercn, to divide (arith.). t>0(i^f yet, still, however, but, after all, etc. ^o'ftur, m., -^, "^otto^xtn, doctor {academic degree). Cottar, w., -^, -^, dollar. ^onncr^iatt, m., -e^, thunder-clap. ^onncti^tag, w., -g,-e, Thursday. bo^^clt, double. ^orf, n., -e^, -^er, village. ^orn, w., -e§, ^/. -en, -e or -^er, thorn. hoxt, yonder, there. ^r. {see ^oftor). bran {see baran). branftcn, adv., outside. brel)cn, to turn. brci, three. brcimal, three times. bret^tgfalttg, thirty-fold. bringcnb, urgent. brol^en, to threaten. ^rofc^fe, /., -n, cab. briilbcn, over there. brum {see barum). bu, thou, you. bunfcl, dark. burci^ {ace), through, by, with. burti^brt'ngen, st., insep., to pene- trate, be infused into. burc^flC^tig, transparent. bur^fu'rficn, insep., to search, ransack. burfen, irr., mod. aux., to dare, be permitted, allowed, etc.; barf id)? may I? biirrc, dry, dried up. ^urft, m., -t^, thirst; — l^abcn^ to be thirsty. burfttg, thirsty. ^U^cnb, n., -e^, -c, dozen. (B then, just now; erft — , only just now. cbenfo, just as, as. * ebel, noble. (Sbuarb, m., -g, Edward. ©ggc, /., -n, harrow. ttft, conj., before. Cl^cr, adv., rather, sooner. Q:ffU, /., -n, honor; i^m JU — n, in his honor. C^ren, to honor. C^rttC^, honest. (St, n., -t^, -cr, egg. ei! ah! why! indeed! etgcn, adj., own. Ctgcnt(i(!^, really, anyway, cin, art., a, an; num., one. Ctna'nbcr, one another, each other. einer, pron., one, a man, etc.; hit — C; the one; bie — en, some. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 281 ctnfal^rcn, 5^, to haul in. cinfoUcn, st., \,, to occur (to one's mind). etngeben^ st., to give, administer. etnige, a few, several, some. ©infauf, w., -c«, -"-e, purchase; (Sinfdufe tnadien, to make pur- chases, go shopping, shop. einlaufen, to make purchases, go shopping, shop. cmlabcn, 5/., to invite. ^inlabung, /., -en, invitation. eintcnfcn, to turn, tack. einmal, once; auf — , at once; nod^ — , once more, again; eiTi= rtd, once (upon a time); ben= fen Uttcr, m., -g, — , splinter of iron. QMtiltxiff., -en, vanity. e'lcnb, miserable, wretched. eUfabet^,/., -g, Elizabeth. ©Ifc, /., -n3, Elsa, Elsie. (^iitxxif pi., parents. cmpfangcn, st., to receive. cm^fcl^ten, st., to recommend, commend; refl., to take (one's) leave. ©m^jfc^lung, /., -en, recommen- dation. @m^fe^tung!§5ricf, m., -e«, -e, letter of introduction {or recommendation). ©nbc, «., -^, -n, end; jn — , at an end, over. enb(t(^, at last, finally. cngUfrfl, English; (Sngtifc^, w., English {the language); auf — , in English. ^ttfcl, w., -8, — , grandson. entbcrfcn, to discover. ©ntbecfung, /., -en, discovery. cntfcrnt, distant. cnt^alten, st., to contain. cntfommcn, 5/., f., to escape. cnttang, along. cnttoffen, st., to dismiss. Ctttlcgen, remote, distant. cntfc^Itcftcn, st., refl., to resolve, make up one's mind. entft^ulbtgcn, to excuse. ©ntfc^cn, n., -g, horror. enttdufc^t, disappointed. ©nttdufc^ung,/., -en, disappoint- ment. cnthjebcr, either. ent^ttiei, in two, to pieces; — brec^en, st., to break up, break to pieces. er, he, it. 282 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. txhiidtXlf to catch sight of, see, discover. crBrcri^cn, 5^, to break open. (Srifc,/., -n, pea. (SrbBcBen, «., -«, — , earth- quake. ^rbc, /., earth, ground, soil. erfa^rcn, st.y to experience, learn (by report). crftttbcn, St., to invent; find. ^rftnbung, /., -en, invention. ^rfolg, m., -t^, -t, success. crfrcucn, to make glad; crfreut, delighted. ^rfrifrfiung, /., -en, refresh- ment. crfiittcn, to fulfil; fill. crgcbcnft, (most) humbly, very truly (yours). erl^altcn, 5/., to receive, get; pre- serve, keep. er^eben, st., to lift; refl., to rise, get up. erfattctt, refl., to catch cold, take cold; erfaltet fein, to have a cold. erfcnncn, irr., to recognize; per- ceive. txliaxta, to explain. crfronfcn, f., to fall ill. crfunbigcn, refl., to make in- quiries. ertaubcn, to permit, allow. ^rlefini^, «., -eg, -t, experi- ence. •crmiigtic^cn, to render possible. crnennen, irr., to appoint. ^rntcfran^, w., -e«, ^t, harvest- wreath, garland. crnten, to reap, harvest. (Jrquirfung, /., -en, comfort. crtcici^cn, to reach, arrive at. crfc^attcn, wk. or st., \., to sound, resound. crfc^cmcn, 5^, f., to appear. (Srf(!^Ctnen, »., -^, appearance. erft, adj., first; adv., first, only, not before, not until; — eben, only just now, not till now; — tn^f in the first place. crftaunett, to be astonished. crftirfcn, intr., to choke, smother. crtragcn, st., to bear, endure. crtrtnfcn, st., \., to be drowned, drown (intr.). crhjac^cn, f., to awake. cmartcn, to expect. crhjcifen, st., to show; do. erttJtbctn, to reply, answer; re- turn (tr.). cr^a^len, to relate, narrate, tell. C^^ it, etc.; there; so. Cffcn, St., to eat; ju SJilttag — , to dine. ©ffen, n., -g, eating, meal. ©ftliiffcl, m., -^, — , tablespoon. Ctlic^c^, some. Ctttia, adv., about. titva^f something, anything, some, any; fo — , anything (something) of the kind, such a thing; adv., somewhat. ewd^, you, (to, for) you. CUCr, poss. adj., your. CUrer, poss. pron., yours. curigc (ber, bie, ha^), poss. pron., yours. Europe, n., -§, Europe. tnxopixi^aif European. Cttjxq, adj., eternal; adv., for- GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 283 8f fttl^tg, capable. JJa^tgfett, /., -en, capacity. galjnCr/., -n, flag, banner. fa^ren, st., \,, %, to go, go (in a vehicle), drive, ride, travel, sail, etc. ga^rfarte,/., -n, ticket (for trav- eling). gott, w., -t^, ^t, fall; case. fatten, St., f., to fall. fatten, to fell, cut down. falfc^, false, wrong. gami'Iic,/., -n, family. faft, almost, nearly. fani, decayed, bad, stale. ^ gauft,/., ^, fist, hand. JJebmar, w., February. gcber,/., -n, pen. fel^ten, to be lacking, missing; be the matter with, ail {dat.)\ — b, missing, lacking. %z\)\tXf m., -g, — , error, mis- take. fetem, to celebrate. Seiertag, m., -c6, -e, holiday. fcin, fine, nice, gentle. JJetnb, m.y -t^, -t, enemy. JJetb, n.y -eg, -tx, field. . genfter, «., -^, — , window. JJe'rien, pi., holidays, vacation. fern, far (away), remote. fertig, ready; — fein, to be ready, have finished, have (be) done. feft, firm, solid. feud^t, damp. • geuer, «., -«, — , fire. finben, st., to find; — (£ic nid^t? don't you think (consider) ? JJifd^, w., -t^, -c, fish. f[a(^, flat, level. gtaft^c,/., -n, bottle. Pattern, to flutter, wave. 5leiftt|, «., -e«, meat. flei^tg, diligent, industrious. fliegen, 5/., f., \),, to fly; soar. glintenhigcl, /., -n, musket-ball. glug, w., -t^, -"-c, river. folgen {dat.)y to follow; — b, (the) following. fotgtid^, hence, therefore, conse- quently. forbern, to demand. fort, away, off; — unb — , con- tinually. fortbliil^en, to continue to bloom. fortfa^ren, st., to continue, go on; f., to drive (go, etc.) on. fortge^en, st., \,, to go away. fortjagen, to drive away. fortfommen, st., \., to get away; tnac^c, bag bu fortfommft, be off with you, begone. fortne^men, st., to take away. fortf^irfen, to send away, dis- miss. fragen, to ask. granfretti^, w., -«, France. granjofe, w., -n, -n. French- man. franjiififci^, French; granj(ififc§, French {the language); auf — , in French. gran,/., -en, woman, wife, lady, madam, Mrs. grttutetn, «., -6, — , young lady, Miss. fret, free; unoccupied. grei^err, w., -n, -en, baron. freili^, certainly, to be sure, of course. 284 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. grcitag, w., -S, -e, Friday, fremb, strange, foreign. gremb(cr), adj. suhst., stranger, foreigner. fjreubc,/., -n, joy, pleasure. frcucn, impers., to gladden; ba0 freut mid^, I am glad of that, that pleases me; refl., to be glad, rejoice. fjrcunb, m., -e6, -e, friend. grcunbtn,/., -nen, friend (/.). frcunblit^, friendly; adv., in a friendly manner, kindly. grtcbc, w., -n^, peace. ^xkM^f m., -^, Frederick. grtcbrirflftraftc, /., Frederick Street. frifc^, fresh, cool. y, n-.y -t^, -tx, money. ^elbftucf^ n., -e^, -C, coin, piece of money. ©etcgcn^cit, /., -en, opportunity, occasion. (Scle^rt(cr), adj. subst., learned man, scholar. gcUngcn, st., I, impers. {dat.), to succeed; e8 ift mir getungen, ju, I succeeded in. ©cma^Un,/., -nen, wife; grau — , wife. ©cmtife, »., -^, vegetables. gcncfctt, St., \,, to get well, recover (from illness). genug, enough. genitgen^ to suffice, be enough. ©e^ftrf, »., -eg, baggage, lug- gage. ©e^ttdfc^cttt, m., -c«, -e, (bag- gage-)check. ©epiirftroger, m., -6, — , porter. gered^t, just, righteous. gcring, small, little, slight; nid^t im — [ten, not in the least. gcnt(c), lieber, am Ueb[ten, gladly, willingly, with pleasure; red^t — , very gladly; etmag — tun, to like to (be pleased to) do anything; — l^aben, to like, be fond of; — e[fen, to like (to eat); lieber tun ic, to prefer to do, etc. ©crftc, /., barley. @cfanbt(cr), adj. subst., ambas- sador. @cf(^(ift, n., -e«, -c, business; business-house. @cf^aft^reifcnb(cr), adj. subst., commercial traveler. gefc^C^en, st., f., impers., to hap- pen; bag ift fc^on — , I (etc.) have already done so. ©efc^cnf, n., -e8, -e, gift, present. (S^efcf)rci, n., -eg, outcry, clamor. ©cfcttft^aft, /., -en, company; party. ©efit^t, «., -eg, -er, face. ©eftalt,/., -en, form, figure. gcftcrn, yesterday. ©cfunb^cit,/., -en, health. ©ctreibCr n., -g, grain, corn. gettja^r, aware. @cnjt(^t, n., -eg, -e, weight. 286 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. gctuifi, certain. OCtt)(^!^nli(i^^ usual, general, ordi- nary. @t|jfcl, m., -^, — , summit, peak. (3ia^, n., -t^, -^tx, glass. glatt, smooth, slippery. glauBcn {dat. of per s.), to believe; think. ©Ictubtgcr, w., -8, — , creditor. gleirf), like, similar {dat.); \iCi^ ift tnlr — , it is all the same to me, I don't care; adv.y at once, presently, directly; co7tj.y al- though; see also iDenn — , glcttcn, St., \,, to glide, slip. ^torfe, /., -n, bell; bell-like flower, hare-bell, blue-bell. mMXtlXXf n., -^, —, little bell. ©liid, »., -e^, (good) luck, hap- piness. gliidUti^, happy. glii^cn, to glow, be warm (hot). gniibig, gracious; — e 'i^XdVi, mad- am, ma'am. (SJolb, «., -t^, gold; — ftiicf, w., -e^, -t, gold-piece, gold coin. golben, golden, gold {adj.). ^fiii, w., -e^, -^er, god; God. ©raB, w., -e^, -^er, grave, tomb. gralien, st., to dig. ^raf, w., -en, -en, count. %m^f n., -e^, -^er, grass. ^xm, grey. ^tcnjC,/., -n, frontier, boundary. firofi, -er, grofet, large, tall, big, great; ber — e 3^^9^l^^ the min- ute-hand, long hand. ©ro^muttcr,/, -^^ grandmother. (^ro^pai^ap w., -^, -^, grandpapa. ©WfttJater, w., -g, ^, grandfather. ©rube,/., -n, pit, ditch. griin, green. ©riin, «., -«, green. ©runb, w., -e^, -^e, ground, rea- son. griinbcn, to found. ©ruft, m., -c§, -"-e, greeting; mit f)erjU(^en ©rilfeen, with kind regards, etc. grii^en, to greet, salute; bow to. gut, beffer, be[t, good; kind; adv., well, very well; re(f)t — , quite well; — tun, to benefit. ©iite, /., goodness, kindliness. giitig, kind. $aar, «., -eg, -t, hair. ^abe,/., belongings, possessions. I^aben, to have; possess; rec^t — , to be (in the) right. $abic^t, m., -eg, -e, hawk. l^acfen, to hew, chop, cut. ^afcr, m.y -g, oats. laager, lean, gaunt. ^alb, adj., half; — fec^g, half- past five. ^(ttftc, /., -n, half {as noun). ^atto! halloa! ^alm, w., -eg, -e, stalk, blade. fatten, St., to hold; deem; — fiir, consider as. $anb,/., -^e, hand. J^anbari&ett, /., -en, needle- work, etc. ^anbfrfjul^, w., -eg, -e, glove. ^anbtafd^c, /., -n, hand-bag, satchel. ^angen, st., to hang. ^an^, m., -eng (/row ^o^anneg), Jack. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 287 ^art, *cr, hard. ^anttlf m.j -c6, -c, breath; breeze. ^au^t, «., -e«, ^cr, head. ^au^Jtftobt,/., -^e, capital (city). ^auptftraftc,/., -n, main street. ^am, w., -eg, -"^er, house; nad^ — C, home; ^u — C, at home. -^ccr, »., -eg, -e, army, licftig, violent. ]^et! ho! heigh! J^eimtncg, m., -eg, -c, way home; fid^ auf ben — madden, to set out (start) for home. ^Ctnrtffl, w., -g, Henry. ^ci'ratcn, to marry. l^cifcr, hoarse. l^cift, hot, fjti^tn, St., to be called, be named; bid; h)ie ^cifet? what is the name of?; i(^ ^ei^e 53., my name is B.; bag ^eifet, that is (to say). l^citcr, clear, bright, cheerful. ^tVbf w., -en, -en, hero, cham- pion. J&elbenmut, w., -eg, heroism. ^clbenmiittg, heroic, l^ctfcn, St. {dot.), to help. l^efl(C), bright, clear. l^cr, hither. ^erabftiirjcn, f., to dash down. ^eraufbringen, irr., to bring up. l^crauffommcn, st., f., to come up, come here. l^crau^fommcn, st., f., to come out. ^icrau^ne^mcn, st., to take out. l^crau^fc^trfcn, to send out (here). I^crauigft^teffcn, 5/., f., to shoot forth {intr.). l^crau^ftcttcn, refl., to turn out. i|crbcirufen, st., to call (to one's self). ^crbft, m., -eg, -e, autumn. l^crein, in (towards); — ! come in! l^creinbringcn, irr., to bring in (here). I^crfommcn, st., \,, to come here. $crr, w., -n, -en, master, gentle- man, Mr.; (bet) — !t?e()rer, (the) teacher; meinc — cn, gentlemen {voc). \)txxi\ii), magnificent, splendid. I^crfagcn, to recite, repeat. ]^cruntcrf(i|(agcn, st., f., intr.y to fall down. ^tx^, n., -eng, -en, heart. ^crjen^fiiitc, /., kind-hearted- ness, kindliness. i!ftx^ix(tl, hearty, affectionate. Jpcrjog, m., -eg, -e or ^t, duke. $CU, n.j -eg, hay. I^CUtc, to-day; — friil^, this morn- ing; — morgen, this morning; — abenb, this evening. l^eutjutage, nowadays, in these days, now. I^tcr, here. I^ierjulanbe, in this country. J^ilfc, /., help, assistance. $immc(, m.y -g, — , sky, heaven. ^tn, thither, along; — nnb l^er, hither and thither, to and fro, backwards and forwards. ^tnabfa^rcn, st., f., to go (drive, etc.) down. I^inauf, adv., up, up on. l^tnau^, adv., out. I^inau^bcgcbcn, st., refl., to betake one's self, go. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. (jinau^fa^rcn, 5/., f., to go (drive, etc.) out. ]^inau)^gc^cn, st., \,, to go out. ^inctn, adv., in. I^incinfa^rcn, st., \,, to go (drive, etc.) in (into). l^incinf alien, st., \,, to fall in (into). l^metngc^cn, 5^., f., to go in (into), enter. ^incinft^trfcn, to send in (into). l)incinf^(ci(i^cn, st., \., to glide into, steal into, come over. l^mgcl^ett, 5/., f., to go (walk) along; flir \x6) — , to saunter along. l^tnfc^cn, to set down; refl., to sit down. l^tntcr, behind. i^mtcrge'^cn, st., insep., to de- ceive, cheat. ^intcrgrunb, w., -e6, ^t, back- ground. ^tntertur, /., -en, back-door. ^iftonf(^, historical. ^t^C,/., heat. ^f^^, p^er, pc^ft, high, tall. . ]^0(i^atf)tung^tloIl, very respect- fully. 1^0(!^betagt, (far) advanced in years. I|(i(!^ft, extremely, very highly. l^offcn, to hope. l^offentttd^, it is to be hoped, I (etc.) hope. J^dfliti^, polite. ^of(ing, w., -e^, -e, courtier. k'^¥ff; -n, height. l^ulb, lovely, sweet. i^olcn, to get, fetch, bring. 5, «., -eg, -"-er, wood. ^ols^aucr, m., -g, — , wood-cutter. l^i^ren, to hear; listen to. ^ii^ft^, pretty, nice. ^uf|n, «., -eg, ^er, fowl, chicken. ^unb, w., -eg, -e, dog. ^unbcrt, w., -eg, -e, hundred {as noun). Ijnnbcrtfaltig, a hundred-fold. hunger, w., -g, hunger. Ijungrig, hungry. l^U^fen, to hop, skip. ^nif m., -eg, ^e, hat. fitter, w., -g, — , keeper, guard- ian. ^iitte,/., -n, hut, cabin. 3 t*r I. i^m, (to, for) him. i^n, him, it. t^ncn, (to, for) them. 3t)ncn, (to, for) you. i^r, 2 pL, ye, you. t^r, pass, adj., her; their. 3^r, poss. adj., your. i^XtXf poss. pron., hers; theirs. S^rer, poss. pron., yours. i^rigc (ber, bte, bag), poss. pron., hers; theirs. S^rtge (ber, ble, bag), poss. pron., yours. immcr, always; nO(^ — , still. imftanbe fcin, to be capable (of), be in a position (to). in (dat., ace), in, at, into, to. inbcm, while. tnbeffcn, meanwhile. Snbien, n., -g, India. inntg, heartfelt; — Uebenb, affec- tionate. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 289. gnfc'ft, «., -c^, -en, insect. 3nfcl, /., -n, island. intcrcffa'nt, interesting. Sntercffc, w., -^, -n, interest. intcrefficrcn, to interest; refl., to take an interest, be interested (in, fur). irgcnb, at all, etc. irgcnbnJO, anywhere (at all); fon[t — , anywhere else. Qrtanb, w., -^, Ireland. irren, refl.y to be mistaken. Stattcn, «., -8, Italy. itaUcniftii, Italian. 3 ja, yes; indeed, really, you know, etc.; tun ^k ba^ — nic^t, be sure not to do that. 3a^r, n., -t^, -t, year. Sa^re^jett, /., -en, season. 3anuar, w., January. jatDO^l^ yes (indeed), certainly, Oh yes. Jc, every, each; — ... befto (umfo), the . . . the (before compar.)\ — nac^, according to. jcbcr, each, every, every one; ein — , each, every, etc. jcbcrmann, -^, everybody, every one. icbcrjctt, always. jcbc^mal, always. jemalS, ever, at any time. jemanb. somebody, some one, anybody. jcner, adj., that (yonder); pron., that, that one, the former, he, etc. It^tf now. je^tg^ adj., present. jjobeln^ to yodel, sing in the style of the Swiss mountaineers. ^O'^flltna,/., -^, Joanna, Joan. inttj^tUf to shout for joy. ^n% m., July. jung, -er, young. Sunge, m., -n, -n or coll., -n6^ boy, lad. ^iingling, m., -e^, -c, young man^ youth. 3u'm, m., June. ^affec, m., -6, coffee. ^a^n, m., -t^, -^e, row-boat, skiff, canoe. ^aifer, m., -^, — , emperor. ^alabricn, n., -^, Calabria. ^albS^taten, m., -«, — , roast veal. fait, ^tx, cold. Camera 'b, m., -en, -en, comrade, companion. fftmmen, to comb. £am^f, m., -c6, ^t, combat, con- flict. fftmpfen, to fight. ^ampfcnb(cr), adj. suhst., com- batant. ^am|)fcr, m., -6, — , fighter, com- batant. tam^fnJUt,/., fury of battle. ^anjlcr, m., -^, — , chancellor. ^art, m., -^, Charles. ^artoffel, /., -n, potato. ^(tfe, m., -^, — , cheese. faufcn, to buy. 290 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. ^aufmann, m., -C«, -leute, mer- chant. laum, scarcely, hardly. fcin, no, not a, not any. feincr, no one, nobody. better, w., -g, —, cellar. ^ellncr, w., -^, — , waiter. fctincn, irr.j to know, be ac- quainted with. fcntern, f., to capsize. £cffel, w., -9>, —, kettle. £tnb, w., -t^, -it, child. ^inberftimme,/., -n, child's voice. ^inhc^\)tx^, w., -en^, child's heart. ^irrfllcin, w., -«, — , little church. ^irfc^C,/., -n, cherry. fta^en^ to complain. tlax, clear, bright; tm — en fcin, to be clear, have made up one's mind. 2iata,f., -«, Clara. ^Itffe,/., -n, class. ^latJie'r, «., -C^, -t, piano; — fpteten, to play the piano. ^Icc, m., -g, clover. ^Icib, w., -e^, -tX, dress; />/., dresses, clothes. Ilctbcn, to dress; refi.j to dress (one's self). !lein, small, little; bcr — C S^W^f the short hand, hour-hand. ^Uma, n., -g, ^limata, climate. f linden, st., to sound, resound. ilop^Ctlf to knock, clap, pat; cS flopft, there is a knock, some- body is knocking. flu^; ^n, intelligent, clever. Slnabe, w., -n, -n, boy, lad. ^nec^t, m.y -t^, -c, man-servant, laborer, hired-man, man. lie, »., -e^, -t, knee. I, m.f -c^, ^t, cook. :, m.y -g, — , trunk. [, w., -e^, cabbage. ^oinm^n^f w., Columbus. fommcn, st., f., to come; toit fommt e^, bafe? how is it that ?; um6 !^eben — , to lose one's life, perish. ^iJnig, w., -e«, -c, king. ^iJnigtn,/., -nen, queen. Wmglit^, royal. ^ilmflrei(^, m., -c«, -C, king- dom. li^nntn, irr., mod. aux.y to be able, can, etc.; to know, be versed in, know how to. ^on^e'rt, «., -t^, -t, concert. ^p|lf, w., -e^, ^c, head. ^iipfleln, w., -g, — , little head. ^o^ff timers, w., -c§, -en (w5w- fl//>' ^/.), headache. ^orB, w., -e^, -"-e, basket. foften, to cost. foftfpiettg, costly, expensive. ^raft,/., -^e, strength, force. ^rattc,/., -n, claw, talon. (ranf, ^er, ill, sick; bet ^ranfc, the sick man, patient. ^tanf^eit, /., -en, illness, sick- ness. ^rctbc,/., chalk. ^ricg, w., -e^, -e, war. ^ronijrtnj, w., -en, -en, crown- prince. ^Vi6)tff.y -n, kitchen. ^ugel,/., -n, bullet. ^u^,/., ^e, cow. fit^l, cool. ^itnftler, w., -«, — , artist. ^upfcrmunse,/., -n, copper coin. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 291 ^ur^, w., -C«, -C, rate of ex- chaxige. furs, -^^^f short. Sliiftc,/., -n, coast, shore. ^utfc^Ct, w., -«, — , coachman, driver, cabman. s Ittt^cln, to smile. la(i}tn, to laugh. (ftc^crltc^, ridiculous, absurd. Sad^S, w., -e^, -c, salmon. laben, st., to invite; gu 3:ifc^ — , to invite to dinner. 2aben, w., -g, -«■, shop, store. 2anb, «., -C§, ^er, land, country; soil; auf bent — t, in the coun- try; auf^ — S^^cti, to go to the country. (anbcn, f., to land. Sanb^aui^, «., -C§, -"-cr, country- house. Sanbfartc, /., -n, map. Sanbfcliaft, /., -en, landscape. Sanb^mann, w., -e^, -leute, coun- tryman; n)a^ flir ein — finb (Sic? what countryman are you? lan^f ^tv, adj., long. lang(e), -^er, adv., long, a long time, for a long time; fo — , as long as. IttngS (gen., dat.y or ace), along. tangfam, slow. iangft; fd^on — , long ago. Sarm, w., -e^, noise. laffcn, St., mod. aux., to let, leave; cause to be (done), have (done); mac^cn — , to have made. Satcmc, /., -n, lantern, stree't- lamp. 2aufburf(ifte, w., -n, -n, errand- boy. taufen, st., f., t)., to run; hasten. Saune, /., -n, humor, temper, whim. iant, loud; adv., aloud. tauten, to sound; run, read, be. (ftutcn, to ring. Icbcn, to live. Scben, n., -^, life; um« — fommen, to lose one's life, perish. (cbc'nbig, living. Scbcn^ja^r, «., -e«, -t, year (of life). Scbcn^UJCtfc, /., -n, manner of life. (cb^aft, lively, exciting. UtX, empty. (cgcn, to lay, put. Ic^ncn, to lean. Ic^rcn, to teach. Scorer, m., -^, — , teacher, mas- ter. Sc^rcrtn, /., -nen, teacher (/.). Scibfttst, m., -t^, ^t, physician- in-ordinary. Uid^i, light, easy, slight. 2cib, n., -c^, grief, sorrow. ktb tun, impers. (dai.), to be sorry; e« tut ntlr — , I am sorry. Icibcn, St., to suffer, endure. (cibcr, unfortunately. lei^cn, St., to lend. Scrtfte,/., -n, lark, skylark. Icrncn, to learn, study. Icfcn, 5^, to read. Sefcftiirf, «., -c^, -e, extract for reading. 292 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY (c^t, last; — crcr, (the) latter. Icuc^tcn, to shine. Scute, ply people. ticb, dear. Siebe, /., love. Ucbcn, to love. licber, comp. of gem, rather; — ef[en, to prefer (to eat). Sieb, w., -e^, -er, song. Uecjcn, St., to lie, be situated, be. Sicfe,/., Lizzie. Siltc,/., -n, lily. Sinbe, /., -n, lime-tree, linden. (inf, left. ImU, on the (to the) left. loben, to praise. ^i>^, n.y -t^, ^er, hole, pit. Udtm, to loosen. Siiffct, w., -^f — , spoon. !So!^n, m., -t^, reward. (of en, to buy, get, take (ticket). Sotfe, w., -n, -n, pilot. Siittie, w., -n, -n, lion. Sttftf/, -^e, air. Sttft, /., -^e, desire, inclination, pleasure; — t)aben, to have a mind to, want to, wish to. Suftgatten, w., -g, •«^, pleasure- garden, park. lufttg, gay, merry. Suftf^iel, w., -e^, -t, comedy. m. {see mati). mat^eHf to make, do; ettte Jrcube — , to give pleasure, please; etnen (SpajierQang — , to take (go for) a walk; fic!^ auf ben ^elmtDeg — , to set out (start) for home; \\6) an ettDtt^ — , to set about anything; tnad^C, ha^ bu fortfommft, be off with you, begone. ^aci^t, /., ^t, power, might. mitcl^tig (gen.), master of. ajlabc^en, n., -^, —, girl. 50'i'); Tl* 3. — , (= brei Waxt) three marks. SJJarf, /., -en, march (district). 2)larft, w., -eg, "e, market; auf ben — ge^en, st., f., to go to (the) market. Wlax^, w., March. SJlafc^ine, /., -n, machine. ajlatrofe, w., -n, -n, sailor. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 293 SWau^, /., ^t, mouse. Wthi^Vn,/., medicine. SJlccr, w., -e^, -e, sea. tttel^r, more; nid^t — , no more, no longer, not now. me^rcrc, several. mc^rmali^, several times. aJlcilc,/., -n, league. tttcin, poss. adj., my. ttlCtncn, to mean, think, express I the opinion (that), refer to. p mcin(cr), pers. pron., of me. incinct, poss. pron., mine. mcintge (ber, Me, ba6), poss. pron., mine; bic SD^einigen, my family, etc.; ha^ SO^einige tun, to do my share, do what I can. tncift, most. mciftcn^, mostly, for the most part. SOlciftcr, m., -§, — , master. melben^ to announce; refl., to apply (for a situation). Wltnqtf /., -n, multitude, great many. Mtn^^, m., -en, -en, man (human being), person; feitl — , no- body, no one; pi., people. 9Wcnf(^CttIcben, w., -«, — , (hu- man) life. mcnfc^Uc!^, human. mcrfcn, to mark, note, perceive. Wlcffcr, «., -«, — , knife. SSltitX, m. or n.y -g, — , metre. mi^f me. mictcn, to hire, engage. 9JlU(i^,/., milk. TOttio'n, /., -en, million. SJltni'fter, m., -g, — , minister (political). tninui^, minus. aWinutc, /., -n, minute. TOnutcnjeigcr, w., -g, — , minute- hand, long hand. mir, (to, for) me. mit (dat.), with, along with; by (in multiplication). mitl^nngen, irr., to bring with (one), bring along. mitfa^rcn, st., f., to go (drive, etc.) with; go along (with). mitgc^cn, st., f., to go with, go along (with). mitfommcn, st., f., to come (go) with one, come (go) along. mttnclfmcn, st., to take with (one), take along. mitreifctt, f., to travel (go) with, come (go) along (with). 9Jlitrcifcnb(er), adj. subst., fellow- traveler. mitfud^Ctt, to look for along with others. SDltttag, m., -eg, -e, midday, noon; gu — effen, to dine. SOltttagi^cffcn, n., -«, dinner. ^xttt, /., middle, centre. mtttcikn (dat.), to inform. ajlittctlung, /., -en, communica- tion, information. Wxitti, n., -g, — , mean(s). Wliiicxnatiii, /., -^e, midnight. aWittnJorff, m., -«, -e, Wednesday. m<)gen, irr., mod. aux., may, like, etc.; id^ mag bag nid^t^ I do not like that; id^ ntijd^tc (gem), I should like to. miigUrff, possible. Wlo'natf m., -eg, -c, month. ^onb, m., -eg, -e, moon. 501ontag, m., -g, -e, Monday. aWorgen, m., -g, — , morning; 294 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. ht^ — «, morgen^, in the morn- ing; tjeutc (geftem) tnorgen, this (yesterday) morning. morgcn, to-morrow; — friil^, to- morrow morning. Wloioxifooif n., -eg, -bfite or -boote, motor-boat. miibe, tired, fatigued. multt^jn^iercn, to multiply. 9Jlunrf|Cn, w., -^, Munich. aUiinjc,/., -n, coin. aUufc'um, «., -g, 9JJufecn, mu- seum. aJluflX/., music. SJiu^fatnuftr /., ^c, nutmeg. muffen, irr., mod. aux., to be obliged to, be forced to, have to, must. WMSitXf «., -g, — , pattern, sample. abutter,/., ^, mother. Wluttcrd^cn, w., -«, — , mother (dear). SJlil^c,/., -n, cap. 91 tta! well! now! Xid^ {dat.), after, to, according to; — $aufc, home; btX 3ug — SB,, the train for B. ^ati^itaXf w., -g, -n, neighbor. tiat^bcm, C(7wy., after. S^arfffolgcr, w., -g, — , successor. na(i^gelben, st., to yield, give way. tta(!^^er^ afterwards, thereupon. Slat^mittag, w., -eg, -e, after- noon; beg — g, in the afternoon. ^atijxid^if f.y -en, news. nati^fe^en, 5^, to look, search. natf desolate, dreary. obcr, or. Dfcn, m.y ~^, ^, stove. Offistc'r, m.y -t^, -e, officer {milit.). Dffljicrigmantcl, m., -^, ^, offi- cer's cloak. oft, often, frequently. oftmali^, often. O^ne {acc.)y without. O^r, n.y -cd, -en, ear. O^rfctgc,/., -n, box on the ear. Oftubcr, m.y October. Omntbui^, m.y —, -ffe, omnibus. Onfcl, m.y -^, —, uncle. Ontario, w., -g, Lake Ontario. O^Jfcr, n.y -^, — , sacrifice. orbentlic^, proper. Ort, m.y -eg, -e and ^tx, place, spot. Often, m.y -g and — , east. Oftcm, Easter. 6fterret(ft, «., -«, Austria. 6fterteic^=Ungam, w., -«, Austria- Hungary. iJfterrcid^ifdji, Austrian. i^ftUd^, eastern. Oftfcc,/., Baltic. $aar, «., -C3, -c, pair, couple; cin paar, a few; ein paarmal, several times. pacfen, to pack; seize. ^a^ic'r, n.y -e«, -t, paper. $a|)tergelb, «., -e^, paper-money. ^a^ierforb, m., -e^, ^t, waste- basket. ^arabc,/., -n, parade. ^ari'i^, «., Paris. $arf, m.y -t^, -e or -g, park. ^attc'nt, m.y -en, -en, patient. ^aufe, /., -n, pause; recess. perflft^, Persian. ^etctigburg, «., -«, St. Peters- burg. 296 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. ^farrcr, w., -«, — , clergyman, minister. :pfctlf(^nett, swift as an arrow. ^Pfennig, m., -e«, -e, 'pfennig' (to (3 P^-^t of a mark). ^fcrb, n., -e^, -t, horse. :pflan5cti, to plant. :pftaftern, to pave. :pflcgen, to tend, nurse. tPflic^t,/., -en, duty. :pf(it^tQetrcu, faithful to duty. p^Mcn, to pick, pluck, gather. :pflugen, to plough. tPfunb, n., -e^, -e, pound. $^i(ofo'^^, w., -en, -en, philoso- pher. ^fjf>t0^xapi)W f /., -n, photo- graph. mWlfn physics. 5|Sla^, w., -e^, -"-e, place, seat; public place, square. :pIii^Uc^, sudden. :|j(u^, plus. ^ortemonnate [pr. portmona'], »., -6, -^, purse, pocket-book. iprd^tig, splendid, magnificent, fine. ^ret!^, m., -e§, -e, price; prize. :prcifcn, 5^, to praise, extol. ^xm^t, m., -n, -n, Prussian (jtoun). ^reu^en, «., -«, Prussia. ipreuftifc^, Prussian (adj.). ^rofeffor, m., -g, ^rofeffo'rcn, pro- fessor. ?Progta'mm, «., -e^, -e, pro- gramme. ^rofldmieren, to proclaim. !|Srot)ia'nt, m., -e§, provisions. ^Subbing, m., -6, -g, pudding. ^nl^f w., -eg, -e, pulse. ^nU^tiila^f m.y -e8, ^e, pulsation, pulse-beat. $unft, m., -e«, -C, point; — 10 U^r, at ten o'clock precisely, piinftlit^, punctual. ^nppt,/., -n, doll. a qn'ditn, to torment, vex. Cluell, w., -eg, -e, spring, foun- tain. Ouctte,/., -n, spring, fountain. 9flanun!cl, /., -n, crowfoot, but- tercup. rafieren, to shave. fftat, w., -eg, advice. ratcn, 5^. (dat.), to advise. fRaif^an^, n., -eg, -^er, town-hall, city-hall. Cfiiitfel, «., -g, — , riddle. raut^cn, to smoke. taufc^en, to murmur, gurgle. rcc^nen, to reckon. [Rcc^nung, /., -en, bill, account. rec^t, right; — gern(e), very gladly; — gut, quite well; — geben, to admit; — l^aben, to be (in the) right. XC^t§, on the (to the) right. reben, to speak, talk. fRthtn^axi, /., -en, phrase, ex- pression. S^iegctt, m., -g, rain. 9flegenf(^trm, w., -eg, -e, um- brella. JRcgCttJCtt,/., -en, rainy weather. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 297 9flegtcrung, /., -en, government, rule; Utlter ber — , in the reign. rcgncn, to rain. rctd^, rich. 9flei(^, «., -eg, -t, empire, king- dom. rctrffcn, to pass, hand. Oicic^^ftabt, /., ^t, imperial city. rcif, ripe. 9fici^C,/., -n, rank, row, turn; id^ fomme an bic — , it is my turn; ber — nac^, in turn. rein, clean, pure. tCtnlic^, cleanly, neat, tidy. tRcifc, /., -n, journey, voyage, trip; eine — madden, to take (go on) a journey. tcifen, f., 1^., to travel, journey, go; go (away), set out (on a journey). 9'leifcnb(er), adj. subst,, traveler. retjcnb, charming. ^ttpnhWt, /., -en, republic. ditpnUitantt, m., -g, — , repub- lican. fRcftauratb'n, /., -en, restaurant. rcttcn, to save, rescue. 9tt\)ointxo'n, /., -en, revolution. ffitt)0'it)tt, m., -^, — , revolver. ffit^tpi, n., -e^, -e, recipe, pre- scription. 9fl^cin, w., -e«, the (river) Rhine. Oi^cmttJCm, m., -e^, -e, Rhenish wine, hock. ri(i|ti0, right, correct; — Qe^en, to be right, correct {of time- piece). 9ltnbcrBratcn, m., -g, — , roast of beef. Sling, w., -eg, -e, ring. tinnen, st.j f., to flow, run, pass by. DlUtcrfti^aft,/., knighthood. Oiorf, w., -eg, -^e, coat. iRotte,/., -n, part {theat.). JRom, «., -g, Rome. Sfloma'n, w., -eg, -t, romance, novel. ^«»fCf/, -tt/ rose. 9flofmc,/., -n, raisin. OiiJj^lcin, w., -g, — , little rose. rot, ^er, red. IRottocin, w., -eg, -c, red wine, claret. gfliiftc,/., -n, turnip. 9luden, m., -g, — , back. [Ritrffi^, w., -eg, -e, back-seat. 9fluf, w., -eg, -e, call, shout, cry. rufen, st., to call, cry out. Siu^e,/., rest, repose. tU^cn, to rest, repose. rulfig, quiet, calm. runb, round. 9^unbe, /., -n, round, circuit. Dfiuffe, m., -n, -n, Russian (noun), tRuftlanb, w., -g, Russia. ^^ {see t§). )^f m., -^, molasses. qL m. (unb bergleid^en ntc^r)* Ufcr, n., -g, — , shore, bank. U^r, /., -en, clock, watch; tDit t)iel — ift eg? what time is it?; brei — , three o'clock; um n)ie t)iel — ? at what time (o'clock) ? um (ace), around, about, for, at; um + infin., in order to, to. umfa'ffen, insep., to comprise, include. u'mgrabcn, st., to dig up, dig over. u'mfommen, st., \,, to perish; um etmag fommen, to lose anything. U'mft^logcn, st., f., to turn over, capsize. Umftanb, m., -eg, ^e, circum- stance. umft(inMt(i^, ceremonious. u'm^ic^cn, st., f., to remove, move {intr.). 304 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. tmaitQCne^m, disagreeable, un- pleasant. U'narttg, ill-behaved, naughty. unbcfc^abtgt, uninjured. unt>, and; —, fo tdditV (ufh).), and so forth. Ultcntbc^rl^, indispensable. untXtDaxtct, unexpected. ungcbulbig, impatient. ungcfd'I)r, about, nearly. unglau'BUrf), incredible. U'ngliicfUdfl, unhappy, unfortu- nate. llmtierfttttt, /., -en, university. irnfoftcn, pL, expenses. unmil'gltrfi, impossible; id) fantt e^ — tun, I can't possibly do it. U'nniittg, unnecessary. U'norbnung, /., disorder, untidi- ness. Utt!^, us, (to, for) us. unfcr, poss. adj.y our. unfcrcr, poss. pron., ours. unfrtge (ber, bie, ba^), poss. pron., ours. untcn, at the bottom, below, downstairs. Unter {dat., ace), under, beneath, below, among, in; — ber dlt- gierung, in the reign. nnitvhn^d^tnf st., insep., to inter- rupt. untcrbcffcn, meanwhile, in the meantime, while. Untcr^altcn, 5/., insep., to enter- tain; refl., to enjoy one's self. Untctf^tcb, m., -e^, -e, differ- ence. Untcrf(!^rtft,/., -en, signature. Unttxtan, m., -^ and -en, -en, subject (of a ruler). u'ntertaud^ctt, to dive (down), untcmeg^, on the way. unticr^eiratct, unmarried. untierlc^t, uninjured. Ux^ad^t, /., -n, cause. ufhj. (unb fo tDeiter), and so forth, et cetera. tj. (t)On, in titles of nobility). fSaicXf m., -g, -«•, father. fSiXUxttftn, n., -^, — , little father {Russian mode of address). JBatcrlanb, «., -e^, -e, fatherland, native country. S^ctlc^en, w., -g, — , violet. S^cranba, /., -^ or 33eranben, veranda. ticrou^gabcn, to pay out, spend. UcrBeffcrn, to correct. tierblet^cn, st., f., to remain. tJcrBrec^en, st., to be guilty of. ucrBrenncn, irr., to burn. ticrfinngcn, irr.\ to spend, pass (time). tJCrbicncn, to earn; deserve. 't>ZXt\)Xtn, to honor, revere. ucrctnen, to unite. toerfertigcn, to make, prepare. tJcrgcBeni^, in vain. tjergetten, st., to repay. ticrgcffcn, st., to forget. tJCrgcftltrff, absent-minded, for- getful. 85crgttugcn, w., -g, pleasure, joy, delight; t)iel — ()aben, to enjoy one's self very much. JBcrgnugungj^rctfc,/., -n, pleasure- trip. ^eri^ci'ratet, married. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 305 tJetl^tnbcrn, to hinder, prevent. ticrirrcn, refl.^ to lose one's way. bcrfaufcn, to sell. JBcrfftuferin, /., -nen, sales- woman. ©crfcftr, w., -e^, intercourse. bcrflcibcn, to disguise. ticrlci^cn, st., to confer, give (title, etc.). ticrltercn, st., to lose. tocrm(^tcn, to annihilate. ticrfaumcit, to miss (train, etc.). bcrfc^affcn, to procure, get. ticrfci^rcibcn, st., to prescribe. t)crfrf|hJmbcn, st., \,, to vanish, disappear. berfc^cn, to reply, answer; in gute Saune — , to put in good humor. tJCrfmfcn, st., f., to sink, founder. Ucrf^JrccJ^cn, 5/., to promise. J8crfu(i^, w., ~t^, -e, trial, attempt. t)erfll(i|cn, to try, attempt. (lertrauen^ to trust, confide. SSerhianbt(cr), adj. subst., rela- tion, relative. uernjclfcn, to wither. t)cmunbcn, to wound. fStiitXf m., -g, -n, cousin. t)XClf mti)X, meift, much, a great deal of; pL, many. tJtclcrlct, indecL, many kinds of. totcttei'cfit, perhaps. t)XtX, four. fBkxitl, «., -9, — , quarter. SSicrtclftu'nbc, /, -n, quarter of an hour. fSoqti, w., -«, ^, bird. SSilg(e)(ein, «., -«, -— , little bird, birdie. kioa, full. t)Ot(c'tlbctt, insep., to finish, end, complete; DoUenbet, complete, etc. \)0n {dat.)y of, from, by, with, about, concerning. bor {dat., ace), before, of, in front of, ago. kJOrbci, past, gone. tiorbcifalfrcn, st., \,, to go (drive, sail, etc.) past^ tjorbcigc^cn, st., f., to go (walk) past. SJorbcrgrunb, w., -c3, -^e, fore- ground. JBorbcrfl^, w., -c^, -e, front-seat. JBorbcrtur, /., -en, front-door. tJOrbrttngcn, refl., to press for- ward. JBorgcBirgC, «., -«, — , promon- tory. SS(Jrgcfc^t(cr), adj. subsl., su- perior (officer). \)OXf}tXf before(hand), first. t)OX\Q, adj., last, former. tJOrlcfcn, St., to read aloud. Uorf(^ieftcn, 5/., to advance (money). JBorf^Jcifc, /., -n, e«/re^. SSorftabt,/., ^e, suburb. !S8orteil, w., -e^, -c, advantage. Uortragcn, st., to recite. t)OXnf)CXf by, over, past. tiorii&crhjanbcm, to pass by. tJOrjtc^cn, 67., to prefer. SSaarenliau^, «., -c«, -^cr, depart- mental store. ttiacftfcit, 5^, (., to grow. 3o6 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. SBa^t,/., watch, guard. SSaffc,/., -n, weapon. SBagcn, m., -3, — , carriage, waggon. ttiagCtt, St., to weigh (tr,), tO'^i^ltn, to choose, select. toa^r, true; ©ic flnb tnilbe, nid^t — ? you are tired, are you not ? ttia^renb {gen.), during; conj., while. SSa^r^cit, /., -en, truth. SSalb, m.j -t^, ^tx, forest, wood(s). aSanb,/., ^t, wall. SSanb(e)rcr, m., -^, — , wanderer, pilgrim. toanbern, f., to wander, go, pass. hjann? when? tnarm, ^tx, warm. njarncn, to warn. hjartcn, to wait. SBartcfaal, w., -e^, -fclle, waiting- room. toarum? why? wherefore? toa^? what? XQd^, rel. pron., that which, what, which. tt)a^ fiir (ein, -t, — )? what kind of (a)? what? hJafrfjCtt, sL, to wash. Staffer, n., -g, — or ^, water. toec^feltt, to change, exchange. ttttdcn, to waken. mebcr ♦ . . nodff neither . . . nor; nor. SScg, m., -e^, -e, way, road, street. tt)ZQ, away, out of the way. ftlCgCtt (gen.), on account of. mcgnc^mcn, st., to take away. aSedmut, /., sadness, melan- choly. \Dtfl tun (dat.)y to hurt, pain. SBci^, »., -c«, -cr, woman; wife. ttici(^i, soft. ttJcU, because, as, .since. SBcin, w., -eg, -e, wine. meincti, to weep. aScin^ttnbler, w., -g, — , wine- merchant. aScmtraulie, /., -tt, grapes. SBcife, /., -n, way, manner; auf biefe — , in this way. hJCtft, white. ttJett, far. Iticttcrfa^rcn, st., f., to go (sail, etc.) on. aSeijcn, m., -^, wheat. hJClc^cr? which? what? tueld^er, rel. pron., who, which, that; indef., some. aSclfen, n., -g, withering. SBcttc,/., -n, wave, ripple. SBelt,/., -en, world. SBcltaUi^ftcttung, /., -en, inter- national exhibition. ItJCm? (to, for) whom? njcn? whom? njenig, little; few. ttienigftcn^, at least. hJCnn, when, whenever; if; — and), — gteid^, even if, although. nicr? who? tt)tt, rel. pron.y he who, the one who, etc. tuerben, st., f., to become, grow, turn out to be, be; aux. of Jut., shall, will; aux. of passive, to be; eg tr>trb ^benb, evening is coming on; — aug, to become of; — gn, to turn into. toerfcn, st., to throw. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 307 SBcrf, «., -e^, -t, work, writings, etc. SaScrt, w., -c«, -C, worth, value. tocrt, worth, of the value of. SScfcn, «., -«, — , being. toci^^alb? why? hJCffcn? whose? toeftUdl^ western, westerly. toei^ttjcgcn? for what? SBctter, w., -8, weather. tOXtf how, how? what?; as, like; fo — auc^, as also, as well as. totcber, again; now. hitcbcrfommcn, st., f., to come back, return. aSiebcrfe^cn, «., -«, meeting again; auf — , good-bye (till we meet again), au revoir. aSietl, n.y -^, Vienna; — tx, (of) Vienna. SBicfc,/., -n, meadow. njictiicl(f)te (ber)? what day of the month? SSUtfelm, w., -^, William. aSU^elmmc, /., -M, Wilhelmine. tottt!o'mmen, welcome. tDtmmcln, to swarm, teem. SBinb, m., -c^, -t, wind, breeze. njinfcn {dat.), to beckon. SBtntcr, w., -6, — , winter. SBtntcr^alaw [pr. -palft'J, «., — , — f winter-palace. SBinterquat, /., -en, torment of winter, hard winter weather. aSt^fcl, m., -«, — , tree-top. \o\Xf we. aStrt, w., -c^, -e, host, landlord. S93trtj^i|au!^, »., -c^, -^-er, tavern, inn. ttfiffen, irr., to know (of facts) ; know how to, can. too, where; where? toobei, whereby, in connection with which, etc. SBoc^c,/., -n, week. SSogc, /., -n, billow. aSogcn^Jtafl, w., -c«, dashing waves. too^in? whither? where to? tooffl, indecL, well (0/ health)', adv., well, then, indeed, I sup- pose, I wonder, I am sure, of course, doubtless, etc. too^ncn, to dwell, live, reside. aSo^nung, /., -en, dwelling, resi- dence, house. aSo^njimmer, n., -«, — , sitting- room. 2Bo«e,/., -n, cloud. toollen, irr., mod. aux., to will, desire to, wish to, want to, be about to, mean to, etc.; claim to, assert. toomit, with which (what). toorauf, at which, on which, etc.; whereupon. aSort, n., -e6, word; pi., SSfirter, words {as vocables); pi., SBortC, words {in discourse). toariibcr, at what, whereat. toi)t)on, of which (what), etc.; whereof. tooju? for what? etc. tounbern, refl., to wonder, be as- tonished; impers., eS tt)unbert ntici^, I wonder. tounbcrf(^iJn, very beautiful. toitnfc^en, to wish, desire, want. toiirbtg, worthy. aSurft,/., -^e, sausage. aSurjcI, /., -n, root. SBitrjlctn, n., -«, — , rootlet. 3o8 GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 8 ^O^l,/., -m, number, figure. ^dt^Uttf to count; number, have. Sd^n, w., -e«, ^t, tooth. 3ar, w., -en, -en, Czar. 5. J8. (sum ^eifpiel), for example, e.g. 5C^n, ten. 3eic^enftunbC, /., -n, drawing- lesson. ^eigen, to show; refl., to show one's self, appear. 3ctgcr, w., -6, — , hand (of time- piece); ber grofee (fleine) — , the long (short) hand, minute- (hour-)hand. Stilt, /., -n, line. Stitff; -en, time; t)or dter — , in old(en) times. S^^^tog; eine — , a (short) while. 3cttung, /., -en, newspaper. 3cttnjort, n., -e6, -^er, verb. JcrfaKcn, ruined, in ruins. gerflicftcn, 5^, f., to melt (away). SCrrctften, 5^, to tear (to pieces). gerruttcn, to shatter. gcrftiJrcn, to destroy, demolish. 3c«g, w., -e«, -e, stuff, cloth, material. Jte^en^ 5^, to draw; intr.j f., to go, travel. gicrcn, to adorn. differ, /., -n, figure, number. 3ifferb(attr «., -c«, -^er, dial, face. ^tmmct, «., -«, — , room. SitnmtxiUXf /., -en, door of a room. gtttcrn, to tremble. SoUf w., -e^, -e, inch. ^tt (dat.)y to, at, for, in, on, by; — ^aufe, at home; — 3^]^nen, to your house, etc.; adv., too; \-infin., to. jubringcn, irr., to pass, spend (time). 5U(^ttgcn, to chastise. 3urfcr, w., -«, sugar. ^ubecfen^ to cover (up). 5wcrft, first. 5Ufattig, accidental; adv., by chance. jufrtcben, contented, satisfied. 3ug, m., -e6, -^e, train (railway). SUgcbCtt, 5/., to admit. ^Ugegen, present. 5Ug(ei(^, at the same time. 5U^auf, in heaps. 5U^iircn, to listen. Svif)&ttXf m., -g, — , hearer; pL, audience. jufpmmcn, 5/., f., — auf (ace), to approach. julttutcn, to ring (to). ^Ulcljt, last (of all), at last. ^umadicn, to close, shut. 5Unrirf|ft^ next, in the next place, then. §unbcn, to kindle. 3«n9Cf/., -n, tongue. Swriid, adv., back. gurucffa^rcn, 5^, f., to drive (etc.) back. juriirffattcn, 5^., f., to fall back, recoil. juriirfgcbcn, s^., to give back. 5UrU(ffc^ren,f., to return, go back. surufen, sL, to call (shout) to. jufagcn (dat.), to suit, agree with- 5ufammcn, together. 3«fammentrcffcn, n., -«, meeting, encounter. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 309 Svi^^antt, m.y -0, spectator. jufc^icn, st.y to look on; take care. 3utrawcn, «., -«, trust, con- fidence. JUUJeikn, sometimes. ^tttatf it is true, indeed. 3tOCrf, w., -c^, -c, object, pur- pose. jmci, two. jWcicrki, two kinds of. Smiq, w., -c«, -c, branch, bough. Jtlictgcn, to send out shoots. StOtxtampf, m., -eg, ^t, duel. ^njcimat, twice. Jhiciten^, in the second place, secondly. ^ttiingen^ st.y to force, compel. ^njtfd^Ctt (dat., ace), between, among. Stuiilf, twelve. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY a, an, etn; twice a day, jhjcimd bed Xage^; twice a week, jtDci* mat bie SSod^c. able (to be), fiinncn, irr. about, prep. J toon {dat.); unt (occ); round — , utu . . . ()crum. about, flff?;., ungefa^r, etma; to be — to, cben iDoIlen, irr.-, Im SBc* Qtiffc fein, «Vr., f. above, prep., liber (re^., nad^ (f/a/.); conj., nac^bem; — all, boc^» afternoon, 9^ac^mittag; m., -t^, -€♦ afterwards, nad^^er, fpciter, again, toieber. ago, t)or {prep., dat.); a week — , ^eute t)or ac^t Xagcn. agreeable, angene^m. air, ^u\t,f., -^e. all, att; ganj; at — , trgcnb; not at — , gar nid^t, nid^t int gering[ten; after — , bod^. allow, eriauben {dat.); laffen, st.; be — ed, bUrfen, irr. almost, beinal^e, faft. alms, Hlmofen, «., -«, — . along; — with, mit. aloud, kut; read — , t)or(efen, st. already, fd^on, also, auc^. although, obgleld^ :c. always, Immer, ftet^. a.m., 35m. (33ormittag«) ; mor*' gen«. ambassador, ®cfanbt(er), adj. subst. America, 2lmerifa, «., -6. 311 312 ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. American, noun, Sltnerifaner, m., -^, -» American, adj., amerifanifd^. among, unter, gmifdjen (dat. or ace); be — (belong to), ge^oren gu. and, unb. angry, bofe (at, ouf, ace). animal, Xier, n., -e^, -e, annihilate, t)ernic^ten. another, adj., ein anber(er, -e, -e^); one — , einatiber; — cup of tea, nod^ eine Xaffe 2^ee, answer, Hnttrort, /., -en. answer, antmorten. anxious, beforgt (urn, ace). any, toelc^er, etma^; — body, — one, jemanb; — one at all, irgenb einer; — thing, etma^; —thing but, ni(^t6 tDeniger al^. apiece, je. appear (seem), fc^einen, st.; (make one's — ance), erfd^eitien, sL, f.; gum 5Sorf(^ein tommen, st., f. apple, 5lpfel, m., -g, -^. application (to make), \i6) melben. apply to, fic^ melben bei. appoint, ernennen, irr. {aU or gu). approach, fid^ na^em {dat.). April, 5lpri'I, m. arithmetic, 9?ec^nen, n., -g. arm, 5lrm, m., -e^, -e. army, §eer, «., -e^, -e; Hrmee',/., -n. arrangement, (Slnrid^timg,/., -en. arrest, toer^aften, arretieren. arrive,, anfommen, st., f.; anian* sen, f. as, trie; (when), aU; — . . . — , (eben)fo . . . h)ie; (since), ba; — if, aU tDenn, aU ob; — soon — , fobdb, fottjie. ascend, befteigen, st., tr. ascertain, feftftellen. ashamed (to be), fic^ fd^amen. ask (inquire), fragen; {question)^ befragen; (request), bitten, st. asleep (to be), fd^Iafen, st.; fall — , einf(f)Iafen, st., f. asparagus, ©pargel, m., -6, — , assist, beifte{)en, st. (dat.). astray (to go), fic^ ijerriren. at (A pp. B, 4, 5), in, an, auf (dat. or ace); gu, bei (dat., of place); um (ace), gu (dat., of time); um, gu (of price) ; — all, irgenb ; not — all, gar nic^t; — last (finally), enbltd^; (last of all), gulefet; — least, tDenigften^; (all) — once (suddenly), auf ei'nmal; (immediately), fofort; — one time ... — another, balb ♦ ♦ ♦ attack, angreifen, st. attempt, ^erfud^, m., -eg, -e. attend (he present at), bein)0]^nen (dat.). attentive, aufmerffam. August, 5lugu'ft, m. Augusta, 5lugu[te, /., -n0, aunt, ^ante,/., -n. Austria, 6[terreld^, n., -g, avoid, t)ermeiben, st. away, n)eg, fort, axe, l\ii,f,^t. B back, 9?ii(fen, m., -§, — , back, adv., guriidf. back-door, Winter tilt, /., -en. backgroimd, ^intergrunb, m., -t^, ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. 313 bad, fc^Umm; f(f)lcd^t; biife; Ubcl; arg, -er. baggage, ®epacf, «., -c6. bake, baden, 5^ ball, ^a(I, w., -e«, -e. Baltic, Oftfee,/., bank {banking-house), 39anf, /., -en; (0/ a stream), Ufer, n., -^, — . banker, 53anfier, w., -^, -^. bankrupt, banfero'tt; become — , banferott madden. banquet, ©aftma^l, «., -e^, -^er. basket, ^orb, m., -t^, -^e. battle, ©cf)(a(^t, /., -en. Bavaria, ^at)ern, w., -^. be, fein, irr., f.; (m^/t passive), tDerben; — in a position (to do anything), imftanbe fein; I am to, ic^ fott; how are you? mie ge^t e^ 3f)nen? mie befinben (Sie fic^? bean, ^o^ne, /., -n. bear, tragen, st. beautiful, fc^bn. because, n)eil. beckon, minfen. become, merben, st., f. bed, 33ett, «., -e^, -en; garden , ^eet, n., -e«, -e. bedroom, (S(f)Iafjimmer, n., -6, — . beef (roast of), ^ftinberbraten, m., -«, — . before, prep., t)or (dat. or ace). before, adv., t)or()er. before, conj., e^e, beoor. beg (ask), bitten, st.; {ask alms), betteln. beggar, SBettler, m., -«, — . begin, beginnen, st.; anfangen, st. behind, prep., f)inter {dat. or ace). Belgium, 58elgien, n., -6. believe, glauben {dat. of pers.). bell, mode,/., -n. bench, ^anf//., -^e. bend, biegen, st. beside, neben {dat. or ace); bet {dat.). besides, aufeerbent. betake one's self, \i6) begcben, st, between, jmifc^en {dat. or ace). beyond, ienfeit {gen.). bid {order), ^eifeen, st. {ace)', {offer), bieten, st. big, gro6, -er, grofet. bill {account), ^Rec^nung, /., -en. bird, SBogel, m., -^, ^; little — , birdie, 33i5g(e)Iein, n., -^, — ; SBogelc^en, n., -^, — . birthday, ©eburt^tag, m., -e€, -e; for (as) a — present, gum ®e* burt^tag. bite, beifeen, st. bitter, bitter. black, fc^tDarg, -^er; Black Forest, @d)n)argmalb, m., -eg. blind, blinb. blow, blafen, st. blow {knock), (Stofe, m., -t^, -"-c. boat, ^oot, «., -e6, -e and iBfite; ^a{)n, m., -eg, -^e. book, ^ud^, n., -eg, -^er. boot, ©tiefel, m., -g, — ♦ bom, part., geboren. both, beibe, beibeg. boimdary, ©renge,/., -n. bow to, griifeen {ace). box {of paper or cardboard), ©(^ad^tel,/., -n; — on the ear, Of)rfeige,/., -n. boy, 3unge, m., -n, -n(g); ^nabe, m., -n, -n. 314 ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABUIARY branch {of a tree, etc.), '^\Qt\^, m., -t^, -e; {pj a stream), ^rm, w., -e«, -c. bread, S3rot, «., -e^. break, brec^en, st.\ — to pieces, ent^meibred^en; — open, er- bred^en. breakfast, grii{)ftM, w., -eg, -c, bridge, 33rucfe, /., -n» brig, ^riQQ, /., -6. bright, ^elL bring, bringen, irr.; — out, ]^er= au^bringen; — up, l^eraufbringen, irr. brother, SBrubcr, w., -g, ■«•. build, bauen. building {edifice), ©ebfiube, «., -^, -* bum, iw^r., brennen, irr.; tr., Dcr- brennen. bury, begrabcn, 5^ business, ®ef(^aft, «., -c«, -c. busy {occupied), befd^aftigt. but, aber; allein; {after neg.), fon=s bern; not only ... — also, nid^t nur , . ♦ fonbcrn au(^; anything — , nid^tg menigcr alg; nothing — , nid^tg alg, buy, faufcn; — from, ab!aufen {dat. of pers.). by {with passive), Don {dat.); near — , bel (dat.), uebeit (Ja^. or ace.) ; — (a certain time), bi«, big s^t ; — night, bei '^ad:}t, be« 9^ad)t«, nac^tg, {See also A pp. B, 4.) cab, S)rof(^!c, /., -n. cabbage, ^o^, m., -e6. cabman, ^utfd^er, m., -g, — » Calabria, ^alabricn, «., -«, call {summon), rufen, 5/.; {name)y nennen, «rr.; — to, gurufen (dfl^), ^ be — ed (named), f)ei6en, st. calling {profession), iBeruf, m., -t^, -e. camp, Sager, n., -^, — . can, fonnen, irr. candy, candies, 33onbong, pL cane, ©tocf, m., -t^, ■«-c. canoe, ^(xfya, m., -i%, -"-c, cap, 9)^u1je, /., -n. capable, fa()ig. capital {city), ^auptftabt, /., -^c. capsize, umfc^lagen, st., f.; fen* tern, f, captain {of a ship), ^apitcin, m., -eg, -e; (wi/. officer), §aupt* tnann, m., -eg, -leute. care, ntiigen, irr.-, take — , ftd^ in ad^t nel^men; take — of, a(^t* geben auf {ace). careful, forgfattig. carriage, SEBagen, m., -6, — ♦ case, gad, m., -eg, ^t. castle, ©d^lo^, w., -eg, *er. cat, ta^e,/., -n. catch, fangen, st.-, — cold, fid^ er* fiilten. cauliflower, ^lumenfol^l, m., -eg. cause, Derurfad^en; — to be made, madden laffen, st. cease, auf^oren. celebrate, feiern. celebrated {famous), berut)mt. certain, getuife. chair, (Stu()l, m., -eg, ^t, chancellor, dangler, m., -g, — , change {alter), tr., anbcrn, t)er* anbern; intr., fid^ (inbern. Charles, -^arl, m., -g. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. 315 charming, rctgcnb. cheap, bittig; ma^lfcU. cheat, ^interge'f)en, st., insep. check {for baggage), ©epacffd^ein, m., -e^, -c. chemistry, (S^cmie, /. cherry, ^irfc^e, /., -n. chicken, ^u^n, «., -eg, -^cr, child, ^inb, n., -c«, -cr. choose, mci^len, erma^len (d^ or city, ©tabt,/., •«-c» Clara, ^lara,/., -«. class, Piaffe,/., -n. clean, rein. clear, flar. clerk, lOabenbicncr, m., -9, — ; ^anblung^ge^ilfc, w., -n, -n. clever, flug, ^er. climate, ^lima, n., -^, ^Umata. cloak, '^flantdf w., -g, ■^. clock, Ul^r, /., -en; what o' — is it? tt)ie t)lel Ul^r i[t e^?; it is nine o* — , e^ ift neun Ul^r. close, gumac^en; fc^Iiefeen, st. cloud, SBolfe,/., -n. coachman, ^utf(^er, w., -«, — . coat, 9?0(f, m., -c^, •«■€. coffee, ^affee, m., -8. coin, 9J2un^e,/., -n. cold, fait, -"^er; be (feel) — , fricren, St.; catch — , fid^ erfditen; have a — , erfaltet fein, irr., f. Colimibus, ^olumbu8, m. comb, fammen. come, fommen, 5/., f.; — in, l^cr* ein fommen, f.; — in! I^eretn!; — to mind, einfaHcn, 5/., f. (dat.). comfortable, bequem. command, befe^Ien^ st. (dot.). commercial - traveler, ©efd^fiftg* reifenb(er), adj. subst. compartment, Slbteil, w., -eS, -e. compel, gtDingen, st.; be — led, miiffen, irr. complain, flagen; fid^ beflagen. comrade, ^amerab, w., -en, -en. conduct, iBetragen, n., -«. consequently, foIgUd^, alfo, balder, considerable, bebeutenb. consist of, beftel^en au«, 5^ (dat.). consul, ^o'nful, w., -g, -n. contain, ent()alten^ st. continually, beftanbig, fortrtjal^* renb. continue (intr.), fortfal^ren, st. convince, iibergeu'gcn, insep. copy, abfd^reiben, st. com (Indian), 9)lai^, m., -e3» comer, (gdfe, /., -n. corn-meal, SO^ai^mel^I, «., -c^. cost, foften (ace. of pers. and price) . coimt (title), ©raf, m., -en, -en. count, iai)Un. coimtry, $?anb, n., -c^, -^cr; in the — , auf bem ![?anbe; in this — , l^iergulanbe; to the — , aufg :2anb. coimtry-house, Sanbl^au^, n., -cd, -^er. corn-age, 93?ut, m., -eg. course; of — , natiirlid^. courtier, ^iifling, m., -eg, -e. cousin, ^Setter, m., -g, -n; (Sou=» fine, /., -n. cover, bebecfen. cow, ^ul^, /., "^e. create, fd^affen, st. creep, fried^en, st., f. crime, 53erbrec^en, n., -g, — ♦ crop (harvest), (Smte,/., -n. 3i6 ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. crown-prince, ^ronprlng, w., -en, -en, crush, ©cbrttngc, «., -«♦ cup, Xaffe,/., -n. current (to be), get ten, st. cut, fd^neiben, st.; — down (fell), um()aueTi, st. Czar, Sax, m.y -en, -en. damage, ®d^abe(n), w., -n(«), (Sd^aben owrf ■^; do — , ©d^aben anrid^ten. dance, tanjen. danger, ©efal^r,/., -en. date, !Datum, w., -g, ^ata and T)aUn. daughter, Xo^Ux,/., ^. day, 2^ag, w., -e^, -e; in these — s, tieutgutage; one — , eine^ Jage^; what — of the month is it? hex n)iet)lelte tft t)eute?; this — week (fortnight), l^eute liber ad^t (t)ierje()n) 2:age. dead, tot. deal ; a great — of, \ti)x t)iel. dear (beloved), teuer; (expensive), teuer, foftfpielig. death, Xob, m., -e«. deceive, betrilgen, st. December, ^cjember, m. decide, tr., entfd^etben, st.; intr., \x6) entfd^eiben; befd^Uefeen, st. Denmark, ^Danemarf, «., -«. department, ^Ibtellung, /., -en; ladies' dress — , 5lbteilung filr ^amenfleiber. departmental store, SBaaren^aug, »., -e^, -^er. desert (mil. term), befertieren. destroy, jerftfiren.. dial, 3iffci^^ttitt, n., -t^, -"-er. die, fterben, st., f. difference, Unterfd^ieb, m., -t^, -e. dig, graben, st.; — up, — over, u'mgraben, sep., st. diligent, fleifeig. dine, effen, st.; yw 9)^ittag effen. dinner, (gffen, n., -6; 9}^ittag^* effen, n., -^; at — , bei ^tlfc^; to — , gn Xifd^; before — , Dor 3:ifc^. disagreeable, unangenef)nt. disappear, t)erfd^tx)inben, st., f. disappointed, enttaufc^t. discover, entbedfen. discovery, ©ntbedfung, /., -en« discuss, befpred^en, st. dismiss, entlaffen, st. distinct, beutlid^. disturb, ftoren. dive, u'ntertaud)en, sep., st. do, tnn, irr.; — an exercise (les- son), eine 5lufgabe niac^en; — damage, ©d^aben anrid^ten. doctor (physician), ^Irjt, m., -eg, •^e; (academic degree), ^oftor, m., -g, ^ofto'ren. dog, ^unb, m., -eg, -c, doll, *^uppe, /., -n. done (ready), fertig, door, Jiir, /., -en. doubt, S^\ot\.\t\, m., -g, — ; no — , mo^l, of)ne 3^^U^J» doubt, gmeifein (an, dat.); bejioei^ feln (ace). doughy, teigig. down, adv., ()inab, l^inunter. dozen, ^u^enb, n., -eg, -e. draw (pull), gie^en, st. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. 317 dreadful, fd^redfUd^, furd^tbar, fUrd^* terlic^, entfeljUc^. dream, Xraum, w., -c^, -^c. dress, ^leib, w., -c«, -cr; lady's dress, !Damcnf(eib; summer — , (Sommerfleib. dress, tr., anjiel^en, st.; anfleiben; intr., fid^ anjiet)en, st.; fic§ an* fleiben. drink {of people), trinfen, st.; {of beasts), faufcn, st. drive, tr., faf)ren, st.; treiben, st.; — away, forttreiben, st.; — {in a vehicle), intr., fal^rctl, St., \,, ]^» driver, ^utfd^er, m., -^, — , drown {be drowned), ertrinfen, St., \. duke, §ergog, m., -c6, -c and ■«-c. during, n)a()renb {gen.). duty, ^flit^t,/., -en. E each, icbcr; — other, cinanbcr, ear, £)\)X, n., -t^, -en; box on the — , D^rfeigc, /., -n, early, fril^. earn, tjerbienen. earth, Srbc, /., -n; on — , auf (Srbcn. earthquake, (Srbbcbcn, n., -«, — . east, Often, m., -^ and — ; on (in, to) the — , im Often, iJftUc^. Easter, Dftem, pi.; at — , urn (gu) Dftem. eastern, aftUd^» easy, teirf)t. eat {of people), effen, st.; {of beasts), freffen, 5/. Edward, (Sbuarb, m., -«. egg, (Si, «., -e^, -er. either; — ... or, entmeber . . . ober. elect, marten, ermci^Ien (dg or gu). elementary school, Slementar- fc^uIe,/., -n. EUzabeth, (glifabet^, /., -«. else, fonft. embark, elnfteigen, st., f. (in, ace). emperor, ^aifer, m., -«, — . empire, ^aiferreic^, n., -e8, -e; the German — , ba^ !Deutfcf)e $Reid^. end, (Snbe, n., -^, -n; set on — , aufred^t ftetten. enemy, geinb, m., -e^, -c. England, (Snglanb, «., -«. English, engtifd^; — language, (gngtifc^, n.; in — , auf (gnglifd^; into — , in^ Snglifd^e; the — , bie ©ngldnber. Englishman, Snglanber, m., -^, enjoy one's self, S3ergntlgcn l^aben, irr.; {in conversation), \x6) un* ter{)a'lten, st., insep. enough, genug. enter, eintreten, st., f. and 1^. (in, ace); f)ineinge^en, st., f. (in, ace). entire, gang. entirely, gang, gttnglid^, bollftfinbig. entrust, ant)ertraucn. errand-boy, !i?aufburfd^e, m., -n, -n. escape, entfommen, st., f.; entlau^* fen, St., f, especially, befonber^. etc. (et cetera), tc, ufm. (unb fo iDciter). Europe, ©uropa, «., -«. 31^ ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. European, adj., europciifd^. even, adv., au6), fogar; — if, tocnn and), evening, 3lbenb, m., -t^, -e; in the — , be^ 2lbenb^, abenb^; this — , f)eute abenb. ever {at any time), je, jemd^; {al- ways), immer, ftet^. every, jeber; — body, — one, jeber, iebermann; — thing, alle^; — where, iibera'IL evil, bbfe. examination, (Sjamen, w., -6; "jpriifung, /., -en. excellent, Dor^refflid^. Exchange {building), SBorfc, /., -n. excursion, 5lu^flug, m., -e^, -^e; make (go on) an — , einen 5lu^f(ug madden. excuse, (gntfd^ulbigung,/., -en. excuse, entfc^ulbigen. . exercise {task), ^lufgabe,/., -n; do an — , eine 5lufgabe madden. expect, ermarten. expensive, foftfpielig. experience, (Srfa^rung, /., -en. ' express train, (Sd^nell^ug, m., -e^, extol, preifen, st. extremely, (iufeerft, ^'6^\t F face, ©efic^t, n., -eg, -er; {of a time- piece), 3iff^t^blatt, n., -e^, ■^er. fall, fallen, st., f.; — ill, franf mer* ben, St., f. fall, gaE, m., -eg, -^c. famine, ^ungergnot, /., ■«'e. famous, beruf)mt. far, meit; as — as, big nad^; big gu. farmer {peasant), ^aucr, m., -g and -n, -n. fast {quick), fd^neH. father, 33ater, m., -g, ■«•. fear, fiird^ten. February, gebruar, m. feel, fii^ten, empfinben, st. fell, fallen. fellow; that — , ha, demonstr. fellow - traveler, a)^itreif enb (er) , adj. suhst. few (a), einige; toenige; ein paar {indecl.). field, gelb, n., -eg, -er. fifty, fiinfjig. fill, full en; erfullen. finally, enbli(^. find, flnben, st. fine {beautiful), fd^on; {delicate) y fetn. finish, beenbigen; {complete), t)olt* e'nben, insep.; to have — ed, fertig fein (mit, dat.). fire, geuer, n., -g, — . Afirst, adj., erft; adv., erft, guerft; ^^ in the — place, erfteng. fish, gifd^, m., -eg, -e. fish, fifc^en; go — ing, fifd^en gel^en, St., f. five, fiinf. flatter, fd^meld^eln {dat.). flee, flie^en, st., f., 1^. fling, fc^meifeen, st. floor, 58oben, m., -g, -«•; gugboben. flow, fliegen, 5/., f., I). flower, 53tume, /., -n; be in — , blil^en. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 319 flower-bed, 33(umenbect, «., -e8, -e. flower-garden, SBlutncngartcn, w., -«, -. fly, fticgen, si., I, ^, fog, SRthd, m., -^, — . follow, fotgcn, I {dat.); bcfolgen {ace. of thing). fond of (to be), gem \)abtn, cffen, trinfen 2C. fool, 9^arr, w., -en, -en; Xox, w., -en, -en. foot, gu6, W-, -e^, -^e; on — , ju football game, gufebaHfpiel, w., -e«, -e. for, prep. (A pp. B, 4, 5) ; fiir (aee.) ; gu (0/ purpose); feit (0/ Z^'wg />a50; auf (of fuL time, ace.); iDegen (^en., on account of). for, c^w;., benn. forbid, tjerbieten, st. {dat. of per s.). force, Wl(x6)iJ.', {mil.), Xruppenan* l^^, J- force, jmingen, st. foreground, ^Sorbergrunb, m., -t^, forgery, galf(^ung, /., -em forget, Dergeffen, 5/. fork, ®abcl,/., -n» form, bilben. former {of two), jener. formerly, frii^cr. fortnight, Dierge^n Xage, pi. forward, toormart^; press — , \i6) oorbrangen. France, granfreic^, «., -«. Frederick, gricbrid^, m., -«. free, frei. freeze, fricren, st. French, franj5[i[(^; — language, grang5flfc§; in — , auf gran* giiflfd^; the — , bie granjofen. Frenchman, granjofe, m., -n, -n» Friday, greltag, m., -g, -t. friend, greunb, m., -e^, -e; greun=» bin,/., -non. friendly, freunbUd^. frighten, tr., erfd^recfen; be — ed, erfd^redfen, st., f. fro (to and), {)in unb ^er; auf unb ah. from, t)On, aug {dat.); — fear, au« gurd^t. front; in — of, bor {dat. or ace). front-door, 33orbertur, /., -en. fruit {in general), gruc^t, /., -^e; {orchard or garden), Obft, «., -e«. fruitful, frud^tbar. fruit-tree, Dbftbaum, m., -t^, -"-e. fulfil, erfullen, full, t)oIl {ace. or gen.); {occupied)^ befefet. game, Spiel, n., -c«, -e. garden, ©arten, m., -«, ■«•. gardener, ©cirtner, m., -«, — ♦ gate, %ox, n., -e«, -e. general {title), ©enera'I, m., -t^, -e; — in-chief, Oberbefe^I^* l^aber, m., -g, — ; {distinguished soldier), gelb^err, m., -n, -en. generally, gemo^nlid^. gentleman, §err, m., -n, -en; gentlemen! meine ^etren! George, ®eorg, m., -g. German, bcutfd^; — language, ^Deutfd^, «.; in — , auf !5)eutfd^; 320 ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. into — , in^ ^eutfi^c; the — , bcr ^eutf(^e. Germany, ^eutfd^Ianb, n., -«. get {receive), befommen, st.-, cr* I)dten, st.\ {fetch), {)o(en; {he- come), h)erbcn, st., f,; — in(to a vehicle), einftetgcn, st., f.; — out (of a vehicle), au^fteigen; — up, aufftc^en, st., f.; — well, genefen, st., f.; — rid of, lo^ h)erben, st., \, {ace.). girl, Wah6)txi, n., -«, — . give, geben, st.; — as a present, fc^enfen; — {a title, etc.), t)er* Ieii)en, st.; — heed, ac^tgeben, St. (to, auf, ace). glad, fro^; I am — , c§ freut nttc^; id) freuc mic^ {gen. of thing). gladly, 9ern(e), Ueber, am lieb- ften. glass, ©lag, ??., -eg, -^er. glove, ^anbfd^u^, m., -eg, -e. go {walk), ge^en, 5^., f.; {of or in a vehicle), faf)ren,5/., \,; {travel), reifen; {depart on a journey), abreifen, f.; {move), gie^en, st., f.; — astray, \i6) toerirren; be — ing to, tDoden, irr.; im 58e* griff e fein, irr., f.; — for a walk, fpajieren ge{)en, st., f,; einen (Bpagiergang mac^en; — for a sleigh-drive, eine (Bc^Uttenfa^rt mac^en; — down, l)inabfa!)ren, St., f»; — in, I)ineinget)en; — on, n)eiterge^en; — out, augge^en, l^inaugge^en; — shopping, ©in* faufe mac^en, einfaufen. god, ®ott, m., -eg, -^er, God, @ott, m., -eg. gold, noun, ®oIb, n., -eg. gold(en), adj., gotben. gold-piece, ©olbftildf, »., -eg, -c. good, gut, beffer, beft; {well-be- haved), artig. grain, ©etreibe, n., -g. grandparents, ©rofeeltem, />/. grant, geben, st. grass, @rag, «., -eg, -^er. grateful, banfbar. great, grofe, -^er, grCgt; a — deal (of), fe^r t)iel; a — many, fel^r Diele. green, griln. greet, begrilfeen. grind, fd^Ieifen, st. grindstone, ©d^Ietfftetn, m., -eg, -e. ground {soil, earth), S8oben, w., -g; (grbe,/. grow, n)ad)fen, st., f.; — dark, bunfel luerben, st., f. guard (wi/.), SKac^e,/., -n. guess, ^«/r. raten, st. ; tr. erraten. guest, ®aft, m.y -eg, -^e* habit, ®ett)o]^nl^eit,/., -en. hair, §aar, «., -eg, -e. half, ac^f , ^alb; the — , bie ^'^\\it\ — an hour' eine ()albe Stunbe; past ten, !)alb elf; one and a — , anbertf)alb. hall, (Baal, m., -eg, ©ale. halt, l)alten, ^^ hand, §anb, /., -^e; (0/ a time- piece), 3etger, w., -g, — ; long — , minute — , 9J?inutengeiger; short — , hour , (Stunben* jetger; second — , (©efunben* getger. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. 321 hand (pass), rcic^en; — over, Uberla'ffen, st., insep. handkerchief, Za\(i)tntnd), «., -c3, ■^er. handsome, fc^fin. hang, intr., \)an^m, st. happen, gefcf)e^en, st., f. happy, glilcfUc^. hard, \)axt, ^er; {difficult), fd^rtjcr, harrow, @ggc, /., -n. hasten, eilen, 1^., f.; fid^ bceilen. hat, §ut, m., -t^, -^e. have, fjahtn, irr.; fein, irr., f.; — to, miiffcn, irr.; — a cold, cr* fciltet fein; — a mind to, Suft l^aben ^u; to — (a thing) made, madden laffen. Havel, ^a'od, f. hay, §cu, n., -e«. he, er; berfelbe; that man, etc., bcr; — who, mx; ber(ienige) h)el(^cr. head, ^opf, m., -c6, -^c; ^aupt, «., headache, ^opfmcl^, «., -«; ^opf* fc^mer^, m., -t^, -en {usually pi.). headmaster, $Rcftor, w., -«, D^Jcf^ toren; ^ircftor, w., -8, ^Dlrcf* to'ren. health, ©efunb^cit, /. hear, tj'dnn, heart (by), auSmcnbtfi, heaven, ^immcl, m., -«, — » heavy, fd^mcr. heed (to give), ad^tgcbcn, st. (to, auf, ace). help, §Ufe,/. help, ^elfen, 5^ (dat.). hence {therefore), alfo, baljcr. Henry, ^cinreid^, w., -d. her, /?er5. />row., fie {ace); \f)t {dat.). her, />05s. adj., it)V. here (in ^/t^'^ place), l^icr; (//ace), f)er, l)ierf)cr. heroic, l^elbentniitig. heroism, ^elbenmut, m., -c8. hers, i^rer; ber (bie, bag) i^r(ig)e. hide, Derbergen, st.; tjerftccfen, high, i)o6), t)6t)er, f)oc^ft. high-school, ©ijmnafium, w., -8, ©^mnafien, hill, ^crg, w., -c6, -e; ^llgel, w., -«, -. him, [i)n {ace); il^m (a^) (ein(ig)e. hoarse, ^eifer. hoist {a sail, etc.), aufl^tffcn. hole, 2oii), n., -eg, -^er. holidays {vacation), gerlen, pi. home, adv., nad^ ^aufe; at — , gu §aufe. honest, el^rlld^. honor, S^re, /., -n. honor, e^ren, t)eref)ren. hope, ^offnung,/., -en. hope, ^offen; it is to be — d, t)of* fentUd^. horror, (Sntfetjen, «., -«. horse, $ferb, n., -e8, -e. hospital, §ofpitat, ®pita'(, w., -e«, ^er. hot, l^eife. hotel, ©aft^of, m., -c«, -"-e. hour, (Stunbe, /., -n; — hand, (Stunbenjetger, m., -8, — . 322 ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. house, ^au^, «., -c6, -^er; at the — of, bei {dat. of pers.); to the — of, gu {dat.). how, h)ie; — long? felt mann?; — are you? — do you do? iDic ge^t eg 31^nen? toit beftnben (Bit \i(i)? however, aber, jebo(^. human, menfc^lic^; — life, Wtn^ fcftenleben, n., -8, — ; — being, SD^enfd^, m., -en, -en. himdred, noun, §unbert, n., -e6, -e. hungry, l^ungrig; be — , hunger l^aben, ^ungrig fein, irr., f. hurt, tt»e^ tun, irr. (dat.). husband, Tlann, m., -eg, -"-er; @atte, m., -n, -n. I, pers. pron.y i(^, ice, @ig, w., -eg. if, iDenn; (whether), ob; even — , tt)enn aud^. ill, txant, -^er. illness, ^ranf^eit, /., -en. imperial city, D^eic^gftabt, /, -"-e. important, tDic^tig. impossible, unmogUc^. in, prep., in {dat. or ace); adv., l^erein, ^inein; — the country, auf bent ?anbe; come — ! I^erein! inch, 3 oil, m., -eg, -e. include, einfd^Uefeen, st. indeed, in ber 3:at; yes — , jamol^I. Indian com, SD^aig, m., -eg. Indian meal, Mai^mt^l, n., -eg. indignant, entriiftet (at, ilber, ace). indispensable, unentbel^rUd^. industrious, fleifeig. inhabitant, @inrt)of)ner, nt., -g, — ^ ink, 2:inte,/., -n. innocence, Unfi^ulb,/. innocent (of), unfc^ulbig {gen.). insect, ^tife'ft, n., -eg, -en. insist (on), beftel^en, st. (auf, ace). instead of, anftatt {gen.). intelligent, flug, -«^er. intend, mollen, irr.-, beabfid^tigcn; gebenfen, irr. intention, 5lbfid^t,/., -en. interesting, intereffa'nt. into, in {ace). invent, erfinben, st. invite, (ein)Iaben, st. iron, (Sifen, n., -g. island, 3nfel,/., -n. it, eg, er, \\)Xi, fie; ber (tixt, bag); ber {W, bag)felbe. Italian, adj., italienifd^. Italy, 3talien, n., -g. its, poss. adj., fein; \\)X. its, poss. pron., feiner; il^rer; ber (bie, bag) fein(ig)e, t]^r(ig)c. itself, refl., fic^ (felbft) ; (emphatic), felbft, felber. James, ^afoh, m., -g. January, ^cit^uar, m. John, 3o]^a'nn, m., -g. journey, 9?eife,/., -n. July, 3u'Ii, m. jump, fpringen, st., f., % Jime, 3u'ni, m. just, dd^T'., nur (with impve.); • now, eben, focben. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. 323 keep, bcl^altcn, sL; — on, fortfal^* rcn, sL; — silent, f^iDcigen, st. kettle, ^cffcl, w., -«, — . km, mtn. kind, 3lrt,/., -en; of that — , bcr* gkic^cn; what — of? n)a« filr (ein)?; many — s of, t)lclcrlei; two — s of, gtDcterlei. kind, adj., giltig. kindliness, §cr^cn6giltc, /. king, ^iinig, m., -c^, -c. kingdom, ^iinigreld^, «., -cd, -c. kitchen, ^iid^c,/., -n. knife, iD^cffer, w., -«, — . knit, ftricfcn. knock (rap), flopfcn; there is a — (at the door), C0 flopft; (hU) Jlo^cit, 5/., tr., 1^»; m/r., !♦ know {be acquainted with), fcnticn, irr.; {have knowledge of) , tDiffetl, irr.; — (a language, etc.), t'^w ntn, irr. known {familiar), bcfannt. laborer, Hrbeitcr, m., -^, — ; ^ncc^t, m., -t%, -c. lady, !DaTnc,/., -n; grau,/., -en. lake, (gee, m., -t^, -(e)n. land, ?anb, «., -c«, *cr. landscape, !2anbfd^aft, /., -en. language, ^\t,f., -n. 324 ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. lion, 2'6\t)t, m., -n, -n. listen, gul^iiren (dat.). little {of size), thin; {of quantity) y live, leben; {reside, dwell), tDOl^nen. loaf, iBrot, «., -e^, -c. lock, fc^Uefeen, st. long, lang(e), *(e)r; a — time, langc; no — er, nic^t me^r; as — as, fo (ange; — hand {of time- piece), ber gro^e ^d^tx, TOnu* ten^elger, m., -g, — ; how — ? feit njann? look, blicfen, fd^auen; — at, an* \t1)tx[, St.; — for {search), fuci^en. loosen, lodfern, lose, tjerlleren, st.-, {he deprived of), fomtnen urn, st., f, {ace); — one's life, umfomtnen, utn^ !2eben fommen, loud, laut, love, Iteben; Iteb {)aben, irr. luck, mU, n.y -e«. M M. (monsieur, Fr.), §crr, m., -n. ma'am, madam, gnftbige grau. machine, 5D^afc^ine, /., -n. maid {servant), 9JJagb, /., -^c; Wo!ii&itn, n., -0, — ; ^im\U tniibc^eTi, main street, ^auptftrafec, /., -n. Majesty, SD^aieftftt, /., -en; His — , @elne {abbr. (Se.) SD^ajeftftt. make, madden; {appoint), erncn- ntn (al^ or ju) ; — application, fl(f) melben; — up one's mind, fic^ cntf(f)Ue6cn; st. man {adult male), SD^ann, m., -cS, ■^cr; {human being),Tltn\(i), m., -en, -en; the — who, ber(ienlge) +rel. mankind, ^tn\6), m., -en, -en. manner {way), SSeife; in this — , auf biefe SBeife. man-servant {hired-man), ^ned^t, m., -t^, -e. many, biele, mand^e; — a, man* d^(er); — things, t)iele^; a great — , \t))x Dtele. map, i^anbfarte, /., -n. March, Waxi, m. mark {= about 24 cents), Maxt, /., -» market, Tlaxtt, m., -e^, -"^e, marry, tr., f)eiraten; ftd^ Derl^elraten mit. Mary, Tlaxk, f., -n§. master, §err, m., -n, -en; — of, mftd^tig {gen.). material, 3^W9/ w> ~^^J ®toff, m., -e^, -e. matter, (Ba(i)t, /., -n; what is the — with you? n)a^ fel)lt 3§nen? may, biirfen, irr.; miigcn, irr. May, $D^ai, m. me, mtd^ (ace); ntlr {dat.). mean {intend), tootten, irr.; ge* benfen, frr.; {signify), melnen, bebeuten. means, SD^ittel, n., -^, — . meanwhile, inbeffen, unterbeffen. meat, gleifc^, m., -e§. medicine (science of), TlthxiVn, /.; {physic), Sltgenei, /., -en, mtUiin, /. meet {of people going in opposite directions), begegnen, f. {dat.)\ ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 325 — {chance upon), trcffen, an- trcffen, st. (ace). melt, tr., fd^melgen, st.; intr., fd)meljen, st., f. memory {Jaculty of), ©ebttd^tni^, «., -ed; {memorial), 5lnbenfen, n., -«; in — of, jum ^nbenfen an {ace). merchant, ^aufmann, m., -t^, -leute. metre, WltXtx, m. or «., -^, — ♦ middle, mHit, /• midnight, 9)2ittcmac^t, /., -^c. milk, mxX^J. milk, melfen, w^. or st. mind (to have a), l^uft l^abcn, ^>r.; come to — , einfatlen, st., f. {dat.)\ make up one's — , fld^ cntfc^Uefeen, 5/.; state of — , (©timmung, /., -en. mindful, eingebenf (of, gen.)\ be — , gebenfen, irr. (of, gen.). mine, meiner, ber (bie, ba^) met- n(ig)e; a friend of — , ein grcunb Don mir, einer toon met* nen greunben. minister {polit.), SD^ini'ftcr, m., -g, — ; prime — , erfter 3Jiini^ ftcr. minute, ayjinute,/, -n. minute-hand, aJJlnutenjcigcr, m., -«, -. misfortime, Unglilrf, «., -c«. Miss, gr(tulcin, n., -^, — {ahhr. gri.). missing (be), fcl^Icn. mistake, getter, m., -«, — . mistaken (to be), fic^ irrcn. mixed train, ^crfoncnjug, m., -eg, molasses, Sirop, w., -«. Monday, 9}2ontag, w., -8, -c, money, ®elb, n., -e«, -cr; piece of — , (J^elbftiicf, n., -e6, -e; sum of — , ®elbfumme, /., -n. month, Mo'n^xt, m., -t^, -e; what day of the — is it? ber tt)iet)ielte ift ^eute? monmnent, Denfmal, n., -e8, -c and -^er. more, me^r; — of the same kind, bergleic^en mel^r; once — , noc^ ei'nmal; — and — , nod^ tmmer; one — , noc^ ein (-cr, -e, -e§); not any — , nirf)t me^r. moreover, and^; augerbem* morning, SJiorgen, m., -g; in the — , beg SJiorgeng, morgeng; this — , t)eute morgen. most, adj., meift. most, adv., aufeerft, tj'6^\i, fel^r; — ly, meift (eng); at — , l^iic^* fteng. mother, SJiutter, /., ^; — dear, 9}ilitterd^en, n., -g, moimt, tr., befteigen, st. mourn, tr., betrauern; intr., trau* em. move, tr., bemegen; intr., fid^ be* megen; jiefien, st., f.; — (from one house to another), um* gie^en, st., f. Mr., ^err, m., -n, -en. Mrs., grau, /., -en. much, t)iel; very — {adv.), fel)r. multitude, 9)?enge, /., -n. musemn, 9}?ufeum, »., -g, SJJu* feen. must, milffen, irr. my, mein. mjrself, refl., m\6), mir (felbft); (I) — , (\6)) [elbft, felber. 326 ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. name, 5^ame, w., -n^, -n; what is this man's — ? iDie f)ei6t btc= fer TlcLun?; his — is Schafer, er i)ei6t ©deafer; by — , tiamen^. name, tiennen, irr.; — d, namen^. natural, natUrlid^. near, adj.y na]^(e), •^(e)r, n'a^\t (dat.). near, prep., bel {dai.), nebcn {dat. or ace). nearly, beinal^e, faft. necessary, notig. need, braud^en. neglect, bernad^I&ffigcn, berffiumen. neighbor, 5^a^bar, m., -3, -n; 9^ad)barin, /.; -nen. neither, iDeber; — ... nor, h)cber « ♦ ♦ nod); — am (have, do) I, i6) aud^ m(j^t» never, ntc, mental^; — yet, nod^ nic(malg). nevertheless, bod^, bennod^, nid^t^* bcftotDenlger, new, neu. news, 9^ad^rid^t,/., -en. newspaper, 3^ttung, /., -en. next, ncid^ft, folgenb;* in the — place, sunftd^[t, bann. Niagara Falls, ble 9'^iagara=gatte. nice, nett. Nicholas, 9^lfoIaug, m., — . night, 9^ad^t,/., -^e; by — , bet (in ber) maii)i, beg 9^a(^t6, nad^tg. No. (number), 9^0. (9^umero). no, adj., feln; — body, — one, nie- manb, feiner; — longer, nid)t tnel^r; — doubt, tt)o% no, adv., nein; — , thank you, id^ banfc. noble, ebel. noise, learnt, m., -e^. none, feiner. north, 5^orben, m., -§ and — ; the — Sea, bie 3^orbfee, bag ^eutfc^c ai^eer. northern, nfirblld^. not, nid^t; — a, — any, fetn(er); — yet, nod^ nidE)t; — at all, gar nid^t; is it, etc., — ? nid^t tioa^x? nothing, nic^tg; — at all, gar nld^tg, novel, D^oma'n, m., -eg, -c. November, 9^ot)ember, m. now, je^t. nowadays, l^eutptage. number (figure), 3^ff^^/ /•> -"^t 3a^l, /., -en; — {in a street), Summer, 9^umero {abbr. 5^o.); (quantity), ^niai)l,f.; SO^enge,/. nutmeg, 9JJug!atnu6, /., -^e. O ! oh ! ! ad^ !; — yes, iatool^!, bod^. oats, §afer, m., -g. obey, ge^orc^en (dat.). oblige (put under obligation), Der* binben, 5^; (force), gtDlngen, 5^; to be — d (compelled), Uliiffcn, irr. ; to be — d (under an obliga- tion), t)erbnnben fetn. observe (mark closely), beo'bad^* ten; (remark), bemerfen. occasion, ®elegen()eit, /., -en. occasion (cause), t)eru'rfac^en. occurrence, 33egeben]^ett, /., -en. o'clock, Uf)r; ten — , je^n Uf)r. October, Oftober, m. of, prep. (A pp. B, 4), t)on (dai.); — course, natUrlid^. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. 327 ofif, ab. offer, bictcn, anbictcn, st. office, 2lmt, «., -e«, -^er. officer (mil.), Offijie'r, w., -e§, -c. official, 53eamt(cr), adj. subst. often, oft, -^cr. old, alt, ^cr. omnibus, Omnibus, w., — , -ffc, on, prep. {A pp. 5, 4), auf ((ia^ or ace); an {dat. or ace). on, a(fi;., h)citer. once, ei'nmal; (all) at — (sud- denly), auf ei'nmal; {immediate- ly), fofort; — more, nod^ einmal. one, num., eln; {in counting), einS; /)ron. ciner; — another, eln* anbcr; the — who, bcr(icnige) n3elcf)er; some — , jemanb; not — , feincr. one, indef. pron., man. only, nur; {of time), crft; not — ... but also, nid^t nur . . . fon* bem auc^. open, aufmad^cn; dffncn. opinion, Wdnun^,/., -en. opportunity, ©elcQen^elt, /., -en. opposed (to be), Qegcnilbcrfte^en, St. {dat.). opposite, gcgenilbcr {dat.). or, ober; — else, fonft; three — four, brci bis Dier. order {a command), iSefcl^l, m., ~cS, -c; in — to, um . . . gu. order {to command), befef)tcn, St. {dat.)', {to direct), bebcutcn {dat.); — {from a tradesman), beftettcn. other, anbcr; — wise, fonft; each — , einanber. ought, foUtc. our, unfcr. ours, unfrer; bcr (bie, boS) \xn^* r(i9)e. ourselves, refl., unS (felbft); (we) — , (mlr) felbft, felber. out, auS, ^erauS, ^inauS. outcome, SluSgang, m., -eS, -^e, out of, auS {dat.). over, iiber {dat. or ace); — there, briiben. overcoat, Ubergiel^er, m., -«, — . own, adj., eigen. ox, £)c^S(e), w., -(e)n, -(e)n. oyster, 3lufter,/., -n. pack, pacfen, einpacfcn. painter, SJ^aler, m., -8, — . pair, ^aar, n., -eS, -c. padace, ©c^lofe, «., -cS, ••^er; ^ala'ft, m., -eS, ^e. pardon, 3Serjei^ung, /.; @ntf(^ul* bigung,/.; to ask (beg) — , um ^Sergei^ung ic. bitten, st.-, fid^ ent* fc^ulbigen. pardon, Dergeiben, st. {dat. of pers.), entfd^ulbigen {ace). parents, ©Item, pi. park, ^arf, m., -eS, -S and -e. part {portion), %i\\, m. and «., -eS,-e; {dram, part, role), D^iolte, /, -n. part, intr., \\6) trennen. party {social), ©efeltfcfiaft,/., -en. pass {time), tierbringen, jubringen, irr.', — {an examination), be* ftel^en, st.; — away, t)ergef)en, St.. I past {of time), bergangen; for the — week, feit ad^t 2:agen. 328 ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. past, prep, {of time), nac^ (dat.); a quarter — ten, (ein) ^iertel auf elf; half ten, l^alb df. past, adv., \)oxhd, t)oruber. pasture, 3Beibe, /., -n, pat, flopfen. patient, *ipatie'nt, m., -en, -en; ^atientin, /., -neti; ^ranf(er), adj. sub St. pattern, 9}iu[ter, «., -^, — . pay, ^a^Ien {dat. of per s.), bega^len (ace. of pers., or dat. of pers. and ace. of thing); — visits, 53efud^e mac^en. pea, (Srbfe, /., -n. pear, ^irne, /., -n, pear- tree, 53imbaum, m., -e^, -^e. peasant, ^auer, m., -n or -g, -n» pedestrian, gu^Q anger, m., -g, — , pen, geber, /., -n, pencil (lead-), iBIeiftlft, m., -e^, -e, people, Seute, pi.; (nation), ^o\t, «., -e^, ^er, people, indef. pron., man, perhaps, t)tellel'd^t, perish, umfommen, st., f, Persian, adj., perfif(^. 'pfennig/ "ipfennig, m., -^, -e. physician, Slr^t, m., -e^, ^e, physics, '^i)^\Vt,f. piano, ^lat)te'r, n., -e^, -e; play the — , ^Iat)ier fpielen. pick, pfliidfen; — out, au^fud^en; — up, auf^eben, st. picture, 33i{b, n., -e^, -er» picture-gallery, ^tlbergalerie, /., -n; ©emalbegalerie, piece, (BiM, n., -t^, -e; — of money, ©elbftilcf; to — s, ent- pilot, Sotfe, w., -n, -n. pin, (Stedfnabel, /., -n. pinch, fneifen, st. pity (it is a), e^ ift fc^abe. pity, bebauern. place, "ipia^, m., -t^, ^t; (situa- tion), @ telle,/., -n; (Stellung,/., -en; take — , ftattfinben, st.; in the first (second, etc.) — , er[ten^ (jtr>eiten^ 2C.). plant, pflanjen. play, fpielen, pleasant, angene^nt. please, vb., gef alien, st. (dat.). please! (if you), (tc^) bitte; gc« fatligft (adv.). pleasure, ^Sergniigen, n. pleasure-trip, 53ergnngung^reife,/., -n. plough, pflilgen. p.m., ^m, (^^ac^mlttagg) ; abenb«. pocket, Jaf(f)e, /., -n. pocket, in bte Za\^t ftecfen. poem, ®ebi(^t, n., -e^, -c, poet, ^ic^ter, m., -g, — , point ; on the — of, im ^cgriffe. polite, ^ijflid^, pond, Xd^, m., -e^, -e, poor, arm, -^er, position, ©tellung, /., -en; be in a — (to), imftanbe fein, irr., f» (Su). possession, (Sigentum, «., -e^, -^er; — s, ^(iht,f. possibility, 3)?ogltc^feit, /., -en, possible, moglic^. postman, ^oftbote, m., -n, -n; ^rleftrager, w., -^, — . potato, ^artoffet, /., -n, pound, *ipfunb, «., -e6, -e. pour, giefeen, st. power, 2)?a(^t,/., -^e. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 329 praise, lobcn, pray {say a prayer), bcten; {re- quest), bitten. prefer, t)oqie^cn, st.-, Ucbcr (am Ucb[ten) l^aben :c. prepare, bereiten, Dorbcrcitcn, — (a field, etc.), beftcUett. present {gift), ©efc^enf, w., -e«, -e. present, adj., gegentt)Srtig {of time and place); gugegen {adv., of place only); jeljig {adj., of time only). present {make a present of), fd^en* fen. president, ^rafibc'nt, m., -en, -en. press forward, fi(^ Dorbrangen. pretend {assert), iDOllen. pretty, f)iibfc^. prevail, l^errfd^en. prevent, t)erbinbem. prime minister, erfter SDlini'fter, m., -^, — . prince {ruler or title), R^l^ft/ w-, -en, -en; {title of courtesy), ^tini, m., -en, -en. prisoner, @efangen(er), adj. subst. prize, *»Prei«, m., -e^, -e. profession {calling), !53eruf, m., -e«, -e. professor, "iprofeffor, m., -«, "ipro* feffo'ren. promise, vh., berfprcd^en, st. {dat. of pers.). promontory, SBorgebirge, «., -«, prove, bemeifcn, st. proverb, ®pricf)n3ort, «., -c6, -^er. Prussia, *ipreu6en, «., -«. pudding, "Rubbing, w., -«, -«; In- dian meal — , 9)2ai«pubbing. pulse, ^Vi\^, m., -eg, -e. pulse-beat, ^ul^fc^Iag, w., -eg, -^e. pimctual, piinftUcb. pimish, ftrafen, beftrafen. pupil, (Sd)lller, w., -g, — ; ©d^tt* lerln, /., -nen. purchase, (ginfauf, m., -eg, -^e. purchase, faufen. purse, ^ortemonnaie, n., -g, -g. put (56/ upright), ftellen, feljen; (/ay), leg en; {insert), ftecfen; — on (a coat, etc.), an^ie^en, st.; — on (a hat, etc.), auffefeen. quarter, 3SterteI, n., -g, — ; a — past 10, (eln) 33iertel (auf) 11; a — to 10, brei 35iertel (auf) 10; — of a teaspoon, S3ierteltee* loffel, m., -g, — ; 3 — s of an hour, 3 SSiertelftunben* queen, ^onigln,/., -nen» quick, f^nell. quite, ganj. rage, mllten. rain, 9^egen, m., -g. rain, regnen. raise, er^eben, 5/. raisin, 9vofine, /., -n. rather {preference), Ucber; {on the contrary), t)ie(mel)r; {toler- ably), jiemlicb; a — long jour- ney, eine I dug ere 9?eife. read, lefen, st.; — aloud, borlefcn. reading {the act of), Sefen, «., -g, ready, fertig, berelt. 330 ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. real, eigentUrf), tnirHid^, reason, ®runb, w., -eg, -^e; Ur* fac^e, /., -n, receive {of things)^ befommen, 5^.; erf)alten, st.) {of pers. or things)^ empfangen, st. recite, tjortragen, st. recognize {know), erfennen, irr. recommend, empfef)len, st. {dat. of pers.). recommendation, (Smpfel^Iung, /., -en; letter of — , (SmpfeI)Iun9g* brief, w., -eg, -e, recover {health) , genefen, st., f, red, rot, -^er, reflect {think over), \x6) be[innen, St. refreshment, (grfrtfc^ung,/., -en* refuse, abf(^lagen, st. {dat. of pers.). regard, betrad^ten; anfel^en, st. regards {in correspondence), (Smpfe^Iung, /., -en; ©rug, m., -e8, -"-e. regret, bebauem. reign, 9^egterung, /., -en. rejoice, freuen; be — d, \x6) freuen, erfreut fein, irr., \ry — at, fid^ freuen iiber {ace). relate, erjaf)len. relative {relation), 5Sern)anbt(er), adj. sub St. relieve {release from), entbinben, St. {gen.). ' remain, bleiben, st., f. require, brauc^en; bebilrfen, irr. resemble, {i()nUd^ feln, irr., f. {dat.). resolve, befc^Uefeen, fic^ entfd^Ue^en, St. respect, Sld^tung,/. rest {repose), ^n^t,f. rest, ruf)en; augrut)en; take a — , fid^ augru^en. restaurant, SfJeftauration, /., -en. retain, bef)atten, st. retire, fic^ guriicfgiel^en, st.; — to rest, fic^ 5ur dln\)t begeben, st, return, gurilcffe^ren, \, revolver, D^etjolder, m., -g, — . reward, So{)n, m., -eg» Rhine, $H^ein, m., -eg. rich, relet). ride, rei ten, st., \,,^, rid of, log {ace). right, adj., red^t, rid^tig; be — {of a time-piece), rid^tig gel^en, st., f.; be (in the) — , redf)t f)aben. right (on, to the), red)tg, jur red^* ten. ring, 9?ing, m., -eg, -e. ring {of a large bell), lauten. rise {mount), fteigen, auffteigen, St., f.; {get up), aufftef)en, st., f.; {of the sun, etc.), aufgel^en, St.. I river, glu^, nt., -eg, -^e. roast, SBraten, m., -g, — ; — of beef, ^inberbraten. rock, gelg(en), m., -(en)g, -(en)» Rome, dlom, n., -g. roof, ^ad), n., -eg, -^er. room, 3iitimer, n., -g, — ; (Stube, /., -n. rose, 9lofe,/., -n. roimd {mil.), 9^unbe, /., -n. round, adj., runb. row {series), $Reif)e, /., -n. rowboat, ^af)n, m., -eg, -"^e. royal, ffinlglid^. rum, $Ruine,/., -n; — s, ^rilmnter, pi.; in — s, jerfatten. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 331 run, laufen, st.j\,,l}, Russia, 9fiu6lanb, «., -«. Russian {native of Russia) ^ diu\\t, m., -n, -n. S sad, trourig. sail, @egel, «., -8, — . sail, fegeln, f. ; fasten, st., f., ^. sailor, 9}iatrofc, w., -n, -n. Saint (see St.). salt, ®al3, w., -c8, -e. salute, griigeti. same, jelb(ig). Sarah, @ara, /., -«♦ satisfied, ^ufrieben, Saturday, ©onnabcnb, w., -9, -t ; ©am^tag, m., -8, -c. sausage, SSurft,/., -"^c. save {rescue), retten. Saxony, ©ac^fen, «., -«. say, fagen; he is said to be rich, cr foil reid^ fcin* scatter, au^ftrcuen. school, (Sc^ulc, /., -n; high — , ©tjmnafium, »., -8, -en; ele- mentary — , (Slcmentarfd)ule. school-bell, (©cJ^ulglocfe, /., -n. school-fellow, — mate, (B(i)uU famerab, w,, -en, -en. school-house (Sd)ul^au«, n., -e«, ■"•cr. scold, fd^elten, 5^ Scotland, ©c^ottlanb, h., -3. scream, fc^reien, st. sea, (See,/., -(e)n; Tim, w., -e«, -e. search (through), burd^fu'd^en, insep. seat, mung, /., -en. statesman, (StaatSmann, m., -e«, ^er station (railway), 53a]^n{)of, m., -e§, •'^e; (stopping-place), (Sta= tion,/., -en. stay, bleiben, st., f.; — up, auf= bleiben, 5^., f.; — in (after school), nad^filjen, st. steal, ftef)len, st. steamer, !Dampfer, m., -^, — . steer, fteuem. steersman, (gteuermann, m., -eg, ^er. step, treten, st., \., f). still (to stand), fte^en bleiben, St., I still, adv. (of time, number, and degree), nod^; (adversative), hoi), be'nnoc^. stocking, em, 260, 11, 297, 3. ndc^ft, prep., App. B, 2. 9iamc model, 54; App. A, 7. Names, see under Person names, Place names. Nationality, adjs. and nouns of, 183. nebft, App. B, 2. nic^tg, 220. nic^l^ rtjetttgcr al^, 260, 5. ntcmanb, 219. noc^, 245. Nominative, form, 20 ; use, 18, 265. Nouns : case forms, 20 ; strong decl., 33-35. 43; weak dec)., 53; mixed decl., 54; essential parts, 34; com- pound, 35; summary of decl., 59; gender, 1,35, 36, 44, 55; reference lists, App. A, 1-9 ; nouns of national- ity, 183; 5s prefixes, 251. Numerals, cardinal, 41 ; remarks on, 114 ; ordinal, 184-186, 189. nur, 246. ob, conj., in dep. questions, 91, 260, 7, ob, prep., App. B, 3. obcr^alb, App. B, i. obgieic^, obfc^on, etc., 260, 8. Objects, word order, 69. obcr, 40, n. I, 256. 'of,' how rendered, 99, notes; Ger. equivs., App. B, 4 ; after vbs., App. B,5. ot;ne, 81, 290. £)^r model, 54; App. A, 9. •on,' Ger. equivs., App. B, 4. Ordinals, 184, 185, 189. Participles: present, 294, 297; past, formation, 37, 2, 119, 120 ; as impve., 286, 2; idioms, 295; fut. passive, 296; place, 40, 49, 70; as nouns, 68; use, 293-298; adjectival, 294, 298. Passive: with tDcrben, simple tenses, 75 ; with fettt, 75. n. i, 227 ; replaced by matt constr., 75, n. 2, 218, 5; passive voice, 224-228; paradigm, 226, App. C, 6. Perfect tense, formation, 37 ; use, 38, 281. Personal pronouns: of address, 7, 141 ; word order of, 69 ; paradigms, 139; agreement, 140; substitutes for, 85, 102, 134, 199; after h)te as rel., 215. Person names, 187-189. Place names: with art., 108; gender, 108; with l^alb, 209, 2, n.; with gans, 231, 3. Pluperfect tense, formation, 39; use, 282. Possessive adjectives, 25. INDEX 343 Possessive case, Eng., how rendered, i8. 2. Possessive dative, 163. Possessive pronouns, 31, 32, 161, 162. Predicate accusative, 267. Predicate adjective, i, 9. Predicate nominative, 265, 2. Prefixes, to verbs, 50, 51, 250-254. Prepositions : contractions, 19, 84, 95, n.; with ace, 76; with dat., 92-101. App. B, 2; with dat. or ace, 123- 133; with infin., 290; with gen., App. B, i; with varying case, App. B, 3 ; Ger. equivs. of Eng. do., App. B, 4 ; after vbs., etc., App. B, 5. Present indicative, formation, 14; vowel changes of strong vbs. in, 145; use, 279; as impve., 286, 2. Present participle, see Participles. Present subjunctive, formation, 88, 89 ; use, in indir. discourse, 91. Price, ace. of, 29. Principal parts, of verb, 136, 145, 3. Principal sentences, word order of, 40, Pronouns, word order, 69; see also under Personal, Possessive, etc. Pronunciation, see Introduction. Proper names, see Person names, Place names. Punctuation, see Introduction. Purpose, infin. of, 65, 288, 2 ; subjunc- tive of, 285, 4. Quantity, expressions of, 112. Quantity, of vowels and consonants, see Introduction. Quasi-prefixes, 251. Questions, indirect, 91. Reciprocal pronouns, 151. Reference lists : nouns, App. A ; preps., App. B; strong and irreg. vbs., App. D. Reflexive pronouns and verbs, 149- 152. Relative pronouns, 72-74, 211-216. Repetition of article, possessives, etc., 12. Rivers, names of, 182, n. famt, App. B, 2. fd)tc§en model, 148, 4. fc^Iagcn model, 148, 13. fd)oit, 247. Script, German, see Introduction. fc^en model, 148, 7. fcin, 'to be,' paradigm, App. C, i ; verbs conjugated with, 61, 62, App. C, 5 ; omission 70, 7 ; passive with, 75, n. I, 227. feit, prep., 98. fcit (bcm), 260, 3, 4. fclbcr, felbft, 152. Separable prefixes, 50, 250-254. <©te, ' you,' use, 7, 141. ' since,' 260. fingen model, 148, 12. @ol)n model, 33. fo, in comparison, 13, 168; in condl. sents., 106, 4, 5 ; in correl. clauses, 261, 4. 'so . . . as,' in comparison, 13, 168. fo ctn, 215. folc^, 197, 215. foUcn, use, 159, 5, 160, 178. ' some,' how rendered, 220, 223, 234, 2, n. fonbern, 256, 6. f^inncn model, 148, 10. f^rec^en model, 148, 8. ftatt, see anftatt. ftc^Ien model, 148, 9. Stress, see Introduction; in comp. vbs., 250, 254. Strong conjugation, 144-148; App. C.4. Strong declension : of nouns, 33, 43, 59; of adjs., 56, 57. Subjunctive mood : formation, 88, 89 ; impf., 147; use, 90, 285; in indir. discourse, 91 ; in condl. sentences. 106; as impve., ii6, 285, 2. 344 INDEX Subordinative conjunctions, 259, 260. Substantival adjective, 58. Substantival infinitive, 289. Superlative, 169, 170. Syllabication, see Introduction. Tense, in indir. discourse, 91. Tenses: of indie, 279-284; see also under Auxiliaries and under the various tenses. 'than,' after comparatives, 13, 168. 'that,' dem. pron., how rendered, 191. ' there,' before vbs., 143. Time, ace. of, 29 ; word order, 30, 69 ; time of day, 86; gen. of time, 87; Eng. pres. part, of, 297. Titles, 188, 262, 3. 'to,' prep., how rendered, lOO, n. ; Ger. equivs., App. B, 4; after vbs., etc., App. B, 5. tro^, App. B, 3. iiber, prep., 130; prefix, 254. um, prep., 82; with infin., 65, 290; prefix, 254. Umlaut: in comparison, 13, 165; in declension, 33, 43, 59, App. A, 3-5; in impf. subj., 88, 89, 147. umfo, in compar., 168, 3. um ♦ ♦ ♦ hjtflen, App. B, i. Uttt %yx, after adjs., 288, 4, n. unb, 40, n. I ; 256, 2, 3. unfcrn, App. B, i. unter, prep., 131 ; prefix, 254. unterbcffen, 260, i, 6. unter^alb, App., B, i. untuett, App. B, i. ' used to,' how rendered, 280, i. 35ater model, 43; App. A, 5. Verb, place of, 40, 70. Verbs: with fettt, 61,62; stems, 135; prin. parts, 136 ; special weak forms, 137 ; irreg. weak, 138 ; strong-, 144- 148; classesof strong, 148; impers., 142, 272, 4 ; reflexive, 149, 150 ; com- pound, 50-52, 250-254 ; agreement, 262; paradigms, App. C; preps, after, App. B, 5 ; alphabetical list of strong and irreg., App. D; of ac- cusing, etc., 272, 3; of choosing, etc., 267, 3 ; of naming, etc., 267, i ; of regarding, etc., 267, 2 ; of teach- ing, 266, 2. tcrmtttelft, App. B, i. tjermoge, App. B, i. better model, 54; App. A, 8. t)tel, use, 237. Vocative, 265, i. t>olI, adj., 272, I, n. t)ofl, prefix, 251, 3, n. J30n, with passive, 75, 2 ; use, 99 ; re- places gen., 99, notes, 181, 2, n. t)or, prep., 132, 260, n. tt>alt)renb, App. B, i. njann, 71. ttja^, interrog. pron., 207, 208; rel. pron., 211, 212. tt>a^ fiir ein, 202, 203. Weak conjugation, special forms, 137 ; irreg., 138; paradigm, App. C, 3. Weak declension : of nouns, 53 ; of adjs., 56, 57. hjcgen, App. B, i. Weight, expression of, 112. -ttjcifc, advs. in, 273, 2. iDCId^cr : interrog., decl., 31 ; use, 206; rel. pron., decl.,73; use, 74; indef. pron., 223. hjcnig, use, 237. njenn, use, 71 ; omission, io6, 5. h)ennc;teic^, etc., 260, 8. hjcr, interrog., 207, 208 ; rel., 211, 212. kocrben : aux. of tense, 46-48 ; aux. of condl., 103-105 ; aux. of passive, 75, 225, 226; paradigm, App. C, i. ttjcg, 208, 3. ' when,' how rendered, 71. 'whether,' in dep. questions, 91. ' while,' 260, 6. 'whole', 231. INDEX 345 tDtber, prep., 83. tt)k, use, 13, 2, 168, 2 ; as rel., 215 ; in appos., 263, 2. tvicbcr, as prefix, 254, 4, n. tDiffen, conjugation, 153-156. * with,' Ger. equivs., App. B, 4. h)of)I, 248. IcoUcn, use, 64, 159, 6, 160, 179. h)o(r), before preps., 74, 4, 208, 2. Word order, rules of: place of pred. adj., 9; of infin., 22, 49; of expres- sions of time, 30; in prin. sentences (vb. and past part;), 40 ; disregarded in verse, 40, n. 2 ; of objects, prons., and advs., 69; in dep. sentences, 70; in rel. clauses, 74, 216; in mo- dals, 172. 'would,' of customary action, 280, i,n. Year number, 185. ' you,' how rendered, 7, 141. ' your,' how rendered, 7. • gu, prep., use, 100; with infin., 22, 65. gucrft, 249. jufolgc, App. B, 3. ^umd)% App. B, 2. 5un)ibcr, App. B. 3, snjifc^en, 133. ADVERTISEMENTS l)eatb's /^^o^ern language Series^ GERMAN GRAMMARS AND READERS. Nix*s Erstes deutsches Schulbuch. For primary classes. Illus. 202 pp. 35 cts. Joynes-Meissner German Grammar. Half leather. ^1.15. Joynes's Shorter German Grammar. Part I of the above. 80 cts. Alternative Exercises. Two sets. Can be used, for the sake of change, in- stead of those in the Joyties-Meissner itself. 54 pages. 15 ct3. Joynes and Wesselhoeft's German Grammar. $1.15. Fraser and Van der Smissen's German Grammar. 51.10. Harris's German Lessons. Elementary Grammar and Exercises for a short course, or as introductory to advanced grammar. Cloth. 60 cts. Sheldon's Short German Grammar. For those who want to begin reading as seon as possible, and have had training in some other languages. Cloth. 6oc Ball's German Grammar. 90 cts. Ball's German Drill Book. Companion to any grammar. 80 cts. Spanhoof d's Lehrbuch der deutschen Sprache. Grammar, conversation, and exercises, with vocabularies. $1.00. Foster's Geschichten und Marchen. For young children. 25 cts. Guerber's Marchen und Erzahlungen, I. With vocabulary and questions in German on the text. Cloth. 162 pages. 60 cts. Guerber's Marchen und Erzahlungen, n. With Vocabulary. Follows the above or serves as independent reader. Cloth. 202 pages. 65 cts, Jojmes's Shorter German Reader. 60 cts. Deutsch's Colloquial German Reader. 90 cts. Spanhoofd's Deutsches Lesebuch. 75 cts. Boisen's German Prose Reader. 90 cts. Huss's German Reader. 70 cts. Gore's German Science Reader. 75 cts. Harris's German Composition. 50 cts. Wesselhoeft's Exercises. Conversation and composition. 50 cts; Wesselhoeft's German Composition. 40 cts. Hatfield's Materials for German Composition. Based on Immenste and on Hbher als die Kir eke. Paper. 33 pages. Each, 12 cts. Homing's Materials for German Composition. Based on Der Schwie- gersohn. 32 pages. 12 cts. Part II only. 16 pages. 5 cts. Stiiven's Praktische Anfangsgriinde. Cloth. 203 pages. 70 cts. Kriiger and Smith's Conversation Book. 40 pages. 25 cts. Meissner's German Conversation. 65 cts. Deutsches Liederbuch. With music. 164 pages. 75 cts. Heath's German Dictionary. Retail price, ^1.50. Tbeatb'B /Ro&ern XanguaQe Series/ ELEMENTARY GERMAN TEXTS. Grimm's Marchen and Schiller's Der Taucher (van der Smissen). With vocabulary. Mdrchen in Roman Type. 45 cts. Andersen's Marchen (Super). With vocabulary. 50 cts. Andersen's Bilderbuch ohne Bilder (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Campe's Robinson der Jiingere (Ibershoff). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Leander's Traumereien (van der Smissen). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Volkmann's Kleine Geschichten (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Easy Selections for Sight Translation (Deering). 15 cts. Storm's Geschichten aus der Tonne (Vogel). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Storm's In St. Jiirgen (Wright). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Storm's Immensee (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Storm's Pole Poppenspaler (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Heyse's Niels mit der offenen Hand (Joynes). Vocab. and exercises. 30 cts. Heyse's L'Arrabbiata (Bernhardt). With vocabulary. 25 cts. Von Hillern's Hoher als die Kirche (Clary). Vocab. and exercises. 30 cts. Banff's Der Zwerg Nase. No notes. 15 cts. Hauff's Das kalte Herz (van der Smissen). Vocab. Roman type. 40 cts. Ali Baba and the Forty Thieves. No notes. 20 cts. Schiller's Der Taucher (van der Smissen). Vocabulary. 12 cts. Schiller's Der Neffe als Onkel (Beresford-Webb). Notes and vocab. 30 cts, Goethe's Das Marchen (Eggert). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Baumbach's Waldnovellen (Bernhardt). Six stories. Vocabulary. 35 cts^ Spjrri's Rosenresli (Boll). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Spyri's Moni der Geissbub. With vocabulary by H. A. Guerber. 25 cts. Zschokke's Der zerbrochene Krug (Joynes). Vocab. and exercises. 25 cts. Baumbach's Nicotiana (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Elz's Er ist nicht eifersiichtig. With vocabulary by Prof. B. Wells. 20 cts. Carmen Sylva's Aus meinemKonigreich (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Gerstacker's Germelshaasen (Lewis). Notes and vocabulary. 30 cts. Wichert's Als Verlobte empfehlen sich (Flom). Vocabulary. 25 cts. . Benedix's Nein (Spanhoofd). Vocabulary and exercises. 25 cts. Benedix's Der Prozess (Wells). Vocabulary. 20 cts. Lambert's AUtagliches. Vocabulary and exercises. 75 cts. Der Weg zum Gliick (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Mosher's Willkommen in Deutschland. Vocabulary and exercises. 75 cts. Bliithgen's Das Peterle von Niimberg (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Miinchhausen: ReisenundAbenteuer (Schmidt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. fteatb'6 jflDo&ern Xanguage Series^ INTERMEDIATE GERMAN TEXTS. (Partial List.) Baumbach's Das Habichtsfraulein (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Heyse's Hochzeit auf Capri (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Hoffmann's Gymnasium zu Stolpenburg (Buehner). Vocabulary. 35 cts Grillparzer's Derarme Spielmann (Howard). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Seidell Aus Goldenen Tagen (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Seidel's Leberecht Huhnchen (Spanhoofd). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Auf der Sonnenseite (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Frommel's Mit Ranzel und Wanderstab (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 35 cts* Frommel's Eingeschneit (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Keller's Kleider machen Leute (Lambert). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Liliencron's Anno 1870 (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Baumbach's Die Nonna (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Riehl's Der Fluch der SchOnheit (Thomas). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Riehl's Das Spielmannskind ; Der stumme Ratsherr (Eaton). Vocabu- lary and exercises. 35 cts. Ebner-Eschenbach's Die Freiherren von Gemperlein (Hohlfeld). 30 cts. Preytag's Die Joumalisten (Toy). 30 cts. With vocabulary. 40 cts. Wilbrandt's Das Urteil des Paris (Wirt). 30 cts. Schiller's Das Lied von der Glocke (Chamberlin). Vocabulary. 20 cts. Schiller's Jungfrau von Orleans (Wells). Illus. 60 cts. Vocab., 70 cts. Schiller's Maria Stuart (Rhoades). Illustrated. 60 cts. Vocab., 70 cts. Schiller's Wilhelm Tell (Deering). Illustrated. 50 cts. Vocab., 70 cts. Schiller's Ballads (Johnson). 60 cts. Baumbach's Der Sckwiegersohn (Bernhardt). 30 cts. Vocabulary, 40 cts. Arnold's Fritz auf Ferien (Spanhoofd). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Heyse's Das Madchen von Treppi (Joynes). Vocab. and exercises. 30 cts. Stille Wasser (Bernhardt). Three tales. Vocabulary. 35 cts. Sudermann's Teja (Ford). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Arnold's Aprilwetter (Fossler). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Gerstiacker's Irrfahrten (Sturm). Vocabulary. 45 cts. Benedix's Plautus und Terenz ; Der Sonntagsjager (Wells). 25 cts. Moser's Kftpnickerstrasse 120 (Wells). 30 cts. Moser's Der Bibliothekar (Wells). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Drei kleine Lustspiele. Giinstige Vorzeichen, Der Prozess, Einer mtis^ heiraten. Edited with notes by Prof. B. W. Wells. 30 cts. Helbig's Kombdie auf der Hochschole (Wells). 30 cts. €tem*8 Die Wiedertaufer (Sturm). Vocabulary. 00 cts. Ibeatb'6 /iDoOern Xanouage Seriea* INTERMEDIATE GERMAN TEXTS. (Partial List.) Schiller's Geschichte des dreissigjahrigen Krieges. Book III. With notes by Professor C. W. Prettyman, Dickinson College. 35 cts. Schiller's Der Geisterseher (Joynes). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Arndt, Deutsche Patrioten (Colwell). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Selections for Sight Translation (Mondan). 15 cts. Selections for Advanced Sight Translation (Chamber lin). 15 cts. Aus Herz und Welt. Two stories, with notes by Dr. Wm. Bernhardt. 25 cts. Novelletten-Bibliothek. Vol. I, five stories. Vol. II, six stories. Selected and edited with notes by Dr. Wilhelm Bernhardt. Each, 35 cts. Unter dem Christbaum (Bernhardt). Notes. 35 cts. Hoffmann's Historische Erzahlungen (Beresford-Webb). Notes. 25 cts. Benedix's Die Hochzeitsreise (Schiefferdecker). 25 cts. Stokl's AUe FUnf (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Till Eulenspiegel (Betz). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Wildenbruch's Neid (Prettyman). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Wildenbruch's Das Edle Blut (Schmidt). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Wildenbruch's Der Letzte (Schmidt). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Wildenbruch's Harold (Eggert). 35 cts. Stifter's Das Haidedorf ( Heller). 20 cts. Chamisso's Peter Schlemihl (Primer). 25 cts. Eichendorff's Aus dem Leben eines Taugenichts (Osthaus). Vocab. 45 cts. Heine's Die Harzreise (Vos). Vocabulary. 45 cts. Jensen's Die braune Erica (Joynes). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Lyrics and Ballads (Hatfield). 75 cts. Meyer's Gustav Adolf s Page (Heller). 25 cts. Sudermann's Johannes (Schmidt). 35 cts. Sudermann's Heimat (Schmidt). 35 cts. Sudermann's Der Katzensteg (Wells). Abridged. 40 cts. Dahn's Sigwalt und Sigridh (Schmidt). 25 cts. Keller's Romeo und Julia auf dem Dorfe (Adams). 30 cts. Hauff's Lichtenstein (Vogel). Abridged. 75 cts. Bbhlau Ratsmadelgeschichten (Haevernick). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Keller's Fahnlein der sieben Aufrechten (Howard). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Riehl's Burg Neideck (Jonas). Vocabulary and exercises. 35 cts. Lohmeyer's Geissbub von Engelberg (Bernhardt). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Zschokke's Das Abenteuer der Neujahrsnacht (Handschin). Vocab. 35 cts. Zschokke's Das Wirtshaus zu Cransac (Joynes). Vocabulary. 30 cts. t)eatb*5 /ll^o^etn Xanguasc Serlc0# ADVANCED GERMAN TEXTS. ScheffePs Trompeter von Sakkingen (Wenckebach). Abridged. 50 cts. Scheffel's Ekkehard (Wenckebach). Abridged. 55 cts. MSrike's Mozart auf der Reise nach Prag (Howard). 35 cts. Freytag's Soil und Haben (Files). Abridged. 55 cts. Fre3rtag's Aus dem Staat Friedrichs des Grossen (Hagar). 25 cts. Freytag's Aus dem Jahrhundert des grossen Krieges (Rhoades). 35 cts. Freytag's Rittmeister von Alt-Rosen (Hatfield). 50 cts. Fulda's Der Talisman (Pretty man). 35 cts. KOmer's Zriny (Holzwarth). 35 cts. Lessing's Minna von Bamhelm (Primer). 60 cts. With vocabulary, 65 cts. Lessing's Nathan der Weise (Primer). 80 cts. Lessing's Emilia Galotti (Winkler). 60 cts. Schiller's Wallenstein's Tod (Eggert). 60 cts. Goethe's Sesenheim (Huss). From Dichtung und Wahrheit. 30 ctS. Goethe's Meisterwerke (Bernhardt). $1.25. Goethe's Dichtung und Wahrheit. (I-IV). Buchheim. 90 cts.. Goethe's Hermann und Dorothea (Hewett). 75 cts. Goethe's Hermann und Dorothea (Adams). Vocabulary. 65 cts. Goethe's Iphigenie (Rhoades). 60 cts. Goethe's Egmont (Hatfield). 60 cts. Goethe's Torquato Tasso (Thomas). 75 cts. Goethe's Faust (Thomas). Part I, $1.15 Part IT, $1.50. Goethe's Poems. Selected and edited by Prof. Harris, Adelbert College. Qocts. Grillparzer's Der Traum, ein Leben (Meyer). 40 cts. Ludwig's Zwischen Himmel und Erde (Meyer). 55 cts. Heine's Poems. Selected and edited by Prof. White. 75 cts, Tombo's Deutsche Reden. 90 cts. Walther's Meereskunde. (Scientific German). 55 cts. Thomas's German Anthology; $2.25. Hodges' Scientific German. 75 cts. Kayser's Die Elektronentheorie (Wright). 20 cts. Lassar-Cohn's Die Chemie im taglichen Leben (Brooks). 45 ctS, Wagner's Entwicklungslehre (Wright). 30 cts. Helmholtz's Populare Vortrage (Shumway). 55 cts. Wenckebach's Deutsche Literaturgeschichte. Vol. I (to iioo a.d.) 5oct9» Wenckebach's Meisterwerke des Mittelalters. $1.26. Dahn's Ein Elampf um Rom (Wenckebach). Abridged. 55 cts. Ibeatb'5 /iDo&etn Xanguage Series* FRENCH GRAMMARS AND READERS. Brace's Grammaire Frangaise. ^1.15. Clarke's Subjunctive Mood. An inductive treatise^ with exercises. 50 cts. Edgren's Compendious French Grammar. $1.15. Parti. 35 cts. Fontaine's Livre de Lecture et de Conversation. 90 cts. Fraser and Squair's French Grammar. $1.15. Fraser and Squair's Abridged French Grammar. |i.io. Fraser and Squair's Elementary French Grammar. 90 cts. Grandgent's Essentials of French Grammar, ^i.oo. Grandgent's Short French Grammar. 75 cts. Roux's Lessons in Grammar and Composition, based on Colomba. 18 cts. Hennequin's French Modal Auxiliaries. With exercises. 50 cts. Houghton's French by Reading. ^1.15. Mansion's First Year French. For young beginners. 50 cts. Methode Henin. 50 cts. Brace's Lectures Faciles. 60 cts. Brace's Dictees Frangaises. 30 cts. Fontaine's Lectures Courantes. ^i.oo, Giese's French Anecdotes. 00 cts. Hotchkiss' Le Primer Livre de Frangais. Boards. 35 cts. Bowen's First Scientific Reader. 90 cts. Davies' Elementary Scientific French Reader. 40 cts. Lyon and Larpent's Primary French Translation Book. 60 cts. Snow and Lebon's Easy French. 60 cts. Super's Preparatory French Reader. 70 cts. Bouvet's Exercises in Syntax and Composition. 75 cts. Storr's Hints on French Sjmtax. With exerdses. 30 cts. Brigham's French Composition. 12 cts. Comfort's Exercises in French Prose Composition. 30 cts. Grandgent's French Composition. 50 cts. Grandgent's Materials for French Composition. Each, 12 cts, Kimball's Materials for French Composition. Each, 12 cts. Mansion's Exercises in Composition. 160 pages. 60 cts. Marcou's French Review Exercises. 25 cts. Prisoners of the Temple (Guerber). For French Composition. 25 cts. Story of Cupid and Psyche (Guerber). For French Composition. 18 cts. Heath's French Dictionary. Retail price, ^1.50. Ibeatb'5 /lDo5ern Xanguage Series* ELEMENTARY FRENCH TEXTS. Easy Selections for Sight Translation (Mansion). 15 cts. Segur's Les Malheurs de Sophie (White). Vocabulary. 45 cts. French Fairy Tales (Joynes). Vocabulary and exercises. 35 cts, Saintine's Picciola. With notes and vocabulary by Prof. O. B. Super. 45 cts. Mairet's La Tache du Petit Pierre (Super). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Bruno^S Les Enfants Patriotes (Lyon). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Bruno's Tour de la France par deux Enfants (Fontaine). Vocabulary. 45 cts, Verne's L'Exp6dition de la Jeune Hardie (Lyon). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Gorvais Un Cas de Conscience (Horsley). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Genin's Le Petit Tailleur Bouton (Lyon). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Assolant's Aventure du Celebre Pierrot (Pain). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Assolant's Recits de la Vieille France. Notes by E. B. Wauton. 25 cts. MuUer's Grandes Decouvertes Modemes. 25 cts. Recits de Guerre et de Revolution (Minssen). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Bedolliere's La Mere Michel et son Chat (Lyon). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Legouve and Labiche's Cigale chez les Fourmis (Witherby). 20 cts. Labiche's La Grammaire (Levi). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Labiche's Le Voyage de M. Perrichon (Wells). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Labiche's La Poudre aux Yeux (Wells). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Lemaitre, Contes (Rensch). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Dumas's Due de Beaufort (Kitchen). Vocabulary. 30 cts. Dumas's Monte-Cristo (Spiers). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Berthet's Le Facte de Famine. With notes by B. B. Dickinson. 25 cts. Erckmann-Chatrian's Le Consent de 1813 (Super). Vocabulary. 45 cts. Erckmann-Chatrian's L'Histoire d'un Paysan (Lyon). 25 cts. France's Abeille (Lebon). 25 cts. Moinaux's Les deux Sourds (Spiers). Vocabulary. 25 cts. La Main Malheureuse (Guerber). Vocabulary. 25 cts. Enault's Le Chien du Capitaine (Fontaine). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Trois Contes Choisis par Daudet (Sanderson). Vocabulary. 20 cts. Desnoyer's Jean-Paul Choppart (Fontaine). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Selections for Sight Translation (Bruce). 15 cts. Laboulaye's Contes Bleus (Fontaine). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Malot's Sans Famille (Spiers). Vocabulary. 40 cts. Meilhac and Halevy's L'Ete de la St.-Martin (Franjois). Vocab. 35 cts. t>catb's jfflDobern Xanguage Series* INTERMEDIATE FRENCH TEXTS. (Partial List.) Beaumarchais*s Le Barbier de Seville (Spiers). 25 cts. Erckmann-Chatriaii*s Waterloo (Super). 35 cts. About's Le Roi des Montagnes (Logie). 40 cts. Vocabulary, 50 cts. Pailleron's Le Monde ou Ton s'ennuie (Pendleton). 30 cts. Historiettes Modemes (Fontaine). Vol. I. 60 cts. Historiettes Modemes. Vol. II. 35 cts. Pleura de France (Fontaine). 35 cts. French Lyrics (Bowen). 60 cts. Loti's Pecheur d'Islande (Super). 40 cts. V^ Loti's Ramuntcho (Fontaine). 30 cts. Sandeau*s Mile, de la Seigliere (Warren). 30 cts. Souvestre's Le Mari de Mme. Solange (Super). 20 cts. Souvestre*s Les Confessions d'un Ouvrier (Super). 25 cts. Souvestre*s Un Philosophe sous les Toits (Fraser). 50 cts. Vocab., 55 cts, Augier's Le Gendre de M. Poirier (Wells). 25 cts. Scribe's Bataille de Dames (Wells). 25 cts. Scribe's Le Verre d'eau (Eggert). 30 cts. Merimee's Colomba (Fontaine). 35 cts. With vocabulary. 45 cts. Merimee's Chronique du Regne de Charles IX (Desages). 25 cts. Musset's Pierre et Camille (Super). 20 cts. Verne's Tour du Monde en quatre vingts jours (Edgren). 35 cts. Verne's Vingt mille lieues sous la mer (Fontaine). Vocabulary. 45 cts. Sand's La Mare au Diable (Sumichrast). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Sand's La Petite Fadette (Super). Vocabulary. 35 cts. Sept Grands Auteurs du XIX® Si^cle (Fortier). Lectures, 60 cts. Vigny's Cinq-Mars (Sankey). Abridged. 60 cts. Vigny's Le Cachet Rouge (Fortier). 20 cts. Vigny's Le Canne de Jonc (Spiers). 40 cts. Halevy's L'Abbe Constantin (Logie). 30 cts. Vocab. 40 '^ts. Halevy's Un Mariage d' Amour (Hawkins). 25 cts. Renan's Souvenirs d'Enfance et de Jeunesse (Babbitt). 7$ cts. Thier's Expedition de Bonaparte en Egypte (Fabregou). 30 cts, Gautier's Jettatura (Schinz). 30 cts. Guerber's Marie-Louise. 25 cts. Zola's La Debacle (Wells). Abridged. 60 cts. THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STA3VIPED BELOW AN INITIAL FINE OP 25 CENTS • WHLL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. DEC 7 18 37 i iOct^ooB n REC'D LD -w^ OCT 9 1956 MAR 22 1939 210ct'6QDf J^egJJ^^ vm^ il JAM jt3 JUl^^ - • ^'*- 20ct'6^MH jCT U1M5 REC^D LD JAN 101947 JUN2 3'64-3PM JAN 11 1333 5 19Jun'52Flt imr REC'D LD ^'66-lQPM LD 21-95m-7,'37 X" 926697 ■to ©43 ra43 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA UBRARY